Diagrams User Guide
This document was uploaded by user and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this DMCA report form. Report DMCA
Overview
Download & View Diagrams User Guide as PDF for free.
More details
- Words: 85,163
- Pages: 362
Loading documents preview...
Diagrams User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer 1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from viruses. 1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise. 1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's claim is brought. 1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law. 1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution. The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited. © Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
Diagrams User Guide
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
Comments / Remarks
September 2011 12.1.1
Publishing Diagrams data to AVEVA .NET, Diagrams Options Default, Options in Application Setup. AVEVA Compare/Update - Utilities, Instrument Control Handle, ConnMapAddin Schematic Model, Auto Formatting Rules, PMLDiagrams Object and Specification Search on Non-specified Data added/ amended.
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
October 2012
12.1,SP3
New Batch Job window in chapter Utilities.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Additions to chapter Intelligent Background.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter DGN Export in Utilities.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter diagrams API in Appendices.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter Diagrams Rules in Working with Diagrams.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter Explorer Settings in Working with Diagrams.
December 2012
12.1.SP2 Fix
New screen shot in chapter 5, figure 5:12.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot in chapter 4,3, File menu.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot and text in chapter 5.19.2, Instrument Loop properties.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot and text in chapter 4.15.2, Auto-delete obsolete database element on Name Change.
April 2013
12.1.SP4
New section about Design Reuse in Utilities chapter.
May-June 2013
12.1.SP4
Major changes for Ribbon layout. Behaviour on Name Change chapter. Instrument Loop Properties chapter. Diagram Replace Object. Design Reuse for Diagrams. P&ID Grid. Secondary Shapes for Pipeline. Datasheets Integration. Export to SVG from PML.
August 2013
12.1SP4
Updates to chapter Release Diagram to 3D and Project Storage with respect to Visio and SVG Files.
September 2013 12.1.SP4
Updates to chapter Working with Diagrams, Copy/Paste Options.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
The Batch Job dialog has been updated in several places.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
Updates to chapter Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
New chapter Unassigned Items in chapter Working with Diagrams.
Diagrams User Guide
Diagrams User Guide
Diagrams User Guide
Contents
Page
Diagrams Diagrams Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Document Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Diagrams Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Database Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 Main Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Application Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Runtime Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Document Files, Sessions etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Copying Data between Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 Database Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 Schematic DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Groups .............................................................. Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:4 2:4 2:5 2:5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Starting the Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Making Settings for the Program Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Select Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2 Set Up Default Groups, Default System and Default Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
i
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Select a Current Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 Diagrams Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6 Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Upgrading Drawings to Latest Diagrams Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 Creating Shapes and Adding to Stencils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating MS Visio Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Diagrams Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Shape Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instant Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:11 3:11 3:22 3:23 3:32 3:32 3:32
Optimising Project Performance and Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32 Recommendations to Improve Performance of SaveWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33 Refresh Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33 Project Storage with Respect to Visio and SVG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Working with Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Main GUI Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Main Window and Dockable Sub-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Schematic Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 System Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3 Project Breakdown Structure Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 Hiding Element Type String in Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6 Possibility to Sort Explorer Items by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Diagram Drafting Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12 Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14 Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14 Catalogue Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15 Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16 Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:17 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:20 Find in Drawing Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21 Standard DB Browse Dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23 Document Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
ii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Edit Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagrams Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:25 4:25 4:26 4:26
Standard MS Visio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45 Application Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:49 Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:49 File Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:50 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New ............................................................. Open ............................................................. Open Read Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Work and Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As with Copy of Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Work and SVG Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As with Copy of Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete ............................................................. Additional Notes on File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:50 4:50 4:52 4:55 4:61 4:63 4:64 4:69 4:71 4:71 4:71
Define / Undefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:72 Refresh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:72
Feedback on Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:73
Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:75 Export Consistency Check Result to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:80
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:81 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels ............................................................. Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Break Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:81 4:82 4:84 4:84 4:86
Off-page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:87 Area Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:91 Defining Area Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:91 Propagation of Attributes to Containing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:95
Manual Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:96 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:96 Catalogue Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:97
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
iii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Defining Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:98 Modifying, Renaming and Deleting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Selection Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Result List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:102
Copying / Pasting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:105 CTRL+DRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:105 Copying and Pasting (CTRL+C > CTRL+V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:106
Primary / Secondary Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:120 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Shapes by Changing Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing Primary/Secondary Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Primary/Secondary Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding All Shapes Referring to a Certain DB Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:120 4:121 4:126 4:129 4:129 4:136 4:136
Unassigned Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:136 Assign to Database Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:137 Elements to be Dropped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:137
Using Background Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140 Import CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140 Intelligent Background Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140
Setting an Initial 3D Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144 Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144
P&ID Grid Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144 P&ID Grid Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Position Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Items that can be Localised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the P&ID Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Existing Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:145 4:146 4:147 4:147 4:150
Changing Symbols for Existing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:151 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Replacing of Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Replacing of Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol from Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:151 4:155 4:156 4:157
Setting System Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:157 Naming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:158
Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:158
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
iv
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Autonaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Renaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prompting the User to Enter a Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:158 4:158 4:159 4:160
Viewing Datasheets in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:160 Drawing ............................................................ Ribbon UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Datasheet in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:161 4:163 4:163 4:164
Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:166 Importing/Exporting Drawings, Stencils and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:167 Importing and Exporting Data to the DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 Import Export
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168
Undo and Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 Working with Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:169
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Creating Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Pipeline Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Creating Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Adding Parts to a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrive and Leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dropping and Connecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Tee Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Tube Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:4 5:4 5:4 5:5 5:8 5:8
Flow Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8 The Flow Direction Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8 Directional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10 Reversing Flow Direction for a Whole Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Using Equipment and Subequipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12 Using Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13 Using Pipe Destination Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14 Grouped Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
v
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Online Dimensioning and Specification Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning without Catalogue or Spec Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning with Manual Catalogue Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning with Automatic Spec Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respec ............................................................. Resize ............................................................. Refit ............................................................. Specification Search on Existing Non-Specified Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:15 5:17 5:17 5:17 5:17 5:20 5:20 5:22 5:23
Reverse Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:29 SpecSearch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Splitting Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Joining Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Consistency Check for Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Line List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:32 Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:32 Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:33 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection in Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Relationship Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Level Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrumentation Loop Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:33 5:33 5:41 5:43 5:48 5:50
HVAC Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Creating HVAC Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 HVAC Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2 Creating Branches and Adding Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3 Resize
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Refit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Splitting and Joining HVAC Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6 Consistency Check for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
vi
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Single Line Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Working with Multi-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Naming Cables Owned by Multi-cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Presenting Multi-cables in Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4 Core Connections Definition Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4 Defining the Number of Cores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Terminal for Each Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7:5 7:6 7:7 7:8 7:8
Generating Core Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:9
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Releasing Information for 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Setting the Release Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2 Visualizing Release and Link to 3D Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6 Warnings and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7 Released but not Linked Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7 Released and Linked Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1 Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1 Batch Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2 Batch Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:9 Batch Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
Project Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:11 Clean Old Session Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:11
AVEVA Compare/Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12 DWG Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:13 Visio Drawing Items Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lines Map Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
vii
10:14 10:15 10:16 10:17 10:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Configuration - DWG Export Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19 Creating Line Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
DGN Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:23 DGN Export - Settings Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Lines Map Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Fonts Map Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Levels Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:25 10:26 10:27 10:28 10:28 10:30
Publishing Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:31 Availability of Publishing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SaveWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing from PML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:31 10:34 10:34 10:34
Publishing from Diagrams via PML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:34 Design Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:36
Schematic Model Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Starting the Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2 Zooming, Panning etc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 Viewing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4 Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Model Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11:5 11:6 11:6 11:8
Right Mouse Button Context Menu on Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9 Reverse link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:10
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1 Attribute Presentation Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1 Pseudo Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3 Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
viii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Using the Visio Drawing Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Diagrams API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5 Adding Custom Calls to Addin Functions Shape’s Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:6
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
ix
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
x
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
1
Diagrams Overview
1.1
Document Contents The chapter gives an overview of the application and explains some of the main principles. It is intended for all users who need a general introduction to Diagrams.
1.2
Prerequisites Before starting to use the Diagrams application, it is recommended that users acquire some general knowledge about using applications based on the AVEVA Design platform: •
Database principles, such as MDBs, sessions, DB elements, attributes, references etc.
•
Using the command line
•
Handling of the Application framework GUI, with docking windows etc.
•
General Microsoft Visio knowledge.
•
You also need to be familiar with the main principles of using Catalogues and Specifications. Please refer to the Catalogues and Specifications User Guide for more information.
These functions are relevant for the usage of the Diagrams application, but are outside the scope for this manual.
1.3
Diagrams Application Diagrams supports the creation of Piping, HVAC and Cabling Diagrams. The application is based on the AVEVA Design Platform GUI and diagram layouts are created using an embedded Microsoft Office Visio drawing control. All relevant data entered through the application is stored into the Schematic Database. The functions available in the application include standard MS Visio functions, standard PDMS functions and specific Diagrams functions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
Figure 1:1.
1.4
The Diagrams Application
Database Architecture The object data created through the Diagrams application is stored in the Schematic Database. This data is possible to re-use for 3D modelling through the use of Schematic 3D Integrator (please refer to the Schematic 3D Integrator User Guide).
The diagram documents created through the Diagrams application will be stored in the file system or an external document management system. There are index elements in the
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
database for each diagram, stencil and template. Diagrams, stencils and templates are listed and opened through the DB index elements.
In addition to the MS Visio Diagram files the application also creates SVG format files for the purpose of viewing the diagrams in the Schematic 3D Integrator.
1.5
Main Operating Principles When shapes are dragged from a stencil and dropped onto the diagram, a corresponding element will, if possible, be automatically created in the database. This process is known as Define. In some cases the Define operation will not take place until shapes are connected. It is also possible to manually Define and Undefine items. The application supports the Dabacon session concept with Save Work / Get Work functions. In the Save Work function, the diagram document is also saved together with all pending DB changes in the session. To ensure consistency between diagram documents and the database items, certain procedures have been introduced, for instance when the user chooses Save As on a diagram, it is required that Save Work has first been executed. The schematic data is organized in two parallel hierarchies. The main hierarchy is the Group Hierarchy, which works more or less like a folder structure where schematic items can be organized according to customer preferences. There is also a secondary System Hierarchy, which represents the design systems within the project. Diagrams contains functions for the user to control in which Schematic Group new items will be placed. Items will also be organized into the system structure according to the system reference attribute. The database also maintains references between schematic items and the diagram drawings that they are represented on. This allows the user to, for example, find and open all diagrams where a certain pipeline is depicted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
2
Application Setup This chapter covers the database setup and runtime environment for the application. It is primarily intended for administrators who will set up the project environment for using Diagrams and for advanced users who need a deeper knowledge in how the application operates on a technical level.
2.1
Runtime Environment
2.1.1
Environment Variables To define diagram, stencil and template paths a number of environment variables are used. They are named as follows:
%DIA% %STE% %TPL% For example in the SAM project this would be equal to:
%SAMDIA% %SAMSTE% %SAMTPL% These environment variables should point to the repository for each file type. Typically they would reside under the project folder along with xxxPIC and xxxISO etc.
2.1.2
Document Files, Sessions etc. All MS Visio documents such as diagrams, stencils and templates are handled through index elements in the database. When a diagram is created, an SCDIAG element is created in the database, and this contains a pseudo attribute (VISF) that provides the file name of the actual file in the file system. File names are composed by <element ID><session no>. This mechanism and naming convention supports the Dabacon session concept and provides a possibility for GLOBAL to manage the files in a multi-location project. These file names are not visible to the user. The user will handle all diagrams through the index elements in the database and will only see the names of the index elements. This mechanism creates new files each time a Save Work is executed. This means that when users have been working for a certain amount of time, a large quantity of files may exist in the %DIA% directory, in the same way that a Dabacon database grows as sessions are being added. There is currently no mechanism to automatically
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
delete obsolete versions of the files when a database session merge is executed, however the Diagrams application provides a tool for removing old session files from a project. It could be used manually when KEEP_SESSION_FILES is set to False. For more information please refer to Clean Old Session Files in Chapter Utilities. At the same time as a diagram file is saved, an SVG format file is optionally created. This is for the purpose of viewing the diagrams in other applications such as the Schematic 3D Integrator without having the need for an MS Visio installation. In the same way as querying the VISF attribute on the SCDIAG element for obtaining the MS Visio diagram file name, the SVG file name can be found by querying the NVIEWF attribute. On large diagrams, or diagrams that contain detailed imported background drawings, the creation of the SVG file may take some time to execute. This could affect the performance of the Save Work command. For that reason a possibility to control the SVG creation has been introduced. Whether the SVG file is created or not depends on the General Options > System configuration > SVG setting in Diagrams Options. •
If this setting is False, then the SVG file will only be created if the drawing contains or has contained any items released to 3D.
•
If this setting is True, the SVG file will always be created.
When an SVG file is created, there will be a message in the message log indicating this. Note: By changing the KEEP_SESSION_FILES default setting to False, only the latest version of the Visio diagram file as well as the SVG file will be kept. Please consider that using this setting will not make it possible to restore a previous session including the corresponding diagram file version. MS Visio templates and stencils are handled in the same way as the diagrams, using SCTEMP and SCSTEN index elements in the database. One difference however, is that no SVG format files are created when templates and stencils are saved by the application.
•
Document file formats Documents in the Diagrams application can be saved in two formats - binary or XML depending on the ‘Save documents in Visio XML format’ setting in Diagrams Options:
The setting provides possibility to choose if drawings, templates and stencils should be stored in binary (*.vsd, *.vst, *.vss) or XML format (*.vdx, *.vtx, *.vsx). It is recommended to save documents in a binary format which is more efficient and improves performance of Save Work and Open operations. For that reason it is used by default in the Diagrams application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
It is possible to check in which format the document was last saved by querying SCHFF (schematic file format) attribute of SCDIAG, SCTEMP or SCSTEN. It can have the following values: 0 - Visio XML format 1 - binary format When Save Work is performed all opened documents (also unchanged) with file format not corresponding to the ‘Save documents in Visio XML format’ setting will be saved again in an appropriate format.
•
Working with Diagrams Options There are two sections (each presented in a corresponding tab) of Diagrams Options: Diagrams Defaults, and Attribute Presentations. Diagrams Defaults are specific for a particular version of AVEVA Diagrams. Any change from the default value of the Diagrams Defaults will trigger storing of these settings in a file. If no values have been loaded upon startup (no valid settings store found) the file will be stored in the first folder pointed by %PDMSDFLTS% in it's subfolder Diagrams as a file in xml format. If a valid store file was found and loaded on application startup, then this file will be overwritten with the new options' values. When starting up the Diagrams application will try to load settings from two different store files. 1. User settings store The application will look for a store with appropriate file name in the folders pointed by %PDMSDFLTS% and their subfolder Diagrams in order of appearance. If a store file is found, its location will be saved so when options is changed by the user it will be saved in the same location. If no store file is found the default options values will be loaded. 2. Admin settings store The application will also look for an admin settings store in the %DFLTS%/ Diagrams/ folder. If an admin settings store file is found its content will be merged with the user settings in such a way that the Admin Settings with read only attribute set to True will override the values stored in the User Settings. Thus if the %DFLTS%/Diagrams/ location is write protected for user accounts it achieves administrative read only settings on a per-setting level.
The name of the store file is composed of DiagramsSettings and a version number. The extension of the file is xml.
DiagramsAttributePresentation.xml contains information about Attribute Presentation section of Diagrams Options. By default the file is located in the installation directory and the Diagrams application reads it from there. Because of that the settings are not project-specific and must be adjusted according to the special user needs separately on each machine. If project-specific settings should be used, common for all users using the same network project, the file should be manually copied by the administrator to %DFLTS%/
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
Diagrams/ where %DFLTS% is the environment variable pointing to the defaults folder for project . After that is done, the Diagrams application uses settings for Attribute Presentation from the above location and files from the installation directory are ignored.
2.2
Copying Data between Databases It is possible to use RECONFIGURE to copy schematic data between databases and also to copy databases between projects. Below is an example of the procedure for copying data from SCHEMATIC/DIAGRAMS database in one project, source, to MASTER/TEST database located in another project, target: 1. Open Admin in the source project and type the following instructions on the command line (please note that there is no need to use the SAMEREF option): FROM DB SCHEMATIC/DIAGRAMS TO FILES /TMPF RCFCOPY ALL RECONFIGURE 2. Save work and close Admin. 3. Open Admin in the target project. 4. Make sure that the target TEST database exists in the target project (if not create it). It is not necessary that the source and target databases have the same number. 5. Type the following instructions on the command line: FROM FILES /TMPF TO DB MASTER/TEST RECONFIGURE 6. All data have now been copied together with associated files (for diagrams, templates and stencils) and no other action is required before they can be used. For more information please refer to chapter Reconfigure in the Administrator Command Reference Manual.
2.3
Database Setup
2.3.1
Schematic DB A new schematic (SCHE) database must be created in a project where Diagrams will be used. For more information on how to create databases please refer to your Data Management and Data Base / Administrator User Guide.
2.3.2
MDB Setup The MDB to be used for Diagrams must contain: •
At least one SCHE DB. The administrator can add several schematic DBs to the MDB if desired. The SCHE DB(s) must be writeable.
•
At least one DESI DB for the System Hierarchy. The DESI DB(s) can be read-only if so desired.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
It is recommended to keep the System Hierarchy in a separate DESI DB to make administration easier. In case the Diagrams user should be able to access data in 3D design elements, additional DESI DBs can be added to the MDB. If the Diagrams user should be able to modify the System Hierarchy, the following must be completed: 1. The module definition of Diagrams must allow Read/Write access to DESI DBs. 2. The Diagrams user must be a member of the team that owns the DESI DB where the system hierarchy resides. Note: It is possible to set it up in a way that the Diagrams user will have Read/Write access to the DESI DB where the system hierarchy resides but not to other DESI DBs. In this case the Diagrams user should not be a member of the team(s) that owns the other DESI DBs.
2.3.3
Groups When a schematic database has been set up, any number of Schematic Group elements (SCGROU) can be created to form the primary hierarchy in the database. This can be considered similar to a folder structure in the file system. Schematic groups can be used to hold schematic elements, such as diagrams, stencils, templates, equipment, pipelines, cables and HVACLines. Schematic groups can also be nested in an arbitrary number of levels (having groups within groups). To create Schematic Groups, right click in the Schematic Explorer, or use the command line. It is also possible to import a standard Group structure into the database from a spreadsheet using the Spreadsheet Import function (please refer to Import in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
2.3.4
Systems The System Hierarchy can be created and maintained through the Admin Tab > Definition > Systems command. For each system, there is also a subordinate SYSCDA element containing default values per system for the Diagrams application. For instance, when creating a new pipeline, the Pipe spec, Insulation Spec, Fluid Ref etc. can automatically be picked up from the defaults set up in the SYSCDA element. Please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide for setting up this data. The System Hierarchy command is also available in the 3D Design applications. Note: To be able to create and modify the System Hierarchy, it is required that the MDB contains a writeable Design DB where the System Hierarchy resides. Note: The SYSCDA elements are not visible in the System Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3
Getting Started This chapter describes how to get started with the Diagrams application, making settings and creating base data etc. This chapter is primarily aimed at users who will be setting up the working environment for users. These could be super-users or CAD co-ordinators. Note: Chapters Starting the Application and Making Settings for the Program Session apply to all users.
3.1
Starting the Application Diagrams is started by selecting the Diagrams module in the AVEVA Login dialogue.
Note: The Diagrams application requires an MDB that contains one or more schematic databases. Please refer to section Database Setup in Chapter Application Setup for more details.
3.2
Making Settings for the Program Session When the application window has appeared, there are a few session settings that need to be done before you can start using the application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.2.1
Select Mode Select the Mode you want to work in (Pipe, HVAC, Cable), this setting is available in the Project Tab.
3.2.2
Set Up Default Groups, Default System and Default Attributes Set up session defaults by clicking on the Session Default panel in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. This will bring up the Session Defaults dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Select Defaults Group
Figure 3:1.
Defaults groups
By clicking on the line for each type, a browse button can be selected by clicking this button.
will appear and a suitable group
If the same group is wanted for all elements, use the Apply to All button to set the group for all elements in one go. The initial group for this option is calculated from CE (Current Element) when the dialogue is entered. If there is a need to change this, use the to browse the database for a new group.
button
In case new groups need to be created, this will have to be done before going into this dialogue. New groups can be created by right clicking on the schematic world or on existing groups in the Schematic Explorer and selecting the Create Group command. This must then be done before the Default Groups can be selected.
•
Select a Default System Select a Default System, by right clicking on the Default System tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:2.
•
Defaults system
Select Defaults Attributes This tab allows the user to pick attributes (also User Defined Attributes) and set a default value for them. Whenever an element that contains this attribute will be created a value will be set using this table.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:3.
3.2.3
Defaults attributes
Select a Current Line For Pipe / HVAC mode, also select a Current Line before proceeding to create branches and add fittings etc. Note: This is however not done by clicking in the status bar, but is instead done by selecting a line in the schematic explorer.
3.3
Application Settings
3.3.1
Overview In the Project Tab > Options menu the following commands are available: •
Visio Options. This is the standard MS Visio Options dialogue (available at Tools > Options in MS Visio). Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information.
Note: In Vision options, there is an option to disable Automation events (Advanced tab>Enable Automation events). AVEVA Diagrams is depending on these events. Without them, the application is “blind” and if they are disabled, AVEVA Diagrams will stop working. To prevent this, a message will appear if this checkbox is unchecked:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Diagrams will then enable the Automation Events again. •
Explorer Options. Further described in User Guide Catalogues and Specifications / General Application Tools / Settings / Explorer.
•
Page Setup. Is a standard MS Visio dialogue. Refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information.
Other options are available on the Admin Tab in the Configuration group. This is further described below.
3.3.2 •
Diagrams Options Defaults
In the Diagrams Options Defaults section tab, there are a several settings that will control the operation of the application. On the left pane is a tree structure showing the organization of the settings by group. When a group is selected, the settings in that group are presented in the window to the right. At the bottom of that pane there is a grey box providing an explanation for each setting. The settings are further described in the documentation for the respective functions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
If changes have been made when the dialogue is closed by clicking the OK button, the dialogue window shown below will appear. In case the user clicks Yes the changes will be saved for the next program session. If the user clicks No, the settings will only apply to the current program session. By default changes to Diagrams Options Defaults are saved to %PDMSDFLTS%/ Diagrams/ which usually is a machine specific location and should be configured separately on each machine. It is also possible to configure a project with Diagrams Options Defaults. For more information about handling settings files please see Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup. On startup the application will attempt to find a valid settings file in any of the folders specified in %PDMSDFLTS% with a subfolder, Diagrams. If a valid settings file is found, the location will be remembered, so when the settings are changed and the user has requested them stored, the file will be overwritten with the new settings' values.
•
Attribute Presentation
On the Attribute Presentation tab the user can set up the attribute presentation to be used in the Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window as well as in the Item List. To the
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
left there is a tree-view containing the different element types relevant to the Diagrams application. In case UDETs have been defined, these will be included in the list. For each element type selected in the tree-view, the attribute presentation can be individually controlled by the settings in the right hand list view. The columns in the table are as follows: Attribute
Name of the attribute. (This can not be modified).
Label
Presentation label for the attribute. This controls the name to be presented to the user in the Custom Properties window only. This setting does not apply to the Item List as it shows mixed items in the same list.
Prompt
If a Prompt string is entered, the application will prompt the user for a value as the shape is dropped on the drawing. The Prompt string will be presented to the user at that time, for example ‘Please enter Name’.
Visible
If this checkbox is checked, then the attribute will be included in the list of attributes shown in the Custom Properties window.
Visible in Item List
If this checkbox is checked, then the attribute will be included in the list of attributes shown in the Item List.
Read Only
If this checkbox is checked, it will not be possible to update the attribute value from the Custom Properties window or from the Item List.
Copy with Shape
If this checkbox is checked, the attribute value will be copied when shapes are copied in or between drawings. Please note that the shape must be defined for the Copy with Shape setting to apply (refer to Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
Propagate
PropagateThe setting is available for Area shapes. If this checkbox is checked, value of the attribute will be propagated to all applicable items contained by Area.
By clicking the Move Up and Move Down buttons, the presentation order of the currently selected attribute can be changed. In the Import Shape Wizard there is a possibility to override the default attribute presentation settings for individual shapes. In case this override should be enabled, the Allow individual shape settings to override default settings should be checked. This setting can be applied individually for each element type by first selecting a type in the tree before clicking the checkbox. If this is not checked, any attribute presentation settings done in the Import Shape Wizard for individual shapes will be ignored. By clicking the Referenced attributes button, it is possible to add attributes from referenced or hierarchically superior elements. If changes have been made when the dialogue is closed by clicking the OK button, the below dialogue will be shown. In case the user clicks Yes the attribute presentation settings will be saved for the next program session. If the user clicks No, the settings will only apply to the current program session. By default Attribute Presentation settings are machine specific and should be configured separately on each machine, but it is also possible to make them specific for the project. For more information about handling settings files please see Working with Diagrams Options chapter Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Referenced attributes can be added in two ways: 1. Navigate and select. Navigate and select the attribute in the tree view on the right hand pane, and click the Add button to add them to the Selected Attributes list on the right hand side. 2. Key-in. Click on the next free line in the Selected Attributes list, and key in the name of the referenced attribute using a dot notation as described in Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices. Attributes selected by Navigate and Select can also be manually edited by selecting them in the Selected Attributes list. For example by selecting SPRE.CATR.PARA and then manually adding (0) at the end to get the first parameter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: Pseudo attributes are not shown in the list of attributes in Attribute Presentation and Referenced Attributes dialogues. In case pseudo attributes should be presented, these will have to be added manually by using the Key-in method described above. A few pseudo attributes that can be useful for the Diagrams user are described in Pseudo Attributes in Chapter Appendices.
3.3.3
Other Options Under the Admin Tab > Configuration group the following commands can be found: •
Units
•
Aveva Net
•
Line List
•
Naming
The Units command. For more information refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Current Sessions Units. The Aveva NET command. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway. The Line List command is further described in chapter Line List Configuration in the User Schematic Model Manager User Guide. The Naming command is further described in chapter Creating/Modifying Auto Number Rules in the Area Based ADP Administrator Guide.
3.4
Upgrading Drawings to Latest Diagrams Version Every time a new version of the Diagrams application is released, drawings created in previous versions should be upgraded in order to make sure all their shapes support newly added functionalities. The upgrade is done automatically when a drawing is opened, however, it is possible to turn the automatic upgrade off by setting ‘Upgrade drawing on Open’ to False in Diagrams Options.
After a drawing is opened it is possible to force updating all shapes by calling Admin Tab > Upgrade > Upgrade Drawing. The function will traverse the shapes on the current drawing and upgrade the ones created in previous versions of the Diagrams application. The shapes that have a format that is not recognized will be ignored. Please note that the command Upgrade Drawing will update the shapes' formats only and will not create or delete any links between shapes and database elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
During the Upgrade Drawing process the below window is shown and the operation may be cancelled:
However, the shapes upgraded before Cancel was clicked are not restored. If it is required to keep shapes in their original versions, the drawing should be closed without saving.
3.5
Creating Shapes and Adding to Stencils
3.5.1
Overview A major part of the Diagrams functionality is based on a set of specialized Diagrams shapes. Many of these shapes contain information about what kind of database element the shape should be related to, while others do not have any database equivalence at all (such as annotation labels etc.). This mechanism enables the application to automatically create related database elements, as well as provide automatic annotation and general intelligence. Shapes that should be recognized by Diagrams and handled by the application logic must be created through the Import Shape Wizard accessible on the Admin Tab. Examples of these are as follows: •
Shapes corresponding to DB elements, for instance branches, valves, instruments and fittings.
•
Off-page connector shapes.
•
Label shapes presenting attribute information.
Shapes processed by the Import Shape Wizard will be stored in a user-selected stencil and will contain data specific to the Diagrams application. Other Visio shapes that have not been processed through the Import Shape Wizard can still be used for annotation etc. on drawings, but they will not be handled ‘intelligently’ by the application. Diagrams shapes can also contain default attribute values, which can enable users to create specialized shapes and will reduce the amount of information that is necessary to enter when diagrams are created. By investing some time and effort in the creation of stencils and shapes, the application can be tailored to work as efficiently as possible for the needs of the user. Thereby time and effort can later be saved when these shapes are used to build up diagrams.
3.5.2
Creating MS Visio Shapes Before shapes can be imported to a stencil using the Import Shape Wizard, they will have to be created using MS Visio tools. It is highly recommended that the user creating shapes has a good knowledge of MS Visio and is familiar with how Visio shapes works before proceeding to create Diagrams shapes. MS Visio offers many possibilities for creation of
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
smart shapes with different kinds of behaviour. We recommend that this is used sparingly and with consideration, as complex shape behaviour can result in reduced performance and also interact with the Diagrams application code in a way that can give unexpected errors. A few examples of useable behaviour are described below. Note: To be able to create shapes with special features, the MS Visio Shape Sheet has to be used. For technical reasons, this is not available in the Diagrams application. In case you need to access the Shape Sheet for making special settings in the shapes before import, you will have to copy the shape to the Standard MS Office Visio application, access the Shape Sheet, and then copy the shape back to Diagrams. When drawing the shape, it is recommended to use the same grid setting that will apply when the shape will be used in the drawing, thereby avoiding alignment and snapping problems. To minimize the risk for mistakes when different zoom settings are used, the grid can be set to Fixed. A suitable grid size is suggested to be 1 mm. The Ruler & Grid dialogue is available from the button next to the Show group label on the View Tab.
It is also preferable to use a X any Y size of the shape that is evenly dividable with 2, so that connection points can be conveniently placed at grid intersections.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:4.
Example of Valve shape using a 4x8 size
Connection points can be added to shapes by using the Connection Point Tool available on the dropdown for connector tool in the Standard toolbar.
To add connection points, Ctrl+Click using this tool. For inline pipe/HVAC parts, the order in which connection points are added is relevant, as the first added connection point will correspond to ppoint 1 on the catalogue item. When an inline fitting is connected, Arrive and Leave are resolved depending on the connections. I.e. if conn 1 is connected to Leave of another fitting during define, conn 1 will be Arrive and vice versa. If it is not connected when defined, Arrive and Leave will default to 1 and 2. The direction of the connection points can be changed by right clicking on a connection point and selecting Inward, Outward or Inward & Outward.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: These directions are NOT related to flow directions of the component. This only relates to Visio mechanisms for connecting shapes to each other. Connection points for 2D shapes (such as Equipment, Valves, Fittings etc.) should normally be Inward. Only use Outward connection points if you intend the shape to be directly connected to other 2D shapes. The normal approach is to always use Inward when shapes are created, and to change them to Outward after dropping on a drawing only in case the shape should be connected to another 2D shape. (refer to Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)). Note: When creating grouped piping/HVAC shapes having connection points, please make sure to first group the shapes and then add the connection points to the group. In case connection points are added to the members of the group, this could result in difficulties to connect pipes/HVACs when the shapes are used. For electrical items, it is OK to have connection points on group members as this is specially handled by the application when cables are connected. Note: When grouping shapes, use the Group command rather than Convert to group, as the former works better with the Diagrams application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Example 1: Creating an Attachment Line
For shapes that can be attached to other shapes using a control handle, such as labels and off-line instruments, it can be preferred to have an attach line showing where the item is connected. This can be achieved by going though the following steps: 1. Create the shape which is going to represent the offline instrument or label in MS Visio by using the drawing tools. If the shape is more complicated (consisting of several shapes) it should be grouped before proceeding. 2. Draw the attachment line and adjust z-order of the shapes (in most cases the attachment line should be sent to back).
3. Group the instrument or label shape and attachment line.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
4. Access the Shape Sheet of the group (available on the right click menu). 5. If there is not any Controls section, create a new (Right click > Insert section). The newly created control should be named Attach.
6. Now, when the Attach control is added to the group, the attachment line should be adjusted so its begin refers to the shape representing instrument or label (rectangle) and its end, to the position of Attach control belonging to the group. In order to do this go to the command Shape Sheet of the attachment line and do the following changes: •
Refer beginX and beginY cells to the middle of a sub-shape representing instrument:
To refer to the instrument shape, its ID should be used. It can be found in the Special format window accessible from Format > Special in the shape context menu or from the main menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
The ID's of the shapes in the example are as follows: - 1 for the rectangle shape representing label or offline instrument (Sheet.1 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) - 2 for the attachment line (Sheet.2 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) - 3 for the whole group (Sheet.3 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) •
Refer endX and endY cells to position of Attach control in the whole group (now the ID of the whole grouped shape is used):
7. After the references are set, the attachment line will follow the Attach control. 8. Now the alignment box of the shape should be adjusted to contain the instrument (or label) shape only. In order to do this, Attach control should be brought to inside the rectangle, so the attachment line is hidden. After that the Update Alignment Box command should be issued for the group.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
9. In case there should be a possibility to turn on and off the attachment line, this can be achieved by the following: •
Inserting an Actions section (in the Shape Sheet of the group) with the =SETF(GetRef(Actions.Row_1.Checked),NOT(GetVal(Actions.Row_1.Ch ecked))) action:
•
Referring the Checked property using the =IF(Sheet.3!Actions.Row_1.Checked,1,0) formula from the LinePattern cell of the Line Format section in the attachment line (the Shape Sheet of attachment line should be opened):
10. The attachment line can now be turned on and off by using the shape right click menu:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
11. The last thing to do is to ensure that the text of the created shape will be displayed in front. To do this please make sure that Group data is set to "" in the Behaviour window accessible from Shape Tab > Properties > Behaviour:
12. Now the shape prepared in the above way can be imported using the Import Shape Wizard as Offline Instrument or Label and used in the drawing. Note: The above example will allow for creating a shape with desired behaviour only before Import Shape is executed on the shape. It is because of the need to group shapes to achieve attachment line functionality. The table below provides some specific information for each kind of shape to be imported: Category
Type
Conn. Points
Equipment items
Equipment
Any number
Sub-equipment
Any number
Nozzle
2
The point to be used for connecting the nozzle to an equipment item should be of Outward type. The point where a pipe branch should be connected should be Inward.
Electrical connection
2
The point to be used for connecting the elconn to an equipment item should be of Outward type. The point where a cable should be connected should be Inward.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:19
Notes
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Pipeline elements
Pipeline, Branch, Tube
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
Pipe components
Valve
For 2-way:2
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive (= connection point 1) and Leave (= connection point 2) for the main flow will be achieved.
For 3-way:3 For 4-way:4
Pipe components Fitting
Instrument
2
Pipe Destination
1
Cap
1
Closure Blind flange
2
For a reducer, the first connection point (arrive) is normally on the large side.
Cross
4
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive - Leave (main flow) will be achieved.
Olet
3
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive - Leave (main flow) will be achieved.
Coupling Filter Flange Reducer Trap Vent Weld Other
Tee
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Instrumentation
HVACline elements
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Instrumentation line, Instrumentation branch, Instrumentation tube
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
Instrument relationship shape
N/A
This must be a connector shape. Linestyle can be assigned before importing. When connecting to instruments, Begin is considered to 'fromreference', and End is considered to be 'toreference'.
Actuator
2
The point to be used for connecting the actuator to component items should be of Outward type. The point where an instrumentation line (tube) or instrument relationship shape should be connected should be Inward.
Offline Instrument
Any number
During Import Shape, an attachment control handle will automatically be added to the shape if it does not already exist in the shape sheet.
HVACline, HVAC branch, Duct
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
3:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Inline HVAC Components - HVAC Fitting
Air handling unit
1
Cowl Grille Mesh Plate Taper Branch connector
2
Damper Fan Flexible joint Offset Plenum Silencer Straight Transformation piece Cable elements
Three way
3
Cable
N/A
Multi-cable Annotation
Off-page connectors
Line splitter
3.5.3
Label
None
Multilabel
None
Title block
None
Off-page connector, incoming
1
Off-page connector, outgoing
1
Must be a Connector type shape.
Line splitter
Creating Diagrams Shapes Diagrams shapes can be created using the following steps: 1. Create a shape in a diagram drawing using standard Visio drawing tools and according to the instructions in Creating MS Visio Shapes shapes. 2. If the shape has been drawn as separate entities, e.g. two separate lines, or a line and a text etc., it must be grouped before proceeding. Normally shapes should be grouped BEFORE connection points are added, refer to further information in Creating MS Visio Shapes 3. If relevant, attach connection points by using the Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add the points to the shape. 4. Make sure that the stencil that you want to add the shapes to is open.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
5. Select the shape(s), (several shapes can be imported in one go, but they must be of the same type). 6. Select Admin Tab > Shapes > Import Shape. This will start the Import Shape Wizard that will guide you through the steps to transform the shapes into Diagrams shapes. An alternative way of doing this is to create the Diagrams shape directly on the drawing. To achieve that the below steps should be followed: 1. Create a shape in a diagram drawing using standard Visio drawing tools and according to the instructions in Creating MS Visio Shapes shapes. 2. If the shape has been drawn as separate entities, e.g. two separate lines, or a line and a text etc., it must be grouped before proceeding. Normally shapes should be grouped BEFORE connection points are added, refer to further information in Creating MS Visio Shapes. 3. f relevant, attach the connection points by using the Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add the points to the shape. 4. Select the Home Tab > Object > Define command. The Define Item Wizard window will open and by the following steps similar to the Import Shape Wizard, it will be possible to configure the shape and transform it to a Diagrams shape. In addition after the dialogue is closed, the shape will be defined in the way it would be after dropping it from a stencil.
3.5.4 •
Import Shape Wizard Overview Prior to starting the Import Shape Wizard, one or more shapes must have been selected on the current drawing. In case more than one shape has been selected, they will all receive a common type, common presentation settings etc. when the wizard has completed. Only the name will be different. If shapes of different types should be imported, the wizard must be executed once for each type of shape.
When the Import Shape Wizard starts, it will perform an optional scale check of the shape. In the Diagrams Options > System Configuration > Import Shape a min/max height/width can be set up. Import Shape will check against these values and give a warning to the user in case the shape exceeds or falls below the set limits. The four steps of the import shape wizard allows the user to set up the following information for the imported shapes:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 1: Selecting Type and Assigning a Name
1. First select the category in the explorer pane to the left. 2. Then select the type in the right hand pane. In case UDETs have been defined, these will be available for selection together with the corresponding base types. 3. Last enter the name for the shape. In case more than one shape is imported at the same time, the name will be suffixed _1, _2 etc.
Note: The checkbox Keep Custom Menu Actions is available for each shape. If checked the cells in Actions section of the shape sheet will be preserved.For piping and HVAC branches, a Denote to dropdown box will appear. This can be used to select
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
the tube/duct type that a branch should be denoted to when dropped on to the drawing. When a branch shape is dropped on to a drawing, a new branch element will be created in the pipeline hierarchy. At the same time, the actual shape will be denoted to become a tube/ duct shape, and a corresponding tube/duct element will be created in the DB as well. In case a shape having a UDET type derived from a branch is dropped on the drawing, the application must know which UDET type it should be denoted to. When the Next button is clicked, the wizard will continue to the next step. At this time, there is also a check that the shape has the correct number and direction of connection points.
Figure 3:5.
•
Example of error message dialogue box shown when the number of connections on the shape is not correct
Step 2: Selecting the Stencil
In this step you should select the stencil to which the shape should be added. The dialogue will show the currently open stencils, so the stencil must have been opened before starting the Import Shape Wizard.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: When import shape is performed, the stencil is automatically saved, but to make this save permanent, the user will have to perform a Save Work.
•
Step 3: Annotation Style Settings
In this step the default annotation can be set up. The default annotation is represented by the shape text as well as a number of default labels that can be automatically placed on the drawing when the shape is dropped. The number of default annotations varies depending on the type of item and can be controlled by changing the settings under General Options > Annotation Settings in Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
The annotation options are as follows: Shape text options
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Use defaults
If this is set to True, the Shape Text settings will be fetched from the default set up in Diagrams Options > Element Options for the relevant type. If it is set to False, it will be possible to override the default settings with a specific setting for the shape to be imported in this dialogue. Other Shape text options can only be changed if Use defaults is set to False.
Shape text
The shape text can be specified using attribute references and dot notation (refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices).
Text frame style
The setting is available for 2D shapes except annotating shapes (e.g. Labels). It allows adding a frame around the shape's text. Possible values are: None-no text frame, Rectangle-rectangular frame will be added to the shape text, RoundedRectangle-rectangular frame with rounded corners will be wrapped around text.
Rotate text with shape
The setting is available for 2D shapes except annotating shapes (e.g. Labels). Its value determines the shape text orientation. When set to False, the text will always be oriented horizontally regardless of the shape's rotation. When it is set to True - the text orientation will be corresponding to the shape's rotation.
Shape text colour
The colour of the shape text can be freely selected from a Windows standard colour palette.
Shape text font
The shape text font can be freely selected from a Windows standard font dialogue.
XRef
XRef can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT. It represents the reference point in the shape to which the X offset of shape text is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
YRef
YRef can be set to CENTRE, TOP or BOTTOM. It represents the reference point in the shape to which the Y offset of shape text is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset X
Horizontal offset for shape text placement in relation to XRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset Y
Vertical offset for shape text placement in relation to YRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
3:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Offset longitudinal reference
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT and represents the reference point in the text block. Longitudinal offset of the text will be measured from that point to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset longitudinal
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the longitudinal offset of shape text in relation to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular reference
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It can be set to CENTRE, TOP and BOTTOM and represents the reference point in the text block. Perpendicular offset of text will be measured from that point to the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the distance between the label and the longest part of the line.
3:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Annotation 1 - 10
Use
Can be set to the following values: USE - Means that the annotation will be used for this shape and that the annotation settings can be specified separately. DON'T_USE - Means that the annotation will not be used for this shape. USE_DEFAULT - Means that the default settings as specified in Diagrams Options > Element Options will be used. Other annotation options can only be changed if Use is set to USE.
Attribute
The attribute to be shown in the annotation label can be specified using attribute references and dot notation (refer to Attribute Presentation Notation).
XRef
XRef can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT and represents the reference point to in the shape to which the X offset is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset X
X offset for label placement in relation to XRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Yref
YRef can be set to CENTRE, TOP or BOTTOM and represents the reference point to in the shape to which the X offset is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset Y
Y offset for label placement in relation to YRef. The setting is available for 2-D shapes only.
Offset longitudinal
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines longitudinal offset of a label in relation to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the distance between a label and the longest part of the line.
Colour
Annotation colour can be freely selected from a Windows standard colour palette.
Font
Font can be freely selected from a Windows standard font selection dialogue.
Stencil
Name of the stencil where the label shape should be fetched from.
Label shape
Name of the label shape to be used for the annotation.
Note: The number of annotations can be changed using the General Options > Annotation Settings > Number of Autolabels setting in Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 4: Attribute Presentation
In this step the attribute presentation can be set up. If the Use default attribute presentation settings checkbox is checked, all presentation settings will be taken from the default that has been set up using the Attribute Presentation tab of the Diagrams Options dialogue (refer to Diagrams Options). In addition to the default presentation settings, it is in this step also possible to set up a default value (the Value column) for each attribute. This can still be provided even if the presentation settings are taken from the default. For a description of the columns, please refer to the Attribute presentation tab of the Diagrams Options dialogue. Note: In the Diagrams Options dialogue, there is also an Allow individual shape settings to override default settings checkbox related to the behaviour of this step. If that checkbox is checked, the presentation settings specified in this step of the Import Shape Wizard will be ignored. In case the user wants to override the default settings for certain shapes, this checkbox will have to be unchecked when the shapes are dropped on to the diagram drawing. Note: The value of the Text attribute is controlled by Annotation Settings in step 3, and is therefore disabled in step 4.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 5: Default Catalogue Search Filter
In this step, it is possible to specify a default catalogue search filter for the shape. If this is done, the filter will be applied in subsequent catalogue search operations using the Manual Catalogue Selection (refer to Manual Component Selection in Chapter Working with Diagrams). This can for instance be used in a way that for a cable shape, a filter is referred that includes searching in the correct category for cables. When the user will subsequently select such a cable shape in the drawing and go to the catalogue search window, it will automatically apply the pre-defined filter so only relevant cable catalogue items will be shown. Default filters for each type of item can be specified in Diagrams Options by using the Catalogue search settings > Default filters for non-pipeline elements settings. If these should be used, the Use filter from Diagrams default settings should be checked. Otherwise a specific filter for the particular shape can be specified in the Default catalogue search filter textbox. Note: If specification search for pipeline parts is not active, the following settings are also available, Catalogue search settings > Default filters for pipeline elements. When step 5 has been completed and the Finish command has been given, the shape(s) will be added to the selected stencil. The user will also be prompted if he/she wants to make a Save Work or not. The reason for this is that if the application subsequently will be closed without any Save Work command being issued, the imported shapes will be lost. So if the user clicks NO, then he/she will have to remember to perform a SaveWork at a later time.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.5.5
Edit Master By using the Admin Tab > Shapes > Edit Master command, it is possible to edit the settings for Diagrams shapes in a stencil without having to do a new import. The user interface is the same as for Import Shape (refer to Import Shape Wizard). However, as the dialogue opens it goes directly to step 3, as steps 1 and 2 are irrelevant for an already existing shape in a stencil. In step 3, the annotation settings can be changed, in step 4 the attribute presentation can be changed and in step 5 the default catalogue search filter can be changed.
3.5.6
Edit Shape Sometimes after dropping several shapes from stencils, there is a need to change their text or annotation properties. This can be achieved by using the Admin Tab > Shapes > Edit Shape command. The command can be used for one or more shapes selected on the drawing. If more than one shape is selected, all shapes should represent the same element type (e.g. all should be cable shapes or equipment shapes). The Edit Shape command brings up the same dialogue as Import Shape and Edit Master (refer to Import Shape Wizard). Like for the function Edit Master, the dialogue opens at step 3, but it is not possible to go back to step 1, Type and Name of Shape, because it is not allowed to change the type of an already dropped shape, nor to step 2, Destination Stencil, as this step is not relevant in this case. When using the Edit Shape functionality it is possible to change the following: •
annotation style settings (step 3)
•
attribute presentation settings (step 4)
•
default catalogue search filter (step 5)
Note: Edit Shape can be used for Diagrams shapes only (shapes created using Import Shape Wizard or the Instant Define feature).
3.5.7
Instant Define There are situations when some of the shapes are used very rarely and there is no need to have them defined on the stencil. In these cases, it is possible to draw/copy a shape on the drawing and define it skipping the Import Shape. To achieve that: •
Select a shape on the drawing that was not created by the Import Shape Wizard.
•
Select the Home Tab > Object > Define command.
The Define Item Wizard window will open. The dialogue is the same as the Import Shape Wizard, only step 2, Destination Stencil, is not available and in step 1 the Name field is disabled as it is not relevant. After the steps in the Define Item Wizard are done, the shape will be defined on the drawing in the same way as Diagrams shapes dropped from stencils.
3.6
Optimising Project Performance and Storage Space Important: Please read this chapter before setting up your project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.6.1
Recommendations to Improve Performance of SaveWork 1. Avoid having many pages in the same diagram. It is better to create separate diagram files. At the moment, all the pages in the diagram are being processed and saved as SVG files during SaveWork, this is the case even if the user has just modified one of the pages. 2. Avoid using heavy bitmaps or too detailed vector graphics in title block and backgrounds. You can experiment by removing some of these and measure the SaveWork performance to determine if you have an issue with this. 3. There is a setting to control whether SVG files should always be created, or only when the drawing contains anything released to 3D. If this setting is used, it is possible to get better performance when initially working with the drawing. After it has been released to 3D, there will then be a performance degradation as the SVG files starts getting created. Please note that once SVG files starts generating, you cannot turn it off again, so this setting has to be applied from the start of a new diagram drawing. 4. During savework, there is intense file storage activity with Visio and SVG files. For this reason it is recommended that the IT infrastructure such as network and file server disk performance where the files reside (xxxDIA) is optimized.
3.6.2
Refresh Performance The performance of the Refresh command is dependent on how many shapes are being refreshed and how many attributes belong to each of these shapes in the Custom Properties. It is easy to get large numbers here. E.g. if there are a 100 shapes in a drawing that each has 50 attributes belonging to it, this will produce 5000 attribute values to be read from Dabacon and updated in the shapes' Custom Properties. Recommendations: 1. Only use the Refresh command when necessary, e.g. when you suspect something has been updated in the DB and you need to see it reflected in your drawing. 2. If only some shapes are selected in a drawing when doing the refresh, only those shapes will be affected. It is often unnecessary to refresh the whole drawing if only one part is being worked on. 3. Reduce the number of attributes per shape to be shown in Custom Properties down to a set of attributes that are really being used by the Diagrams user. E.g. there exists a lot of .Pmg... UDA’s in the sample project. In many cases these attributes are not being used and take up unnecessary time during the Refresh. When these kinds of attributes are not being used the UDA’s can simply be removed from the project. It is also possible to control which attributes should appear in the Custom Properties through the Attribute Presentation function. If for instance half of the attributes shown in the Custom Properties are never used, then removing them will halve the time used for refreshing the whole drawing.
3.6.3
Project Storage with Respect to Visio and SVG Files Recommendations 1. As mentioned above, it is possible to disable the SVG creation until it is really needed (when the diagram has been released to 3D). 2. There is a setting to control whether to use binary Visio files or XML format Visio files. XML format requires much more storage space, so make sure to use the binary format.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3. There is a ‘Keep session files’ setting that will determine whether the old versions of the Visio and SVG files will be kept during each SaveWork or not. With this setting you can balance between ‘more data management capability & more storage space required’ or ‘less data management capability & less storage space required’ as is described below: •
With this setting set to True there is a possibility to backtrack the Dabacon session and access the specific Visio/SVG file versions related to that particular session. The drawback here is, of course, that it may take a significant amount of storage space to save the related files for all sessions.
•
With this setting set to False only latest versions of the Visio/SVG files will be kept. This means that backtracking a Dabacon session will not give access to the corresponding Visio/SVG files. However, storage space requirements will be less demanding.
•
When ‘Keep session files’ is set to True, and sessions are to be merged, then select Admin Tab > Admin Tools > Project Maintenance > Clean Old Session Files to get rid of the corresponding Visio/SVG files. This can be an approach where there is a possibility to backtrack changes during a period. Merge and clean the sessions and continue from there.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4
Working with Diagrams This chapter describes all the standard functions and procedures for using the application, and is therefore of interest to all users of Diagrams.
4.1
Introduction Symbols are added to drawings by dragging and dropping shapes from the stencil to the drawing area. As soon as a shape that corresponds to a DB element is dropped, it will if possible be defined (refer to section Define / Undefine), which means that a corresponding database element will be created in the current database session. Some shapes will need a context to be defined. For example, if a valve shape is dropped by itself, it will not be defined until it is connected to a defined member of a pipeline branch, for instance a SCTUB shape. When a shape is defined, the corresponding database element can also be seen appearing in the DB explorer. When using the Consistency Check function (refer to section Consistency Check), a warning will be issued for undefined shapes. Default attributes defined in the shape in the stencil will automatically be assigned to the element. There is also a function to prompt the user for attribute values when a shape is dropped is also supported. The attributes of a shape are available through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. As soon as an attribute is changed by the user, it will be updated into the database session. The data will then be written to the database and be available to other users after issuing a Save Work command. Shapes can be connected to other shapes directly when dropped, or they can be connected afterwards.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:1.
Attributes for a shape can be viewed and updated through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. Updated attributes are automatically stored in the corresponding DB element.
4.2
Main GUI Components
4.2.1
Main Window and Dockable Sub-windows The main window contains a number of dockable/floatable sub-windows that can be rearranged in different ways. Please refer to the Common Application Framework (CAF) documentation for further details.
4.2.2
Schematic Explorer The Schematic Explorer can be used to navigate in the Schematic World in the database. If the Schematic Explorer is not visible, it can be displayed using the View Tab > Explorers > Schematic Explorer command in the main application menu. In this explorer you can see the primary Schematic Group hierarchy (refer to Groups in Chapter Application Setup). Below each schematic group, the items are further sub-grouped by Folders. Folders do not exist in the database, they are only a way to display items of the same type, together, and provide a better navigation and overview. Above the navigation tree is a Filter checkbox as well as a dropdown list where predefined filters can be selected. If the Filter checkbox is checked, the selected filter will be applied to the explorer tree. Currently there are tree filters available, one for each discipline (Piping, HVAC, Electrical). The Schematic Explorer features a context sensitive right mouse button menu that provides common commands.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The Schematic Explorer shows the entire contents of the database and not only the current drawing. Operations done through the explorer such as Rename etc. will be automatically updated in any currently open diagram drawing, but for any drawings that would be affected by the change, but are not open in the current session for the moment, a manual Refresh will have to be applied later.
4.2.3
System Explorer The System Explorer can be used to navigate in the System Hierarchy in the database. If the System Explorer is not visible, it can be displayed by using the View Tab > Explorers > System Explorer command in the main application menu. In this explorer you can see the secondary Systems hierarchy. Below each system, the items are further sub-grouped by Folders. Folders do not exist in the database, they are only
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
a way to display items of the same type, together, and provide a better navigation and overview. Main schematic items such as Pipelines, HVAC lines, Equipment items and Cables are members in the system hierarchy through their SCSYSF attribute, which contains an array of system references. This means that a schematic item can be a member of more than one system simultaneously, thereby appearing in several places in the System Explorer tree. The first system in the array is considered the primary system, and others are considered secondary. By default, all subordinate items are considered to be members of the same system as the parent Pipeline / HVACline / Equipment item. It is however possible to override this by setting a different system reference on a subordinate item, such as a special valve or a sub-equipment item. In this case that particular item would both appear below the parent item (Pipeline, Equipment) in the system explorer, and also by itself under the system set for that item. Diagrams are shown under all systems to which the items on the diagram belong. This includes both primary and secondary systems. Above the navigation tree is a Filter checkbox as well as a dropdown list where predefined filters can be selected. If the Filter checkbox is checked, the selected filter will be applied to the explorer tree. Currently there are tree filters available, one for each discipline (Piping, HVAC, Electrical). The System Explorer features a context sensitive right mouse button menu that provides common commands. Note: The System Explorer shows the entire contents of the database and not only the current drawing. Some administrative elements such as the SYSCDA and SYSMDA are however hidden in order not to clutter the view. These elements can be seen and manipulated through the systems hierarchy administration function. Please refer to Systems in Chapter Application Setup for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.4
Project Breakdown Structure Explorer The PBS (Project Breakdown Structure) Explorer allows presenting database content depending on user needs. It is accessible in View ribbon tab in Explorer group:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The data can be shown as one or more user-defined structures. Each structure is shown in the explorer as a hierarchy starting from separate root node and can show database items organized according to their belonging to system, class, etc., depending on definition in Lexicon (for more information please refer to Project Breakdown Structure chapter in Lexicon User Guide). The PBS Explorer tree is generated during runtime from Lexicon definition and its nodes can represent database items as well as just label texts generated from definition. By selecting node connected to database item, user can navigate database hierarchy (set current element). Also, context menu with basic commands is available for relevant nodes.
4.2.5
Hiding Element Type String in Explorer It is possible to hide the element type when presenting the database elements in the explorer, in order to make the elements appear only by name. This can be done by unchecking the Element Type checkbox in the Explorer Settings:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
This can make the appearance in the explorer easier to view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:2.
Element Type checked
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:3.
Element Type unchecked
The rules of presenting elements when ‘Element Type’ is off are as below; •
For named items, only name is displayed.
•
For unnamed items of build-in (system) type presented string is concatenated from "Reporter text" (RPTX) defined for the type followed by sequence number, e.g. Equipment 1.
•
For unnamed items of user defined type, user-defined type name followed by sequence number is presented.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.6
Possibility to Sort Explorer Items by Name It is possible to display database items sorted by name alphabetically. The sorting can be decided for each element type, so that items under a certain element type is sorted by name. For example, if choosing to sort under SCGROUP, all nodes below SCGROUP will be sorted in the explorer. Nodes that are displaying its members sorted are indicated by an arrow;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
It is possible to select several element types for sorting. Their names can be keyed in or selected from the Select element types window. This is available after clicking the Browse button in the options field.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The method of sorting elements is as follow; •
Elements are sorted by the text visible in explorer tree, that means that if type string is visible, it is taken into account while sorting. For example,:SCPUMP zzz will be placed before SCEQUI aaa. If the type string is off, then the items will be ordered differently.
•
Items are sorted alphanumerically.
•
Sorting is inherited when secondary explorer is created by selecting "New Explorer" command from item's context menu.
Note: The sorting is done only for presentation in the Explorer and does not affect the order of the elements in the database.
4.2.7
Diagram Drafting Canvas The MS Visio sub-window contains the diagram drawing canvas and provides access to stencils as well as attributes through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Shape attributes are available through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window (see below).
•
There are right-click menus available for shapes as well as for the drawing background providing context sensitive short-cuts for common functions.
•
When an item is selected on the drawing, it will automatically be made the Current Element (CE), which means that it will be selected in the explorer and other windows that track the CE.
•
When an item is selected in the explorer, it will however not be selected in the drawing automatically. In case the user wants to select it, there is a Select in Drawing command on the right click menu in the explorer.
•
Navigation such as Scrolling, Panning, Zooming in the drawing window can be achieved through standard Visio functions such as Ctrl+Shift+Click on left and right mouse buttons. See table below. Ctrl+Shift+Left Mouse button click
Zoom in
Ctrl+Shift+Right Mouse button click
Zoom out
Ctrl+Shift+Right Mouse button drag
Pan
•
A number of Function Keys are available for easy access and commonly used commands. Please refer to section Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys for more information.
•
Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information about the drawing window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.8
Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window
Note: The Custom Properties Window has been renamed to Shape Data Window in Visio 2007. If the Custom Properties / Shape Data window is not visible, it can be shown using the View Tab > Attributes > Shape Data command in the main menu. The attributes presented for each kind of item can be changed using the Attribute Presentation settings in Diagrams Options in Chapter Getting Started. When the value of an attribute is changed through Shape Data, it will automatically be changed in the related database item using the current Dabacon Session as well. To permanently save the changes to the database, the Save Work command must be issued. For further information about this, refer to section Save Work and Save As. To enter multiple values for an array type attribute, the values can be entered separated by a blank (using space bar). In case more than one shape is selected in the drawing, Shape Data will show the attributes for the first selected item. If the user will then update an attribute value, it will be applied to all selected shapes.
4.2.9
Item List The Item List contains lists of the items on the current page of the diagram drawing. These are arranged on different tabs according to their type. The Item List can be shown by using the View Tab > Attributes > Item List command in the main menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Item List is synchronized with the drawing, so that any items added to or removed from the current drawing page will immediately be reflected in the Item List. Note: When drawings with many items are being worked on, the automatic synchronization between the drawing and the Item List might lead to a noticeable delay in some situations, depending on the computer performance rating. In case this happens, the automatic updating can be turned off by setting the System configuration > Item List > Automatic updating default setting in Diagrams Options to False. Then the Item List can be refreshed manually by using the Refresh command on the right click menu. When items are selected in the drawing, they will also be selected in the Item List and vice versa. This behaviour can be turned off by setting the Connect Item List with Drawing default option to False. In the Pipe inline components and HVAC inline components tabs, Tube and Duct elements are by default not shown in the list. It is however possible to turn on the display of Tubes/ Ducts by changing the System configuration > Item List > Tube/Duct visible default setting in Diagrams Options to True. The Item List is using the AVEVA Grid Control which provides a number of filtering, sorting and grouping functions. For more information about the AVEVA Grid Control, refer to Getting started With Plant documentation. The presentation of attributes in the Item List is configurable by the Attribute Presentation tab in the Project Tab > Options > Diagrams Options dialogue. Please refer to Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started for further information. Attribute data can be edited in the Item List as well as in the Custom Properties / Shape Data Window (refer to section Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window). The Item List features a right click menu that contains the same item specific commands as in the Schematic Explorer as well as some presentation options such as Show Filter Line, Show Group Panel etc. The Item List also includes an Export to spreadsheet feature. This is further described under section Export.
4.2.10
Catalogue Search By selecting the View Tab > Searching > Catalogue Search command in the main application menu, the Catalogue Search window can be shown. This is further described under Manual Component Selection.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.11
Command Line By selecting the View Tab > Reference > Command Window command in the main application menu, the Command Window can be displayed. In the Command Window you can type in standard PDMS commands for listing and manipulating data, executing PML functions etc. For more information, please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Database Management Reference Manual.
Note: The command line should be used with care, and it is important to fully understand the consequences of the commands issued. Some commands might not work as expected in the Diagrams context. A few examples of these are listed below: •
If changing modules by issuing the PDMS or similar commands, the Diagrams exit handling will be bypassed, so settings and data will not be properly saved.
•
By using the Savework command, the diagram document might not be saved if the user subsequently clicks Cancel in the following dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.12
Message Log
The Message Log can be shown by issuing the View Tab > Reference > Message Log command from the main application menu, or by clicking on the Message Log in the Status Bar (refer to section Status Bar for more information). The Message Log shows messages that occur when the application is being used. Messages can have different severity (Error, Warning or Information) as indicated by the icon. In case a message is related to a particular shape in the drawing, this is indicated by the shape name in the Shape column and the page number in the Page column. In this case it is also possible to click on the message to select the related shape in the drawing. If the shape is not available on the drawing any more (i.e. was deleted or drawing is closed), the page number disappears after the first click on the line with this shape. When the shape is not visible in the drawing window, the window will pan/zoom as necessary. The Message Log can be cleared of all messages by right clicking and selecting Clear Message Log. The columns are as follows: Column Message
Explanation 1. The icon indicates the severity of the message (Error, Warning or Information) 2. Message text
Shape
Name of the Visio shape that the message is related to.
Connection
Connection number of the shape which the message is related to. This is only shown in case the message is related with a certain connection point on the shape.
DB Element
Name of DB element that the shape is related to. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape that has a corresponding DB element.
Page
Page number in the drawing on which the related shape exists. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape.
Time
The time that the message was generated.
Note: When the Message Log window is not open, any error or warning (but not informational messages) that occurs will cause the status bar panel to flash in an orange colour. The flashing will stop as soon as the user moves the mouse to the status bar panel. Please note that in some cases several messages can be generated by a single user operation. In the example below, it is not the SPRE changed… informational message that caused the flashing, but rather the previous error message. Opening the Message Log will show that a previous error message caused the flashing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Status bar panel flashes when the Message Log window is not open.
Opening the Message Log reveals the actual error message that caused the flashing. There is also a functionality which allows exporting the Message log and Consistency check results to a txt or xls file. This is available in the right click context menu of the Message Log and Consistency Check window.
4.2.13
Status Bar
The status bar contains the following panels from left to right: Panel
Description
Status message
Shows status messages, for instance how many shapes are selected at the moment.
Message Log
Shows the latest message in the Message Log. By clicking on this panel, the Message Log window will be shown (refer to the section Message Log for more information).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Panel
Description
Current Line
Shows the name of the current Pipeline/HVACline. The application remembers the latest Pipeline/HVACline that was selected by the user. In case the CE moves to another part of the schematic hierarchy, for instance by selecting an equipment item, the latest selected Pipeline/HVACline will still be remembered and shown in this panel. If any new branches are added, they will be created in the line shown in this panel. If you click on this panel, the line shown will become CE.
Sessions Defaults
When the mouse pointer is hovered over this panel the following tooltip will be shown:
Default System - Shows the current Default System. When new items, that can be part of the System hierarchy, are created they will be created under the current Default System. The current Default System can be changed by clicking on this panel, this will bring up the Standard DB Browse Dialogue. Default Groups - This panel shows the current setting for Default groups. This can be either Individual per type or Get from CE. The Default Groups setting determines at which position in the main hierarchy (schematic groups) that new items will be created. By clicking on the panel, the Default Groups dialogue will be shown (see below). In the Default Groups dialogue, the default group can be set up for each type of item. In case UDETs are being used, separate settings can be applied for each UDET type. In case the Get Default Group from CE checkbox is checked, new elements will instead be created under the Schematic Group which is found in the CE path. Default Attributes - This panel shows the number of currently used default attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Zoom Bar
This panel is visible only when any drawing is open. The content from left is: Zoom To Page- this button zooms out the view to the whole page of an active drawing. Pan & Zoom - toggles the Pan & Zoom window. Zoom Level - Shows the current zoom value. Zoom Out/Zoom In - Zooms the view to the next available zoom threshold. Zoom Slider - allows to quickly change zoom by any value. Figure 4:4.
4.2.14
The Default Groups dialogue.
Search The Search command is available in the View Tab under Searching group. This function searches the database for elements based on name, element type or other criteria and can be useful for finding elements in case the user is not familiar with their location in the schematic hierarchy and are therefore difficult to locate in the explorer. The Search Results shows a list of elements found, and features a right-click menu with common commands.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.15
Find in Drawing Toolbar The Find in Drawing toolbar is available on the Tools Tab. It can be used for finding and highlighting of shapes in the diagram. These selections can be used for further operations.
The procedure to use the Selection Toolbar is as follows: 1. First select the type of element using the Type drop-down box. 2. Select an attribute using the Attribute dropdown box. If no attribute is selected, all items of the specified type will be selected in the drawing. It is also possible to key in the name of a pseudo attribute or a referenced attribute in this field. In order to do that square brackets must be used, e.g. [ABORE] or [SPRE.CATR.PARA(1)]. Note: Array indexing always starts from 1.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
3. Select an operator using the Operator dropdown box. The available operators are the following: Operator
Description
=
Equal-to sign
>
Greater-than sign
<
Less-than sign
<>
Not-equal-to sign
>=
Greater-than-or-equal-to sign
<=
Less-than-or-equal-to sign
The operators are valid for the following types: Type
=
>
<
<>
>=
<=
Integer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Real
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Logical
Yes
Yes
Reference
Yes
Yes
Word
Yes
Yes
Yes
Position
Yes
Yes
Orientation
Yes
Yes
Direction
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: If the attribute is an array, then only the operators ‘=’ and ‘<>’ are available unless an array index is specified, e.g. [Borearray(1)], then the Type should be one of the mentioned above. 4. Enter a criteria value. The value can be left blank in case you are searching for shapes where some fields have not been set, for instance where SPRE in not set. 5. Click the Select button to select items according to the criteria, or click the Highlight button to instead highlight items according to the criteria. 6. Click the Previous button to go to the previous item within the collection of selected or highlighted shapes. The Next button goes to the next item within the collection of selected or highlighted shapes. In the Selection Options menu the user can choose one of the three modes: •
Clear current Selection / Highlight before applying new search - when active new search will disregard the previous selection / highlight next time user performs a search.
•
Add to current Selection / Highlight - when active a new search will add to the existing selection or highlight.
•
Select / Highlight within current selection - forces the search to consider only the items within the current selection. It is therefore possible in this mode to first make a selection using the Area or Lasso method prior to clicking any of the find buttons.
In the Search Options menu the user can choose if the search will be performed on Defined shapes, Undefined shapes or both. When the Zoom To button is activated the application will zoom and/or pan so that the entire selection is visible.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.16
Standard DB Browse Dialogue A standard dialogue is used for several tasks where a DB reference is to be set. The dialogue enables the user to navigate the relevant parts of the database hierarchy as well as search for items by a text search. When the OK button is clicked, the reference to the selected item will be returned to the UI component from which the dialogue was called.
In the Database Tree tab only relevant parts of the database for the current context is shown. In case the user is supposed to select a certain kind of element, only this kind of element together with necessary hierarchy elements will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Using the Search tab, it is possible to make a text search in the database. In case the user has selected a hierarchy node in the Database Tree tab, the search will be limited within that part of the hierarchy. The current search scope can be seen after the Search in label above the text criteria field. The text criteria should be keyed into the criteria field. This will be matched against a concatenation of the Name and Description attributes as the search is being carried out. In case no wildcard characters are used, only items with a whole word matching the criteria will be found. In case more than one word is entered, this will be considered as a complete string to be matched. This means that if you want to find a string that contains two or more words which might be separated by other words, you will have to use asterisks in between (see wildcards below). The asterisk (*) character can be used as a wildcard denominator. Asterisks can be placed before (e.g. *A3), after (e.g. A3*) or in between (e.g. system*spec). This can also be combined (e.g. *A3*). Note: The search is not case sensitive.
4.2.17
Document Links The Links command is available in View Tab > Reference > Links. It allows the user to link documents, URLs etc., to elements in a generic fashion using the LinksAddin. The functionality provided by the LinksAddin is further described in Database Management Reference Manual chapter Link Documents.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.18
Edit Members The Edit Members command is available in the Context menu displayed for elements in the Schematic Explorer. This is an addin which provides functionality to manage members of CE, edit attributes, creating/deleting elements, duplicating some of the members, etc.
4.2.19
Reference List This is an addin which immediately shows the references form the CE to other database elements. It is very useful for checking dependencies between elements and also provides the possibility to navigate between referenced items. This function is available in View Tab > Reference > References.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.20
Status Control Status Control is the ability to control and report on the status of individual model objects as they progress through their lifecycles. It can be applied to any model objects, e.g. tagged items, catalogue components, drawings, etc. It can be expressed in a variety of ways, e.g. Approved for Construction, 80% Complete, Clash Free, etc. For more information about Status Control please refer to the Status Control documentation.
4.2.21
Diagrams Rules The Diagrams Rules provides functionality to configure actions depending on user-defined conditions. There are two kinds of rules available: •
Formatting Rules which allows the control of the appearances of shapes.
•
Consistency Rules which allows to create fully configurable definitions of diagrams consistency.
All the rules are accessible in the Diagrams Rules window which can be viewed using the Admin Tab > Definition > Rules command or the appropriate button on the Auto Formatting Rules toolbar.
Figure 4:5.
Diagrams Rules window
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Diagrams Rules Window The Diagrams Rules window provides functionality to define Rules Sets and create new Rules below them. There are two main nodes in the tree on the left hand side representing two kinds of available rules; the Consistency Rules and Formatting Rules. It is not possible to remove or change the order of these nodes.
Rules Sets and then Rules of a given kind can be created below each of the main nodes. Rules and whole Rule Sets can then be copied, removed or renamed using the right mouse button menu:
Rules and Rule Sets can also be re-ordered using the Drag&Drop functionality. Note: Copying and re-ordering is only possible in scope of one kind of rules, a consistency rule cannot become a formatting rule. It is also possible to turn on/off rules or whole rule sets using check boxes in the left part of the window. If the main node is turned off all the rule sets and rules are not active. Turning a rule or rule set off means that it will be skipped when rules are executed either manually or automatically on events.
•
Rule Details The Rule definition can be seen/modified in the Rule Details window which is shown when a new rule is created or after the Rule Details command is selected from the Rule Context menu. It provides functionality to specify the rule definition and its content is different for Formatting and Consistency Rules.
•
Formatting Rule Details The Formatting Rule definition can be specified by defining the following; •
rule name and description
•
selection criteria
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
format to apply to matching shapes
•
additional rule options
When the rule is executed on the current drawing, first all the shapes that meet the selection criteria are found and then the appropriate format is applied to them according to the additional options.
•
Setting Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria specifies to which elements a rule is applied. Generally the criteria are based on values of database attributes, but it is also possible to filter out shapes fulfilling specified Visio formula. The database criteria can be defined in three ways; 1. Using element type and attribute values 2. Using a pml expression. 3. Selecting shapes without database element This can be chosen in the Criteria drop down box.
Figure 4:6.
Defining selection criteria using the Type & attribute value option
If the ‘Type & attribute value’ is selected it provides the possibility to select the type of elements to which the rule should be applied and then to define the number of attribute filters. It is also possible to select ‘All types’ which means that the attribute filters will be matched to all elements. To specify attribute filters select the Attribute from the drop down in the Attribute column in the grid. It is possible to use regular attributes as well as referenced attributes. It is also possible to key in the attribute name rather than select it from the list. The attributes list contains system attributes and UDAs valid for the selected type including referenced attributes defined in Attribute Presentation in Diagrams Options. It does not contain pseudo attributes unless they are added in the Attribute Presentation. If there is no type specified for the rule (‘All’ is selected in the Type drop down) the list consists
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
of merged attributes for all database types that can be represented on a diagram. After the attribute is selected, the operator and value to compare should be specified as shown in the screen shot above. A new row for the next attribute filter is added automatically after the current row is edited. To delete an existing attribute filter row select the whole row and press the Delete key on the keyboard. When several attribute filters are defined it is possible to decide if all of them should meet the rule for a specified shape or if it is enough that one of them is valid for a given shape. This depends on the state of the Require all the following check box. If the selection criteria type is set to ‘PML expression’ then there will be a text box displayed to key in the expression. It will be executed on all database elements represented on the drawing and the element will be considered as satisfying the rule criteria if the expression returns True. Therefore the expression must be of boolean type, e.g. FUNC EQ ‘PIPE’. For more information about constructing PML expression see User Guide Software Customisation / Customisation Guide / PML Expressions.
Figure 4:7.
Defining selection criteria using the PML expression option
The third possible Criteria is ‘Shapes without DB element’. After this is selected from the drop down, user is able to decide which shapes not having any connection should be taken into account. There is an option to select: •
Not defined shapes
•
Shapes defined but not having any DB representation (this could happen e.g. when element is deleted from database from command line)
•
Non-database shapes like Labels, Title blocks, Instrument Relationship Shapes etc.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:8.
Defining selection criteria for shapes without DB representation
Apart from specifying the database condition, it is also possible to set Visio formula as an additional shape condition. To set the formula 'Visio shape condition...' link label should be pressed and a valid Visio formula should be shown in the dialog:
Figure 4:9.
Setting Visio shape condition
Following Visio standards, the formula should be of Boolean type and result in TRUE (non zero) or FALSE (zero). The entered formula will be executed on shapes and is allowing to make applying rules dependant of e.g. shape geometry. For example formula (BeginXEndX)*(BeginX-EndX)+(BeginY-EndY)*(BeginY-EndY)>10mm could be used if the rule should be applied to shapes matching the given database criteria and in addition only if the length of the connector is greater than 10 mm. After the selection criteria are defined it is possible to check to which shapes the rule will be applied on the current drawing using the Highlight link placed at the right bottom of the dialog. After this is clicked all shapes meeting the criteria will be highlighted on the current drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Specifying Format to be Applied When the shapes meet the rule criteria are found during the executing rule, the format properties defined by this rule are applied to them. The format to be applied to the matching shape can be defined on the Format to be assigned tab:
Figure 4:10. Defining format to be applied by rule
The tab page contains a list of all format properties possible to assign using the rule. If the associated value is not set (blank) it means that the property is not going to be set. The following properties can be assigned: •
Line colour – if the value for the property is set, then the line colour of the shapes meeting the rule criteria will be set appropriately. This will override the Defined, Released To 3D and Associated With 3D colours. The value can be defined in the dialog presented after clicking the button in the field:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:11.
•
Define line colour
Lline pattern – can be defined by selecting the desired value from the drop down in the corresponding field. The value can also be keyed in. It determines which line pattern can be assigned to shapes matching the rule. If a selected pattern is defined, it should be added to the drawing before applying the rule. Otherwise there will be no visible effect (only the formula will be set appropriately).
Figure 4:12. Selecting line pattern
•
Line weight – line weight can be selected from the list or be put into the corresponding field as a text. If the value is keyed in without a unit string, then when the rule is being applied, the default page unit will be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:13. Selecting line weight
•
Line cap - can be selected from a list or keyed in, in the same way as line pattern.
•
Line transparency - can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
Figure 4:14. Specifying transparency
•
Fill colour – can be set in the same way as line colour.
•
Fill pattern – fill pattern can be selected from a list or keyed in, in the same way as line pattern.
•
Fill pattern colour – is defined in the same way as line colour.
•
Fill transparency – can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
•
Layer – layer can be selected from the list containing layers present on the current drawing or keyed into the appropriate field. If it is set, then all shapes matching the rule will be added to the layer and removed from the layers they belonged to before. If a layer with a name does not exist it will be created.
Figure 4:15. Selecting a layer
If is selected from the list, then after the rule is executed, all shapes meeting its criteria will belong to no layer. If the option is chosen, then shapes will be put into layers depending on their catalogue reference – for each spec a corresponding layer will be created and all shapes having reference to the spec will be added to the layer. •
Text font – defines the font to be used in the text of shapes matching the rule. It can be selected from the following list:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:16. Selecting text font
•
Text size – can be selected from a list of typical font sizes or keyed in:
Figure 4:17. Selecting text size
•
Text colour - can be set in the same way as other colours.
•
Text style – specifies if text in shapes fulfilling the rule criteria should be bold, italic, etc. An appropriate value can be selected from the following list:
Figure 4:18. Selecting text style
•
Text transparency – can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
Sometimes there is a need to clear previous formatting before applying the new one. In such a case, the Clear auto formatting option placed on the Format tab below the table can be used.
If the check box is ticked then previous formatting done by the rules will be cleared for all shapes fulfilling current rule criteria. Also, in such a case the formatting table will be disabled for editing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Additional Rule Options To make rules more adjustable to specific needs it is possible to set several additional options. This can be achieved using the Rule options tab.
The options possible to set are: •
Apply rule to protected members of grouped shapes – if the option is unchecked then any format defined in the rule will not be applied to group members protected from group formatting. It can be set by selecting Format > Protection and checking the appropriate option in the dialog opened by the command:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The option will be ignored and disabled for editing when Clear auto formatting is checked in the Format to be assigned tab. •
Overwrite guarded Visio formulas – if the option is not checked then the format will not be applied if the corresponding cell in the shape sheet is guarded, e.g. line colour will not be applied to the shape if its ‘LineColor’ cell contains the formula’=GUARD(7)’.
Note: The option will be ignored and disabled for editing when ‘Clear auto formatting’ is checked in the Format to be assigned tab.
•
•
Apply rule automatically on events (if enabled) – if the option is not checked then the rule will not be executed automatically even if ‘Auto apply rules’ is on, see also Executing Rules below.
•
Handling annotations – if a shape matches the rule, then this setting provides the possibility to decide if the format should be applied to the shape only, to the shape and its annotations (attached labels) or only for the shape’s annotations.
Consistency Rule details The Consistency Rule definition can be specified by setting the following; •
rule name and description
•
selection criteria
•
check to be performer on pre-selected shapes
•
action to be taken on ‘failed’ shapes
•
additional rule options
When the rule is executed on the current drawing, at first all the shapes that meet the selection criteria are found and then the check is executed on the shapes to determine whether they are fulfilling required conditions, and finally specified actions are taken on ‘failed’ shapes. The execution of rules is controlled by the rule options.
•
Setting Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria are specifying which elements should be taken into account while performing the consistency check, e.g. bore size should be checked for inline components only. The Selection Criteria can be defined in exactly the same way as for Formatting Rules.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
For more details please refer to Setting Selection Criteria.
•
Check Definition Shapes meeting selection criteria found during rules execution are checked according to definition. The Check can be defined as PML macro or the Check function should be used. The PML macro should be of BOOLEAN type and it should return TRUE if the shape meets the requirements and FALSE if not and if actions defined on next tab page should be taken.
Figure 4:19. Defining check as PML expression
The Check can also be retrieved from the Library. After selecting the option, using the browse button, a list of available Checks are presented.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:37
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:20. Selecting the check function from library
If the Check method fails for some reason, a defined action should be taken on the shape. There are a number of standard checks defined in the Diagrams Consistency Rules Library, but it is also possible to define customised checks. These should be defined as classes implementing IDiagramsRulesCheck specified in Aveva.Diagrams.DiagramsRules in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. To be automatically picked up, the class defining check should be placed in a dll named *ConsistencyRulesLibrary.dll. Apart from defining the check itself there is also an option to decide if the check should be performed for every connection of the shape. If Execute for each connection is checked, a defined PML Expression or selected library check will be applied for every connection of the given shape and an action will be performed on every failed connection. If the option is unchecked checks are performed once for every shape matching the selection criteria. Note: Only one check can be specified for each rule.
•
Specifying Actions On the Actions tab page it can be specified which action(s) should be taken for shapes that failed the check. Several actions can be specified for the same rule. An action can be defined as a PML macro which can be any operation to be executed on a DB element connected with a shape.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:38
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:21. Definition of action
In addition it is possible to select a number of actions from the library. They can be added/ removed by clicking Add action/Remove Action. Actions are executed in order or appearance on the list. Move up/down link labels allow to re-order them according to needs.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:39
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:22. Selecting action from Library
Similarly to the checks, actions are also pre-defined in Diagrams Consistency Rules Library, with the possibility to add more. To add a custom action a class needs to be defined implementing IDiagramsRulesActon specified in Aveva.Diagrams.DiagramsRules in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. To be automatically picked up, the class defining check should be placed in a dll named *ConsistencyRulesLibrary.dll. On the Action tab page also the severity of rule and message to be added to the Consistency Check Result window can be specified. The severity can be as follows: •
Information
•
Warning
•
Error
And the message can be any text which will be visible in the Consistency Check Result window if a shape fails the check. The severity is also mapped to the window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:40
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Consistency Rule Options To make rules more adjustable to specific needs it is possible to configure their behaviour on events. This can be accomplished using the Rule Options tab:
The following possibilities of rule behaviour exist: •
Don’t execute rule on events – this means that the rule will be executed only manually.
•
Use default configuration – the behaviour depends on the Consistency Rules settings in Diagram Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:41
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
•
Custom configuration – the behaviour is specified ‘locally’ for the rule and does not depend on the default configuration.
Executing Rules Rules and rule sets are controlled by the Diagrams Rules toolbar which allows the turn on/ off of several options and to manually execute rule sets.
Figure 4:23. Diagrams Rules Toolbar
To manually execute the rule set on current selection or the whole drawing if no shapes are selected, the appropriate value (name of the rule set to be executed) should be selected from the drop down on the toolbar and after that the Apply rules button
should be
clicked. To select the proper Rule Set to execute, the kind of rule should be selected from the left drop down list (Formatting Rules or Consistency Rules). Then, the second drop down menu will be updated with all Rule Sets available for the selected kind of rule. To execute all rules of a given kind, the All rule sets should be selected in the second drop down. Note: Only active rule sets (having checked the ‘active’ check box in the tree in the Rule Definitions window) are executed by this command. Another method to execute a single rule or rule set is issuing the Apply command with the Right Mouse button menu on the appropriate item in the Auto Formatting Rules window. This will also work for currently selected shapes or for the whole drawing if nothing is selected on it.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:42
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is a number of options configuring the execution of rules. They are specified for Formatting Rules and for Consistency Rules and the execution of every kind or rule can be performed in a different way.
•
Executing Formatting Rules As mentioned above, Formatting Rules can be executed from the Diagrams Rules toolbar. The important thing to be aware of is that Formatting Rules are applied in sequence and if one of them is specifying the same property, e.g. colour than the previous rule, then the previous value will be overwritten. It could be used to define a sequence of rules going from very general criteria to more specified conditions, but it is important to keep an appropriate rules order. There are also additional options on the toolbar to configure execution of Formatting Rules.
To turn on automatic executing, select the Apply on Events button . When this is checked the active rules with the Apply rule automatically on events option set are executed after different kinds of events. The events can be determined in Diagrams Options.
Figure 4:24. Specifying events that should trigger executing formatting rules
If the Zoom to option changed shapes.
is on, then the zoom of the current page is adjusted to show all
After the rules are executed and the appropriate formats are applied, it is possible to restore the original format from the shapes in the current selection using the Reverse button: If no shapes are selected on the drawing, then the format is restored for all shapes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:43
.
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Another option that can be set in Diagrams Options is the Message level. It specifies how detailed messages will appear in the Message Log during applying auto formatting rules. The setting can have the following values:
•
•
Summary message - only messages on starting and finishing applying auto formatting rules are displayed in the Message Log.
•
Message per rule - apart from start and finish message, one message per applied rule is added with information of the number of shapes the rule has been applied to.
•
Message per shape - apart from start and finish message, one message for each shape with changed format is added to the Message Log.
•
Message per applied format - information about each applied format is added to the Message Log as well as start and finish applying rules messages.
Executing Consistency Rules The Consistency Rules can be executed manually in the following ways: •
From Diagrams Rules definition window by executing the Apply command from the context menu of Rule or Rule Set – the Rule or Rule Set will be executed for the current selection or the whole drawing if nothing is selected.
•
From the main menu by selecting the Consistency Check command – executes all available active Consistency Rules for the current selection or the whole drawing if noting is selected.
•
From the Diagrams Rules toolbar by clicking the Apply button as described in the Executing Rules chapter above. The Rule Set selected from the drop down will also be applied to the current selection or the whole drawing if nothing is selected. It is possible to execute rules with specific severity by checking the appropriate options in the Consistency Check options on the Diagrams Rules toolbar.
In the example above only rules with severity equal Error or Warning will be executed. The ones with severity set to Information will be skipped. Note: The selection of severity only applies when the execution is called from the Diagrams Rules toolbar. On the Diagrams Rules toolbar there is also an option to turn on/off automatic execution of Consistency Rules. This can be achieved by checking/un-checking the Apply on Events button in the Consistency Rules options. After the Consistency Rules are executed the Consistency Check Result window is shown. The messages are added to the window when the check fails for a rule having Message specified on the Action tab page. The Message can be viewed in the window and the severity rule is mapped to the appropriate icon.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:44
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:25. Consistency Check Result window
Every message added to the Consistency Check Result window has information about the Rule that generated the message. It is possible to navigate to the Rule definition by selecting the Go to Consistency Rule command from the Context menu of each message:
4.3
Standard MS Visio Functions The standard MS Visio functions are embedded and available through menus and ribbon tabs. For more information about MS Visio functions, refer to the MS Visio documentation. Below can be seen the main application menus, where the standard MS Visio functions have been highlighted in yellow.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:45
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:46
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:47
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:48
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Other main application menus do not contain any standard MS Visio commands.
4.4
Application Modes Diagrams can operate in three different application modes: •
P&ID mode
•
Cable mode
•
HVAC mode
The selected mode will affect some of the available commands. Each mode has its own group in the Home Tab (P&ID, HVAC, Cable) and is only available when that mode is selected.
Figure 4:26. Application mode selection in Tools menu.
4.5
Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys In the following table is listed the various keyboard shortcuts available in Diagrams. Standard Visio commands have been highlighted in a yellow colour, while Diagrams specific commands are not.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:49
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6
File Handling
4.6.1
Overview All diagrams, stencils and templates are handled through proxy elements in the database, even if the actual files are stored in the file system. Please refer to Database Architecture in Chapter Diagrams Overview for an overview of how these documents are managed. Note: It is possible to choose binary or XML format for saving Visio documents. For more information please see Document file formats in Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup.
4.6.2
New
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:50
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
New diagrams, templates and stencils can be created through the New Diagram and New Stencil commands in the Project > New menu.
If desired, a template for a new diagram can be chosen from the database. If no template should be used, then click the No template button. To ensure integrity between data on the drawing and its database representation, when a new diagram is created (from a template or not) it should be saved to the database. For that reason the user is immediately prompted for a name and database location for the new document via the standard Save Diagram As dialogue as seen below:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:51
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is a possibility to create a new drawing without saving it to the database. This is done by clicking the Cancel button as it states in the dialogue title bar. However, then the document is considered read-only and any database related changes to its content are not allowed. Note: The same occurs when an external drawing is imported using Project > Import and Export > Import > Drawing. The imported drawing should be either saved to the database or be opened in read-only mode.
4.6.3
Open Existing diagrams, stencils and templates can be opened through the Project Tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:52
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When the Open command is issued, the Open dialogue is shown. This dialogue shows a list of the diagram, stencil and template index elements in the database, through which the diagrams can be opened.
Diagrams, stencils and templates can also be opened by double clicking or using the rightclick menu of the Schematic Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:53
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case the diagram is connected to other diagrams through off-page connectors, the Connected Diagrams command will be available. By selecting this command either of two things will happen: 1. If the diagram is connected to one other diagram only, this diagram will open. 2. If the diagram is connected to several other diagrams, a list of diagrams will be shown so the user can select which one(s) to open.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:54
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: When the user tries to open a diagram that is already claimed a dialogue will be shown where the user gets the opportunity to open in read only mode.
4.6.4
Open Read Only It is possible to open a diagram as read only. It will not be possible to modify the diagram and in read only mode it will not be claimed. This means that other users still can open it in Read/Write mode (using the normal Open command). The Open Read Only command is available in a number of situations as seen below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:55
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:27. Context menus on SCDIAG
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:56
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:28. Context menus on SCPLIN or its members (also SCEQUI etc.)
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:57
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:29. When line, equipment etc. are placed on diagrams
Figure 4:30. When option Connected Diagrams is chosen
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:58
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:31. Open from File menu
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:59
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:32. In Open From Batch Job
Figure 4:33. In Line Properties
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:60
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:34. In the Search Result context menus
4.6.5
Save Work and Save As When the Save Work command is issued, the following actions will be performed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:61
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
1. Saving the Visio drawing and modified stencils to the file system, also re-saving all opened documents with a file format not corresponding to ‘Save documents in the Visio XML format’ setting. 2. Updating the SCDIAG and SCSTEN index elements in the database with Visio drawing related data. 3. Performing the Dabacon SaveWork, thereby flushing all session data to the database. The Save As command will provide the user with a possibility to save the drawing under a different name and with the option to duplicate all the presented data. In order to keep consistency between the database and drawings it is not possible to execute the Save As command on a drawing containing unsaved database related changes. In such a case the changes must first be saved and therefore the operation is cancelled with the following warning message.
Figure 4:35. Save As warning message
After the Save As command has been executed and the drawing does not contain any database related changes, the name and location for a new drawing should be specified in the Save As dialog.
Figure 4:36. Save As dialogue
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:62
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The location for a new diagram is assigned by selecting the schematic group element below which the diagram should be created. It is also possible to create new schematic groups by right-clicking on the Schematic World element or on an existing Schematic Group element in the element tree to the left. Depending on the Copy DB items option, shown in the picture above, the new diagram can be saved in two different ways: •
When the option is checked, all items that are defined in the database are duplicated together with the drawing containing the changes. For more information refer to Save As with Copy of Data.
•
When the option is unchecked, the drawing is duplicated but all the containing shapes are undefined on the copy of the diagram.
When the drawing has been successfully saved with Saved As, with a copy of the database data or not, the user is prompted to perform a Save Work.
Note: If the Diagrams application is closed without the execution of Save Work the newly created copy of the drawing will not be saved between sessions. Note: If more than one diagram is open, all open diagrams will be saved when Save Work is performed. Important: It is not allowed to overwrite an existing diagram by performing a Save As and selecting the same name as an existing diagram. This is due to technical reasons and the way that diagram files are stored and referred from the DB proxy elements (SCDIAG). The workaround is to first delete the diagram to be overwritten before performing the Save As using the same name.
4.6.6
Save As with Copy of Data The Diagrams application provides a possibility to duplicate a drawing together with its database context. To use this functionality Save As should be executed on a drawing to be copied and the Copy DB items option should be checked. Then, after the Save button is clicked, the user is provided with further options:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:63
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6.7 •
Save Work and SVG Creation Overview To reduce time for the Save Work function to complete it is possible to choose when to create SVG files for the diagram. The basic concept of this functionality is described in the flowchart below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:64
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:37. Save Work and SVG creation flowchart
You can change the Save Work behaviour via the Diagrams Options > Create SVG on Save Work option:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:65
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:38. Diagrams Options - Create SVG on Save Work
Create SVG on Save Work Set to Always Each time that Save Work is executed SVG files are generated for every page of the diagram. Whether the diagram has elements released to 3D or not has no impact. Create SVG on Save Work Set to For Data Released to 3D Only Each time Save Work is executed SVG files are generated for each page of the diagram that contains data released to 3D. For every page that does not contain released to 3D data a ‘dummy’ SVG file is being created. The dummy file is just an empty file with some basic parameters so the diagram data is possible to load to the integrator without errors. Create SVG on Save Work Set to Never SVG files are never created when Save Work is executed. However, if the diagram contains released to 3D data a warning message is displayed in the message log.
•
Alternate Way of Creating SVG Files One more way of creating, or rather updating, SVG files, is the Batch Job function. This can be selected from the Tools Tab > Drawings > Batch Job function in the Diagrams ribbon menu. Just select the diagrams that are to be updated and click Update Diagrams:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:66
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
On the next form there is no need to select any options, just click Update!.
All selected diagrams that had SVG files created for them will have SVG files generated again for all pages in the diagram. If a diagram had no SVG files created it will not be modified and no SVG files will be created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:67
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: This option only updates pages that were previously exported. Dummy pages will not be updated. -
SVG Creation from PML It is also possible to create SVG files using PML. The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. Export to SVG can be achieved by using PMLDiagrams Object, or global PML function !!ExportToSVG('DiagName'). For more information and usage examples please see Publishing from Diagrams via PML in Chapter Utilities chapter.
•
Release Diagram to 3D Button
Click the Home Tab > Object > Release button and select the pages for releasing items to 3D. This is a simple way to release all items to 3D on selected pages of the diagram. It will affect all elements on the selected pages.
If a page was previously released to 3D then it will be pre-selected and the date of the recent release will be displayed. Note: This performs Save Work. If you are working with extracts, then the Flush extract checkbox will be active. By checking it, all data that were released on the selected pages will be flushed to the master database. Note: It is strongly recommended to set the ‘Keep session files’ option to True. Otherwise, each Save Work in the extract will replace and rename existing Visio and SVG files and may make them inaccessible at the master location
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:68
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6.8
Save As with Copy of Data The Diagrams application provides the possibility to duplicate a drawing together with related database items. To be able to use this functionality the Copy DB items option, in the Save As dialogue, see Figure 4:39.: Copy DB items tick box below, should be ticked and the Save As command should be performed on the drawing that is to be copied. Then click the Save button to display more options. (The full Save As dialogue is shown in Figure 4:36.: Save As dialogue above).
Figure 4:39. Copy DB items tick box
At this stage it is possible to cancel the Save As by clicking the Cancel button. The operation is then aborted and no copy of the drawing is created. The settings available on the Copy DB Items dialog, shown above, are described below:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:69
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Location for New Elements Copies of database items are created below groups specified for particular types in the Defaults Groups settings. The destination groups can be modified by clicking the Change... button. The Defaults Groups dialog is displayed and new groups can be selected for different types. The new setting will be saved when the Save As operation is finished. Note: If a default group is not set for an element type, then elements of such type will not be copied and appropriate shapes will be undefined on the destination drawing.
•
Copy Options Auto named copied elements This option is only available when auto naming is enabled. This is done via This is done via Admin Tab > Configuration > Naming. Tick this option to apply auto naming rules to copied elements. If this option is not ticked, then copies of named items will get a ‘Copy-of-’ prefix while copies of unnamed items will remain unnamed. Create secondary shapes for applicable types Select this option to create secondary shapes for Equipment, Sub-equipment, Electrical connection items, Cables and Multi-cables. This means that these types of items will not be copied and the shapes in the new diagram will instead refer to the same database items as in the old diagram. Copy database items and create primary shapes Select this option to copy database items and create primary shapes for Equipment, Subequipment, electrical connection items, Cables and Multi-cables. If selected then a number of the following options become available (in addition, to make these options available, the appropriate situation must be relevant for the diagram that is being copied):
•
•
Copy owning equipment not on current diagram - in case of the diagram containing sub-equipment, where the owning equipment item is not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those owning equipment items.
•
Copy sub-equipment not on current diagram - if the diagram contains equipment that owns sub-equipment items that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those sub-equipment items.
•
Copy nozzles not on current diagram - in cases where the diagram contains equipment that owns nozzles that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those nozzles.
•
Copy electrical connections not on current diagram - if the diagram contains equipment that owns electrical connection items that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be ticked to also copy those electrical connections.
•
Copy cores with cables - when the diagram contains cables that own cores, this option should be ticked to copy the cores as well.
Refresh Refresh copied drawing If this option is ticked, the shapes on a newly created drawing are refreshed during the Save As operation. It will make the operation take longer, but all the texts on all the shapes will be updated.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:70
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When the appropriate options are selected click OK. The drawing is duplicated and all DB items it contains are copied according to the settings from the dialog. The progress of the copy operation is presented in the Progress Bar in the application window. The information about all subsequent steps is also saved in the Diagrams Message Log:
4.6.9
Get Work To get access to updates done by other users, the Get Work command can be used. This works exactly like the standard PDMS Get Work command.
4.6.10
Delete Diagrams can be deleted using the Delete command on the right click menu on the SCDIAG element in the schematic explorer. When a diagram is deleted, any related items on that diagram will not be deleted from the database. However, all references to that diagram will be cleared. This means that if the diagram for instance contains an equipment shape, the DIAREFARRAY on the equipment item will be updated, but the equipment item as such will not be deleted. Any orphan items left over when diagrams are deleted can be found by searching for items where DIAREFARRAY is empty. Note: When a single page within a diagram is deleted, the user will be presented with a question regarding deleting all items from the database or not.
4.6.11
Additional Notes on File Handling Below are a few notes regarding file handling: •
The application supports Multiple Document Interface (MDI) which allows several diagrams to be open at one time. However, due to technical reasons and the integration between the document state and the database state (Save Work and DB sessions), it is not possible to only save one single document or to close one single document.
•
When Save Work is performed, all open diagrams will be saved.
•
When Quit Work is performed (for instance when one diagram is closed), all open diagrams will be closed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:71
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.7
•
When exiting the application, the user will be prompted whether to save work or not.
•
When KEEP_SESSION_FILES default setting is set to False, there is a tool available for cleaning old session files. For more information refer to Clean Old Session Files in Chapter Utilities.
Define / Undefine The Define command will create a new database element that corresponds to a shape and link the shape to that database element. In case an element with the same name already exists in the DB, the application will issue an error message and create a new unnamed element. The Define command is available on the Home Tab > Object > Define, and on the right click menu for shapes in the drawing. For piping and HVAC branches, there is also a Define Branch command that will create a new branch element under the current pipe-/HVAC-line and define all in-line fittings in the branch in one go. The Undefine command will break the link between the shape and the corresponding database element. The database element will not be deleted. Note: When Undefine is performed, the attributes will be cleared using the same rules as when a shape is copied, refer to the Copy with shape setting in Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started. During normal drafting of diagrams by dragging and dropping shapes from a stencil and connecting together in the drawing, the Define operation will be handled automatically by the application. The manual define/undefined only has to be used in special situations. For example, if a number of inline fitting shapes (a branch or part of a branch) are copied and pasted, they will not automatically be defined, so the user will have to first select a current Pipe-/HVAC-line and then issue the Define command. It is possible to disable the automatic Define mechanism by setting the Define shape on drop to False. As a visual feedback to the user, it is possible to set up a default colour that is automatically assigned to shapes when they are defined. This is done by the Colour setting for each kind of item under Element Options in Diagrams Options in Chapter Getting Started. Using the default application settings from the installation, this means that Equipment and Pipework shapes will turn blue as they are defined, HVAC ducting and fittings will turn green etc. In case the colour does not change on drop/connect, the user will see that the shape could not be defined.
4.8
Refresh The term ‘Refresh’ in Diagrams refers to a mechanism whereby the diagram document is kept up-to-date with changes done in the database. For example, if an update has been done to the database from the Command Line window, it is possible that annotation labels in the drawing or other windows showing drawing-based data such as Shape Data etc. needs to be updated accordingly. Normally the necessary update happens automatically, but in some cases this will not occur, see note below. For this reason there is a manual Refresh command that can be used to get the diagram drawing in synch with the database data. The Refresh command will update the shape attributes, labels and annotations in the drawing from the related database elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:72
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Refresh command works on the current selection, so it is possible to refresh a single selected shape, a group of shapes or the whole drawing. The whole drawing will be refreshed when no shapes are selected before choosing the Refresh command. The Refresh command can be called from the Home Tab or from the Shape and Drawing right-click menus. Refresh will be carried out automatically for any changes on database elements that are directly related to shapes on open diagrams. For example, if you change an attribute on an equipment item in the database, and you have an open diagram containing a symbol representing this equipment item, the shape data attributes as well as related annotations for this symbol will be automatically updated. However, in some cases the automatic Refresh will NOT happen;
4.8.1
•
For referenced data in other elements. For example, if you have an annotation formula like [SPREF.CATR.PARA(1)], it will not be automatically refreshed if the catalogue DB will be updated. In that case the user will have to manually use the Refresh command to see the update in the diagram drawing.
•
For drawings that are currently not open. These will either have to be manually refreshed after opening, or the Refresh drawing on opening setting in Diagrams Options can be used.
•
For Pseudo Attributes. These will not be automatically re-calculated and refreshed if any data they depend on is changed, it has to be done manually by the user to see any updated values from Pseudo Attributes.
Feedback on Refresh The Diagrams application provides functionality to indicate changes made to shape data after the Refresh command has been executed. This functionality makes it possible to know what changes have been picked up from the database - it is useful when database data has been modified by some external application, an addin or by another user in a parallel session. The user can be updated about the changes by highlighting of the modified shape and/or its annotation and also by appropriate messages in the message log. The functionality is controlled by a number of settings:
The settings controlling feedback given by highlighting a shape and/or its annotation are as follows: •
‘Reset highlight before refresh’ indicates whether the Reset Highlight command should be executed before the Refresh command is executed.
•
‘Highlight shape with changed attributes’ - if this option is set to true, then a shape that has attributes updated by the Refresh command will be highlighted.
•
‘Highlight changed annotation’ - if this option is set to true, then after the Refresh command is executed and the shape's text has been changed, the text will be
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:73
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
highlighted. If the text on the Labels/Multi-labels, attached to the shape being refreshed, was changed, the annotation will be highlighted as well.
Figure 4:40. Changed shape and its annotation (text and attached label) being highlighted after Refresh
Apart from highlighting the modified shape or annotation the changes are also indicated by messages in the message log. There is possibility to adjust the level of information according to individual user needs using the ‘Message level’ setting. It can be set to the following values: •
‘Summary message for refresh operation’ - only one summary message with information of the number of changed shapes will be given:
•
‘Message per shape’ – a summary message and also one message for each changed shape with information about the number of changed attributes will be displayed:
•
‘Message per attribute’ – there will be a summary message and also one message for each updated attribute (except attributes listed in ‘Ignore changed attributes’ setting):
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:74
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Another option controlling the feedback on Refresh is ‘Zoom out to show all changes’. When this option is set to True it gives a possibility to zoom out to see all changes, then after the refresh, zoom is adjusted to show all changed shapes on the current page. To avoid indications on any insignificant changes, it is possible to set attributes which should be skipped by feedback on Refresh. They can be listed as value ‘Ignore changed attributes’. The attributes to be ignored should be separated by commas or spaces like on the examples below:
Referenced attributes cannot be listed in the setting, but they are ignored if any of their parts are skipped, e.g. OWNER_NAME will be ignored if the Ignore changed attributes list contains an OWNER or NAME attribute. A change made to ignored attributes during refresh will be skipped in the message log information (there will be no message if the level is set to Per attribute and also the change will not be counted in ‘Per shape’ and summary information). If all changed attributes for the refreshed shape are listed in the Ignore changed attributes list, the shape will not be highlighted even if ‘Highlight shape with changed attributes’ is on. However, if the ignored attribute causes any modification of the shape's text or label text, the text and the label will still be highlighted if ‘Highlight changed annotation’ is set to True. By default the feedback is given only if the Refresh operation is executed from the menu or if it is called after a drawing is opened and the ‘Refresh drawing on opening’ is set to True. However, it is possible to set the 'Give feedback on automatic refresh' to On to get feedback on the automatically called Refresh operations, e.g. after Refit and Resize.
4.9
Consistency Check The Consistency Check command can be executed on a single shape, several shapes or on all shapes in the drawing. This function will perform two kinds of checks on the selected items. It will check the consistency between the drawing and the database as well as performing an engineering check.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:75
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case any inconsistencies are found, these will be listed in the Consistency Check Result window. Inconsistencies are classified as Errors, Warnings and Informational messages as indicated by the status icon. The columns are as follows: Column
Explanation
Shape
1. The icon indicates the severity of the problem (Error, Warning or Information). 2. Name of the Visio shape that the problem is related to.
Connection
Connection number of the shape which the problem is related to. This is only shown in case the problem is related to a certain connection point on the shape.
DB Element
Name of DB element that the shape is related to. This is only shown in case the problem is related to a shape that has a corresponding DB element.
Page
Page number in the drawing on which the related shape exists. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape.
Problem
Problem text. See below for the list of problems that can be detected by the Consistency Check function.
Corrective action
In case any corrective action has been taken, this will be indicated in this column.
By clicking on each line in the dialogue, the corresponding shape will be highlighted in the drawing. In case the shape is not visible in the current view, the system will pan and if necessary zoom out to make the entire shape visible. The system will also attempt to bring back the drawing to a consistent state against the database in case any inconsistencies have been detected. This normally means that shapes will be disconnected or undefined in the drawing. No automatic updates will be done to the database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:76
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Below is a table showing the different checks that are performed during the Consistency Check operation. Problem
Severity
Corrective action
Explanation
Not connected to the same point on element in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The connection number indicated by the shape connection point differs from the one get from arrive/ leave attribute.
Not connected to the same element in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The element connected to the shape on the drawing is not the same as the element pointed by the database reference.
Connected pipeline X has different attribute FLUR
WARNING
None
Pipeline connected to the shape on the drawing has different attribute FLUR than the pipeline that the shape belongs to.
Connected shape's element does not exist in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The shape is connected on the drawing to the element which does not have a database representation.
Element not connected in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
Similar to the above, the shape is connected on the drawing, but not in the database.
Illegal connection between different line types
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
Occurs when connected inline components and tubes are placed below different line types (Pipelines and Instrumentation lines).
Nozzle not related with an equipment item
ERROR
Undefine shapes
Nozzle is defined in the database under some equipment, but not connected to any defined item on the drawing.
Electrical connection not related with an equipment item
ERROR
Undefine shape
Electrical connection is defined in the database under some equipment, but not connected to any defined item on the drawing.
Shape is related to a ERROR different equipment item than in the database
Undefine shape
The nozzle or electrical connection is defined in the database under some equipment, but on the drawing it is connected to another item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:77
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The database element is missing
ERROR
Undefine shape
The shape is defined, but the related database element is missing.
The database element is connected at the connection point, but the shape is not
WARNING
None
The element in the database is connected, but its representation on the drawing (shape) is not.
Shape has only to/from WARNING flows
None
The shape has only 'to' or 'from' connections.
Only X of Y cable members are released to 3D (performed for Multi-cables)
WARNING
None
SPREF not set
WARNING
None
SPREF of component is not set (Nulref)
SPREF not of SPCOMPONENT type
WARNING
None
SPREF of component is set to an element different than SPCOMPONENT (occurs when current settings do not allow out-of-spec components).
Boresizes does not match (between current and connected shape)
WARNING
None
Widths does not match
INFORMATION
None
Heights does not match
INFORMATION
None
Shape do not match
INFORMATION
None
Shapes (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) of connected shapes are different (for HVAC).
Ductsizes/shapes do not match
INFORMATION
None
Widths, heights or shapes (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) of connected shapes are different (for connection between HVAC elements and e.g. nozzles.
Boresize not set
INFORMATION
None
Bore size is unset (for piping and instrumentation).
Ductsize not set
Duct size (height or width) is not set (for HVAC).
Shape not set
Shape (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) is not set (for HVAC).
Shape not connected at connection point
INFORMATION
None
One of connection points is not connected to any item.
Shape is not defined in the DB
INFORMATION
None
Shape is not defined.
Shape not connected to other OPC
INFORMATION
None
Occurs for OPC's when their OPCREF is not set (is not pointing to other OCP).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:78
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Attribute X has bad WARNING reference(s) to Y. Referenced item(s) missing in the MDB.
None
Reference in attribute X is pointing to an element Y which is not valid in the MDB. One attribute can have many references, in which case only bad references will be reported. Note: This will not report unset references, only references set to invalid objects are listed.
Instrument relationship shape is not defined on drawing but it connects items that are connected in DB.
WARNING
‘The shape has been defined’ message appear and relationship line will be defined.
Relationship shape supposed to be defined because it connects valid items and items are connected in DB but for some reason it was not defined.
Can not connect Instrument relationship line shape to this connection point
WARNING
Disconnect in dwg.
User is trying connect relationship shape to some component connection point that was designed for process line.
Instrument relationship WARNING line shape should be connected to offline instrument or actuator from at least one end.
Disconnect in dwg
Situation where the system detects that relationship shape is connected with both ends but none of the connected items are actuators nor offline instruments.
Twin connection.
WARNING
Disconnect in dwg
Message when the system detects that Offline instrument or Actuator has more than one connection to the same item.
One end of Instrument relationship line is not connected.
INFORMATION
None
Situation where relationship shape line has one end disconnected.
Instrument relationship line is not connected.
INFORMATION
None
Situation where relationship line has both ends disconnected.
There is also a functionality which allows exporting the Message Log and Consistency Check results to a txt or xls file. This is available in the right click context menu of the Message Log and Consistency Check window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:79
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Consistency Check command can be issued through the following UI commands: •
Object pull-down menu
•
Shape right-click menu (also works on a selection of shapes)
•
Drawing background right-click menu
A summary of the consistency check result can also be seen in the Message Log. In case no inconsistencies are detected, the Consistency Check Result pane will not appear.
4.9.1
Export Consistency Check Result to File There is functionality to allow the export of a consistency check result. After the consistency check for a diagram has been executed, right-click on a message in the Message list and choose the option Export to....
In the Save As dialogue there is a possibility to choose the export file format to be used, either text file format or Excel file format.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:80
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.10
Annotation
4.10.1
Overview Diagrams supports the standard Visio Shape Text field as well as predefined label shapes. The users can create their own label shapes, including multi-field labels. When such a label is dropped on the drawing and connected to a DB element shape, it can display arbitrary attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:81
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.10.2
Shape Text The Visio Shape Text field provides a default annotation that will be presented together with the shape in the diagram. The initial position of the shape text is automatically calculated by the application according to text placement settings provided in Diagrams Options and in Import Shape Wizard (for more information refer to Step 3: Annotation Style Settings in Chapter Getting Started). After a shape has been placed, the shape text can be selected and dragged by the mouse to another position. For connector type shapes such as tubes, ducts and cables, the shape text is automatically placed and oriented along the longest leg. To be able to move and place the shape text manually, the Using control handle command has to be enabled. This command is available on the Shape right-click menu. The shape text can be turned on or off by right-clicking on a shape and selecting the Show Text command. This command can also be used after having selected several shapes. Line breaks in the shape text can be accomplished in two different ways: •
By adding a "\n" escape sequence to the text annotation format.
•
By defining a linebreak character. This is done by assigning a value to the Linebreak delimiter setting in Diagrams Options.This requires that the attribute data values to be presented in the text contains such characters at suitable positions, which in essence means that these characters will be stored inside the text strings in the database. To enable this kind of linebreaks for a certain shape, the Linebreaks command in the right-click menu has to be checked.
For pipe tubes and HVAC ducts, there is a possibility to enable a mode where only the shape text for the first tube/duct in a branch (or rather segment) will be visible, while others
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:82
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
will be invisible by default. This function can be enabled by setting the Show Text on first segment only default setting in Diagrams Options to True. However, depending on the sequence of operations when the branches and segments are built, some extra texts might be left in the middle of a segment. These can then be manually hidden by using the right click command.
•
Wrapping Frame around Shape Text There is also a possibility to add a frame to the shape text. To do so there is an option to set in the Diagrams Defaults and Import Shape Wizard as shown below.
This option is available for 2D shapes except for annotating shapes (Label, Multi-label, Title Block). The option allows the user to determine whether the shape text should be wrapped with a frame and if so, it is also possible to choose between different frame styles. The text frame styles are:
Name
Description
None
No text frame
Rectangle
Rectangular frame around text
RoundedRectangle
Rectangular frame with rounded corners
The image below illustrates the result of selecting the particular values:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:83
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The colour of the text frame is always the same as the colour of the shape text.
4.10.3
Labels Shapes for custom labels and multilabels can be created using the Import Shape Wizard. The annotation strings can be formatted according to the Attribute Presentation Notation (please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices) in order to present attribute values from the related shape. Default labels can also be set up for shapes, so that for instance an equipment shape will get a number of pre-defined labels when it is dropped on the drawing. This can be done in the type specific settings in Diagrams Options and can also be overridden in step 3 (Annotation settings) of the Import Shape Wizard in case individual settings are required. A number of annotation settings are available in Diagrams Options that controls the label shape to be used for annotation as well as the number of annotation labels that should be available for each type of item in Import Shape Wizard. These settings can be found under General Options > Annotation Settings. Line breaks are supported in the same way for labels as for the Shape Text.
4.10.4
Title Block Title Block shape can be used to annotate a diagram or template. Its behaviour is similar to Multi-label, but it can not be connected to any shape - it is displaying the attributes of the diagram or template. A shape for Title Block can be created using the Import Shape Wizard and then be dropped on a drawing as any other shape. Typically the Title Block consists of several fields (grouped shapes) - each of them representing an attribute:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:84
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:41. Sample method of preparing a shape for the Title Block
Similar to other annotation shapes, texts for particular fields can be formatted according to the Attribute Presentation Notation (please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices) and line breaks are supported in the same way as for Shape Text. During importing Title Block, font and colour of text can be defined separately for each field:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:85
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:42. Configuration of texts for separate fields of Title Block in the Import Shape Wizard
After dropping the Title Block on to a diagram/template the annotation strings defined for particular fields are evaluated according to the existing database attributes. Those strings can be re-defined using the custom properties of a single text field:
Figure 4:43. Sample Title Block - changing annotation string
4.10.5
Property Break Symbol In the Annotations stencil supplied with Diagrams, there is a Property Break symbol. This symbol can be dragged to the diagram and attached to a connection point on an inline fitting. The property break symbol will then show attributes that differ between the elements at the connection. This can for instance be used to annotate spec breaks. In the example
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:86
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
below, there are different Pspec (A300 vs. A150) and Ptspec (PS007 vs. PS008) between the tee and the following tubing.
The attributes that will be shown can be configured using the General Options >Annotation settings > Property Break settings in Diagrams Options. This setting is represented by a comma separated list of attributes. Only the attribute values that differ will be shown.
4.11
Off-page Connectors Diagrams allows the creation of discontinuous pipelines / HVAClines through the use of an Off-Page Connector (OPC) mechanism. Even if these are called Off-Page Connectors, they can also be used within a page. Two variants of Off-Page Connectors are supported by the application, Outgoing and Incoming. Off-Page connectors are created by dragging an OPC shape onto the drawing and connecting it to a free end of a pipeline branch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:87
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
An outgoing OPC can be connected to an incoming (or vice versa) using the Connect OPC command in the shape right-click menu.
This command will bring up a Selection dialogue (Standard DB Browse Dialogue) where all unconnected OPCs of the opposite kind will be listed.
By selecting a matching OPC they will be connected by the OPCREF attribute.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:88
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When examining the database explorer, it can be seen that a new SCSEG element has been created. The purpose of these administrative elements is to serve as containers for the parts of a branch that is divided by OPCs.
The shape text shown in the OPC can be controlled by the Attribute Presentation Notation. Refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices for further information. It is for example possible to show the name of the drawing and the page of the OPC that the current one is connected to by using the following format: [opcref.owner.diaref(1)] - Page: [opcref.owner.page(1)]. It is possible to navigate between connected OPCs by using the Go to Connected OPC command available on the right click menu.
The OPC connections can also be listed and navigated on a diagram level. By right clicking on a Diagram Element in the database explorer and choosing the Connected Diagrams command, all diagrams connected to the current one will be listed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:89
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By clicking on a diagram in the list, this can be opened.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:90
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.12
Area Shape An Area Shape provides the possibility to define an area in the diagram drawing that corresponds to a room, a plant area or represents a db Area Shape (SCAREA) defined in the Schematic database. This provides a general mechanism for assigning attribute values based on the location of the shape within the frame provided by the Area Shape. Area can control a set of attributes and their values are automatically applied to the shapes it contains.
4.12.1
Defining Area Shapes Area can be represented by any 2-dimensional shape which is imported on a stencil as Area Shape using the Import Shape Wizard. After that it can be used as any other item by dropping it on the drawing. Area Shape can be located on the foreground and background page. An Area Shape can be used just as a graphic frame not connected to any database element or it could have database representation. DB data against the Area Shape are stored as SCAREA element, which can be created below SCGROU. As any other element, Area can be defined in DB using Define command and also it can be defined on dropping the shape on drawing. To allow the second possibility, Define Area on Drop settings should be set to True:
Note: The option is only applicable when General options->System configuration->System>Define shape on drop setting is set to True. To disconnect Area Shape from database element Undefine command can be used. It is possible to specify different colours for defined and undefined Area shapes - see picture above. The Primary/secondary shape mechanism can be used to contain several Area Shapes on different drawings referring to the same SCAREA element. For more information please see chapter Primary / Secondary Shapes. Elements contained by defined Area Shape are referring to it via SCAREF. One item can refer to several Area Shapes. All items referring to SCAREA via SCAREF can be seen in Schematic Explorer tree as its secondary hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:91
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By default the Area has the attributes relevant for the SCAREA element, but the set of attributes controlled by Area Shape can be extended in Diagrams Options. Select the Attribute Presentation click the Referenced Attributes button and then manually key in the attribute names:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:92
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To distinguish between attributes that can be propagated to shapes contained by the Area and those who should only be displayed in Area's Shape Data, the Propagate column should be used:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:93
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
All attributes with the Propagate field checked will be controlled by Area and propagated to contained shapes. In addition it is possible to specify prefixes which would be set for both propagate and not propagate attributes in Shape Data. The prefixes can be set in diagrams options for Area Shape:
E.g. the above settings will take following effect in Shape Data:
As for other elements, the default attribute presentation settings for Area Shape can be overridden during Import Shape:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:94
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.12.2
Propagation of Attributes to Containing Shapes After attributes to propagate are specified and Area Shape is placed on drawing, any item dragged inside its limits will automatically receive default values defined in the Area. Any attributes not applicable for a particular type will be skipped. After the item is dragged out from the Area, its attributes controlled by the Area are cleared (set to default values). In both cases applicable messages are added to the message log. In addition, when the Area is defined in database, SCAREF of element represented by the shape dragged in/out is updated appropriately. In Diagrams Options, there is a setting to control how the application should behave when a user tries to change an attribute controlled by the Area Shape - ‘Allow to modify attributes of contained shapes’:
The setting can have the following values:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:95
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Ask user - the user is warned that the attribute being changed is governed by the Area and is asked to proceed or not:
•
Always allow - the change is always allowed without a warning
•
Never allow - the change is not allowed
Please note that changes done directly to the database are not controlled by this setting, for example, if the database is updated from functions such as the Command Line, Attributes Utility form, Customer defined PML forms etc. All differences between attributes controlled by the Area and the corresponding values of the contained shapes and also inconsistencies between value of SCAREF and the situation on drawing are reported by the Consistency Check function. The attribute values of contained shapes being different that corresponding ones in Area Shape can be updated using Update Containing Shapes command available from Area right mouse button menu.
4.13
Manual Component Selection
4.13.1
Overview By using the Catalogue Search function, it is possible to search through the catalogue and to assign catalogue references to the selected item(s). This is achieved by the following steps: 1. First select the item(s) in the drawing that should receive the new catalogue reference. 2. Second, make a selection in the Catalogue Search window. The Select command is available on the right click menus of the explorer and the result list as well as on a dedicated button in the bottom right of the window. Manual component selection behaves differently depending on the current setting of the Use specification default variable as shown below:
General Options - Pipe Dimensioning - Spec Search - Use Specification
General Options - Pipe Dimensioning - Spec Search - Use Specification
Specification
Spec selection
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:96
Result
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
True
False
False
Manual component selection can be done for SCOINS, SCEQUI, SCSUBE, SCCAB, SCMCAB, SCDUCT and SCHVFI.
True
Manual component selection can be done for elements listed above and also for SCINST, SCTUB, SCVALV and SCFITT.
Ignored
The same as above.
The Catalogue Search window is divided in two main parts. To the left is a pane that contains two tabs, Catalogue Explorer and Selection Tables, to the right there is a search result list. The Catalogue Search window will automatically navigate to the currently used catalogue item. This means that when a shape which has a SPREF pointing to a GPART or a TABITEM is selected in the drawing, the catalogue search will switch to the relevant tab and navigate to the currently selected catalogue item in the Catalogue Explorer, as well as in the result list. However, on slow computers this can cause a slight delay when shapes are selected. If this is the case, this behaviour can be turned off by setting the General options > Catalogue search settings > Configuration > Auto navigate to catalogue element setting in Diagrams Options to False.
4.13.2
Catalogue Explorer By selecting the Catalogue Explorer tab, the user can navigate through the GPART user defined hierarchy of the catalogue. In case the desired GPART can be identified already in the explorer, it is possible to right click and choose the Select command to assign the catalogue reference (SPREF) to the selected item(s) in the drawing. There is also a possibility to define and use filters to be applied to the search. When the Find button is clicked, the search result will be displayed in the result list pane to the right.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:97
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case default filters for shapes have been specified in Diagrams Options or in the Default Catalogue Search Filter (refer to Step 5: Default Catalogue Search Filter in Chapter Getting Started), the "== Use default filter from item ==" option will have to be selected for these to take effect. When a shape associated with a default filter is selected, and the "== Use default filter from item ==" is applied, as soon as the Find button is clicked, the associated filter will automatically be applied.
4.13.3
Defining Filters Below the explorer pane, there is a possibility to define or use filters to be applied to the search. By clicking the Define Filters link, the Define Filters dialogue is shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:98
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To define a new filter, click the New filter button and specify a name.
Below the Select Filter section, there is a Category line. If the Category checkbox is checked, the filter will include a category selection criteria. This means that when the filter is used, it will only search within the predefined category. As a default, the currently selected category in the GPART hierarchy explorer pane will be shown in the category textbox. In case the user wants to select another category, the Browse button (…) to the right can be used. If the Category checkbox is not checked, the filter will be defined as a generic filter, which can be applied to any category when used. When filters are used, it works as follows: •
If a filter including a category definition is used, the system will first navigate automatically to the defined category in the explorer and then apply the rest of the filter and make the search.
•
If a filter which does not include a category is used, the system will apply the filter to the category that is currently selected by the user in the explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:99
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Below the category line, a table of criteria statements can be defined for the filter. To add a new statement, simply click on the Attribute field to display a dropdown list of attributes. This list contains all attributes that have been defined using the Customize function and may include attributes from referenced elements.
Next click the Operator field and select an operator. Note that some operators are only applicable to certain data types, for instance the Like operator can only be applied to text string attributes.
Finally enter a criteria value in the Value field. When using the Like operator, wildcards can be specified using the asterisk (*) character.
To add another criteria statement, simply click on the next empty line which was automatically added when the first criteria statement was defined. In case more than one statement is used for a filter, there will be an implicit AND operator applied between statements. Finally click OK to create the filter and close the dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:100
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.13.4
Modifying, Renaming and Deleting Filters To modify an existing filter, click the Define Filters link to go the Define Filters dialogue. Then select the filter from the dropdown list and change the criteria statements. Unnecessary statements can be removed by first selecting the statement in the list and then clicking the Remove Statement button. Filters can be modified and removed by using the Rename and Delete buttons for the selected filter.
4.13.5
Using Filters To use a filter for a search, select it from the Filter dropdown box, and click the Find button to perform the search. In case the filter definition includes a category, the explorer will automatically navigate to this category when the filter is selected, and the search will be performed accordingly.
Filters are stored in the Windows registry of the local machine.
4.13.6
Selection Tables Selection Tables (available on the Selection Tables tab in the left pane), can be used to find catalogue items in a way similar to pipe specifications.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:101
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By making a selection in the Table and Type dropdown boxes and clicking the Find button, the table on the right hand side will be filled with a relevant selection of catalogue items represented by TABITE database elements. If the Auto select table and type from item checkbox is checked, the table and type dropdowns will automatically be set according to applicable default settings under General Options > Catalogue Search Settings in Diagrams Options or specified in step 5 of Import Shape Wizard. A selection table item can contain default values that will be applied to the shape when the catalogue reference is set, provided that the Apply default values to item checkbox is checked. This can be followed up in the Message Log where messages regarding assigned default attributes is provided.
4.13.7
Result List When a search has been performed, the result can be seen in the Result List. If the Catalogue Search tab has been used, the list will contain GPARTs, if Selection Tables have been used, it will show TABITEs.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:102
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To select a Catalogue Reference from the result list, you can either select the line in the list and click the Select button, or use the Select command in the right click menu on the item in the list. The columns shown in the result list can be changed by clicking the Customise link. This will show the Catalogue Search Result Presentation Settings dialogue. Note: The result list for GPARTs will automatically be filtered on the LSELEC attribute. This has to be true in order for the GPARTs to be shown in the result list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:103
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In this dialogue, the presentation label can be changed and it can be set up whether the attribute should be visible or not. By clicking the Referenced Attributes button, attributes from related elements can be shown. This dialogue works just like the same dialogue used for Attribute Presentation (refer to Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started). The result list can be presented in three different layouts, in order to provide as much space for data as possible. By right clicking in the list and selecting Horizontal Layout, Vertical Layout or Result list only the layout can be changed so that either as many rows and/or columns as possible can be shown. In the right click menu, commands are also available for showing or hiding the Grouping pane, Filters row and Summary line. For more information on how to use the grouping and filtering functions, please refer to the Getting Started with Plant documentation.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:104
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.14
Copying / Pasting Data Copy / Paste in diagrams can be executed in two ways: 1. Select the shapes, click CTRL and drag the selected shapes. When you drop the selection new shapes will be created. 2. Select shapes, click right mouse button on the selected shapes and execute the Copy option. Next click on the page and execute Paste from the context menu. Alternatively you can use the shortcut CTRL+C/ CTRL+V when the drawing is in an active window. Which attributes to be copied or not copied together with the shape can be set up using the Attribute Presentation function in Diagrams Options (please refer to Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started). Note: That this only applies when defined shapes are copied. There is also a possibility to copy and paste several attributes at the same time between existing shapes. This can be done by using the Copy Attributes and Paste Attributes commands in the Home Tab > Clipboard group. These will copy and paste all attributes that have been defined as copy with shape in Attribute Presentation. These can be used in the following way: 1. Select a single shape from which the attributes should be copied. 2. Use the Copy Attributes command. 3. Select one or more shapes of the same type as the one that you just copied from. 4. Use the Paste Attributes command. The result of the paste operation can be followed up in the message log, which will show a list of the attributes that have been pasted for each shape.
Note: It is the Copy with shape setting for the destination shape which will determine which attributes will be pasted. The Copy with shape setting for the source shape is not considered. Note: The Copy/Paste Attributes function only apply for DB defined attributes.
4.14.1 •
CTRL+DRAG General When this method for copying is chosen, Diagrams will try to define elements that can be created directly under SCGROUP (like SCEQUIPMENT, SCACTU but not SCTUBE, SCVALVE). The proper group will be taken according to the diagrams settings. Additionally, the application will create all items that were copied and can be created under previously created elements. For example, if selecting an SCEQUIPMENT and a properly connected SCNOZZLE, then after copy/paste the application will create a new SCEQUIPMENT and a
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:105
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
new SCNOZZLE. The attributes of the new elements will be set according to data in Shape Data (it can be determined which attributes will be copied – see diagrams settings for more details). This method will not create items like branches, pipelines segments and inline elements. All tubes, valves etc. that were copied will become undefined. The items can be defined afterwards to create new branches, but the created database structure might be different than for the original items that were copied. This way of copying is very similar to dragging and dropping from a stencil.
4.14.2 •
Copying and Pasting (CTRL+C > CTRL+V) General This way of copying items copies shapes on a drawing together with its database structure. When pasting the data, Diagrams will define the elements automatically. All shapes that were valid in the database during copy will be stored in the windows clipboard with extra information about database structure. The most important differences between Copying and Pasting and copying using CTRL+DRAG are: •
All valid items that were copied can be created with the same database group hierarchy, or according to the hierarchy defined in Session Defaults. See Copy-paste options.
•
In some special cases it might not be possible to restore the same structure - see Partial copy.
•
Any attribute values for the shape are copied from the database rather than the source shape. Normally these should be the same, but if they still differ then the database value is used.
•
Behaviour when copying/pasting two or more items that point to the same database element, for example when selecting two equipment shapes that points to the same database element (primary and secondary):
•
•
When using CTRL+DRAG technique (for each shape) then the application will ask for decision twice whether it should create a secondary shape or a new db element. This means that it’s not possible to create a new equipment item with two shapes representation.
•
However, when using CTRL+C/CTRL+V, then the application asks only once. This means that it’s possible to create a new database element with two shapes representation, but it will not be possible to create new database objects for each shape which is possible using CTRL+DRAG.
Copy-paste sub-equipment items. In Figure 4:44.: Two equipment items with two subequipment items in database, there are three items selected. •
When copy and paste using CTRL+DRAG a new equipment item with two subequipment items below will be created. Figure 4:45.: Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+DRAG technique.
•
When copying items using CTRL+C/CTRL+V a new equipment item will be created with one sub-equipment below. The second sub-equipment will be undefined. The application is checking if the true owner for Sub-Equipment_B was copied or not. Figure 4:46.: Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+C/CTRL+V technique.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:106
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:44. Two equipment items with two sub-equipment items in database
Figure 4:45. Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+DRAG technique
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:107
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:46. Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+C/CTRL+V technique
•
Copy/Paste Options Diagrams has a few options related to Copy and Paste.
Figure 4:47. The copy paste options that can be user changed
-
Destination Group hierarchy Items can be copied and pasted with the same group hierarchy. Basically, when copying equipment that is located in DB like on Figure 4:48.: Sample database structure. Next paste it, then the result can look like on Figure 4:49.: Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from image 5 when source group are kept (“Use existing groups” has to be disabled). Alternatively, new elements can be defined according to diagrams settings.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:108
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:48. Sample database structure
Figure 4:49. Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from image 5 when source group are kept
Figure 4:50. Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from the previous image when diagrams settings determine items owning group
Possible values are: •
Same as source groups – the system will try to create the same group hierarchy structure that the copied items had when they were copied
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:109
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Use session defaults– items are created under groups as defined by the session defaults.
•
Ask – the system will ask if items should be created according to settings or if it should create the group hierarchy from the source.
Note: The groups are created, not copied from the source data. If the system is not able to create the copied items in the DB, then the empty groups will not be created either. -
Use Existing Line In some cases copy and paste of a whole pipeline in one go might not be possible because it can be located on several drawing or pages. When this option is enabled, Diagrams will check if the database contains a line with the same name (it can be different UDET types, only base type must be the same). If a line with the same name exists, then all branches will be created under the existing line. When the option is disabled, a new line will be always created. Possible values are: •
Always – Branches will always be created under existing lines with the same name as in source model. If there is no line with the same name, new lines will be created.
•
Never – system will create new lines and define new branches under them.
•
Ask – each time, before creating a new line it checks if there exist lines with the same name. If existing, a dialog message will be displayed, asking if as new line should be created.
Note: This option will work properly only when line names are set correctly. Please see the “Elements name” section below for naming behaviour during Copy/Paste. -
Use Existing OPC Off page connectors can connect two segments, branches or lines that are located on different drawings/pages. Because of that it might not be possible to copy the whole structure in one go. If we consider the simple case, when it is possible to select connected items, the database structure and connections will be identical (see images below):
Figure 4:51. Two segments in one branch selected on drawing
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:110
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:52. Database structure and drawing layout after copy-paste items from the previous image
However, in most cases it is not possible to copy both OPCI and OPCO at the same time, since they usually are on different pages or diagrams. When copying and pasting OPC’s individually, a new branch will be created for the first OPC, and the system may ask about existing lines for the second OPC. See image below.
Figure 4:53. Database structure and drawing layout when copying items in two steps
The connection will be established only when the database contains items with the same name and type that were connected to copied OPC (only base type match is required). Moreover, the existing item has to have OPCREF free and branches (pasted and existing) has to have proper ends free (HREF/TREF unset, depends on OPC type). Note: This option will work properly only when OPC names are set correctly. Naming behaviour described below. Note: This functionality will be mostly useful when data copied between two different databases. In case if copy and paste in the same MDB then system will not connect offline instruments because existing item will be already connected (unless user disconnected it before paste).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:111
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
-
Use Existing Groups This setting is valid only when user set “Destination group hierarchy” setting to “Same as source groups”. It determines whether items should be created under new groups or under existing one with the same name (the actual type is not obligatory, only base type must be the same). I.E. When user copy equipment “EQUI_1” that is defined under “GROUP_1” from project “A” to project “B” then in project “B” new SCGROUP will be created with the same name (if auto name is disabled, see “Elements Name”). Next user copy “EQUI_2” that was defined under “GROUP_1” from project “A” to project “B” (situation in project A is presented on image 11). Depends on this option, system can create new group with default name and define “EQUI_2” under it, or system can use existing group as owner for pasted equipment (see below images).
Figure 4:54. Two equipment items defined under the same group in project A
Figure 4:55. Project B, Equipment 2 was pasted with disabled “Use existing group” option
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:112
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:56. Project B, Equipment 2 was pasted with enabled “Use existing group” option
Possible values:
•
•
Always – system will create items under existing groups if its names will be the same.
•
Never – system will create new group structure – exactly the same as in source data that was copied
•
Ask – each time, before system creates new groups it checks if in database exist group with the same name. If exist, system will display dialog message, then user can decide whether existing group should be used or not.
Elements Name If auto naming is enabled then all items will be renamed using auto name rules. When auto naming is disabled and data copied between two different projects, then the system will try to set copied item names. If the name is already in use then a warning message will appear. In some cases it is required that the parent object exists for naming to work correctly. For example, if copying a pipeline in two steps from one project to another, and using auto naming, then the newly created line can have different name than the original one because the naming rule might be different. As a result, when copying a second part of the pipeline and pasting it to the second project, a new line will be created because there is no pipeline with the same name defined. It might be also that when copying and pasting the first part of your pipeline, the database already contains a pipeline with the same name. In this case the copied branches will be created under the existing pipeline.
•
Attributes The attributes will be set according to the Attribute presentation settings in Diagrams Options. Attributes that are marked as read only or not marked as “copy with shape” will not be set. If two shapes that points to the same element in database are copied, for example primary and secondary equipment items, it might be that one shape inherited settings from its master but the second one depends on diagrams settings. If there is a conflict in the attribute presentation rules for these shapes, then the attribute will not be copied.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:113
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If attributes cannot be set during copy-paste, warning messages will be displayed, except for the following situations:
•
•
Attribute cannot be set due to definition rules or data access.
•
Attribute is defined as “read only”
•
Attribute is set as not to be copied with shape
Referenced Attributes There are two kinds of referenced attributes: •
Attributes like SPREF, SCLORE etc. that are pointing to other element to get some extra information from them, or where the item is part of for example a system or loop. These attributes will be set if it will be possible.
•
For example, when copying equipment that has SCLORE set to LOOP1 from project MAR to CCH then SCLORE of equipment will be set if LOOP1 exist in CCH. If the attribute can’t be set, then a message will be shown in the message log.
•
Attributes like SCIREF, CRFA etc. that are pointing to other elements because they are connected. These attributes will be set only if connected items were copied together. The paste function will try to set these attributes even when they are set as read only or “copy with shape” is disabled. If the connection cannot be established, a message will be shown in the message log.
Note: SCIRTY attribute will be updated according to SCIREF.
•
Partial Copy Sometimes only a few items from a whole structure are copied. An example is shown below.
There are two equipment items and one branch. When selecting everything except valve and copy this, it will be impossible to recreate the same structure after paste.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:114
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The copy/paste operation creates two branches instead of one. Each time items are copied where branches or segments have to be reorganized, a message will be displayed in the message log.
•
Copying Items without Parent In some occasions, nozzles or electrical connections are copied without its owning element. In these cases the pasted objects will not be defined in the database, since they don’t have any owning element. A warning message will be displayed in the message log. They can afterwards be connected to an equipment, and will then become defined in the database. However, sub-equipment items do not need that connection to be defined, but they require valid equipment as the owner. Because of this, it is possible to copy and paste subequipment items as defined object without copying equipment owners. There is only one restriction, only sub-equipment items are copied and CE has to be equipment when paste executed. This CE will be owner for copied sub-equipment items.
•
Copying Undefined Items Items that were not valid in DB during copy will have the same rules like copying using CTRL+DRAG. For example, when copying two equipment items, one valid and one invalid in DB, then after paste both items will be defined if possible. The defined one will be created according to settings for default group/source group, and its attributes will be the same as in database item. The second item will be created in default group or under the group where current element is located, and its attributes will be set according to Shape Data.
•
Messages in the Message Log During copy paste, messages will be displayed in the message log, informing about the copy paste result. Below is a list of possible messages with explanation.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:115
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Text displayed in SML
Description when message is displayed
Severity
The attribute does not exist in the current project.
Will be displayed each time when source application does not contain that kind of attribute. I.e. MAR project has defined some UDA but SAM project does not have them. Because of that, these UDA's will not be set when copy-paste from MAR to SAM project.
Warning
The attribute can not be updated because the element is not of type . Type of element is .
An example of this message can look like "The attribute HREF can not be set because element is not SCBRAN, SCSEG type. Type of element is SCCABLE". This kind of messages should never be displayed, unless something changed in the database, for example if pasting copied data into older database versions. Message will be displayed only for referenced attributes that are responsible for connections (like CRFA, ECRFA but not SCLORE).
Warning
This is not a SCSEGMENT nor SCBRANCH and you are trying to set HREF. IsTypeValid() method failed!
System error message. This should not occur under normal circumstances.
Warning
This is not a SCSEGMENT nor SCBRANCH and you are trying to set TREF. IsTypeValid() method failed!
System error message. This should not occur under normal circumstances.
Warning
of branch not set because the connected item does not exist.
Message when HREF or TREF cannot be set because item that was connected in source does not exist in destination. Typically, when a branch is connected to equipment but during copy user copied equipment and branch without tube that was connected to equipment (partial copy) system cannot set HREF/TREF because in destination branch is not connected to equipment (there is no tube)
Warning
can not be set because the connected item was not copied. Missing: <missing part name/refnum>
HREF/TREF/STAREF/ENREF can not be set because the item that attribute points to was not copied
Warning
can not be set because connected item is not valid in database.
HREF/TREF/STAREF/ENREF can not be set because the item that attribute points to was copied but for some reason is not valid in DB (there supposed to be different message that explain why item is not valid)
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:116
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
can not be changed because the database element that shape points to already has this attribute set. Database value is , while the value in the drawing is .
When copying a cable or multi cable the pasted item has been selected to be secondary. The existing primary item has STAREF/ENDREF already set.
Warning
The has been updated according to drawing connection.
When copying a cable or multi cable the pasted item has been selected to be secondary. The existing primary item didn’t have STAREF/ENDREF already set. They have been updated according to the pasted item.
Information
can not be set because this item is not connected with <element name> on the drawing
In case STAREF/ENDREF is not connected on drawing, this message will be displayed. Typically it might happen when equipment is connected with primary cable representation. The cable also has secondary shape representation that is not connected with the equipment. When copying and pasting equipment and secondary cable representation then it will not be possible to set the attribute because items are not connected on the drawing.
Warning
The nozzle does not have the required PIPE_1 connection point. CREF attribute is not set.
A nozzle shape was copied that was not properly defined on drawing. The connection point could not be found.
Warning
The connection between nozzle and branch can not be copied because the item is not connected to a valid branch!
This is displayed when the nozzle connection will not be connected in the destination but was in source. For example if an equipment and nozzle were copied without connected branch (or branch is connected but is not valid).
Warning
Could not copy because there are no valid connections.
The message will be displayed when copying and pasting an item with CRFA/ECRFA set. For example, a valve in the source has CRFA set (meaning that the valve has a branching point connected to some branch) but was copied without connected branch.
Warning
One of the referenced items can not be set. Item is not connected, missing element
CRFA and ECRFA are arrays, it might be that a valve with two branching points connected is copied, for example a cross, but it was copied only with one branch. In the result in destination there will be a cross with only one branch connected.
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:117
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The ECRFA maximum size was reached. Some items can not be connected.
The ECRFA size is constant. Some items like equipment might be a secondary. In case an equipment with connected branches is copied and chosen to be secondary during paste, then the ECRFA array will be extended with the new connections. It might be that this operation will cause too many connected branches – then this message is displayed.
Warning
The attribute can not be set because the referenced element {1} does not exist in current MDB
Message will be displayed if referenced attribute is not valid in the destination project. For example if copying an equipment that refers to some systems and pasting it to a project where one or more of these systems doesn’t exist.
Warning
OPCREF can not be set because of missing connected OPCI/O
Message displayed when OPCREF can not be set because connected OPCI/O was not copied
Warning
OPCREF can not be set. The connected OPCI/O was copied but it is invalid
Message displayed when OPCREF can not be set because OPCI/O was copied but for some reason it is undefined. It might happen if creating a branch under existing pipelines and one of pipelines belong to database that is read only. Because of that, the item will be pasted but will be undefined.
Warning
Failed to copy SCIRTY because the SCIRTY table has different size than SCIREF table. All values have been set to NONE
In case if SCIRTY has different size than SCIREF then properly setting this array is not possible. Because of that SCIRTY will be reset. This should not normally happen, but it might be that attributes were changed outside of Diagrams or manually in PML.
Warning
The database does not contain UDET type. The base type will be used.
Displayed when copying a UDET and pasting it in a destination project where this UDET has no definition. In the result base type will be used.
Warning
The object type does not exist in db definition for, failed to create item.
Displayed when the database type of the copied item, that exists in source project does not exist in the destination project.
Warning
There is no schematic DB where the item can be created
The destination project doesn’t have any available Schematics database, or it is read-only.
Warning
Failed creating item because its owner was not created.
Items like Elconns or Nozzles are copied without their owning elements. This will result in the items becoming undefined.
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:118
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Failed to get default group for {0} from CE. Item was not created.
Displayed when the Session Defaults option “Get Default Group from CE” is used, but the group could not be fetched. This can for example happen if the current element is the “World” element.
Warning
Failed to get default group for {0}. Item was not created!
Displayed when no default group for an element type is defined in Session Defaults.
Warning
Can not create item in database because the subequipment is copied without its owner. Either copy the subequipment separately and paste it with the parent equipment item as CE, or copy this item together with its equipment parent.
When user is coping sub-equipment items without its owner, it is possible that they will be created in db. However, there is restriction that CE has to be equipment (or one of the CE parent is an equipment) and only subequipment items were copied. In case mixed types are copied and sub-equipment items are copied without the parent, then this message will be displayed.
Warning
Can not create subequipment in database because CE is not an equipment. Please set CE to equipment or its member, or copy this item together with its equipment parent.
Displayed when sub-equipment items are copied but CE is not an equipment or an equipment member.
Warning
Some of the segments were copied partially, and the copied data structure was reorganized. When pasting, the newly created data structure will be different than the copied one
This message might be displayed during copy action when copying only a few items from branch. Example: There is a branch that contains tube1, valve1, tube2, valve2. If selecting valve1 and valve2 and executing copy/paste, then this message will be displayed because when paste, the structure has to be changed. Two branches have to be created instead of one. However, if selecting valve1, tube2 and valve2 the message will not be displayed because the branch structure will be the same.
Information
Name should not contain spaces. Evaluated name "" contains spaces.
Error from auto naming. Displayed when auto name rule is wrongly set so that name contains spaces.
Warning
Name already exists.
Error from auto naming. Displayed when auto name rule creates name that already is in use.
Warning
The item was supposed to be copied but the DBElem is not valid!
Critical error that can appear when during paste action another thread/process change pasted database elements.
Critical
The shape can not be linked with database element.
Displayed if it is not possible to establish connection between database element and the shape.
Critical
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:119
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The database attribute '' is not valid for this element.
Displayed when an attribute is valid in the database but the element does not have this attribute. A typical case might be when some UDA is defined in both source and destination projects, but in project A this UDA is assigned to SCOINST and SCEQUI but in project B it is assigned to SCEQUI only. When copying SCOINST from project A where the UDA has value set and paste it to project B, it will not be able to set the attribute.
Warning
Paste action failed. Items might be defined incorrectly
Paste action failed. There is high probability that another error message precedes this message.
Critical
The auto naming of elements failed. Exception message
Auto naming failed. Probably some rules are incorrectly defined or some elements do not have all attributes set that naming rule requires.
Warning
4.15
Primary / Secondary Shapes
4.15.1
Overview Diagrams supports a Primary/Secondary shapes concept. This allows a single item in the database to be represented by several shapes in diagrams. The shapes can exist in the same page, on another page in the same diagram or on different diagrams. A good example of this are equipment items to which several systems are connected, such as the main engine. Even if the main engine will be represented on all the related systems' diagrams, it can still be a single item in the database. In some cases the main responsibility for an equipment item lies with a certain design team or system design group while it needs to be accessible to other teams for connecting other systems to it. To support this way of working, shapes can be considered Primary or Secondary, and different rules and restrictions can be applied to these categories. We can distinguish two groups of secondary elements: 1. The non-inline elements: •
Equipment items
•
Sub-equipment items
•
Cables
•
Multi cables
•
Actuators
•
Offline instruments
•
Nozzles
•
Electrical connections
•
Area shapes
The system allows 0-n primary shapes and 0-n secondary shapes for a certain non-inline element in the database. This means that the shapes corresponding to a certain DB element might be all primary, all secondary or a mix of primary and secondary. For example, if an equipment shape is deleted while keeping the corresponding DB item, and later a new shape is created referring to the same DB item, the new shape will be secondary even if no primary shape exists. This kind of situation is not handled
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:120
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
automatically by the system. It is however possible for the user to manually change the IsPrimary flag in the shape data window. 2. The inline elements (elements that can be created under the branch's segment) •
Valves
•
Fittings
•
HVAC fittings
•
Inline instruments
•
Off page connectors (incoming/outgoing)
•
Pipe destinations
•
Tubes
•
Ducts
In contrast to the elements from the first group, the system allows only one primary shape and 0-n secondary shapes for an element in the database. It is not allowed to change the primary status for these shapes. This means that the primary shape will always be primary and the secondary shape will always be secondary. Deleting the secondary shape will never remove the element from the database, but deleting the primary one will always remove it. Secondary shapes can be created in two main ways: •
By changing the name into an already existing name.
•
By copying and pasting shapes in the drawing.
Note: The usage of Primary/Secondary shapes for certain combinations of main items having subitems and/or connected cables or pipes involves a complex behaviour and can give results that were not expected by the user. When using the Primary/ Secondary shapes for such combinations, it is important that the user understands all implications of his/her actions.
4.15.2
Creating Secondary Shapes by Changing Name When a shape of one of the above listed types is dropped on to the drawing, this shape will automatically be considered a Primary shape. You can create a secondary shape representation of the database element by changing its name in the Shape Data window. This behaviour depends on the default settings, please refer to section Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes. Because of the database structure, inline elements are created differently from non-inline elements. Create secondary shape by name change of an inline shape: 1. Drag and drop a symbol of a piping or valve inline component from a stencil onto the drawing canvas. The symbol will not be defined.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:121
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
2. Change the name of the undefined and unconnected symbol to the name of an existing item of the same type.
3. The application prompts the user with a dialog box informing that the item already exists and asks if a secondary shape should be created:
Click Yes and the shape will then refer to the existing item in the database, the name should be manually entered, and it will be made into a secondary shape. Create secondary shape by name change of an non-inline shape: The user can create a secondary non-inline element using the same technique as for inline elements. However, a non-inline element has to be defined and may be connected to other elements. If the user decides to create a secondary shape representation, he may be asked for confirmation of deletion from the database of the original item created when the shape was
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:122
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
dropped (depending on the setting). Please see Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
If the original database item contains some subordinate Electrical Connection Elements or Nozzles, a dialog is shown asking if these should be copied into the existing item is having the new name entered manually. When the element is connected to other items, the system behaves differently depending on the type of connected element. Please refer to the table below for more information. Note: (EXISTING_ITEM" - element that already exist in DB, "CURRENT_ITEM" element where name is changed) “The already existing item in the database”
“The shape on the drawing that is being modified”
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:123
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Situation on drawing
Description
Behaviour
EXISTING_ITEM The already existing item in the database. CURRENT_ITEM The shape on the drawing that is being modified. 1.
The Equipment contains an electrical connection. The Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The EQUIPMENT name is changed manually. In a dialog the user is asked if the connected electrical connection should be moved to the already existing item in the database. The answer is NO.
The following behaviour occurs: 1. The electrical connection will be undefined. 2. The cable will be disconnected from the electrical connection on the drawing. 3. The cable will be disconnected in the database.
(If the answer is YES the system moves the elconns to the destination element without disconnecting cables. The same behaviour is for nozzles) The Equipment contains an electrical connection and the Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The Electrical connection name is changed manually.
The following behaviour occurs: 1. A change to secondary will be possible only if the already existing item in the database has the same owner as the shape on the drawing that is being modified. 2. Cable will be disconnected on drawing. 3. Cable will be disconnected in DB.
The Equipment contains a electrical connection. The Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The cable name is changed manually.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:124
1. The cable will be disconnected on the drawing. 2. The cable will be disconnected in the database.
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Equipment is connected to a cable. The Equipment name is changed manually.
The Equipment is connected to a cable. The cable name is changed manually.
The Equipment contains a nozzle. The nozzle is connected to a branch. The Equipment name is changed manually.
1. The cable disconnected drawing.
will on
be the
2. The Cable disconnected database.
will in
be the
1. The Cable disconnected drawing.
will on
be the
2. The Cable disconnected database.
will in
be the
In a dialog the user is asked if the connected nozzles should be moved to the already existing item in the database. The answer is NO. 1. The Nozzle shape will be undefined. 2. The Branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
3. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by the secondary shape). The Equipment contains a nozzle. The nozzle is connected to a branch. The Nozzle name is changed manually.
1. The Nozzle element will be transformed to secondary only if the already existing item in the database has the same owner as the shape on the drawing that is being modified. 2. The branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
3. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by secondary shape).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:125
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Equipment is connected to a branch. The Equipment name is changed manually.
1. The Branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
2. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by secondary shape). The Actuator is connected to an inline element. The Actuator name is changed manually.
1. The shape on the drawing that is being modified removes connection to valve. 2. The Actuator shape will be disconnected on the drawing.
The Actuator is connected to an inline element by a relationship shape. The Actuator name is changed manually.
1. The shape on the drawing that is being modified removes connection to valve. 2. The Relationship shape will be disconnected from the Actuator and will be undefined.
The system also enforces some restrictions on secondary shape handling for hierarchically subordinate items such as sub-equipment and electrical connection elements. For example, it is not allowed to have secondary electrical connection elements referring to a DB item owned by a different equipment item than the one that the electrical connection element is connected to on the current drawing. This is described in more detail under Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
4.15.3
Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste Secondary shapes can also be created by copying and pasting shapes in or between drawings. When a shape is being pasted, the system checks if it contains a name of a DB element. If that DB element already exists, a dialog is shown. For electrical connections and nozzle elements, no separate dialog is shown and the response is taken from the parent equipment item. This behaviour depends on the default settings. Refer to Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
•
Copy with CTRL+DRAG Also, copying by the CTRL+DRAG technique it is possible to create secondary objects for the following shapes: •
Equipment
•
Sub-equipment
•
Electrical connection elements
•
Cables
•
Multi-cables
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:126
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
•
Area Shapes
Copy/Paste with CTRL+C and CTRL+V
Using this technique it is possible to create secondary objects for all inline and non-inline elements. To achieve this, user has to select shapes on drawing and copy it to clipboard. Next, user has to paste it into the same or different drawing. If all elements can be created as secondary, user is prompted by dialog message as in the picture below (depends on settings).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:127
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the Secondary button is clicked, all shapes become secondary representations of the copied structure.
Note: That if it is not possible to create the secondary elements (because of at least one database element missing), the system tries to create a new structure in the database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:128
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.15.4
Viewing and Changing Primary/Secondary Status The Primary/Secondary status of a shape can be seen by having a look at the IsPrimaryShape attribute in Shape Data or the Item List. It is also possible to change the Primary/Secondary status for a certain shape by using the dropdown list. Auto Formatting rules can be used to localise all secondary shapes. To achieve this, a new rule has to be created under the formatting rules and a Visio Shape Condition has to be set. An example can be seen in the picture below.
4.15.5
Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes A set of default settings available in Diagrams Options controls how primary and secondary shapes will behave regarding creation, updates of attributes and deletion of the shape. These can be found under the respective element options. For instance for equipment items, the settings can be found under Element Options > Equipment Options. The settings are as follows: Default setting
Value
Description
Deleting a primary shape
Ask user
When a primary shape is deleted, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be deleted or not.
Always delete DB item
When a primary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is always also deleted without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never delete DB item
When a primary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is never deleted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:129
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Deleting a secondary shape
Modifying attributes secondary shape
of
Creating secondary shapes on Paste
Creating secondary shapes on Name Change
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Ask user
When a secondary shape is deleted, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be deleted or not.
Always delete DB item
When a secondary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is always also deleted without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never delete DB item
When a secondary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is never deleted.
Ask user
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be updated or not.
Always allow
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the corresponding DB element is always also updated without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never allow
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the corresponding DB element is never updated. The user will receive an error message.
Ask user
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, the user is asked whether to create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB or not.
Always create secondary shape
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, always create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB.
Never create secondary shape
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, blank the name and never create a secondary shape. A new item will be created in the DB.
Ask user
When the name of a shape is changed to the name of an existing item in the database, the user is asked whether to create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB or not.
Always create secondary shape
When the name of a shape is changed to the name of an existing item in the database, always create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB.
Never create secondary shape
It will not be allowed to change the name to the same name as an existing item in the database.
4:130
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is also certain behaviour related to subitems and connected items. This behaviour is described in the table below. In case of secondary shape creation through name change, the DB item that the shape was referring to before it was assigned to another one is referred to as the Source item. The DB item that the shape will be linked to after the creation is referred to as the Destination item. Method
Action
Behaviour
Copy/Paste
Creating secondary shapes for equipment where the source DB item has got subequipment.
No special handling. The source subequipment items will always be kept.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source item has got electrical connection/nozzles items.
The electrical connection/nozzle items will be copied and the electrical connection/nozzle shapes will be made secondary shapes (CTRL+C->CTRL-V, CTRL+DRAG does not support secondary nozzle creation).
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source DB item has got nozzles
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source DB item has connected cables
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment having connected pipes
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment having connected HVACs
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Copy/Paste of an elconn/ nozzle.
It is possible to create a secondary elcon/nozzle without its parent using the CTRL+C->CTRL-V short command. When using the CTRL+DRAG command, the new elconn/nozzle will be created. When copying multiple shapes including equipment items and elconns/ nozzles, the elconn/nozzle always inherits the answer from its parent. Note: When CTRL+DRAG is used, a new nozzle is always created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:131
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Method
Action
Behaviour
Copy/Paste of multiple shapes having mixed item types.
When multiple shapes of different kinds are copied and pasted, the system will behave differently depending on the kinds of items that have been selected. This is fairly complicated and is therefore not recommended unless the user knows exactly what he/she is doing. If the user for instance has selected a few equipment items and a few subequipment items and these items contain elconns, all elconns will be added to their parents as primary/ secondary - depending on the answer from the parent.
•
Behaviour and Limitations of Secondary Shapes for Inline Items The secondary shapes for inline types will show a different behaviour to other kinds of secondary shapes: •
It is not possible to delete the DB item by deleting a secondary shape. If you delete the secondary shape for an inline item, only the shape will disappear. This also means that there is no setting for Deleting a primary shape and Deleting a secondary shape for these types in Diagrams Options.
•
The setting Creating secondary shapes on Paste is located in the Pipeline options, Instrumentation line options and HVAC line options instead of in each inline element options. This setting affects all inline elements defined under HVAC, Pipeline or Instrument line.
•
Settings: Modifying attributes of secondary shape and Creating secondary shapes on Name Change for tubes duct are located under the Pipeline, Instrument and HVAC lines options. Other inline elements, like valves or fittings, have these settings located under their own options.
•
If a secondary shape is copied and pasted without its primary structure, the element will not be defined and the user will be notified by a message in the Message Log.
•
It is not possible to make any pipe/HVAC connections to a secondary shape. However, it is possible to connect offline instruments or actuators.
•
It is not allowed for any operation that might change the database pipeline/HVAC line connection structure (like join, split, reverse branch, insert valve into structure etc.)
•
If refit/resize or propagation of SCLORE will be executed on a secondary shape and the structure is a segment that ends with OPCO, the system will continue propagation only if it finds the primary OPCI.
•
The DIAGREF/PAGEREF attribute of segment is not updated when a secondary shape is created.
•
When secondary shapes for more than one shape have been created, e.g. for a whole branch or part of a branch, then these secondary shapes will subsequently be handled as a group: •
It will not be possible to disconnect them from each other.
•
It will not be possible to delete just one of them, the whole group has to be deleted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:132
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Equipment and Sub-equipment Copy and Paste Summary The following examples will explain the logic in the function for copying and pasting equipment and sub-equipment. Note: This is only valid when using Ctrl+Drag. Example 1: The diagram below has got two equipments with sub-equipments. When they are copied and pasted, the sub equipments will be copied together with the equipment. New database items will be created for them.
Example 2: Now the diagram has one equipment with a secondary shape and two sub-equipments.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:133
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When this group of shapes is marked and copied and pasted, the system will ask if new database items should be created for each shape, or if they should become secondary shapes. This question is asked for each shape.
If new database items are chosen, the system will create two new equipments, making the secondary shape become an individual equipment item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:134
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When creating the database items for the sub equipment, the ownership of the sub equipment is determined by proximity. In this example, sub equipment Equipment-002-Sub001 is owned by Equipment-002 because it is positioned closest to that equipment shape. For the same reason Equipment-003-Sub-001 is owned by Equipment-003 because it is closer to that equipment than to Equipment-002. If both sub equipments are closer to one of the equipment shapes than the other, they will both be owned by this equipment:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:135
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In this case, both sub equipments are owned by Equipment-002.
4.15.6
Deleting Primary/Secondary Shapes Deleting Non-inline Elements: The system does not include any automatic management of primary/secondary status when shapes are deleted. This means that if a primary shape is deleted, leaving the DB element, it can happen that only secondary shapes are left for that item. If this is not a preferred situation, one of the secondary shapes will have to be upgraded to a primary by changing the status of the IsPrimaryShape attribute. In case the DB element has also been deleted, this will be detected and reported by the consistency check operation for the secondary shapes. Deleting inline elements: Deleting secondary inline shapes will not remove the database element. Only when deleting the primary shape. If the user tries to delete the secondary inline element that is connected to other inline items (is inside group) then the operation will be cancelled.
The whole group needs to be selected and deleted.
4.15.7
Finding All Shapes Referring to a Certain DB Element To find out which drawings contain shapes that references a certain DB element, the Open Diagram function can be used. This is for instance available by right clicking on the element in the Schematic Explorer. In case the element only exists on a single drawing, this drawing will be opened. If it occurs on several drawings, a list will be displayed. When a drawing has been opened, the Find in Drawing Toolbar can be used to find all instances of the DB element within that drawing.
4.16
Unassigned Items Unassigned Items are database items that exist in the Schematic database but do not currently exist on any diagram. These can for example originate from AVEVA Engineering via Compare/Update, or created using Excel import.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:136
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.16.1
Assign to Database Element A Visio symbol can be created and connected to an existing database element using the following procedure: 1. Select the desired database element as ‘current element’. 2. Hold down the Shift key. 3. Drag and drop the Visio symbol from the stencil to the drawing area. The Visio shape is assigned to the existing database element only when: 1. The master shape is of the same type as the database element, for example SCEQUIPMENT db element corresponding to an Equipment shape. 2. There is no currently selected database element on any drawing yet. When a database element is assigned to a symbol an information message will be displayed in the message log informing that the shape has been linked to the existing database element. If it is not possible to do assign an error message will be displayed and the dropped symbol will be removed from the drawing automatically.
4.16.2
Elements to be Dropped There are three types of elements that can be dropped onto a drawing; 1. None inline elements that can exist alone on a drawing (like Equipment, Subequipment, Actuators, Offline elements, Area etc.). When a master shape is dropped from a stencil the currently selected database element will be linked to the Visio shape. 2. Nozzles and Electrical Connections. It is only possible to drop electrical connections and nozzles symbols if they are dropped on the shapes of the owning elements, for example a nozzle can only be dropped on an Equipment shape. See figure below.
3. Inline elements. It is possible to drop inline symbols and build segments. To achieve this parts of the segment has to be dropped one by one from the stencil and connected on the drawing by dropping them on the connecting parts, see figures below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:137
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
After connecting a shape with the unassigned item Current Element will automatically be set to the next unassigned element in the branch. If one part of the segment is already on the drawing it will not be possible to continue with the same segment on another page or drawing. Elements have to be dropped one by one and have to be connected, or if it is a component to component connection they have to be dropped closely enough so that they can be auto connected, see figure below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:138
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When connecting a shape to a branch, arrive and leave will be automatically adjusted to the flow direction. If the shape is a one-way component, then it will be rotated according to the flow.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:139
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.17
Using Background Drawings
4.17.1
Import CAD Drawing Diagrams relies on the standard Visio function Import CAD Drawing for importing background drawings. This means that the process is the following: 1. Export the background drawing from Marine Drafting using the Export > DXF function, having a format that is compatible with the used MS Visio version, for stance R12 DXF*. 1. Import the drawing using the Insert Tab > Illustration > CAD Drawing command in Diagrams. *As the support for drawing formats and versions changes with new releases of Marine Drafting and MS Visio, it is recommended that the user will make some tests and investigations using their current program versions to determine which format and version will provide the best results. For more information about the Import CAD Drawing function, please refer to the MS Visio documentation.
4.17.2
Intelligent Background Page The Intelligent Background Page feature allows the import of drafting drawings as a background page. To achieve this open the Visio drawing and choose the Insert Tab > Illustration> Intelligent Background command.
To display a drawing select one in the left hand side window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:140
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Click the Options button to select Import Options and Imported View Types.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:141
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When importing a view from Marine Drafting the basic position of the view can be chosen in the Import Options dialog. There are three possibilities: •
Original
•
Center
•
Fit
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:142
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
After import, the view shape position is locked for modifications. Each imported view gets an extra right-click menu option called Lock. By default this is checked so the view cannot be moved. By unchecking it, the view can be flipped, moved, rotated and scaled. After editing the view, it can again be locked to avoid accidental modifications.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:143
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: That any items located on the foreground page (equipments etc) that had their position set before the view shape movement, will not be automatically updated after the view has been moved or resized. They will need to be manually updated.
4.18
Setting an Initial 3D Position
4.18.1
Overview Diagrams supports a 3D Position (POS) attribute for relevant schematic database elements. This position is independent of the 3D position of any related 3D elements. This can be handled in different ways using the Schematic 3D Integrator. It is for instance possible to copy the initial 3D position given for the schematic element to the corresponding 3D element during the build process. Please refer to the Schematic 3D Integrator User Guide for more details.
4.19
P&ID Grid Definition Diagrams supports localisation of symbols on a diagram within the AVEVA Diagrams application according to grid definition.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:144
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.1
P&ID Grid Definition File The file griddef.xml contains the definition of the gridding for a project. It should be located into your "DFLTS\Diagrams\" project directory. If the file for some reason could not be found, the system will try to load it from the "PDMSDFLTS\Diagrams\" location. If there is no file, the system will try to load it from the folder where the application executable file is located. The file in the executable folder should be delivered together with your Diagrams installation. If the file does not get loaded, an error message will be displayed in the console window (the Diagrams application additionally displays this information in the message log.)
The definition file consists of two paths: one for X and one for Y. Both of them contain a series of tags defined by a min/max value and a name value. Example:
<Path type="X"> <Min>20 <Max>120 <Min>120 <Max>220 … … … <Path type="Y"> <Min>10 <Max>110 <Min>110 <Max>210 … … …
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:145
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.2
Grid Position Attributes Items that can be localized have four attributes as shown below: Attribute Name
Type
Description
DIAGXPOS
Real
The X position of the symbol on Visio drawing stored in mm. The default value is 0.0001. This means that the position is not set. (For old items it will be 0).
DIAGYPOS
Real
The Y position of the symbol on Visio drawing stored in mm. The default value is 0.0001. This means that the position is not set. (For old items it will be 0)
GRIDXPOS
String
The X position of the symbol according to the gridding definition. This is the pseudo attribute. The value is evaluated each time it is queried. It will retrieve the name of the tag from the gridding definition where DIAGXPOS fit, if possible.
GRIDYPOS
String
The Y position of the symbol according to the gridding definition. This is the pseudo attribute. The value is evaluated each time it is queried. It will retrieve the name of the tag from the gridding definition where DIAGYPOS fit, if possible.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:146
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Each time the user wants to move an item on the drawing or create a new one, the DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS will be updated according to the Visio drawing position. Be aware that if DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS will be out of limits of the grid definition file then an appropriate message will be returned by GRIDXPOS/GRIDYPOS pseudo attributes. Note: The four attributes: DIAGXPOS, DIAGYPOS, GRIDXPOS and GRIDYPOS are defined as "Hidden"
4.19.3
Items that can be Localised Items that contain the above mentioned attributes are: •
Equipment items
•
Sub-equipment items
•
Offline instruments
•
Actuators
•
Fittings
•
HVAC Fittings
•
Off page connectors (SCOPCI and SCOPCO)
•
Valves
•
Instruments
•
Pipe destination
•
Nozzles
•
Electrical connections
•
Areas
Some of above items might have secondary representation. That means that there is more than one shape that is representing the same item in the database. The position DIAGXPOS/DIAGYPOS will be updated only according to primary items.
4.19.4
Using the P&ID Grid Each time a symbol is dropped on to a diagram sheet or the symbol is moved on the sheet, the actual PinX, PinY symbol position is retrieved via the Visio application and these values are stored respectively in the DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS DB element attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:147
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
It is mostly not interesting to know this value but rather the corresponding gridding position along the X/Y axes. A second pair of attributes is available for that, they are GRIDXPOS and GRIDYPOS, which are pseudo attributes. That means the value is never stored on the DB element, but is dynamically converted based on the DIAGXPOS/DIAGYPOS values and the gridding defined configuration. Thus, if he gridding definition should be changed during the project life cycle, any simple query would dynamically reflect the changes. Displaying these values graphically for a symbol can be done with the following formula:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:148
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: In some cases it will be required to call the Refresh command to see the proper text. Alternatively you may want to display the gridding position of the connector you are connected to. In that case, use the following formula:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:149
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.5
Updating Existing Drawings Old drawings may be updated using the File > Batch Job… > Update Diagrams function. When the item position is updated this will be will be notified in the message log.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:150
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20
Changing Symbols for Existing Items
4.20.1
Overview Diagrams supports exchanging a placed and connected symbol with another symbol. All connections will be retained. This can be done either manually by the user or automatically by fetching a shape reference from the catalogue. The main difference between manually and automatically replacing a symbol is the Shape Data cells handling. When done automatically all cells are retained. In other words, there is only a graphical symbol change and no database changes. Whereas during manual replace, all attributes that are possible to be set in the database element are copied from the master shape. As in the following example, where the master shape has Description set to "GD629EJ" the database element will have the description attribute updated to that value after replacing the symbol.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:151
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the attribute change is successful, a notification like the one below is displayed in the Message Log.
If the attribute change failed, an error message like the one below is displayed in the Message Log.
The Replace operation does not erase attributes that are not set in the master. In the above example, all attributes with no value in the master (Area, Arrive, Borearray etc.) are not changed in the database element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:152
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: On name change - when the name attribute is changing because of a replace operation, the system does not ask about creating a secondary representation item. The name will be changed. If the operation fails, a warning message is displayed.
•
Replacing Symbols with Updating Attributes According to Master In the Update Diagrams Options dialog tick the box for Update symbols according to master shapes. This will enable execution in a batch job.
Now choose the Replace Symbol option from the shape’s context menu.
The main difference between replacing symbol using batch job and using the Replace Symbol option from the context menu is that in the latter question dialogs can appear when the database attribute is changing. It could be that the replaced item: •
is released to 3D,
•
is a secondary item,
•
belongs to the area that controls attributes.
Normally, while changing database attribute of an item using shape data, there is a user confirmation dialog. When you modify an attribute using Replace Symbol from the shape context menu, you will be notified in the same way. (Note that questions are related with database attribute change, which means that if you say No then the symbol will be replaced
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:153
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
but the attribute will stay the same.) When you use a batch job, all question messages are skipped. Because of that, each time the when the system is not sure if changing an attribute is allowed, the attribute will not be changed. At each attribute operation, regardless of changing or not changing the value, you will be notified about that in the batch log. Note: Changing SCSTYP or PSPE might trigger a specification search. When an attribute is changed using the Replace Symbol option, the process of specification search works just like during attribute change from shape data. However, if it is done from the batch job, the specification search is executed very similarly to when changing GTYP to INST. There are small differences in the algorithm:
•
•
When SCSTYP is changing, the system is checking if any SELE or SPEC asks about the SCSTYP and starts searching from this element (instead of item with TYPE question).
•
When PSPE is changing, the system skips the condition related with SELE element that contains the question and starts searching from SPEC element.
Replacing Symbols that will not Update Attributes Choose the Replace Symbol from Catalogue option from the shape’s context menu.
Change SPREF. In the Update Diagrams Options dialog tick the box for Update symbols according to catalogue information. This will enable execution in a batch job.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:154
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20.2
Manual Replacing of Symbol By selecting one or more shapes and using the Replace Symbol command on the right click menu, the symbol can be manually replaced. This will bring up a dialogue where a new shape can be selected.
In the treeview to the left, all open stencils are shown. In the right hand pane all shapes for the selected stencil can be seen. Select one of these and click the Replace button to make the change. In case the dialogue should remain open, use the Apply button instead. The Reset button will restore the original symbol(s).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:155
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the selected shape is not of the same type or has too few connections, an error message will be shown and the symbol will not be replaced.
4.20.3
Automatic Replacing of Symbol When the catalogue reference for an item is set or changed, the application can automatically replace the symbol using a symbol reference from the catalogue. This can for instance be applied when a generic shape has been used from the beginning, and when at a later time in the process the catalogue reference is set. Then a more specific symbol can be fetched from the catalogue, given that the catalogue item includes a shape reference. The shape reference in the catalogue can be set using the Symbol Group and Symbol Name fields in Paragon. Symbol Group should contain the name of the stencil and Symbol Name should be the name of the shape within the stencil.
Figure 4:57. Catalogue symbol reference in Paragon
The way that the automatic symbol replacement works is controlled by some default settings in Diagrams Options (Defaults in Chapter Getting Started): Default setting
Value
Description
Auto replace shape from catalogue
Yes
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will check if the referenced catalogue item has a shape reference. If it has, the shape will automatically be replaced with one referenced from the catalogue.
No
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will not attempt to replace the shape from the catalogue.
Ask User
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will check if the referenced catalogue item has a shape reference. If it has, the system will ask the user if the shape should be replaced.
In addition to this, there is also a setting for Auto replace manually replaced shapes. This can have the same values as described above for the Auto replace shape from catalogue, with the difference that it only applies to shapes that the user has previously exchanged manually. This basically provides a way to disallow any automatic changes to shapes that the user has manually replaced.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:156
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20.4
Replace Symbol from Catalogue By using the Replace Symbol from Catalogue command available on the shape right click menu, the current symbol will be replaced with the one stored in the catalogue. This can be useful in the following cases:
4.21
•
The item has received a new catalogue reference outside the control of the Diagrams application and the symbol has therefore not been updated accordingly.
•
The user has manually replaced a symbol and now wants to return to the symbol provided by the catalogue.
•
The catalogue has been updated with new symbol references and the diagram should reflect this change.
Setting System Reference In some cases the user might want to override the System reference inherited from the pipeline for a particular valve or fitting. In this case the Set System Reference command available on the shape right-click menu can be used. This will bring up a dialogue where the system reference can be set or updated. This dialogue can also be used for setting the system reference(s) for equipment items and cables.
One item can be a member of multiple systems. To add a reference to a System, click the button, which will bring up a dialogue where the system hierarchy can be browsed and a system selected. To remove a system reference, select it in the list and click the
button.
In the list you can also see the system reference of the parent Pipeline / HVACline for applicable items as a greyed out system name at the top of the list. This is not shown for cables or equipment items, as there is no hierarchically superior element in the database that has a system reference.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:157
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.22
Naming
4.22.1
Overview Diagrams includes a possibility for automatic naming and re-naming of database elements. This is primarily accomplished through the standard PDMS Autonaming function. In addition to this, there are also functions to rename elements based on their position in the diagram layout.
4.22.2 •
Autonaming Naming Rules To set up naming rules to be automatically applied when DB elements are created, use the Admin Tab > Configuration > Naming function. Please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Administrator User Guide for more information about this. The autonaming only works when no name has been given at the time the element is created. If for instance the Prompt on drop (Prompting the User to Enter a Name) facility is used to prompt the user for a name, the autonaming will not be activated (unless the user does not enter any name).
•
Autoname CE The naming can also be manually triggered by using the Autoname CE function available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming menu item. Note: That this only works in case the element is not already named.
•
Autoname CE and Offspring The Autoname CE and Offspring function is the same as the Autoname CE, but it will also autoname any unnamed off springs of CE.
•
Autoname Offspring Only The Autoname Offspring Only function should be used for auto naming any unnamed off springs of CE, but not CE itself.
4.22.3
Auto Renaming In addition to the autonaming, it is also possible to autorename elements. These functions works more or less in the way that the current name is first removed and then a new autoname is applied.
•
Auto Rename CE This function will autoname the current element according to the current Naming Option, after first removing the current name. The function is available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming.
•
Auto Rename CE and Offspring Works the same way as Auto Rename CE, but it will also auto rename any off springs of CE. The function is available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:158
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Auto Rename Offspring Only This function will auto rename any offspring of CE, but not CE itself.
4.22.4
Rename Elements This function works on the current selection in the diagram, and can rename the elements based on their position in the diagram layout. Typically the user can select elements of a certain type (i.e. valves, cables etc.) and rename them according to their position.
•
Name Option Choose whether the names should be regenerated, re-ordered ascending or re-ordered descending. Regenerating the names will first remove the names of the selected elements and then the autoname function will be applied to the selected elements. Re-order names will keep the names of the selected elements and re-order them alphanumerically.
•
Point of Comparison Choose which point of the shape that should be used for deciding the order. Typically this setting is used in conjunction with function Sort Options Horizontally and Vertically.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:159
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Sort Option:
4.22.5
Horizontally
This will consider the X position of the shapes first.
Vertically
This will consider the Y position of the shapes first.
Selected Order
This will rename in the order that the shapes where selected.
Reversed Selected Order
This will rename in the reverse order that the shapes where selected.
Chain (cables only)
This will rename cables in a chain style, starting with the selected cable traversing downstream via connected equipments/elconns. Before using this option, the user must first have selected a single cable at the start of the chain. If more than one cable is selected, the rename chain option will be disabled. It will also only propagate downstream if there is exactly one incoming and one outgoing cable at each connection. Typically this feature can be used for naming continuous circuits like lighting, fire alarms etc.
Prompting the User to Enter a Name By using the Attribute Presentation settings (please refer to Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started), it is possible to make the application prompt the user for attribute values as a shape is being dropped on the drawing. In case the NAME attribute is used for prompting, a special functionality is invoked. In case an element with the same name already exists in the DB, the user will be presented with a dialogue where it is possible to reenter the name, create a Secondary shape (Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste), if this is enabled, or to create the new item anyway, but with a blank name.
4.23
Viewing Datasheets in Diagrams Diagrams allows the viewing of Datasheets for engineering items that are linked with schematics elements. It is possible to open Datasheets from either the context menu on the Drawing, the Ribbon context menu for selected element or in the Schematic Explorer context menu. Datasheets in Diagrams are opened in read-only mode, they can be only viewed. Datasheets can be printed directly from Diagrams.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:160
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.1
Drawing The Open Datasheet function in the Drawing context menu is always enabled and there will be a message in the Message Log window if the element does not have a linked engineering item or the linked engineering element does not have a Datasheet Instance.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:161
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:162
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.2
Ribbon UI The Datasheet option in the Ribbon context menu, for the selected element, is enabled only when the selected element has a linked engineering item and there is a Datasheet Instance created for that item.
4.23.3
Schematic Explorer The Open Datasheet function in the Schematic Explorer context menu is enabled only when the selected element has a linked engineering item and there is a Datasheet Instance created for that item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:163
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.4
Printing Datasheet in Diagrams Datasheets can be printed directly from Diagrams using the Print Datasheet menu in the Project menu. The Print Datasheet function is enabled only when a Datasheet is opened.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:164
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:165
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.24
Highlighting The application includes a number of ways to highlight shapes in the drawing. Some examples of these are the right-click menu in the Schematic and System Explorers, the Find in Drawing group on the Tools Tab, during automatic dimensioning/spec search etc. In the case that the application will not automatically reset the highlight, it can be reset by using the Reset Highlight function. This is available in the Quick Access Toolbar. In addition to this, the F7 key on the keyboard can be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:166
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The highlight colour and linewidth can be configured by changing some default settings in Diagrams Options (refer to section Defaults):
4.25
Default setting
Value
Description
Highlight colour
Colour (default is Red colour)
Colour to be used when highlighting
Line width multiplier
Multiplier factor
The multiplier to be applied to the line width when highlighting. This is only relevant when ‘Enable auto line width’ is False.
Enable auto line width
True / False
Automatically adjust the line width to the current zoom level when highlighting is done.
Auto line width
Line width
The line width in approx points to be applied when ‘Enable auto line width’ is True.
Apply auto line width on zoom operation
True / False
Automatically adjust the line width when the zoom level is changed. This can be set to False if the performance of the zoom operation degrades on large drawings.
Keep highlight after dimensioning operation.
True / False
If True, changed component will be kept highlighted after resize / refit operations.
Importing/Exporting Drawings, Stencils and Templates The Project Tab > Import And Export > Import function can be used to open Visio drawings which are not created through the Diagrams application and are therefore not represented by index elements in the database. Likewise, to export an existing drawing or to save a newly created Visio drawing to a file without creating an index element in the database, the export function can be used.
The Diagrams Import and Export functions are basically the same as the standard MS Visio Open and Save As functions, and also supports importing/exporting other formats, such as DXF etc. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information on how these functions operate. For Export and Save As there might for instance be some differences in what kinds of information can be exported to different formats, as well as if the function will export the whole diagram or only the current page.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:167
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Please note that the Import Drawing function only opens a Visio drawing stored in the file system and does not import related data to the database.
4.26
Importing and Exporting Data to the DB
4.26.1
Import The Project Tab > Import And Export > Import > Excel Import Wizard provides a possibility to import data to the schematic database from .CSV and .XLS format files. Please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Database Management Reference Manual for a description of how to use it.
4.26.2
Export The Item List includes a facility for exporting data to a spreadsheet file. By right clicking on the table and selecting Export to SpreadSheet the contents of the currently selected tab will be exported to an .XLS file. The file can be saved in a location selected by the user through a standard Project Tab > Save As dialog. For more information refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide. Note: DB data can also be exported in the same way from the Search Result grid. When doing that, the scope of data will not be limited to the current diagram.
4.27
Undo and Redo The standard Visio Undo and Redo commands are available in Diagrams. These can be fully used for Visio functions and operations that are not affecting the database, for instance undoing the move of a shape in a drawing etc. Note: The Undo/Redo command supplied via Visio is not connected to the Undo/Redo functionality presented by the database. If any database actions have been carried out as a result of the previous Visio command, then the Undo buffer will be emptied to assure consistency between the diagrams and database. Also, pure Diagrams functions such as Refresh, Resize, Refit etc. are not possible to Undo/Redo.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:168
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.28
Working with Units The Diagrams application supports the usage of values with units. All relevant attribute values are displayed in accordance with the project settings for units. Independent of the current settings for units presentation the user has the possibility to set attribute values or fill in forms with values in any units. For instance if a bore diameters are set to be presented in imperial units all bore diameters will be presented in inches. However, this does not limit the usage of values in metric units, 24.5mm, to set attributes. In cases when other then the relevant units are used the application will try to interpret the value entered. To be able to properly display units in a shape annotation, a unit aware attribute must be referred to in the Text shape property. Some cases when units are used include, but are not limited to, distances, bore diameters, positions. For changing the current units settings, please refer to documentation for Administration of AVEVA Marine Environment. Examples:
Figure 4:58. Tee annotation using PPBO(1) annotation to provide units aware values
Figure 4:59. Reducer with Text value referring to ABOR, LBOR
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:169
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:170
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) The chapter covers the special functions and procedures for the Piping discipline and is of special interest to users creating Piping and Instrumentation diagrams.
5.1
Overview The Diagrams application supports the creation of piping diagrams. This includes features such as automatic management of the logical pipe model, dimensioning and automatic specification search for components. To create P&IDs, the P&ID mode should be used. This can be selected in the Project Tab.
5.2
Creating Pipelines Pipelines can be created using the Home Tab > P&ID > Pipe > Create Pipeline command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
When the Create Pipeline dialogue is opened, a number of attributes will have values preset as follows. These are just default values and can be changed by the user. •
Group will be set from the default group settings available in the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Primary System will be set from current system setting available in the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Pipe Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Insulation Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Tracing Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Fluid will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
The Type dropdown box will allow the user to create pipelines using derived UDET types. The pipeline name can be automatically constructed by using the Autonaming function. In order to provide feedback on the autonaming while the dialogue is open, a pipeline element is actually created as the dialogue is opened. In case the user clicks Cancel, this pipeline element will be removed again. The pipeline will be created in the selected group (SCGROU) in the main hierarchy of the schematic database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is also possible to move pipelines between schematic groups either by changing the Group in the Pipeline Properties dialogue, or by using the Cut and Paste commands in the Schematic Explorer. Note: That it is also possible to create pipelines by dropping a Pipeline shape onto the drawing. This works more or less like a Branch shape with the difference that it also creates a new pipeline (the Create Pipeline dialogue is automatically shown when the pipeline shape is dropped onto the drawing). Pipeline shapes can be created by using the Import Shape Wizard. See chapter Getting Started for further information.
5.3
Pipeline Properties After a pipeline has been created, its properties can be viewed and changed by using the Pipeline Properties command. This command is available through the right click menu in the Explorer on pipelines and their members, as well as through the right click menu for Inline Fittings in the drawing. In case any branches have been created on diagram drawings, the dialogue will now also show an additional tab, Diagram references, which contains a list of all diagrams/pages that the pipeline is represented on.
5.4
Creating Branches Before a branch can be created, the Current Pipeline must be selected. The Current Pipeline can be viewed in the Status bar (please refer to Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams). To change the Current Pipeline, you can either select the pipeline or any item below it in the explorer, or you can select a tube, a duct or an inline fitting in the drawing which belongs to the desired pipeline. Pipeline branches are then created by dragging and dropping a branch shape onto the drawing area. The branch will be added to the Current Pipeline. In addition to the branch element, the application will also create a Segment Element and a Tube Element.
The purpose of the Segment Element is to provide a way to divide branches between several pages or drawings using Off-page Connectors (please refer to Off-page Connectors in Chapter Working with Diagrams). All in-line fittings in a branch belonging to a certain drawing page will be grouped under the same segment in the hierarchy. The tube element will be related with the tube shape in the drawing which was created when the branch shape was dropped. In case UDETs are used, there is a possibility in the Import Shape Wizard (refer to Import Shape Wizard in Chapter Getting Started) to set up which UDET type of tube should be created when the shape is dropped (Denote to). It is possible to move branches between pipelines by using the Cut and Paste commands in the Schematic Explorer. However, please note that this will not re-apply any default values, like pipe spec etc., from the receiving pipeline to the branch or its members.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In Diagrams Options > Element Options > Fitting Options > Default Options, the setting Auto create branch on connect Tee will automatically add a new branch shape when a Tee is dropped into a line. Also, in Diagrams Options > Element Options > Fitting Options > Default Options, the setting Auto create Tee on connect branch will automatically add a new Tee shape when branches are connected.
5.5
Adding Parts to a Branch
5.5.1
Overview Valves, fittings and inline instruments can be members of a branch and are all considered inline parts. These can be created by dragging and dropping shapes from the stencil onto the drawing area. Inline parts can be added to a branch in different ways.
5.5.2
Arrive and Leave Inline parts with 2 or more connections are using the Arrive and Leave attributes to relate the main flow (design) direction to the connection points on the shape. When a shape is created using MS Visio tools and subsequently added to a stencil using the Import Shape Wizard, it is important that the connection points are added in the correct sequence. The point added first will by default be related to Arrive, and the second will be related to Leave. This can be seen as the default value of Arrive is 1 (referring to the first point) and Leave is 2 (referring to the second point). Note: If the values of Arrive and Leave are changed, this will affect the application’s perception of what is the main flow, and therefore cause inconsistencies if not properly applied.
5.5.3
Dropping and Connecting When a shape is dragged and dropped onto the drawing, it will respond differently depending on where it is dropped: 1. Dropped onto an empty space in the drawing: The shape will not be defined (refer to Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) until it is subsequently connected to a member of a branch. 2. Dropped onto a tube shape: The tube will be divided into two and the dropped shape will be inserted in between and defined (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) in the database. Note: This only happens if the connections points related with Arrive and Leave (point 1 and 2 in the shape) will both be in line with the tube shape. Also, Arrive and Leave will if necessary also be automatically switched so that they will be consistent with the flow direction of the branch that the shape is dropped into. Note: If the connector has more than one angle and the connector style is set to Reroute Freely, then each time when the user is trying to drop something on that connector the line is immediately rerouted, avoiding the dropped shape. This is an MS Visio behaviour that unfortunately cannot be changed by AVEVA. To prevent connector reroute during that operation the user has to set the reroute style to Reroute on Crossover or Never Reroute using the Layout & Routing group on the Home Tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
3. Dropped onto a free end of a tube shape: By aligning one of the connection points of the part and a free end of a tube when the shape is dropped, they will be connected and the shape will be defined (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) and added to the branch. When an inline component is connected to a branch, the Arrive and Leave will automatically be set to follow the flow of the branch. However, the visual appearance of the shape will not be changed. There are two ways to make sure that the shape gets the right direction in the branch: 1. Drop the shape onto an empty area of the drawing, and use the rotation handle to properly align it with the branch it should be connected to. Then connect it to the branch end or drag it over a tube to insert it. 2. Drop the shape into the branch (connect or split on drop), and if it gets the incorrect orientation, use the Reverse Direction command. When connecting a branch/tube to an item (valve, inline fitting, equipment, nozzle etc.), which is a grouped shape, the connection points must be on the group and not on the members of the group. Otherwise the connection operation will fail and the message ‘Not a valid pipe piece and/or pipe connection’ is shown. It is not possible to directly connect tube/branch shapes to each other, a Visio 2D shape is required in between. For example, to connect one branch to another, a fitting such as a Tee, Olet or Coupling must be inserted, and the branches connected to this.
5.5.4 •
Automatic Tee Insertion General Automatic Tee insertion provides the possibility to automatically insert a Tee every time two branches are connected by the user. At the branches’ connection point a predefined Tee shape is inserted. If there is any specification or dimensioning conflicts the appropriate dimensioning and size selection dialogs are presented to the user.
•
Activation and Options The Automatic Tee Insertion function can be turned on or off in the Diagrams Options dialog. All related options can be found in the Element options > Fitting options section.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:1.
Activation of Automatic Tee Insertion in Diagrams options dialog
In the options dialog it is also possible to select the shape of the Tee to be automatically inserted on connection of two branches, as well as from which stencil this shape should be taken. The option for Auto create Tee on connect branch is by default set to False. It is left to the user to make sure that the Tee's shape name and stencil exist and are valid. If a Tee with a chosen shape name is not found or a stencil with a chosen name is not found errors will be generated.
•
Using Automatic Tee Insertion The usage of the Automatic Tee Insertion function is as the title suggest automatic. Every time two branches are connected, that usually involves one branch that is dragged (either an end point of it or the branch as a whole) and one that is stationary. When the dragged branch is released the Tee shape specified in the Diagrams Options is dropped over the stationary branch with the branching connector pointing towards the dragged branch. The dropped Tee splits the stationary branch as if the Tee was dropped by the user and the branching connector of the Tee is connected to the dragged branch. Thus completing the process of connecting two branches with a Tee. If there are any specification conflicts or dimensioning variations that cannot be chosen by the system, a choose size dialog will be presented to prompt the user and resolve these variations.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Below is shown an automatically inserted tee when one branch is dragged to another one. The result is as if the tee was placed over the static branch and then the dragged branch connected to it.
Figure 5:2.
The branch is dragged to the one that is stationary
Figure 5:3.
The Tee is connected
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.5.5
Using Tube Shapes Valves, fittings and instruments are normally connected by tube elements. These can be created by dragging and dropping in a similar manner as the parts described above. Tubes are represented by Visio connector shapes, while all other inline parts are represented by Visio 2D shapes. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information about the behaviour of connector shapes and 2D shapes. The main difference between a branch shape and a tube shape is that while the branch will create branch, segment and tube elements in one go, the tube will only create the tube element and can thereby be used to extend an existing branch.
5.5.6
Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between It is also possible to connect several inline parts in a sequence without having a tube in between. This can for instance be used to attach a reducer directly to a valve, or to create a sequence of valves without intermediate tubing. To achieve this, follow these steps: 1. Drag and drop the inline part to the drawing area. 2. Select the Connection Point tool (available on the Home Tab in the Tools group). 3. Right-click on the connection point that you will be using to connect the new shape to the existing one. 4. Select Outward from the right-click menu. 5. Change back to the Pointer tool (available on the Home Tab in the Tools group or click F8). 6. Position the mouse pointer close to the connection point that was just modified. Important: If the mouse pointer is closer to another connection point or to the centre point of the shape as the shape is dragged, it will not be possible to connect. 7. Drag the shape so that the connection point aligns with the connection point of the existing shape.
5.6
Flow Direction One of the branch’s characteristics is its flow direction. In the database flow it is determined by the order of tubes and components below the segments and the sequence of the OPCO/ OPCI connections between the segments. In a correctly designed branch all its segments should be allowed to become traversed trough their OPCs. On the drawing the flow determines the layout of connectors and the logic of the connecting components (the incoming and outgoing connection should correspond with the arrive and leave connection number set in the database).
5.6.1
The Flow Direction Symbol The Flow Direction symbol can be used for a graphical indication of the flow of a branch on a drawing. When dropped on top of a tube or duct shape, the flow direction symbol automatically aligns with the current flow and it reacts on the connectors’ moving or resizing. It is also automatically adjusted on the reversing of the flow direction. The flow direction symbol can be created using Import Shape Wizard and then dropped from the stencil as any other shape. To achieve proper behaviour it is important that before the symbol is imported its orientation corresponds with default flow direction going horizontally
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
form left to right. The shape should also have one outwards connection point which will be used to attach to the connector.
Figure 5:4.
Creation of sample flow direction symbol
It is possible to define a flow direction symbol that is automatically attached to a dropped piping or HVAC connector. This can be achieved using the default settings or in the Import Shape Wizard by specifying a stencil and a name of the flow direction symbol to be automatically dropped.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:5.
5.6.2
Definition of default flow direction symbol for pipe connectors
Directional Components Inline parts can be defined as directional components. This means that the shape will always be adjusted to the flow of the branch. When such a shape is inserted into the tube, the application will check if its orientation is corresponding to the main flow and automatically reverse the direction of the component if needed. Such shapes can be used e.g. to represent non-returning valves. To create a directional component the following actions are required: •
draw the Visio shape which is going to represent the component and make sure its arrive and leave (first and second) connection points are aligned with the default flow which goes horizontally from left to right
•
import the shape as desired inline component and in Step 1 of the Import Shape Wizard tick the Directional component option.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.6.3
Reversing Flow Direction for a Whole Branch Diagrams application provides functionality to reverse flow direction of a branch. The command is accessible from main menu of from context menu for any branch components:
After the command is issued all necessary changes will be done to branch hierarchy in database and its representation on current drawing is changed to fit reversed flow. The changes done to database are following:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
Order of elements below all segments belonging to the branch is reversed.
•
All OPCO elements are changed to OPCI and the other way round. As a result of that sequence of connections between segments belonging to the branch is reversed.
•
All OPC connections referring to other branches are disconnected.
•
Arrive and Leave attributes of all components below segments (except OPC elements) are switched.
•
TREF/HREF attributes of branch and segments below it are adjusted accordingly to new flow direction.
Corresponding changes done to shapes on current drawing are: •
Start/end of tube shapes is reversed.
•
Type of OPCO shapes is changed to OPCI (and OPCI to OPCO), but the shapes are not replaced.
•
Directional components (e.g. non-return valves) are reversed and their connection points are changed to fit Arrive and Leave attributes in database. The other components are not changed.
Note: If the directional component has branching connection it may not be possible to restore the connection after reverse. In such situation the branching point will be disconnected on drawing and in database with appropriate message in message log. In case branch is located on several drawings, user is prompted to automatically update shapes on other drawings as well.
If other drawings containing parts of reversed branch are not updated (user answered “No” to above question or it was impossible to edit the drawings e.g. because they were claimed by another user) there is inconsistency between the drawings and database data. Such inconsistencies are detected and fixed on opening drawing and by Consistency Check.
5.7
Using Equipment and Subequipment Equipment items can be created by dragging and dropping equipment shapes from the stencil to the drawing area. The application includes support for Primary and Secondary equipment items (refer to Primary / Secondary Shapes in Chapter Working with Diagrams), meaning that a single equipment item in the database can be represented by two or more shapes on the same or on different drawings. For an equipment to be defined on drop, it is required that a default Group is set up in the Default Groups dialogue that can be reached from the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams. Subequipment items can also be created by dragging and dropping a subequipment shape from a stencil onto the drawing. However, for the subequipment shape to be defined in the database, it is required the equipment item to which is should belong is currently selected when the drop takes place.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to add more connection points after an equipment, or sub-equipment, item is dropped onto the drawing. To achieve this, select the Visio Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add points.
Sub-equipment items are not dependent on their parent equipment item being represented on the same diagram. It is allowed to have the main equipment item on one diagram and the subequipment item on another diagram, even if they are hierarchically linked in the database. Likewise, when and if they appear on the same diagram, there are no layout restrictions in terms of them having to be connected or close to each other in any way.
5.8
Using Nozzles Nozzle shapes can be added to equipment items by dragging and dropping onto an equipment item. They can be attached to a connection point on the equipment item (‘Glue to connection point’) or just to the geometry (‘Snap to Geometry’). Nozzle items will then be created under the equipment item in the DB. In case a nozzle shape is not connected to an equipment item on drop, it can be connected later, but it will not be defined in the database until it is connected to an equipment item.
Note: When dragging a nozzle to connect to an equipment item, it is important that the mouse pointer is close to the connection point on the nozzle that you want to connect to it. Otherwise Visio will not find the correct connection. The nozzle specification can be set by right-clicking on the nozzle shape and selecting the Nozzle Specification command. This will bring up the Nozzle Specification dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In the Nozzle Specification dialogue, the Specification, Generic Type and Nominal bore can be selected, and this will result in a specification reference. When the OK button is clicked, the specification reference will be updated in the CATREF attribute of the nozzle. Branches can now be created and connected to the nozzle.
5.9
Using Pipe Destination Elements For pipes that end without any connection to an equipment item, Pipe Destination elements can be used. A Pipe Destination shape can be attached to the end of a branch, and can contain a description of the nature of the branch end. This can for instance be ‘Vent to atmosphere’, ‘Overboard discharge’ etc. Pipe Destination elements will also remove unnecessary information messages from the consistency check result, such that the end of a branch is unconnected. Pipe Destination shapes can be created using the Import Shape Wizard.
5.10
Grouped Shapes It is possible to group together several shapes into a unit that can be added to a stencil. To achieve this, start by building up the arrangement in the drawing in the normal way. Then select the shapes that should form the group, undefine them (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams), and drag them to the stencil. They will then be grouped automatically.
Figure 5:6.
Example of a group of shapes
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
This group can then be dragged and dropped onto a drawing, thereby adding an arrangement of branches and inline fittings in a single operation. In case the arrangement contains more than one branch, the user will have to select a part in each branch and issue the Define branch command (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Note: When a group of shapes is added to the drawing in the way described above, it is recommended to ungroup it (Right click > Shape > Ungroup) before proceeding to connect or modify. If this is not done, it can result in unexpected behaviour. For instance that a tube within the group will not split into two when a new fitting is dropped onto it.
5.11
Online Dimensioning and Specification Search
5.11.1
Overview The Diagrams application supports a flexible approach to the handling of dimensioning and spec search. The following levels of automation are supported: •
No dimensioning.
•
Dimensioning without catalogue or spec search.
•
Dimensioning with manual catalogue selection.
•
Dimensioning with automatic spec search.
These methods can also be combined in various ways and allows for an incremental/ iterative workflow. It is for instance possible to start a diagram using dimensioning but no catalogue or spec search. At a later time when a catalogue and specification has been established, the spec search can be enabled and the selection of components be done based on the previously entered dimensions. If the automatic spec search is enabled, the manual catalogue search can not be done for in-line parts, please refer to Manual Component Selection in Chapter Working with Diagrams for more information about the Catalogue Search window. The dimensioning is using the concepts of Fit and Size operations: •
Refit means that the current component will obtain a new size from the upstream component. When this will occur automatically, it is called Autofit.
•
Resize means that the user will manually select a new size to be applied to the component. This only applies to branching and size-changing components such as tees and reducers.
The dimensioning can work with varying degrees of propagation of dimension changes. Propagation will always occur in a downstream direction (from head to tail). There are a number of default settings in Diagrams Options under General Options > Pipe Dimensioning that control the way that the dimension and spec search is operating (please refer to Defaults in Chapter Getting Started): Default setting
Value
Description
Refit - Autofit on connect
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when connecting.
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when connecting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Refit - Autofit on delete
Refit - Propagate autofit
Refit - Propagate at segment
Refit - Propagate at branch
Resize - Propagate at segment
Resize - Propagate at branch
Spec Search - Use Specification
Spec Search - Allow out-of-spec selection
True
The component following the one that is being deleted will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component.
False
The component following the one that is being deleted will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component.
True
Autofit should be propagated to downstream components.
False
Autofit should not be propagated to downstream components.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
The specification search will be used.
False
The specification will not be used. Dimensioning will be stored locally in each inline part using the BOREARRAY attribute.
True
SPRE of tubes and inline components can be set to GPART or SCOM rather than to SPCOMPONENT.
False
SPRE attribute of tubes and inline components can be set only to SPCOMPONENT. Note: This setting has no effect when Use Specification is set to False.
Spec Search - Autoselect on define
Spec Search - Ignore defaults in specification
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
True
Specification search and component selection will be triggered when a shape is defined.
False
No spec search and automatic component selection will be done when a shape is defined.
True
No selection of the first found SELE/SPCO member when TDefault of the SELE is set to EQUA.
5:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.11.2
No Dimensioning To create a piping diagram without any dimensioning, all the settings described in the table above should be set to False.
5.11.3
Dimensioning without Catalogue or Spec Search If the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting is set to False, the specification will not be used and all dimensioning will be handled through the BOREARRAY attribute on the parts. When a new branch is created, the boresize will be picked up from the default bore size that is set up in the current pipeline. When inline parts such as valves, reducers etc. are dropped into a branch, the bore will be picked up from the upstream component. In case a size-changing or branching component will be dropped, the system will prompt the user for a ‘Leave bore?’ or ‘Branching bore?’. In all other cases the system will automatically pick up the bore size from the element it will be connected to.
Figure 5:7.
The bore-question dialogue.
The Resize and Refit operations and related propagation settings operates in the same way for dimensioning with or without spec search.
5.11.4
Dimensioning with Manual Catalogue Selection When the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting is set to False, it is possible to manually select components from the catalogue for inline parts using the Catalogue Search function (see Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
5.11.5
Dimensioning with Automatic Spec Search To use the automatic spec search, the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting must be set to True. A default pipe specification for a pipeline can be set up in the Create Pipeline dialogue when the pipeline is created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The pipe specification works as a default value that is propagated to subordinate elements such as branches and inline parts as these are created within the pipeline. It is possible to subsequently change the specification reference for an individual fitting through the Custom Properties window or Item List. If the pipe spec is later changed in the pipeline properties dialogue, it will not affect existing inline parts within the pipeline, it will only be applied to new inline parts as they are added. When a new branch is created, the boresize will be picked up from the default bore size that is set up in the current pipeline. When inline parts such as valves, reducers etc. are dropped into a branch, the bore will be picked up from the upstream component and a specification search will be performed, provided that the Autoselect on Define default setting is set to True in Diagrams Options.
Figure 5:8.
Before valve is dropped
Figure 5:9.
After valve is dropped. The specification reference can be seen in the shape text, as this has been set up to show [SPRE.NAME].
In case a size-changing or branching component will be dropped, the system will prompt the user for a ‘Leave bore?’ or ‘Branching bore?’. In all other cases the system will automatically pick up the bore size from the element it will be connected to.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The Bore-question dialogue will present a dropdown list of valid boresizes picked up from the specification. In case a user will type in a bore size that does not match any of these, the application will round it up to the next defined bore size. The result of the specification search will be that the specification reference (SPREF) will point to the matching SPCO element. In case no matching SPCO will be found, the SPREF will not be set. The operation of the spec search is highly dependant on how the spec is organized in terms of the hierarchy of questions and answers. In case the spec search will not find the expected SPCO, please review the structure of the spec and modify if necessary.
The progress of the spec search is also presented in the Message Log window (refer to Message Log in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Successful spec search operations are logged as informational messages, while unsuccessful ones are logged as warnings.
All elements affected by an automatic spec search can also be left highlighted, depending on the value of the Keep highlight after dimensioning default setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Note: When the automatic spec search is enabled, it is not possible to manually set catalogue references for the inline parts using the Catalogue Search function (please refer to Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
5.11.6
Respec Changing the specification of existing pipework can be done by first selecting all relevant inline parts and then change the PSPEC attribute in the Shape Data window. The new spec will be applied to all the selected inline parts. After this, the spec selection process will automatically be triggered and changes to Sprefs can be followed up by viewing the Message Log. Note: In order to get a good overview of what happens during the respec operation, it is recommended to only respec a reasonable number of parts in the same operation. This makes it easier to follow up and check any changes. Note: To select, in the current drawing, all inline parts in a branch or a pipeline, it is possible to right click on the branch or pipeline in the explorer and use the Select in Drawing command. In the case where a diagram has been created without using any specification, and you subsequently want to apply a spec, the below procedure can be followed: 1. Go to the Diagrams Options dialogue and change the Use specification default setting under General options > Pipe Dimensioning > Spec search to True. 2. Also make sure that any desired propagation settings such as Refit – Propagate Autofit, Refit – Propagate at Segment and Refit – Propagate at Branch are set to True. 3. Close the Diagrams Options dialogue. 4. Click on the first tube/fitting in the branch you want to apply spec search to and select pipeline properties. 5. In the Pipeline Properties dialogue, go to the Specification tab and select a Pipe spec. 6. Click OK to close the dialogue. 7. Select the first tube or fitting in the branch, right click and choose Refit. The specification search will now be carried out and propagated according to the propagation settings.
5.11.7
Resize In case the user would like to change the leave bore or branching bore on an existing shape, the Resize command can be used. The Resize command is available on the Shape Contextual Tab as well as on the shape right-click menu. Whether the result of the Resize operation should be propagated or not is controlled by the various propagation default settings.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In case specification search is used, the Bore size dialogue will contain a dropdown list where valid boresizes can be selected. In case the user will key in a bore size, this will automatically be rounded off to the nearest valid bore size. In case specification search is not used, the dropdown list will not contain any predefined values, and the rounding will not occur.
Note: Resize can only be done at the start of a branch, at branching components such as tees and at size-changing components such as reducers. All other components will obtain their size from upstream components in order to keep the dimensional consistency of the data model. There are cases when the resize will not provide any result from the spec search, such as when an equal Tee is resized to be un-equal. The Diagrams application then provides a fallback in form of a new spec search which will hopefully find a matching SPCO of the unequal type. In case this happens, it will be visible to the user in the way that the Bore question dialogue will appear twice.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.11.8
Refit
In case a bore size inconsistency has occurred, the Refit function can be used. This can for example happen when a reducer is inserted and the Propagate autofit setting is set to False. In the example above, the reducer has an input bore size of 100 and output of 80 while the downstream valve has a bore size of 100. Such inconsistencies can be found by using the Consistency Check function.
By using the refit function available on the shape right click menu, the specification reference for the valve will be re-selected using the upstream bore size.
After the Refit command has been performed, the valve now has a correct bore size and specification reference.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Depending on the propagation settings, the action will propagate downstream to a varying degree.
5.11.9
Specification Search on Existing Non-Specified Data There is a possibility to run Diagrams without a specification. To do that just turn off the ‘Use Specification’ setting i Diagrams Options.
The below layout is done using the ‘Use Specification’ setting set to False. This means that any dimensioning will be done using the Borearray attribute, and the PDMS specification will not be involved at this stage.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
For the above selected reducer the Borearray can be viewed in Custom Properties. To view it on the drawing select [borear] as Shape Text.
There are now two options: 1. Make no changes and let Integrator deal with 3D specifications during Build/ Compare operations. 2. Switch over to specification driven in Diagrams. To do that proceed as follows: 1. First change the ‘Use Specification’ setting in Diagrams Options to True.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
2. Next enter a Pipe specification in the Pipeline Properties dialog. This needs to be done for every SCPLIN. To do this for several lines in one go the Search Result or any other utility that allows bulking updates of database items may be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
To start the Specification Search, either right-click on each branch and do a Refit, as shown below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Or, go to the Shape Contextual Tab and perform a Spec Search.
The propagation settings in Diagrams Options will determine how far the specification search will continue along the piping network.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
By viewing the Message Log it is possible to follow up the changes made. Click on the message to select the corresponding item in the diagram.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
If there are any valves or fittings that cannot be found in the specification, then a warning message will be shown in the Message Log. These warning messages have to be dealt with manually.
To find any items that have not yet received a proper specification reference use the Find in Drawing toolbar and search for SPREF = “ ”. It is also recommended to do a Consistency Check to make sure it is all connected after the change from Borearray to specification driven.
5.12
Reverse Direction By using the Reverse Direction command, the direction of valves and fittings can be changed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Before Reverse Direction is performed, Arrive is 1 and Leave is 2. The Reverse Direction command is available on the shape right-click menu.
After Reverse Direction has been performed, the symbol has been reversed and Arrive and Leave have been exchanged.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Note: Reverse Direction only works on valves and fittings, which are Visio 2D shapes. In case the user wants to reverse the direction of a tube segment, which is a Visio connector, the standard Visio Reverse Ends command can be used. This command can be found under Shape Tab > Format > Orientation. An important difference between these commands is that Reverse Ends changes the flow direction, while Reverse Direction does not.
5.13
SpecSearch By using the SpecSearch command a re-setting of SPREF of piping elements can be performed. The functionality can be used e.g. for changing the specification for a whole segment (or branch or pipeline depending on the propagation settings) as the component selection is made from scratch and any existing search results or SPREF are not considered.
5.14
Splitting Pipelines One pipeline can be split into two by using the Pipe Splitter tool. This is available in the Pipes sample stencil delivered with the system. Drag the Pipe Splitter and drop it onto the position where the pipeline should be split.
The parts following the split point will now be re-organized into a new pipeline. Note: If the Pipe Splitter will not split the line as it is being dropped, try to zoom in and make sure that the hair cross is properly aligned with the line to be split. If the Show property dialogue on split default setting is True, the application will automatically show the pipeline properties dialogue for the newly created pipeline. This will give the user the opportunity to change attributes as for instance the description of the new pipeline.
5.15
Joining Pipelines To join two pipelines, first select the last part of a branch in the target pipeline, then Ctrl+Click to also select the first part in the source pipeline. Next use the Join Pipelines command to join the two pipelines together. All branches and inline parts will now be transferred from the source pipeline to the target pipeline and the now empty source pipeline will be deleted. Note: That the Join Pipeline command requires that the branches are not connected at the join point.
5.16
Consistency Check for Pipe The Consistency Check function can be used to check the consistency of the piping arrangements (please refer to Consistency Check in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.17
Line List Configuration The Line List Configuration command is available under the menu Admin Tab > Configuration > Line List Options. It brings up the dialogue for configuring rules used to calculate pseudo attributes for generating line lists from P&ID content. The Line List Configuration command is further described in chapter Line List Configuration in the Schematic Model Manager User Guide.
5.18
Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model As the user is working with the diagram, creating/deleting and connecting/disconnecting items, the application will attempt to keep a consistent data model. This includes the following functions: •
Automatic concatenation of branches. When the first or last element of a branch is connected to the first or last element of another branch in the same pipeline, the branches will be concatenated. This means that all inline fitting will be reorganised as members of the first branch, and the second branch will be deleted. This behaviour is controlled by the following setting; Diagrams Options > General options > System Configuration > Concatenate branches.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
5.19
When the last inline part within a segment is deleted, the segment will also be deleted. The same goes for branches. Because of this, the user will not have to consider this situation and there will never be any empty segments or branches left in the database.
Instrumentation This chapter describes instrumentation features that can be used to create control systems for piping diagrams.
5.19.1
Overview The Diagrams application allows the user to create low and high level control systems. There are a few special elements in the database that can be easily used to create a instrumentation data model. Those elements can be grouped into schematic loops and can be easily found and modified.
5.19.2 •
Elements Schematic Loop (SCLOOP) The Schematic Instrumentation LOOP is located at the same level as SCPLIN, which will be a root for a secondary hierarchy. Instruments and other piping components will have the capability to reference a SCLOOP and participate in the SCLOOP hierarchy (very similar to the SYSTEM hierarchy, but the SCLOOP will be in the schematic database).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
If a high level of detail is desired, it will be possible to model instrument lines in the same way as the main flow, using branches, tubes, valves and off-page connectors. All discrete components as well as structural elements will have the capacity to refer to a SCLOOP by SCLORE attribute, and thus, be a member in instrument loop hierarchies.
Figure 5:10. SCLOOP element in the tree explorer
All elements that are members of a schematic loop can be easily found and selected on the drawing. You can use one of the options from the context menu, Select in Drawing, Highlight or Zoom to. A typical loop is presented below:
Figure 5:11.
Typical instrument loop
The Offline instrument (CCH-0/TC) is controlling the temperature inside the reactor. If the temperature is too high/low, it gives a pneumatic signal via the tube to the actuator. The actuator is steering cooling stream via a valve. To create a new schematic loop the following dialogue is to be used:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:12. Instrument Loop (SCLOOP)
An existing Instrument Loop can be modified by the Instrument Loop Properties dialog. It is available in the context menu after right-clicking the Instrument Loop element in the Schematic Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:13. Instrument Loop Properties
SCILIN represents a Schematic Instrument Line in the data model. It is very similar to SCPLIN and should be used by those who prefer to have a high level of detail in their instrumentation model. SCILIN is able to refer to SCLOOP via the SCLORE attribute, similar to other instrumentation elements. SCILIN has the same member hierarchy as SCPLIN (SCBRAN, SCSEG etc.) and its primary hierarchy structure is the same as for SCPLIN.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
From the Home Tab > P&ID > Instrument menu an Instrument Line can be created as shown below:
The options here are the same as for pipeline. There is one additional option that allows to set schematic loop references for Instrument Lines.
•
Offline Instruments (SCOINS) SCOINS represents the Schematic Offline Instrument An Offline Instrument can be connected to: •
equipments
•
sub-equipments
•
other offline instruments
•
actuators
•
valves
•
fittings
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:37
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
tubes
•
ducts
•
HVAC fittings
•
nozzles
Note: Connection of offline instrument to nozzle is not supported by Schematic 3D Integrator and therefore will not be properly modelled in 3D. For that reason it is recommended to use inline instruments connecting to nozzles instead. To create an offline instrument: 1. First, drag an offline instrument shape from the stencil onto the drawing.
2. Second, drag the control handle and connect it to an inline fitting.
3. The instrument is now connected to the fitting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:38
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is also possible to have connection points on the off-line instrument, allowing control lines to be attached to it as can be seen in the example below:
It is also possible to connect two offline instruments directly, i.e. connect some alarms. To achieve this the connection points have to be added as shown below:
The offline instrument has to be dragged with the outward connection point to offline instrument with the inward connection point.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:39
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
Actuator Element (SCACTU)
SCACTU is representing a Schematic Actuator in the schematic database. Its attribute set and behaviour is very much like SCOINS and its primary owner is the same as for the SCOINS element. The differences between SCACTU and SCOINS are in: •
the item they represent
•
the element they can refer to
•
the way the user can manipulate them in the AVEVA Diagrams application.
SCACTU is able to refer (attach) to another inline component, such as SCVALV, SCFITT and SCINST. The SCOINS shape accomplishes this by using the Control Handle. On the contrary, the SCACTU has a an outwards connection point used to build up the reference in the diagram (SCNOZZ works similarly). Actuators can be connected to: •
equipments
•
sub-equipments
•
offline instruments
•
other actuators
•
valves
•
fittings
•
inline instruments
•
HVAC fittings
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:40
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to connect control lines for actuator behaviour managing.
5.19.3 •
Connection in Database Schematic Instrument Reference (SCIREF) Offline instruments and actuators can refer to other offline instruments, as well as equipments, actuators and other pipe components. This reference is called schematic instrument reference (SCIREF). There are pseudo attributes used for querying SCIREF as described below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:41
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Example:
SCIREF
Attribute executed on SCOINS, points to SCVALVE (returns all items that are connected via SCIREF).
SCIREL
Pseudo attribute executed on SCVALVE, points to SCOINS (returns all items where SCIREF points to this SCVALVE).
Note: There is one more pseudo attribute called SCEIRE that returns the sum of SCIREF and SCIREL. For Actuators and Offline Instruments there is a possibility to query on only references to elements of a particular type (process or instrumentation). To get such information the following pseudo attributes should be used: SCIPRE
Returns a list of all process elements (equipments, sub-equipments, nozzles and elements placed below SCPLIN) referenced by Actuator or Offline Instrument via SCIREF.
SCIIRE
Returns a list of all instrumentation elements (Actuators, Offline Instruments and elements placed below SCILIN) referenced by Actuator or Offline Instrument via SCIREF.
A list of corresponding connection types is returned by SCIPRT, for process connections, and SCIIRT, for instrumentation connections, pseudo attributes described in the next chapter.
•
Schematic Instrument Reference Type (SCIRTY) The type of SCIRTY connection (i.e. electrical, infrared, Bluetooth, ZigBee, hydraulic etc.) can be determined by using the SCIRTY attribute. This attribute is an array and has the same size as SCIREF. The available pseudo attributes for querying SCIRTY are described below: SCIRLT
Pseudo attribute returning all connection types that are linked with SCIREL.
SCIERT
Pseudo attribute returning all connection types that are linked with SCEIRE.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:42
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
SCIPRT
Returns a list of connection types for process connections of Actuator or Offline Instrument (connection types from SCIRTY which are corresponding with elements returned by SCIPRE).
SCIIRT
Returns a list of connection types for instrumentation connections of Actuator or Offline Instrument (connection types from SCIRTY which are corresponding with elements returned by SCIIRE).
The table in the following example illustrates possible data extracted by SCIREF and SCIRTY.
SCIREF of CCH-1 [DBREF]
SCIRTY of CCH-1 [WORD]
1
CCH-2
ELEC
2
CCH-11
ZIGB
... 10 Schematic instrument reference type is corresponding to schematic instrument reference where the same index. CCH-1 has two SCIREF connections. It is connected with offline instrument (CCH-2) via electrical interface and it is connected with actuator via the ZigBee interface.
5.19.4
Instrument Relationship Shape
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:43
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Instrument Relationship Shape does not represent a database element, but do represent a SCIREF between SCOINS and SCACTU. In the figure below, the dashed line represents a SCIREF from the SCOINS element at CCH-0 to the SCACTU representing the actuator at AT-12. The actuator has a SCIREF set to A150/Vv-002.
When Instrument Relationship Shape connects two valid items, it changes colour to ‘defined’. The colour can be determined in Diagrams Options:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:44
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
As mentioned earlier, Instrument Relationship Shape does not represent any database element but it can display information from a database element that is associated with its start. It has a little support for SCIRTY because it is representing a connection. This connection type can be set using the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. If the Text property is filled in, the Instrument Relationship Shape displays connection type value on drawing using SCIRTY attribute without index. The system will automatically find the correct one. In the figure below the offline instrument has SCIREF set to equipment and actuator. A connection between the equipment and offline instrument is achieved by the control handle which is using an infra red interface. A connection between the offline instrument and actuator is achieved by instrument relationship line which is using an electrical interface.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:45
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:14. Offline instrument is controlling a valve via actuator
It is possible to use a relationship shape to connect an Offline instrument or Actuator to any valid item. The connection point will be created automatically on the shape if connection is at all possible, therefore it is not necessary to create any additional points on a shape that should be connected, before using the shape. Note: Note that connection points that are designed for process lines cannot be used to connect to a relationship shape. For example, a two way valve has two connection points that should be connected to a process line. If a relationship shape is connected to one of them, Diagrams will automatically disconnect it and present a message in the message log.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:46
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The direction of the relationship shape is not important. You can connect an Offline Instrument to a Valve or a Valve to an Offline Instrument:
The result in the Database will be the same. The only one exception is connections between Offline instruments and Actuators. Because both elements have SCIREF attributes, the system will set SCIREF on the element that has the connected relationship shape starting part. In the below example Offline instrument A will point to Offline instrument B. (SCIREF of Offline instrument will refer to Offline instrument B)
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:47
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.19.5
High Level Detail The Instrument Relationship Shape can be replaced by more advanced structures. The scenario presented in figure Figure 5:14.: Offline instrument is controlling a valve via actuator can be realized using the SCILIN, if a higher level of detailing is desired. In that case, the instrument line is a full featured line consisting of branches and segments, similar to the main flow lines. This will also cater for using any inline style valves and/or fittings within the instrument line if needed. Since SCILIN has a SCLORE pointing to a loop, any member of the SCILIN inherits the loop membership.
If desired, individual fittings can have a direct SCLORE making them direct members of another loop. This may be the case when bridging between different systems and/or signal styles.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:48
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to create control lines from tubes, valves etc. Those elements are the same elements that are created under pipe lines. To distinguish between those two line types in the Diagrams application when importing shape, AVEVA Diagrams gives the user new types to select: 1. Instrument line - works similar to Pipeline, creates SCILINE element in database after drop. 2. Instrumentation branch - works similar to Branch, creates branch, segment and tube under SCILIN after drop. 3. Instrumentation tube - works similar to Tube, creates tube under segment.
All inline components (valves and fittings) have the same Visio shapes for two types of lines: pipelines and instrument lines. To distinguish them in the drawing it is possible to determine different colours for items defined under SCPLIN and items defined under SCILIN lines.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:49
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.19.6
Instrumentation Loop Options Items like actuators, offline instruments, inline components and tubes have an attribute called Schematic Loop Reference (SCLORE). Elements with this attribute can be assigned to any SCLOOP element. This is done by changing the value in the Custom Properties / Shape Data window, item list or by using the dialogue available from the Home Tab > P&ID > Instrument menu and context menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:50
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
There is an intelligent mechanism helping to keep connected elements in the same SCLOOP. When something is connected to an item that is a part of a control system and it has SCLOOP set already, the propagation mechanism will automatically set the SCLORE attribute to newly connected items. Moreover, if the SCLORE attribute is changed, the new value will be propagated to all connected items that have SCLORE unset or have previous SCLORE value set. Note: The Propagation mechanism does not support multiple SCLOOPs. If the previous value was multiple SCLOOP the propagation will not continue after the change. Additionally, propagation will stop on elements when: •
The item has SCLORE already set.
•
The item is not an instrument/process line member or equipment or sub-equipment.
•
The item has multiple SCLORE set.
All items propagated will be displayed in the System Message Log. Propagation behaviour can be defined via Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:51
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
There is an option called ‘Ask user for loop reference when connecting instrument loop’. When the instrument item is connected to another item that does not have SCLORE set, the system will automatically ask for SCLOOP.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:52
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
6
HVAC Diagrams In this chapter the special functions and procedures for the HVAC discipline are covered and it is of special interest to users creating HVAC diagrams.
6.1
Overview The application supports the creation of HVAC diagrams. This has a lot in common with the creation of piping diagrams, but with the following major differences: •
The dimensioning considers the shape factor (Rectangular, Round, Oval).
•
There is no automatic spec search.
To create HVAC diagrams, the HVAC mode should be used. This can be selected in the Project Tab menu. Before reading the HVAC diagrams documentation, it is recommended that you read the Pipe diagrams section. The documentation for HVAC diagrams primarily covers the differences compared to the piping diagrams functionality.
6.2
Creating HVAC Lines HVAC lines can be created by using the Home Tab > HVAC > Create HVAC Line command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
This dialogue is similar to the Create Pipeline dialogue, the most significant difference is in the Default Dimension tab. In this tab the Shape setting is available as well as Width and Height for using with the rectangular and oval shapes. For the circular shape, only the Width is available, which then represents the diameter.
6.3
HVAC Line Properties After a HVACline has been created, its properties can be viewed and changed by using the HVACline Properties command. This command is available through the right click menu in the explorer on HVAClines and their members, as well as through the right click menu for inline fittings in the drawing.
6.4
Creating Branches and Adding Parts Before a branch can be created, the Current HVACline must be selected. The Current HVACline can be seen in the Status Bar. To change the current HVACline, you can either select the HVACline or any item below it in the explorer, or you can select a duct or an inline fitting in the drawing which belongs to the desired HVACline. Parts are added in the same way as for piping, by dragging and dropping ducts and fittings to the drawing and connecting it together.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
6.5
Dimensioning The HVAC dimensioning considers the shape factor as well as the dimension. The shape factor is stored in the Conarray attribute, and the dimension in Heightarray and Widtharray. In case a circular shape is used, the diameter is stored in the Heightarray. When a branch shape is dropped on a drawing, the dimension will be picked up from the default dimensioning settings for the HVACline.
As HVAC fittings are added, they will pick up the dimension from the upstream component, provided that the Autoselect on Define default setting is True.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
As can be seen in the picture above, the fittings will by default get the same dimension for arrive and leave. Please note that the CON1 & CON2 annotations do not reflect arrive and leave, but rather connection1 and connection2. The behaviour of the dimensioning during the creation of HVAC diagrams can be controlled through a number of default settings that can be found under General options > HVAC Dimensioning: Default setting
Value
Description
Miscellaneous Autoselect on define
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when defined (dropped onto a free connection).
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when defining.
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when being connected.
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when being connected.
True
The component following the one that is being deleted will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component.
False
The component following the one that is being deleted will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component.
True
Autofit should be propagated to downstream components.
False
Autofit should not be propagated to downstream components.
Refit - Autofit on connect
Refit - Autofit on delete
Refit - Propagate autofit
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
Refit - Propagate at segment
Refit - Propagate at branch
Resize - Propagate at segment
Resize - Propagate at branch
6.6
True
Autofit propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over branch limits.
Resize The Resize command is available on the right click menu of the shape. It will bring up a dialogue where the leave size, and if applicable also the branching size can be set. Whether the result of the Resize operation should be propagated or not is controlled by the various propagation default settings.
Figure 6:1.
Resize dialogue
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
Figure 6:2.
6.7
After resizing
Refit In case a size inconsistency has occurred, the Refit function can be used. This can for instance happen when a dimension is changed and refit propagation is disabled (HVAC Dimensioning > Refit options set to False). Such inconsistencies can be found by using the Consistency Check function. The Refit function is available on the shape right click menu and will apply the upstream size to the current part.
6.8
Splitting and Joining HVAC Lines HVAC lines can be split and joined in the same way as pipelines.
6.9
Consistency Check for HVAC The Consistency Check function (please refer to Consistency Check in Chapter Working with Diagrams) can be used to check the consistency of a HVAC diagram and will provide messages for mismatches between diagrams against the database, dimensional mismatches and unconnected ends etc.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7
Cable Diagrams This chapter covers the special functions and procedures for the Cable discipline and is of special interest for users creating single line and core connections diagrams.
7.1
Overview The application supports the creation of single line cabling diagrams as well as core connection diagrams.
7.2
Single Line Cabling Diagrams There are two types of cable elements: •
Cables - connector shapes representing a single cable line.
•
Multi-cables - connector shapes representing a set of cables (refer to Working with Multi-cables for further information).
Both types listed above are created by dragging and dropping corresponding shapes from the stencil. Cables and Multi-cables can be connected to equipment items in four different ways: •
Connected to the centre point of the equipment item. This means that the shape representing the equipment item does not have to have any connection points defined.
•
Connected to a predefined connection point on the equipment item.
•
Connected to an electrical connection element on the equipment item.
•
By applying the Connection to Nested Symbol method (refer to Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol for further information.
For renaming cables there is a special Rename Chain function in the Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming > Rename Elements function (refer to Rename Elements in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Note: That you might have to refresh the shapes to update annotation etc. on the drawing, after the Rename operation is complete. Electrical equipment items can be created in the same way as other equipment items. See the Using Equipment and Subequipment in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs). For cabling diagrams, electrical connection elements can be used. These behave very much like piping nozzles, see Using Nozzles in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.3
Working with Multi-cables Multi-cable elements represent several cables with the same specification and are also connected to/from the same database item. In database, cables represented by a multicable shape, are placed below the corresponding Multi-cable db element. On the drawing, multi-cables are represented by single connector lines and can be created by dragging and dropping Multi-cable shapes from a stencil. Dropping Multi-cable on a page will result in creation of a new Multi-cable db element with a configurable number of db cables placed below it. The number of cables represented by Multi-cable is controlled via its SCQUAN attribute. It can be set in the Custom Properties / Shape Data window or directly on the command line. Connecting/disconnecting Multi-cable shapes to/from different db elements (equipments, sub-equipments, electrical connections) will cause changing STAREF/ ENDREF of Multi-cable and all cables below it. Changes to Multi-cable attributes, except NAME, will override changes to Cable attributes. Changes made in Multi-cable are propagated to its cable members. It is possible to set values of attributes of a particular cable by using the command line (except STAREF, ENDREF, CATREF), but the values will be overridden each time the same attribute will change on Multi-cable level.
Figure 7:1.
7.3.1
Example of using Multi-cable element
Naming Cables Owned by Multi-cable Cables owned by Multi-cable are named automatically and the names can not be edited directly. The names are consisting of three parts:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
•
Name of owning Multi-cable
•
Delimiter - configurable by SCDELIM attribute of Multi-cable
•
Ordinal character (numeric or alpha)
Ordinal character is controlled by SCALPHA and SCDIGITS attributes in the following way: SCALPHA determines whether ordinal character should be numeric (SCAPHA=false) of alphabetic (SCALPHA=true). Example 1: Attribute
Value
SCMCAB NAME
/XYZ
SCDELIM
'-'
SCALPHA
false
SCDIGITS
2
Result Cable names: Element
Name
SCCAB1
/XYZ-01
SCCAB2
/XYZ-02
Example 2: Attribute
Value
SCMCAB NAME
/XYZ_1
SCDELIM
Unset
SCALPHA
true
SCDIGITS
2 (ignored when SCALPHA=true)
Result Cable names: Element
Name
SCCAB1
/XYZ_1A
SCCAB2
/XYZ_1B
Note: The names of cables owned by Multi-cable will be generated automatically only when the name of the Multi-cable itself is set. Note: Each time SCDELIM, SCALPHA or SCDIGITS (when SCAPHA=false) is changed, the names of cables will be redefined.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.3.2
Presenting Multi-cables in Item List As any schematic elements present on a drawing, the Multi-cables are shown in the Item List. They are listed on a separate Multi-cables tab. Cable members can be shown on the Cables tab depending on the Show Multi-cable Members setting, which can be defined in the Diagrams Options window.
7.4
Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol One of the methods of connecting Cable or Multi-cable to equipment is connection using a nested symbol. It can be established as follows: •
By connecting the Cable element to a connection point on a symbol being part of Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical Connection group.
•
By dragging a symbol that is already connected to a Cable element into Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical connection group. To be able to use this option, the behaviour of the Containing Group should be set to Accept dropped shapes and nested symbol should be set to Add shape to group option.
Disconnecting a cable element from a symbol belonging to an equipment group, or dragging a symbol connected to a cable element out of an equipment group, will result in disconnection in db. To achieve this functionality the Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical connection should be converted to a group before importing a shape to the stencil.
7.5
Core Connections Definition Dialogue By first selecting one or more cables, and then issuing the Home Tab > Cable Cores > Define command, the core connections can be defined. In case other items than cables have been selected, these will be ignored.
Note: To select all cables in a drawing or cables according to a certain criteria, the Selection Toolbar can be used (refer to Find in Drawing Toolbar in Chapter Working with Diagrams. The Define Core Connections dialogue will contain one section for each cable. In the middle is the cable with its cores and to the left and right are the connected equipment items.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.5.1
Defining the Number of Cores The number of cores for a cable is fetched from the catalogue. If the Spref is already set, the correct number of rows will be shown for each cable, one for each core. In case the cable does not have any Spref, the application will not know how many cores the cable has and will therefore show a question mark in the Core column. It is possible to assign a Spref to a cable in the core connections dialogue by right-clicking on the cable name and selecting Set Catalogue Reference.
This will bring up a Catalogue Search dialogue, which works in the same way as the general Catalogue Search function (Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
When a cable catalogue item has been selected, the Cable Core Connection Definition dialogue will know how many cores the cable has got and will then show the corresponding number of rows.
7.5.2
Selecting Equipment In case the cable has already been connected to equipment items in the diagram, these equipment items will be shown in the Equipment columns to the left and to the right in the dialogue. If it has not been connected, it is possible to select an equipment item in the core connections dialogue by clicking on the text box and using the
button.
This will bring up the standard Browse/Search dialogue (Standard DB Browse Dialogue in Chapter Working with Diagrams) where an equipment item can be found and selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
The text box in the Equipment column also features a fill handle. By clicking and dragging on the grey box in the lower right corner, the selected equipment can be applied to other rows in the same way that the fill handle works in applications like MS Excel.
It is also possible to change the connected equipment item for a cable that has been connected to an equipment shape in the diagram. Changing the equipment item in this dialogue will only affect the core connections. The cable as such will still retain its connection to the equipment item, as defined in the diagram, and will not be affected. Theoretically it is possible to define all cores being connected to a different equipment item than the one that the cable is connected to, in the single line diagram.
7.5.3
Selecting Electrical Connection By clicking at the Text box in the Electrical connection column, an electrical connection (elconn) can be selected. The dropdown list will show all existing elconn elements for the selected equipment item. In case the equipment item does not have any or too few elconns, it is possible to add new ones by selecting the Add… command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
This will bring up the Create electrical connection dialogue, where the new electrical connection can be created and its attributes set. The Catalogue reference is of special importance as it will be used to determine how many terminals the elconn has.
The Electrical connection column also features a fill handle like the one described above for the Equipment column.
7.5.4
Selecting the Terminal for Each Core By clicking on the dropdown and using the fill handle in the terminal column, the actual core connection can be defined.
7.5.5
Configuring the Dialogue In the Diagrams Options, under the General Options > Dialogues, there are a number of values that can be set up to control the initial layout of the dialogue columns. The numbers are given as a percentage of the total dialogue width. By entering -1 as column width, the column will automatically adjust to the free width.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
Here it is also possible to configure tooltips to be shown in the dialogue. This can for instance be used to show the description of an equipment item when the mouse hovers over the equipment name. The format of the tooltip definition follows the Attribute Presentation Notation format, please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices for further information.
7.6
Generating Core Connection Diagrams After the core connections have been established using the Cable Core Connection Definition dialogue, the Generate Core Connections Diagram command can be used to create the connection diagram layout. This will be created as a new diagram that can be manually annotated, saved, printed etc.
The Diagrams application is delivered with a standard core connections diagram layout which can be considered a sample. As there is a wide variety of preferred layouts and many
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
companies have their own layout standards, the program source code for the Core Connections diagram generation is provided on the support site (www.aveva.com/support). It is therefore possible for customers to modify the layout by modifying the program code, or to create totally different layouts by creating new code, perhaps with some inspiration from the standard sample. The program code is contained within the following c# source files: • CableInfo.cs • CoreInfo.cs • Commands.cs • CoreConnectionsDiagram.cs • CoreConnectionsDiagramAddin.cs These can be found in the installation in folder
C:\AVEVA\Marine\OH12.1.SP4\Samples\Samples.zip. Microsoft Visual Studio is required to modify and rebuild the Add-in.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Reporting
8
Reporting The Diagrams application offers different types of reports of schematic data for various purposes. These are as follows: •
Visio reports: This is the standard MS Visio report function and can be used to create reports based on diagram document data. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information. This command is available in the Tools Tab > Reporting > Visio Reports menu.
•
Reports: This is the standard AVEVA reporting tool which can create reports from database data and is also available in the other PDMS applications. In the Tools Tab > Reporting > Reports > Reports sub-menu there are commands for running, creating, modifying and deleting reports. Please refer to the General / Reporting Reference Manual for more information on this reporting tool.
•
Quick Reports: This is the standard AVEVA quick reporting tool and is available in the Tools Tab > Reporting > Reports > Quick Reports menu. Please refer to the Catalogues and Specifications User Guide / Quick Reports Form for more information.
•
Spreadsheet export: This is available on the right click menu in the Item List (please refer to Item List in Chapter Working with Diagrams) and can be used to create equipment lists, fitting lists, cable lists etc. from the current drawing. This is further described in Export in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
Figure 8:1.
The reports menu
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
8:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Reporting
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
8:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9
Releasing Information for 3D This chapter includes information about managing the relation with 3D data and is of interest to most users when the link to 3D through the Schematic 3D Integrator is used.
9.1
Overview To support the workflow between diagram designers and 3D model designers, Diagrams includes some functions to manage the release of information to 3D. These are as follows: •
Setting the Release Status.
•
Highlighting and Visualizing Release and Linked-to-3D status.
•
Warnings and Restrictions for Released and Linked-to-3D items.
Diagrams supports a Release status that can be set or re-set through the application and serves as a flag to the 3D designers that the diagram data is now complete and approved and can be used as a base for 3D modelling. When related 3D data is created through the Schematic 3D Integrator, a link between 2D schematic items and corresponding 3D items will be established in the database. These items are then considered to be linked, and this is represented by a linked-to-3D status attribute. If items have been linked they can be considered as being picked up and re-used by the 3D designers. The release status can be set on database items in a flexible way, among these is to set the release status for all items in a diagram. However, the diagram document as such does not have a release status and will not be managed in this way. The release status is represented by the RESTAT attribute in the database. A value of 1 means that the item is released, and a value of 0 means that it is not released. The diagram documents are made available to 3D design users as SVG files, created for each foreground page on the drawing. This can then be used for viewing the diagram without the need for having MS Visio installed. The SVG file name for a particular page can be found by querying the NVIEWF(N) pseudo attribute on the SCDIAG element, where N is a number of a page. Depending on the ‘Create SVG on Save Work’ setting available in Diagrams Options>General Options>System configuration>SVG, the files can be created automatically on Save Work for every drawing, for pages containing data released to 3D only or if the setting is set to ‘Never’ the SVGs will have to be created manually using the Release Diagram to 3D function. If this function is used, then all items on pages the SVGs are created for are released to 3D. For more information please see Save Work and SVG Creation in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9.2
Setting the Release Status Setting the release status can be done in two ways, using the Set Release Status dialogue or Release Diagram to 3D. The Release Diagram to 3D dialogue provides functionality to release all items on selected pages and to create SVG files for the pages to make them available for Design. For more information please see Save Work and Save As in Chapter Working with Diagrams.The Set Release Status dialogue provides the possibility to release individually selected items as well as whole drawings. It can be opened in different contexts and parts of the user interface providing a flexible way of selecting the items to be released. The dialogue is available: •
By right-clicking on items in the Schematic Explorer.
•
By right-clicking on items in the System Explorer.
•
By selecting one or more objects in the drawing and using the Home Tab > Object > Release command or using the shape right click menu.
•
By right clicking on the drawing background (this will release all items on all pages in the current drawing).
The release status can be set individually for: •
Equipment
•
Sub-equipment
•
Cables
•
Multi-cables
•
Offline instruments
•
Actuators
•
Segments
For piping and HVAC, the lowest level that can be released is a segment. Nozzles and Elconns will be released together with their parent equipment/subequipment item. When the Set Release Status command is issued, a dialogue will be shown to the user. In this dialogue it is possible to see the current release status of the selected items as well as set or reset the status of the selection or individual items.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
When the dialogue is opened, the current release status is shown. If the item is already released, you will see a green checkmark in the box in front of the item. For hierarchically superior items, there is also a green checkmark if all subordinate items are released. If only some of the subordinate items are released, there will instead be a green box shown. After the type, name and description of the item, the date and user that released it is also listed. To set the release status, click the boxes. If a box on a high level is checked, all subordinate items will also be checked, the same applies if you uncheck a box. As well as setting the release status, it is also possible to reset it here, simply by unchecking the boxes. This means that items that were earlier released now no longer are released. This enables the user to make changes to already released items and these changes can be detected by the Schematic 3D integrator application. Once the changes are complete, the release status can be set once again. The dialogue also includes a Comment field which can be used to enter a release comment to be applied to the items. Depending on how the Set Release Status command was activated, the dialogue will show a different hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Group Context window which will be displayed when a schematic group has been selected in the explorer. The dialogue now shows the complete hierarchy below the group node.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Objects Context window which will be displayed when one or more objects have been selected in the explorer or in the drawing. The dialogue now only shows parts of the hierarchy covering the selected items. If for instance a piping or HVAC branch has been selected, the explorer only shows that branch, even if the pipeline might have other branches.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Diagram Context window which will be displayed when the user has right clicked an SCDIAG element in the explorer or on the drawing background. The dialogue now shows all items in the current drawing. In case the drawing contains parts of a pipeline (branches or segments) while other parts of the pipeline are represented in other drawings, the explorer only shows the parts of the pipeline that are on the current drawing.
9.3
Visualizing Release and Link to 3D Status By using the Home Tab > Object > Release drop down > Visualize Release and Link to 3D Status command, the items in the current drawing page can be highlighted or selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9.4
Warnings and Restrictions In case the user will try to modify or delete an item that has been released or associated, messages will be shown and restrictions can apply.
9.4.1
Released but not Linked Items
The dialog above will be shown when an item which is released but not linked is modified. If the user clicks OK, the modification will be applied to the item and the release status will be reset. If the user wants to release the item to 3D again, he/she will have to use the Set Release Status function again. If the Cancel button is clicked, any changes will be undone.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
If the user tries to delete one or more items that are released but not linked, the dialogue above will be shown. If the user clicks OK, the item(s) will be deleted, otherwise the user should click Cancel.
Also if the user opens the Pipeline Properties / HVACline Properties dialogues, a warning will be issued.
9.4.2
Released and Linked Items For items that are released AND linked, similar dialogues as above will be shown. However, depending on the value of the Allow changes to linked with 3D default setting, changes and deletions will be either allowed or not.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10
Utilities This chapter describes miscellaneous utilities that can be useful to most users.
10.1
Batch Job By using the Batch Job function, a selection of diagrams can be checked and printed in one operation.
To the left, the contents of the database can be navigated using the Database Tree tab and searched using the Search tab. This part of the dialogue behaves more or less like the general Browse Dialogue (please refer to the Standard DB Browse Dialogue in Chapter Working with Diagrams), with the difference that it contains checkboxes for multiple selection in the tree view. In the search view, multiple diagrams can be selected by using normal Shift+Click and Ctrl+Click.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Items can be added to the selection in the right side of the dialogue by using the Add button and removed using the Remove button. The selected diagrams can then be consistency checked and printed by using the buttons at the bottom of the dialogue.
10.1.1 •
Batch Update Overview The Batch update function is used to update many drawings in one go without opening them separately. The option is available in the Batch Job dialogue below.
Figure 10:1. Batch job form
Before proceeding, select the diagrams that are to be updated. After selecting the diagrams click the Update Diagrams button.
•
Batch Update Options The Batch update function also makes it possible to choose options that will be updated on selected diagrams. Available options are presented in Figure 10:2.: Update Diagrams Options Form below. The options will be described further later on in this chapter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:2. Update Diagrams Options Form
•
Select Updated Masters A new shape is created each time you drag and drop a new symbol from an external stencil (e.g. ‘Sample_Fitting_Symbols.vss’) into the drawing. In addition it creates a new master on the Document stencil (Figure 10:3.: Document Stencil). After dropping the symbol the direct link between the Shape and its original master located on the external stencil is broken. However, each master has a BaseID and a UniqueID.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:3. Document Stencil
The following example will explain the difference between a BaseID and a UniqueID: A BaseID is assigned to a master when it is created. The valve has been dropped on to the page from the ‘Sample_Valve_Symbols’ stencil. As a result of this operation the new master will be created in the Document Stencil. Both masters (on the document and Sample_Valve_Symbols stencils) will have the same BaseID and UniqueID. If one of the masters is changed the UniqueID will also change but the BaseID will remain the same. For more information refer to the Microsoft Visio documentation. If modifying masters items on external stencils and applying changes to shapes, which were created by dropping these masters, those masters need to be selected. To do that click the Select master shapes to use for update button in Figure 10:2.: Update Diagrams Options Form. The following dialog will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:4. Select Masters to Update
The dialogue above contains three windows: Stencils, Masters and Masters to update. These windows will be empty at start up. Click the Add Stencil button to add a stencil that contains modified masters. These added stencils will be shown in the Stencils window. In the Masters window the masters that belong to a selected stencil are displayed. Only the masters in the Masters to update window will be used during the update operations. To add masters to the Master to update window, use drag and drop or the right-click context menu. If the Add all check box is checked all masters from all stencils will be added. To remove masters from the Master to update window select right-click on a master or use the Delete key on the keyboard.
Figure 10:5. Deleting Masters to update
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The number of selected masters will be visible in brackets in the Update Diagrams Option dialogue as shown below.
Figure 10:6. Number of selected masters
•
Update Symbols According to Master Shapes This option replaces the shape symbols if the shape master, that is located in the document master, has a different UniqueID than the master with the same BaseID that was selected. Note that all cells from the shape data section with a value set in the new master will be copied to the shape in the drawing. This might trigger an attribute change. For more details please read Changing Symbols for Existing Items in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Update Symbols According to Catalogue Information This option replaces symbol shape according to data in the specification. Symbol from SPREF will replace the existing one when:
•
•
the SPREF attribute points to an element that have SYMGROU and SYMNAME attributes
•
SYMGROU points to a valid stencil and SYMNAME points to a valid master.
Update Annotation Formats When this option is checked it is possible to update auto labels and presentation text according to the diagrams settings or master settings. There are four different scenarios: 1. If a master was selected then labels and text rule is taken from the master instance. 2. When the master is not selected then the system will check if the shape that should be updated inherited its setting from the master or the default. 3. If settings were derived from the master and this master is not selected then some shape settings will not be updated. 4. If settings were derived from the diagram’s default settings then the system will update them. Note: Title blocks and multi-labels require the master to be selected because there is no setting for this in Diagrams Options. Note: If an auto-label is deleted from a shape after the update the label might not be added. The reason for this is that the system remembers that this label was previously deleted. To add an auto-label use the option Ignore stencil settings or select the correct master. Note: It is possible to preserve the position of a particular auto-label shape during the update. The position will not be modified if the Keep Position function in the RightClick contextual menu of this auto-label shape is checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
Update Attribute Presentation Settings This option is for updating the Shape Data (Custom Properties) order, presentation texts, visibility etc. according to Diagrams default options or master setting. This option can be controlled globally for each type separately by checking ‘Allow individual shape to override default settings’.
Figure 10:7. Allow individual shape settings to override default settings
When this option is unchecked the shapes will be updated according to the diagrams default settings. Otherwise data from the selected master will be used. If the master was not selected, the system checks if a shape that should be updated retrieved its settings from the master or the default. If the settings were taken from the master and the master was not selected then the shape will not be updated. If the settings were taken from the diagrams default settings then the system will update the shape. During update all Shape Data (Custom Properties) that exist in the shape instance but does not exist in the current settings will be removed. The only exception from this rule is a situation where other cells depends on it. When this is the case, the system will not delete it but will display a warning that other cells are using this data. See the following example: A shape has two shape data before update: •
Text
•
Instrument Type
This will be displayed as in the following figure.
Figure 10:8. Shape data before update
The next step is to modify the settings to hold only one set of shape data: •
Text
Click Update. This can result in two scenarios: 1. The Instrument type was removed according to the current setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:9. After update unnecessary shape data were removed
2. The instrument type remains. This is because other cells are using its value. In this case there will be a warning issued in the report.
Figure 10:10. After update the Instrument type remains
Warning message: ‘This update will not set any default values to new shape data.
•
Refresh Shapes If this option is checked it will make a call to refresh each shape.
•
Ignore Stencil Settings Some options require the selection of masters to execute the updates properly. This is because the data was retrieved from them. However, there might be situations where this will not be possible or instead the diagrams settings should be used. In these cases this option should be checked. When it is checked, the system will update the shapes according to the global settings. Note: This setting will not work for the autolabels layer. The layer for autolabel is taken from the master that is used to create autolabel.
•
Update of the Diagram After clicking the Update! button the system will start updating the diagrams. Each column corresponds to an according update option. There is one more extra column called Update drawing. This option is obligatory to execute. It will upgrade the shapes to the newest versions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
.
Figure 10:11. Upgrade Diagram Status
When all the steps are finished more details can be viewed by clicking the link label:
Figure 10:12. Upgrade details
Information can be selected and copied to the clipboard. To save the report to a file, click the Save Report button on the Update Diagrams Status form. To load a saved report, use the Load Log button on the Update Diagrams Options form.
10.1.2
Batch Consistency Check The Consistency Check function will go through each of the selected diagrams and run a consistency check on them.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The result summary for each diagram is reported in the Errors, Warnings and Informational columns, as well as represented by the icon before the diagram name. The progress for each diagram can be seen in the Progress Bar as well as in the status text below it. By using the Stop button, the Check function can be cancelled. In case the user wants to further investigate any of the issues found in a diagram, it is possible to select the diagram and use the Open Diagram button. The diagram will then be opened in the background, and after the dialogue is closed, the Consistency Check function can be used to create a detailed report of the issues with that diagram.
10.1.3
Batch Print By clicking the Print button in the batch job dialogue, a Print dialog will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
In the Print dialog it is possible to select the following: •
Which printer to use
•
Number of copies
•
Print colour as black
•
Printer paper size and aspect
•
Zoom settings
When the OK button is clicked, all pages of all selected diagrams will be printed on the selected printer. Note: It is possible to print to PDF without an installed PDF printer. To achieve this click Export to PDF instead of the Print button on the Batch Job form, see Batch Job.
10.2
Project Maintenance
10.2.1
Clean Old Session Files The Diagrams application provides a tool for removing old document session files from a project. It is available from the menu Admin Tab > Admin Tools > Project Maintenance and can be used when the Keep session files setting (KEEP_SESSION_FILES) in Diagrams Options is set to False. After selecting it from the menu, the dialogue window is opened and provides the possibility to select the document types to clean:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
After clicking OK the following confirmation dialogue is displayed:
After clicking the Yes button all old session files connected with DB elements (of selected types) existing in the current MDB are removed. Only the files that are related with the most recent version of each element will be kept. Files that are not connected with any SCDIAG, SCTEMP or SCSTEN from the current MDB are not considered to avoid accidental deleting of important files. Note: Cleaning old session files allows saving disc space in the case that there is no need to keep previous documents versions, but after performing the operation it will not be possible to restore earlier sessions including the corresponding diagram file versions. Note: Using the Clean Old Session Files function will only remove Visio and SVG files related to old sessions, it will not remove the actual dabacon DB settings. To remove the sessions from the DB, use the Merge Changes function in Admin.
10.3
AVEVA Compare/Update Compare/Update in AVEVA Diagrams can be used to compare and update from the AVEVA data sources. From the Manage Tab select Integration > Compare / Update / Link.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:13. View Menu
For more information please refer to the Compare/Update User Guide.
10.4
DWG Export DWG Export is a tool for exporting Visio drawings to DWG format. The DWG Export tool is available in Project Tab > Import and Export > Export > DWG Export.
During the export process the tool reads Visio geometry and styles information and creates corresponding DWG objects that the best fit Visio components. Whole component corresponding geometry objects are exported as blocks with component attributes as block attributes. Then blocks inserts are creating DWG file geometry. The existing background page of the Visio drawing is exported as one block named ‘Background’. All additional texts corresponding to the Visio component are exported separately as MTexts and grouped with blocks. It makes editing texts easier and available without block exploding.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.4.1
Visio Drawing Items Compatibility Geometry: Supported:
Line Arc EllipticalArc Polyline Ellipse
Unsupported:
NURBS, Spline, Infinities
Note: If some unsupported shape geometry will be found, a proper message will be displayed in the Message Log. Foreign object: Supported:
All COM objects (Excel) Ink Pictures
All these objects are exported as raster images. Set the AutoCAD option ImageFrame to 0 to disable frames for pictures attached to a dwg file. Lines Option: Supported:
Weight Colour Pattern (patterns depend on user Diagrams.lin file definition). Ends
Unsupported:
Round corners, Transparency, Caps Note: Shapes with transparency line set to 100% will be exported like shapes with "NoLine" set to True in its geometry sections.
Fill options: Supported:
Foreground colour Solid fill Patterns from 2 to 7
Unsupported:
Other patterns, Shadow, Transparency, Patterns with defined background colour.
Texts:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Supported:
System fonts Text formatting; Size, Colour, Italic, Bold, Underline, Alignment, Margins, Paragraph Line Spacing.
Unsupported:
Visio line braking (DWG uses a different algorithm), Case (Caps), Position, Strikethrough, Transparency, Character Spacing, Paragraph Indentations, Paragraph Before/After Spacing, Background Colour, Vertical Text, Bullets, Tabs.
Data:
Supported:
Shape Data (component attributes become block data).
Layers:
Supported:
Active Page Layers, Background(s) layers. Shape ‘Layer Membership’ Layer property: Colour
Unsupported:
Layer properties: Visible, Print, Active, Lock, Snap, Glue.
Note: There are some differences between DWG and the original Visio format. If a Visio shape geometry is an open contour or the filled area is defined by more that one geometry, it is not possible to fill it using hatch in DWG format. An example of this is the AVEVA logo from the default diagrams background which is exported with incorrect fill in some of the letters.
10.4.2 •
User Interface Main Form After running Dwg export, the Dwg export docked window will show on the Diagrams main form. With every first run of this add-in, there will be export settings from DiagramsCadExport.xml file located in the application directory. The Export window has four operating buttons (see Figure 10:14.: Dwg export window) and two tabs. The tabs
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
are described further in Settings Tab and Lines Map Tab below. Operating buttons: Dismiss
Closes the Dwg export window
Load
Loads settings from DiagramsCadExport.xml file
Save
Saves settings to DiagramsCadExport.xml file
Export
Runs export
Figure 10:14. Dwg export window
10.4.3
Settings Tab The Settings tab, in the Dwg export window above, contains general settings for export like: •
Export location - path to exported DWG file. On the right hand side there is a button for choosing the right path from the dialog. If full path is not used, the export will create the DWG file in the %PDMSEXE% directory
•
DWG version - option to fit valid version of exported DWG file. Available DWG versions:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
•
•
Release 14
•
AutoCAD 2000/2000i/2002
•
AutoCAD 2004/2005/2006
•
AutoCAD 2007/2008/2009 (default)
•
AutoCAD 2010
Exported shapes - option with shape collection manners for exported diagram. •
Page (default) - collects all shapes from the active page and background page(s).
•
Selected - collects all selected shapes from the active page and all from the background page, if the background page is not the active page. The order of selection determines the order of export.
Units - option for choosing metric or imperial units to be used in the DWG file. Available units:
10.4.4
•
Millimetres - measurement - Metric.
•
Inches (default) - measurement - Imperial.
Lines Map Tab Lines Map contains pairs of Visio lines types and DWG line patterns that shows line type representation in DWG after export. Available DWG lines are defined in the Diagrams.lin file. A description of how to define DWG line patterns can be found in Creating Line Patterns below. The Lines Map tab (Figure 10:15.: Lines Map) contains the following controls: •
Line types table- table with corresponding lines patterns from Diagrams to DWG.
•
New - add new rows to the map table.
•
Delete - delete selected rows from the map table.
•
Default - option to choose default DWG pattern.
•
Refresh - refreshes DWG patterns list. Refresh must be used every time the Diagrams.lin file is changed so that the DWG line patterns will be available in the lines map grid.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:15. Lines Map
10.4.5
Layers Tab The Layers tab contains a set of DWG layer properties; Colour, Line Width and Line Pattern. If the Line Pattern box ByLayer is ticked, every shape that belongs to the specific layer will have the corresponding property set to ByLayer. This means that the value in the layer property will control that of the shape(s). The Refresh button refreshes layers from the active diagram. The Layers Map tab (Figure 10:16.: Layers Tab) contains the following controls: •
Layers settings table
•
Refresh button - refreshes layers from the diagram.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:16. Layers Tab
10.4.6
Configuration - DWG Export Settings When DwgExport starts, all settings are loaded from the DiagramsCadExport.xml configuration file. While loading the settings, the application is looking for the DiagramsCadExport.xml file in the following locations: 1. First in the Diagrams sub-folder in of directory pointed by %DFTLS% environment variable is checked. 2. If the file was not found in the first location, then the application is searching for the settings file in the Diagrams sub-folder in %PDMSDFLTS%. 3. In case the DiagramsCadExport.xml file is not found in the above locations, the default settings from the installation directory (%PDMSEXE%) will be used.
10.4.7
Creating Line Patterns The default Diagrams.lin file with DWG patterns definitions is placed in the %PDMSEXE% directory. This is a text file, so it can be edited using a text editor like Notepad. This file can be exchanged with another line pattern file directly in the operating system. It is possible to have project-specific patterns. To achieve this the modified Diagrams.lin file should be placed in the Diagrams sub-directory in the location pointed out by %DFLTS%. The systems is searching for the
patterns file in the following order;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
1. %DFLTS%/Diagrams 2. %PDMSDFLTS% 3. %PDMSEXE% One pattern consists of two lines. The first line contains the name and description and uses the following syntax: *name,description The Second line starts with A,. It indicates the beginning of the linetype pattern:
A,pattern A simple pattern is a sequence of dashes, dots or spaces separated by commas: •
Dash - is represented by a positive number.
•
Space - is represented by negative number.
•
Dot - is represented by zero.
Example 1: A simple linetype definition containing dashes:
*myLine1,- - - - - - - A,1,-1
Example 2: A simple linetype definition containing dashes and dots:
*myLine2,- . - . A,1,-0.5,0,-0.5
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
To define the linetype that includes text characters, some parameters must be defined: •
"text" - text to display (must be defined)
•
textstylename - used text style (must be defined)
•
scale - the scale or height of the text
•
rotation - rotation angle of the text
•
xoffset - X offset from the end of the previous space
•
yoffset - Y offset from the end of the previous space
The text specification is enclosed in square brackets "[]" and each item is separated by commas ",":
["text",textstylename,scale,rotation,xoffset,yoffset] Note: textstylename - should be ACAD embedded text style name, .shx files are unsupported. Example 3: Line type definition with text character:
*myLine3,- B - B - B A,1,-0.5,["B",STATNDARD,S=0.4],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 4: Line type definition with rotated text character:
*myLine4, - B - B - B -
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
A,1,-0.5,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,R=18],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 5: Line type definition with moved text character:
*myLine5, - B - B - B A,1,-0.5,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,X=0.2,Y=0.3],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 6: Line type definition with text character above continuous line:
*myLine6, -B-B-B-B-BA,1,-0,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,Y=0.3]
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Example 7:
*FLOWDIR, -->---->-A,1,-0,[">",STANDARD,S=0.1,R=0,Y=-0.05]
10.5
DGN Export DGN Export is designed for exporting Visio drawings to DGN format. The File menu contains a DGN Export option under the Export submenu. After selecting the option, the main window for export settings will be shown. The Export button is only active if a Diagrams drawing is opened. Settings can be loaded and saved in DiagramsDGNExport.xml file stored in the Diagrams settings folder (project defaults or global defaults).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.5.1
DGN Export - Settings Tab
The Settings tab contains the following controls: •
Export location - the location where the exported file should be saved.
•
Exported shapes - it is possible to export a whole page or selected object.
•
Units - exporting can be done in inches or millimetres.
•
Use Shared Cells - when this box is ticked it is allowed to use shared cells in the produced drawing.
•
Use Nested Cells - when this box is ticked it is allowed to use nested cells in the produced drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
Export Attributes as Tags - in combination with the Use Nested Cells box this allows for including shape attributes in the produced drawing
•
Export Embedded Objects - This is for allowing export of references/attachments. DGN can then be exported with OLE files and bitmaps.
•
Seed file name - The seed file (contains default settings and attributes) will be opened and Diagrams data will be added to it.
•
Line type and font libraries - This is a list of libraries to use with mapping. To control the contents of these lists, you may do modifications in DiagramsDGNExport.xml.
To finalize the export load the libraries for mapping, save and load the settings in the project folder and start the export.
10.5.2
DGN Export - Lines Map Tab
This tab is used for line mapping. As line style definitions can be stored directly in DGN, in DGNlib files or in line style libraries (RSC), library styles must be loaded with the Load for mapping button, on the Settings tab, after a selection change.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Some custom Diagrams line styles may be used in the current diagram. Use the Reload button to be able to map line styles to them. If there are line styles in the drawing that are not mapped, the drawing will be exported using the default line styles. Note: Shapes with transparency line set to 100% will be exported like shapes with "NoLine" set to True in its geometry sections.
10.5.3
DGN Export - Fonts Map Tab
This tab is used to define font mapping. As font definitions can be stored in RSC libraries, the libraries must be loaded with the Load for mapping button, on the Settings tab, after a selection change. Some custom Diagrams fonts may be used in the current diagram. Use the Reload button to be able to map fonts to them.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.5.4
DGN Export - Levels Tab
The Levels tab contains a set of DGN layer properties; colour, line width and line pattern. Every property has a check box to mark if every shape that belongs to the specific layer should have the corresponding property set to ByLevel. This means that if checked, the value in the levels table will control that of the shape(s). The Refresh button refreshes layers from the active diagram. Note: If some elements in the diagram are altered by the level setting and no specific check boxes in the Levels tab are checked, the output DGN will be different from the diagram. Elements are exported with their local shape format, not layer override, by default.
10.5.5
The Settings File The Settings file contains the first tab settings and the mapping settings. The nodes DGNvariety and RSCvariety contain filters on files to be displayed in two library lists. The DGNvariety collection will be displayed in the first list and the RSCvariety collection will be displayed in the second list. The node DGNSeedFiles is a filter for seed files displayed in the seed file drop-down box.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Filter nodes can contain wildcards, environment variables along with fully extended file paths. Additionally, the settings file contains the line style factor in the node LineStyleFactor. This is used when applying a line style to an element. The line style factor is set to 0.05 by default.
•
Example of a Settings File %PDMSEXE%\dgndata\*.RSC %PDMSEXE%\dgndata\*.DGN %PDMSEXE%\dgndata\*.DGNLIB %PDMSEXE%\dgndata\pdmsSeed2d.dgn <PatternsMap> <PatternPair>
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
CAD Drawing Connector unknown library <Scalable>true 0 <ExportPath>C:\temp\ <ExportedShapes>Page Inches 0.05 <UseNestedCells>false <ExportAttributesAsTags>false <ExportEmbedded>false <UseSharedCells>false
10.5.6
Language Customisation The DGN Export form is available for local specific resource selection. This can be achieved by the standard AVEVA Resource Editor. The resource file name for DGN Export is DiagramsDGNExportText.resources.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.6
Publishing Data to AVEVA NET
10.6.1
Availability of Publishing Function The function for publishing Diagrams data to AVEVA NET is available from the following locations in Diagrams: 1. Right-clicking on a diagram in the Schematic explorer:
A dialog to choose which pages to publish will be shown. By default, all pages in the diagram will be checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
2. Right-clicking on the current page of an open diagram:
A dialog to choose which pages to publish will be shown. By default, only the currently selected page will be checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
3. New button, Publish, in Batch Job function.
When using the Batch Job function, all pages on each diagram will be published. 4. Checkbox in Release to 3D function.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
5. From the Ribbon menu Manage Tab > Integration > Publish to AVEVA NET command:
10.6.2
SaveWork When publishing a diagram to AVEVA NET, the diagram must not contain any unsaved changes. The system will prompt for save work if needed.
10.6.3
Configuration Tool The Configuration Tool dialog is available from Admin Tab > Configuration > AVEVA NET. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway.
10.6.4
Publishing from PML The SCDIAG database elements can be published to AVEVA NET using PML. The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. For more information and usage examples please see Publishing from Diagrams via PML chapter.
10.7
Publishing from Diagrams via PML This object can be used as an interface to Diagrams using PML. It enables the following: •
export drawings to the SVG file(s)
•
publish SCDIAG database elements to AVEVA NET.
The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. The sample usage might look like below:
•
Sample Usage (Publish to AVEVA NET): import 'Aveva.Diagrams' using namespace 'Aveva.Diagrams' !tool = object PMLDiagrams() !tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') The input parameter is a Diagram name. By default publishing will use Diagrams configuration settings. However, the PublishToAVEVANET method is overloaded and gives the possibility to publish diagrams with different deliverables. The deliverables that might be used are available on the list in the Publish To AVEVA NET Configuration dialog. The dialog is available from Admin Tab > Configuration > AVEVA NET. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The sample usage might look like below:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom','DiagramsHVAC') •
Sample Usage (Export to SVG) import 'Aveva.Diagrams' using namespace 'Aveva.Diagrams' !tool = object PMLDiagrams() !tool. ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') The input parameter is a diagram name. In case of any exporting error it throws a PMLException. There is also a global PML function available which uses the PMLDiagrams object and the method mentioned above. It handles any PMLExceptions by printing the error message in the console window. This PML function returns the Boolean value True if export has been completed successfully, or False in case of any errors. The sample usage might look like below:
!!ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') •
Error Handling: If something goes wrong the PMLDiagrams object will throw a PMLNetException that can be handled in PML like below:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') handle any !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
If needed, it is possible to filter exceptions by using module 98 and error code 1 i.e.:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') handle(98,1) !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle The .ExportToSVG method throws PMLExceptions with module number 98 and code 2.
!tool.ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') handle(98,2) !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle The error message might be different, depending on the problem.
•
The Interface has the Following Methods: Methods
10.8
Name
Result
Purpose
PublishToAVEVANET(STRING DiagramName)
No Result
Publishes SCDIAG to AVEVA NET.
PublishToAVEVANET(STRING DiagramName, STRING DeliverableName)
No Result
Publishes SCDIAG to AVEVA NET with specific deliverable.
ExportToSVG(STRING DiagramName)
No Result
Exports SCDIAG to the SVG file(s).
Design Reuse It is possible to copy Diagrams or any database elements between projects using the Design Reuse tool. With this tool database elements can be exported to the files in the local file system. They are called the Transfer Set, and can later be imported by the same tool.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11
Schematic Model Viewer
11.1
Overview The Schematic Model Viewer allows users to view the contents of the schematic model database independently of diagram layouts. It provides a continuous navigable view of equipment items and the interconnecting networks, independently of which system they belong to or which P&ID they have been drafted on. The ConnMapAddin with Schematic module is implemented as a CAF Add-in, meaning that it can be hosted by different applications. The viewer will also require access to a SCHE DB as part of the current MDB.
Figure 11:1.
Sample Model Map results
To start the viewer, the user will have to select an equipment item. This item will be placed at the centre of the generated view and the system will automatically find all connections in the database and display each connection as a graphical sub tree. Each sub tree is traversed through all branches until other equipment items or branch ends are encountered. Branching points (such as Tees, Owlets or 3-way valves) are represented by a generic branching point symbol. The initially generated view will not extend beyond the equipment items encountered at the end of the branches, but it is possible for the user to manually expand and continue exploring along the schematic network. Equipment items are displayed using different symbols, selected by a set of customer definable rules.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.2
Starting the Viewer The viewer can be started in a few different ways, depending on the possibilities of the hosting application: Start method
Available in
Click the New Schematic Model View button in the Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar.
All hosting applications where the Schematic Model Viewer is available.
Select an equipment item in the explorer, right click and choose the Create Schematic Model View command.
All applications where the schematic explorer is used.
Select an equipment item in the Diagram Drawing, right click and choose the Create Schematic Model View command.
Marine Diagrams application only.
and
Cable
Diagrams
When using the New Schematic Model View command in the toolbar, a Select Equipment dialog will be shown where the equipment item can be selected.
Figure 11:2.
The Select Equipment dialog
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.3
Zooming, Panning etc. The viewer is using an MS Office Visio drawing control component to generate the view, please see the related Microsoft documentation for a full description on how to navigate in an MS Visio view. A few navigation functions especially worth mentioning are the following.
11.4
Command
Result
Ctrl+Shift+Left mouse button click
Zoom in
Ctrl+Shift+Right mouse button click
Zoom out
Ctrl+Shift+Right mouse button drag
Pan
Viewing Attributes By right clicking on an item and selecting the Show Attributes command, an attributes pane will be shown. This is the standard MS Visio attributes pane which is labelled Shape Data. This pane can be resized, moved and docked in various ways, see the MS Visio documentation for more information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.5
Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar When the ConnMapAddin with Schematic module is successfully loaded the Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar is shown as a Contextual tab in the Ribbon menu. Tools on that toolbar allow you to control the ConnMapAddin behaviour.
Starting from left: •
Create Model View - allows the creation of a connection map by choosing an element from the dialog.
•
Pipelines - shows pipe lines connections.
•
HVAC lines - shows HVAC lines connections
•
Cable - shows cable lines connections
•
Inline Items - By selecting the View Inline Items command, the viewer will change into a mode where all inline fittings are shown. These will be placed along the lines between the branching points, like knots on a piece of string. The branching points will also be illustrated by an icon representing the kind of fitting it is, rather than the generic branching point icon used when inline fittings are not shown.
•
Center - when a model map is created for an element, the system automatically inserts that item in the centre, all connections' lines must start from the centre item, and there is a possibility to also change the centre item. To do so, select any item on a drawing and execute the Centre command. The item is then highlighted and moved to the centre and the window will be changed.
•
Expand - by selecting an item and using the Expand command, all connections to that item will be traversed and expanded.
•
Collapse - items that have previously been expanded can also be collapsed, restoring the previous state.
•
Settings - options are described in the following chapter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.6
Options
11.6.1
General Settings
This page presents options common for all modules. •
Follow CE - when an item is selected in the viewer, the CE will also change accordingly.
•
Layout after hide - when checked, the connection map will be redrawn each time the user hides some connections’ lines, elements or execute a collapse.
•
Show connector text - determines whether the connector's lines should display describing text.
•
Show inline - this is the same as the Show Inline Items command on the toolbar.
•
Show Arrow - shows flow direction using arrows. You can determine the size of the arrows by using the drop down list.
•
Highlight color - selection of colours for highlighted items.
•
X Distance - determines space between elements in the x axis.
•
Y Distance - determines space between elements in the y axis.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.6.2
Schematic Model Settings
The settings are divided into five categories:
11.6.3
•
Display Text - the text that is displayed on the item.
•
Line Color - changes the colour of the lines for the desired connection type.
•
Line Patters - changes the line patterns for the desired connection type.
•
Line Weight - sets the weight of the line for the desired connection type.
•
Object Visibility - shows/hides the desired element types.\
Schematic Symbol Settings The icons used to represent the equipment items, generic branch points as well as inline fittings are determined by a set of user configurable rules. These rules are stored in an XML file called SchematicSymbols.xml which resides in the main installation directory. Below can be seen an example of this file. By changing the file, it is possible to apply different rules for the selection of symbols. The icon files are by default stored in the %PMLLIB%\icons\SchematicModelViewer\ directory. New icons can be added to this location and it is also possible to modify or replace the existing ones if so desired.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
You can view the file in, e.g., Notepad.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
It is possible to determine which symbol should be used when creating a connection map and also to set the displayed text beneath the item. Attributes can be used by entering the attribute name in brackets, e.g. [Type]. To use a shape from a stencil instead of icons the setting ‘Use Icon’ needs to be set to False and the settings ‘Set Stencil Name’ and ‘Stencil Shape’ to True. However, if the system cannot find a shape or a stencil the icon will be automatically used instead. If an icon, a shape or a stencil is not found the default rule will be used. Stencils and icons have to be located in the "%PMLLIB%\icons\SchematicModelViewer" directory. The location can be changed with Default > Path. Note: You can not change an already drawn item. Note: [UNIQUE_ID] is not an attribute, it is the unique id of the element.
11.6.4
Saving Settings The
default
schematic
model
settings
are
stored
in
your
PDMSEXE\SchematicModelSetting.xml file, this file points to SchematicSymbols.xml. By clicking on the Save to defaults button, the settings will be saved in PDMSDFLTS\SchematicModelMapModuleUserSettings.xml. If there will be more modules, their settings will be saved in the same location. The file name will be <ModuleName>UserSettings.xml. Next time when running the application
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
the settings will be read from PDMSDFLTS. To reset custom settings please remove all <ModuleName>UserSettings.xml files from your PDMSDFLTS. Note that the system will also save the settings for symbol. The file name will be ModuleName>UserSymbolSettings.xml in schematic module case, this name will be SchematicModelMapModuleUserSymbolSettings.xml
11.7
11.8
Right Mouse Button Context Menu on Items
•
Open Diagram - If the main application is Marine Diagrams or Cable Diagrams then the Visio diagram will be opened. Otherwise the system will try open the SVG document.
•
Center - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
•
Show All Connections - Sometimes items are connected to more than one line. To make the drawing easier to read other connections can be turned off.
•
Expand - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
•
Collapse - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
Connectors •
Layout - The connector locations can be changed by moving a whole connector or points on a connector. This works as normal drag and drop functionality. To move a whole connector just click on it and move. To move a point on a connector first have to select it, next press CTRL and click on the green point on the connector, then move the point to the desired location. To set connectors re-route style use the options available in the right mouse button context menu. Right-Angle, Straight or Reset.
Note: When the connection map is redrawing then the connector's layout is resetting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.8.1
Reverse link When items are connected, Figure 11:3.: below, it is possible to change that layout using one of the reverse link options additional connector. See figure Figure 11:4.: and Figure 11:5.: for two available ways of doing this (reverse source and destination).
Figure 11:3.
Figure 11:4.
Figure 11:5.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
A
Appendices
A.1
Attribute Presentation Notation Through the Attribute Presentation format notation, attribute information can be collected from the DB element that corresponds to the shape as well as from hierarchically superior elements and referenced elements. It can also be combined with literals in an arbitrary way. The notation uses square brackets for attribute references that should be evaluated before presentation. All characters outside the brackets are considered as literals and will be presented as-is. Referenced attributes can be referred by a dot notation (reference.attribute). References can be in several steps, in that case the reference chain will be followed to resolve the expression and find the attribute value. An arbitrary number of literals and attribute references can be combined to form advanced attribute presentation and annotation strings. Attributes that are of a particular dimension will have units associated with their current value. Using the name of the attribute will result in presenting the value of the attribute in the current units without the actual unit label. If the units identifier is desired a ‘.withunit’ suffix can be added to the attribute. For example if the current session units for bores are inch the [scplin.bore] will produce a value of "12", while [scplin.bore.withunit] will produce "12in". Another example is [scplin.press.withunit] will produce "23psi" if the current session units are psi, while using the [scplin.press] will produce "23". For changing current session units settings use Admin Tab > Configuration > Units. For more information refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Current Sessions Units. The notation can also be a result of a pml1 expression. Refer to Software Customisation Reference Manual, chapter PML 1 Expression. PML1 expressions should be enclosed with curly braces { }. The usage of native square bracketed attribute references within PML1 expressions is supported. In such case the square bracketed attribute references are resolved first, and then the PML1 expression is parsed. The attribute presentation notation can be applied to the following: •
Attribute Presentation Setup (In Diagrams Options and in Import Shape Wizard)
•
Shape Text attribute
•
Label annotation fields
Here follows a few examples using native syntax: Syntax
Description
[scplin.bore]
Will fetch the default bore attribute from the pipeline element that owns the current hierarchically subordinate element, for example a valve
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
[owner.owner.owne r.bore]
Will provide the same result as above for a valve. The owner of a valve is the SCSEG element, the owner.owner is the SCBRAN element, and the owner.owner.owner is the SCPLIN element.
[name][spref.name]
Will display the name of the current element, a literal (in this case a "-"), and the name of the related catalogue element.
Following are some examples using PML1 expressions: Syntax
Description
{str(abor)} {subst(name,2)}
Provides the arrival bore value.
ERED[\n]{str(para1)} *{str(para2)} {str(para[arrive] of catr of spre)}/ {str(para[leave] of catr of spre)}
Equivalent to ERED[\n][spre.catr.para(1)]*[spre.catr.para(2)]
This uses the substring function to provide the part of the name of the element starting at the 2nd character.
When using the spec-driven mode, labelling of a reducer with the larger diameter first.
For more information about PML1 expression syntax please see PML 1 Expressions in the Software Customisation Reference Manual. To get a particular element from an attribute of array type, use a (num) notation. Example: Owner.Diaref(1). The enumeration of elements is 1-based. The (0) string will give all elements. Using square brackets to reference an element in an array in PML1 expressions is not supported, as it interferes with the native syntax. To reference an array element use the attribute name followed directly by a number. For example "ppbo[2]"is not supported - instead use "ppbo2"to refer to the 2nd value in the ppbo attribute array.
A.2
Pseudo Attributes The table below describes a few pseudo attributes that can be useful for attribute presentation, annotation etc. Attribute
Element
Description
HBOR
SCBRAN
Head bore for the branch
TBOR
SCBRAN
Tail bore for the branch
ABOR
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Arrival bore
LBOR
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Leave bore
PPBO(n)
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Bore of connection point n, for example, PPBO1 returns the bore
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
A.3
Customisation
A.3.1
Overview The Diagrams application provides significant built-in customisation capabilities through XML menus, default settings, UDETs and UDAs, autonaming, attribute presentation notation etc. For more extensive customisation it is also possible for customers to develop new program functions and routines. Diagrams is based on the AVEVA Design Platform, and thereby includes all of the customisation and development possibilities provided by that platform. Examples of this are the database.Net API (AVEVA.Pdms.Database) as well as other.Net APIs. CAF Add-ins can be created and PML can be used to the same extent as in the Design (General) module. In addition to this, the actual Microsoft Visio Drawing Control used by Diagrams is also accessible, giving the user full access to the extensive toolbox that MS Visio provides. A good example of how this works is the CoreConnectionsDiagramAddin, which is a sample Addin shipped with the product to create core connection diagrams. The addin is delivered with source code for the user to use as template when creating their own addins to support their particular needs.
A.3.2
Using the Visio Drawing Control The Visio Drawing Control can be accessed in different ways. By using reflection, it is possible to invoke GetCurrentVisio method which will return an instance of Visio.Application associated with currently active drawing. Example using System; using Visio=Microsoft.Office.Interop.Visio; using Aveva.Diagrams; namespace UserAddin { /// <summary> /// Summary description for AccessVisio. /// internal class AccessVisio { internal AccessVisio() { // // TODO: Add constructor logic here // } internal static bool IsDrawingActive() { System.Reflection.Assembly _assembly = System.Reflection.Assembly.Load( "diagrams" ); System.Type _type = _assembly.GetType( "Aveva.Diagrams.diagApp", true, false ); System.Reflection.MethodInfo _info = _type.GetMethod( "GetCurrentVisio", System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Static | System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Public ); Visio.Application visApp = (Visio.Application)_info.Invoke ( null, null );
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
if(visApp == null) return false; return true; } internal static void AddDescription(string ElemType, string Description) { System.Reflection.Assembly _assembly = System.Reflection.Assembly.Load( "diagrams" ); System.Type _type = _assembly.GetType( "AvevaDiagrams.diagApp", true, false ); System.Reflection.MethodInfo _info = _type.GetMethod( "GetCurrentVisio", System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Static | System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Public ); Visio.Application visApp = (Visio.Application)_info.Invoke( null, null ); if(visApp == null) return; //Find all shapes of type ElemType and add Description foreach(Visio.Shape shape in visApp.ActivePage.Shapes) { try { if(shape.get_CellsU("User.ElementType").get_ResultStr (Visio.VisUnitCodes.visNoCast) == ElemType) { try { shape.get_CellsU("Prop.VMD_SCEQUI_DESC").FormulaU = string.Format("\"{0}\"", Description); } catch(Exception){}; } } catch(Exception){}; } } } }
Another approach is to use the AVEVA.ApplicationFramework.Presentation.WindowManager and iterate through the windows looking for an active Drawing Control. Example if( WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild != null ) { _activeCtrl = WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild.ActiveCont rol; if(_activeCtrl != null && !(_activeCtrl is AxDrawingControl)) { foreach(System.Windows.Forms.Control ctrl in WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild.ActiveControl.Contro ls) { if(ctrl is AxDrawingControl) { _activeCtrl = ctrl;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
break; } } } }
When the Visio.Application instance is obtained from the Drawing Control it is possible to invoke any of the Visio API methods available to customize the drawing.
A.4
Diagrams API AVEVA Diagrams has a public interface to help developers write custom addins, Aveva.Diagrams.Interface.dll. The dll contains a class with three interfaces, including the following methods and events; SettingManager Methods GetSettingValue
Get actual AVEVA Diagrams setting value.
DrawingManager Events DrawingOpened
Raised when a drawing is opened.
DrawingClosed
Raised when a drawing is closed.
Methods GetActiveDrawing
Get DrawingInfo on active drawing.
GetOpenedDrawing
Get list of all opened drawings.
ShapeManager Events BeforeShapeAdd
Raised just before Visio Shape add.
BeforeShapeDelete
Raised just before Visio Shape delete.
ShapeAdded
Raised when Visio Shape added.
ShapeDeleted
Raised when Visio Shape deleted.
Methods FindShapesOnCurrentDrawing
Find all shapes on current representing database item.
FindShapesOnCurrentPage
Find all shapes on current page that are representing database item.
FindShapesOnOpenedDrawing s
Find all shapes on all opened drawings that are representing database item.
GetDbElementFromShape
Find database elements represented by a shape.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:5
drawing
that are
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
HighlightShape
Highlight or reset highlight on Visio Shape.
ResetHighlight
Reset many shapes in one go on desired area.
The detailed documentation for the library can be found following this link. DiagramsAPI.chm Note: It is not recommended to call other Diagrams dll’s, as these are internal to Diagrams and may be changed without notice.
A.4.1
Adding Custom Calls to Addin Functions Shape’s Context Menu It is possible to add a custom context menu option and call the Execute() method from any registered Command class or call a PML function. To achieve this, the shapesheet of the master shape that is representing an item has to be edited in Visio. There, the Action section has to be updated with custom rows Figure A:1.: Edit master shape in Visio and add own action rows in shape sheet. This will result in all shapes based on this master having an additional context menu Figure A:2.: Additional context menu items.
Figure A:1.
Edit master shape in Visio and add own action rows in shape sheet
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
Figure A:2.
Additional context menu items
This mechanism is based on the Visio function QUEUEMARKEREVENT. This requires proper parameters that will be parsed when QueueMarkerEvent will be handled by the Diagrams application. According to parameters, the PML function or Command.Execute() will be called.
•
PML Function For example, to call a simple PML function that looks like below;
define function !!DiagramsPrint() $P Hello world! endfunction All needed is to set the proper Action cell formula. In this case, it will look like below;
define function !!DiagramsPrintParam(!DbRefNum is string) !a = object DBREF(!DbRefNum) handle any endhandle if (UNDEFINED(!a) or UNSET(!a) or BADREF(!a)) then $P element not found return endif !n = !a.name $P The clicked item is $!n endfunction
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
In this example, the reference number should be passed to the PML function. This is done by adding /param=refnum to the formula, like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=PMLFUNC /name=DiagramsPrintParam /param=refnum") •
Command Execute It is possible to call Execute() methods from your classes based on the Command. See the command class example, below;
class DiagramsAPICommand : Command { internal DiagramsAPICommand() { this.Key = "TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD"; } public void Execute(Shape shape) { MessageBox.Show(string.Format("The shape: {0} was clicked!", shape.Name)); } public override void Execute() { MessageBox.Show("Execute!"); } } There are two Execute() methods:; 1. Execute(); 2. Execute(Shape shape); The Action cell formula can be set up to call both versions. To call Execute without a parameter would look like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=COMMAND /Key=TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD") To call Execute with the parameter param=shape added to the formula would look like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=COMMAND /Key=TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD /param=shape")
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
Note: The command has to be registered in
Aveva.ApplicationFramework.Presentation.CommandManager Parameters used in QUEUEMARKEREVENT are; Parameter Name
Allowed Values
Comments
module
Diagrams
Application name
type
shapecontext
Says that it is the shape context menu
code
PMLFUNC
The PML function will be called
COMMAND
The Command Execute will be called
name
[PML function name]
Used with PMLFUNC only
key
[CommandKey]
Used with COMMAND only
param
refnum
Database reference number as a string of item that is represented by the Visio Shape. This parameter can only be used with PMLFUNC.
shape
The Visio Shape will be passed as parameter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:10
12 Series
AVEVA Solutions Limited
Disclaimer 1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from viruses. 1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise. 1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's claim is brought. 1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law. 1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.
Copyright Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution. The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited. © Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
Trademark AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
Diagrams User Guide
Revision Sheet
Date
Version
Comments / Remarks
September 2011 12.1.1
Publishing Diagrams data to AVEVA .NET, Diagrams Options Default, Options in Application Setup. AVEVA Compare/Update - Utilities, Instrument Control Handle, ConnMapAddin Schematic Model, Auto Formatting Rules, PMLDiagrams Object and Specification Search on Non-specified Data added/ amended.
January 2012
Copyright added to all pages.
October 2012
12.1,SP3
New Batch Job window in chapter Utilities.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
Additions to chapter Intelligent Background.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter DGN Export in Utilities.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter diagrams API in Appendices.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter Diagrams Rules in Working with Diagrams.
October 2012
12.1.SP3
New chapter Explorer Settings in Working with Diagrams.
December 2012
12.1.SP2 Fix
New screen shot in chapter 5, figure 5:12.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot in chapter 4,3, File menu.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot and text in chapter 5.19.2, Instrument Loop properties.
February 2013
12.1.SP4
New screen shot and text in chapter 4.15.2, Auto-delete obsolete database element on Name Change.
April 2013
12.1.SP4
New section about Design Reuse in Utilities chapter.
May-June 2013
12.1.SP4
Major changes for Ribbon layout. Behaviour on Name Change chapter. Instrument Loop Properties chapter. Diagram Replace Object. Design Reuse for Diagrams. P&ID Grid. Secondary Shapes for Pipeline. Datasheets Integration. Export to SVG from PML.
August 2013
12.1SP4
Updates to chapter Release Diagram to 3D and Project Storage with respect to Visio and SVG Files.
September 2013 12.1.SP4
Updates to chapter Working with Diagrams, Copy/Paste Options.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
The Batch Job dialog has been updated in several places.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
Updates to chapter Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model.
October 2013
12.1.SP4
New chapter Unassigned Items in chapter Working with Diagrams.
Diagrams User Guide
Diagrams User Guide
Diagrams User Guide
Contents
Page
Diagrams Diagrams Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Document Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Diagrams Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 Database Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2 Main Operating Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Application Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Runtime Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1 Document Files, Sessions etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Copying Data between Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 Database Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4 Schematic DB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Groups .............................................................. Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2:4 2:4 2:5 2:5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Starting the Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Making Settings for the Program Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Select Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2 Set Up Default Groups, Default System and Default Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
i
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Select a Current Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Application Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5 Diagrams Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6 Other Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Upgrading Drawings to Latest Diagrams Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10 Creating Shapes and Adding to Stencils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating MS Visio Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Diagrams Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Shape Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instant Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3:11 3:11 3:22 3:23 3:32 3:32 3:32
Optimising Project Performance and Storage Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:32 Recommendations to Improve Performance of SaveWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33 Refresh Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33 Project Storage with Respect to Visio and SVG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:33
Working with Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1 Main GUI Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Main Window and Dockable Sub-windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 Schematic Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2 System Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3 Project Breakdown Structure Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5 Hiding Element Type String in Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6 Possibility to Sort Explorer Items by Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10 Diagram Drafting Canvas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:12 Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14 Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:14 Catalogue Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15 Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16 Message Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:17 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18 Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:20 Find in Drawing Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21 Standard DB Browse Dialogue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23 Document Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:24
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
ii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Edit Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagrams Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:25 4:25 4:26 4:26
Standard MS Visio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45 Application Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:49 Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:49 File Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:50 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New ............................................................. Open ............................................................. Open Read Only. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Work and Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As with Copy of Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Work and SVG Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save As with Copy of Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Get Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete ............................................................. Additional Notes on File Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:50 4:50 4:52 4:55 4:61 4:63 4:64 4:69 4:71 4:71 4:71
Define / Undefine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:72 Refresh
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:72
Feedback on Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:73
Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:75 Export Consistency Check Result to File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:80
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:81 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shape Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labels ............................................................. Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Property Break Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:81 4:82 4:84 4:84 4:86
Off-page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:87 Area Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:91 Defining Area Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:91 Propagation of Attributes to Containing Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:95
Manual Component Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:96 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:96 Catalogue Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:97
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
iii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Defining Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:98 Modifying, Renaming and Deleting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Selection Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:101 Result List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:102
Copying / Pasting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:105 CTRL+DRAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:105 Copying and Pasting (CTRL+C > CTRL+V). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:106
Primary / Secondary Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:120 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Shapes by Changing Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Changing Primary/Secondary Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Primary/Secondary Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding All Shapes Referring to a Certain DB Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:120 4:121 4:126 4:129 4:129 4:136 4:136
Unassigned Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:136 Assign to Database Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:137 Elements to be Dropped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:137
Using Background Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140 Import CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140 Intelligent Background Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:140
Setting an Initial 3D Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144 Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144
P&ID Grid Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:144 P&ID Grid Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Position Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Items that can be Localised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the P&ID Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Existing Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:145 4:146 4:147 4:147 4:150
Changing Symbols for Existing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:151 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Replacing of Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Replacing of Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace Symbol from Catalogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:151 4:155 4:156 4:157
Setting System Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:157 Naming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:158
Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:158
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
iv
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Autonaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Renaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prompting the User to Enter a Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:158 4:158 4:159 4:160
Viewing Datasheets in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:160 Drawing ............................................................ Ribbon UI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printing Datasheet in Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4:161 4:163 4:163 4:164
Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:166 Importing/Exporting Drawings, Stencils and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:167 Importing and Exporting Data to the DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 Import Export
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168
Undo and Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:168 Working with Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:169
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Creating Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1 Pipeline Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Creating Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3 Adding Parts to a Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrive and Leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dropping and Connecting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Tee Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Tube Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:4 5:4 5:4 5:5 5:8 5:8
Flow Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8 The Flow Direction Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8 Directional Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:10 Reversing Flow Direction for a Whole Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Using Equipment and Subequipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:12 Using Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13 Using Pipe Destination Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14 Grouped Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:14
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
v
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Online Dimensioning and Specification Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:15 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . No Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning without Catalogue or Spec Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning with Manual Catalogue Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning with Automatic Spec Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respec ............................................................. Resize ............................................................. Refit ............................................................. Specification Search on Existing Non-Specified Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:15 5:17 5:17 5:17 5:17 5:20 5:20 5:22 5:23
Reverse Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:29 SpecSearch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Splitting Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Joining Pipelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Consistency Check for Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:31 Line List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:32 Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:32 Instrumentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:33 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection in Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument Relationship Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Level Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrumentation Loop Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5:33 5:33 5:41 5:43 5:48 5:50
HVAC Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Creating HVAC Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 HVAC Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2 Creating Branches and Adding Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2 Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3 Resize
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Refit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Splitting and Joining HVAC Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6 Consistency Check for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Cable Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
vi
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Single Line Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1 Working with Multi-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Naming Cables Owned by Multi-cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2 Presenting Multi-cables in Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4 Core Connections Definition Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4 Defining the Number of Cores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Terminal for Each Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7:5 7:6 7:7 7:8 7:8
Generating Core Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:9
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Releasing Information for 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1 Setting the Release Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2 Visualizing Release and Link to 3D Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6 Warnings and Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7 Released but not Linked Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:7 Released and Linked Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1 Batch Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1 Batch Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2 Batch Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:9 Batch Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
Project Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:11 Clean Old Session Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:11
AVEVA Compare/Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12 DWG Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:13 Visio Drawing Items Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lines Map Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
vii
10:14 10:15 10:16 10:17 10:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Configuration - DWG Export Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19 Creating Line Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
DGN Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:23 DGN Export - Settings Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Lines Map Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Fonts Map Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DGN Export - Levels Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Settings File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Language Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:25 10:26 10:27 10:28 10:28 10:30
Publishing Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:31 Availability of Publishing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SaveWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing from PML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10:31 10:34 10:34 10:34
Publishing from Diagrams via PML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:34 Design Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:36
Schematic Model Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1 Starting the Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2 Zooming, Panning etc.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 Viewing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3 Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4 Options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Model Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schematic Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11:5 11:6 11:6 11:8
Right Mouse Button Context Menu on Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:9 Reverse link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:10
Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A:1 Attribute Presentation Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:1 Pseudo Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:2 Customisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3 Overview
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
viii
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
Using the Visio Drawing Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:3
Diagrams API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:5 Adding Custom Calls to Addin Functions Shape’s Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A:6
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
ix
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
x
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
1
Diagrams Overview
1.1
Document Contents The chapter gives an overview of the application and explains some of the main principles. It is intended for all users who need a general introduction to Diagrams.
1.2
Prerequisites Before starting to use the Diagrams application, it is recommended that users acquire some general knowledge about using applications based on the AVEVA Design platform: •
Database principles, such as MDBs, sessions, DB elements, attributes, references etc.
•
Using the command line
•
Handling of the Application framework GUI, with docking windows etc.
•
General Microsoft Visio knowledge.
•
You also need to be familiar with the main principles of using Catalogues and Specifications. Please refer to the Catalogues and Specifications User Guide for more information.
These functions are relevant for the usage of the Diagrams application, but are outside the scope for this manual.
1.3
Diagrams Application Diagrams supports the creation of Piping, HVAC and Cabling Diagrams. The application is based on the AVEVA Design Platform GUI and diagram layouts are created using an embedded Microsoft Office Visio drawing control. All relevant data entered through the application is stored into the Schematic Database. The functions available in the application include standard MS Visio functions, standard PDMS functions and specific Diagrams functions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
Figure 1:1.
1.4
The Diagrams Application
Database Architecture The object data created through the Diagrams application is stored in the Schematic Database. This data is possible to re-use for 3D modelling through the use of Schematic 3D Integrator (please refer to the Schematic 3D Integrator User Guide).
The diagram documents created through the Diagrams application will be stored in the file system or an external document management system. There are index elements in the
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
database for each diagram, stencil and template. Diagrams, stencils and templates are listed and opened through the DB index elements.
In addition to the MS Visio Diagram files the application also creates SVG format files for the purpose of viewing the diagrams in the Schematic 3D Integrator.
1.5
Main Operating Principles When shapes are dragged from a stencil and dropped onto the diagram, a corresponding element will, if possible, be automatically created in the database. This process is known as Define. In some cases the Define operation will not take place until shapes are connected. It is also possible to manually Define and Undefine items. The application supports the Dabacon session concept with Save Work / Get Work functions. In the Save Work function, the diagram document is also saved together with all pending DB changes in the session. To ensure consistency between diagram documents and the database items, certain procedures have been introduced, for instance when the user chooses Save As on a diagram, it is required that Save Work has first been executed. The schematic data is organized in two parallel hierarchies. The main hierarchy is the Group Hierarchy, which works more or less like a folder structure where schematic items can be organized according to customer preferences. There is also a secondary System Hierarchy, which represents the design systems within the project. Diagrams contains functions for the user to control in which Schematic Group new items will be placed. Items will also be organized into the system structure according to the system reference attribute. The database also maintains references between schematic items and the diagram drawings that they are represented on. This allows the user to, for example, find and open all diagrams where a certain pipeline is depicted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Diagrams Overview
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
1:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
2
Application Setup This chapter covers the database setup and runtime environment for the application. It is primarily intended for administrators who will set up the project environment for using Diagrams and for advanced users who need a deeper knowledge in how the application operates on a technical level.
2.1
Runtime Environment
2.1.1
Environment Variables To define diagram, stencil and template paths a number of environment variables are used. They are named as follows:
%
%SAMDIA% %SAMSTE% %SAMTPL% These environment variables should point to the repository for each file type. Typically they would reside under the project folder along with xxxPIC and xxxISO etc.
2.1.2
Document Files, Sessions etc. All MS Visio documents such as diagrams, stencils and templates are handled through index elements in the database. When a diagram is created, an SCDIAG element is created in the database, and this contains a pseudo attribute (VISF) that provides the file name of the actual file in the file system. File names are composed by <element ID><session no>. This mechanism and naming convention supports the Dabacon session concept and provides a possibility for GLOBAL to manage the files in a multi-location project. These file names are not visible to the user. The user will handle all diagrams through the index elements in the database and will only see the names of the index elements. This mechanism creates new files each time a Save Work is executed. This means that when users have been working for a certain amount of time, a large quantity of files may exist in the %
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
delete obsolete versions of the files when a database session merge is executed, however the Diagrams application provides a tool for removing old session files from a project. It could be used manually when KEEP_SESSION_FILES is set to False. For more information please refer to Clean Old Session Files in Chapter Utilities. At the same time as a diagram file is saved, an SVG format file is optionally created. This is for the purpose of viewing the diagrams in other applications such as the Schematic 3D Integrator without having the need for an MS Visio installation. In the same way as querying the VISF attribute on the SCDIAG element for obtaining the MS Visio diagram file name, the SVG file name can be found by querying the NVIEWF attribute. On large diagrams, or diagrams that contain detailed imported background drawings, the creation of the SVG file may take some time to execute. This could affect the performance of the Save Work command. For that reason a possibility to control the SVG creation has been introduced. Whether the SVG file is created or not depends on the General Options > System configuration > SVG setting in Diagrams Options. •
If this setting is False, then the SVG file will only be created if the drawing contains or has contained any items released to 3D.
•
If this setting is True, the SVG file will always be created.
When an SVG file is created, there will be a message in the message log indicating this. Note: By changing the KEEP_SESSION_FILES default setting to False, only the latest version of the Visio diagram file as well as the SVG file will be kept. Please consider that using this setting will not make it possible to restore a previous session including the corresponding diagram file version. MS Visio templates and stencils are handled in the same way as the diagrams, using SCTEMP and SCSTEN index elements in the database. One difference however, is that no SVG format files are created when templates and stencils are saved by the application.
•
Document file formats Documents in the Diagrams application can be saved in two formats - binary or XML depending on the ‘Save documents in Visio XML format’ setting in Diagrams Options:
The setting provides possibility to choose if drawings, templates and stencils should be stored in binary (*.vsd, *.vst, *.vss) or XML format (*.vdx, *.vtx, *.vsx). It is recommended to save documents in a binary format which is more efficient and improves performance of Save Work and Open operations. For that reason it is used by default in the Diagrams application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
It is possible to check in which format the document was last saved by querying SCHFF (schematic file format) attribute of SCDIAG, SCTEMP or SCSTEN. It can have the following values: 0 - Visio XML format 1 - binary format When Save Work is performed all opened documents (also unchanged) with file format not corresponding to the ‘Save documents in Visio XML format’ setting will be saved again in an appropriate format.
•
Working with Diagrams Options There are two sections (each presented in a corresponding tab) of Diagrams Options: Diagrams Defaults, and Attribute Presentations. Diagrams Defaults are specific for a particular version of AVEVA Diagrams. Any change from the default value of the Diagrams Defaults will trigger storing of these settings in a file. If no values have been loaded upon startup (no valid settings store found) the file will be stored in the first folder pointed by %PDMSDFLTS% in it's subfolder Diagrams as a file in xml format. If a valid store file was found and loaded on application startup, then this file will be overwritten with the new options' values. When starting up the Diagrams application will try to load settings from two different store files. 1. User settings store The application will look for a store with appropriate file name in the folders pointed by %PDMSDFLTS% and their subfolder Diagrams in order of appearance. If a store file is found, its location will be saved so when options is changed by the user it will be saved in the same location. If no store file is found the default options values will be loaded. 2. Admin settings store The application will also look for an admin settings store in the %
The name of the store file is composed of DiagramsSettings and a version number. The extension of the file is xml.
DiagramsAttributePresentation.xml contains information about Attribute Presentation section of Diagrams Options. By default the file is located in the installation directory and the Diagrams application reads it from there. Because of that the settings are not project-specific and must be adjusted according to the special user needs separately on each machine. If project-specific settings should be used, common for all users using the same network project, the file should be manually copied by the administrator to %
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
Diagrams/ where %
2.2
Copying Data between Databases It is possible to use RECONFIGURE to copy schematic data between databases and also to copy databases between projects. Below is an example of the procedure for copying data from SCHEMATIC/DIAGRAMS database in one project, source, to MASTER/TEST database located in another project, target: 1. Open Admin in the source project and type the following instructions on the command line (please note that there is no need to use the SAMEREF option): FROM DB SCHEMATIC/DIAGRAMS TO FILES /TMPF RCFCOPY ALL RECONFIGURE 2. Save work and close Admin. 3. Open Admin in the target project. 4. Make sure that the target TEST database exists in the target project (if not create it). It is not necessary that the source and target databases have the same number. 5. Type the following instructions on the command line: FROM FILES /TMPF TO DB MASTER/TEST RECONFIGURE 6. All data have now been copied together with associated files (for diagrams, templates and stencils) and no other action is required before they can be used. For more information please refer to chapter Reconfigure in the Administrator Command Reference Manual.
2.3
Database Setup
2.3.1
Schematic DB A new schematic (SCHE) database must be created in a project where Diagrams will be used. For more information on how to create databases please refer to your Data Management and Data Base / Administrator User Guide.
2.3.2
MDB Setup The MDB to be used for Diagrams must contain: •
At least one SCHE DB. The administrator can add several schematic DBs to the MDB if desired. The SCHE DB(s) must be writeable.
•
At least one DESI DB for the System Hierarchy. The DESI DB(s) can be read-only if so desired.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
It is recommended to keep the System Hierarchy in a separate DESI DB to make administration easier. In case the Diagrams user should be able to access data in 3D design elements, additional DESI DBs can be added to the MDB. If the Diagrams user should be able to modify the System Hierarchy, the following must be completed: 1. The module definition of Diagrams must allow Read/Write access to DESI DBs. 2. The Diagrams user must be a member of the team that owns the DESI DB where the system hierarchy resides. Note: It is possible to set it up in a way that the Diagrams user will have Read/Write access to the DESI DB where the system hierarchy resides but not to other DESI DBs. In this case the Diagrams user should not be a member of the team(s) that owns the other DESI DBs.
2.3.3
Groups When a schematic database has been set up, any number of Schematic Group elements (SCGROU) can be created to form the primary hierarchy in the database. This can be considered similar to a folder structure in the file system. Schematic groups can be used to hold schematic elements, such as diagrams, stencils, templates, equipment, pipelines, cables and HVACLines. Schematic groups can also be nested in an arbitrary number of levels (having groups within groups). To create Schematic Groups, right click in the Schematic Explorer, or use the command line. It is also possible to import a standard Group structure into the database from a spreadsheet using the Spreadsheet Import function (please refer to Import in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
2.3.4
Systems The System Hierarchy can be created and maintained through the Admin Tab > Definition > Systems command. For each system, there is also a subordinate SYSCDA element containing default values per system for the Diagrams application. For instance, when creating a new pipeline, the Pipe spec, Insulation Spec, Fluid Ref etc. can automatically be picked up from the defaults set up in the SYSCDA element. Please refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide for setting up this data. The System Hierarchy command is also available in the 3D Design applications. Note: To be able to create and modify the System Hierarchy, it is required that the MDB contains a writeable Design DB where the System Hierarchy resides. Note: The SYSCDA elements are not visible in the System Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Application Setup
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
2:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3
Getting Started This chapter describes how to get started with the Diagrams application, making settings and creating base data etc. This chapter is primarily aimed at users who will be setting up the working environment for users. These could be super-users or CAD co-ordinators. Note: Chapters Starting the Application and Making Settings for the Program Session apply to all users.
3.1
Starting the Application Diagrams is started by selecting the Diagrams module in the AVEVA Login dialogue.
Note: The Diagrams application requires an MDB that contains one or more schematic databases. Please refer to section Database Setup in Chapter Application Setup for more details.
3.2
Making Settings for the Program Session When the application window has appeared, there are a few session settings that need to be done before you can start using the application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.2.1
Select Mode Select the Mode you want to work in (Pipe, HVAC, Cable), this setting is available in the Project Tab.
3.2.2
Set Up Default Groups, Default System and Default Attributes Set up session defaults by clicking on the Session Default panel in the status bar at the bottom of the screen. This will bring up the Session Defaults dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Select Defaults Group
Figure 3:1.
Defaults groups
By clicking on the line for each type, a browse button can be selected by clicking this button.
will appear and a suitable group
If the same group is wanted for all elements, use the Apply to All button to set the group for all elements in one go. The initial group for this option is calculated from CE (Current Element) when the dialogue is entered. If there is a need to change this, use the to browse the database for a new group.
button
In case new groups need to be created, this will have to be done before going into this dialogue. New groups can be created by right clicking on the schematic world or on existing groups in the Schematic Explorer and selecting the Create Group command. This must then be done before the Default Groups can be selected.
•
Select a Default System Select a Default System, by right clicking on the Default System tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:2.
•
Defaults system
Select Defaults Attributes This tab allows the user to pick attributes (also User Defined Attributes) and set a default value for them. Whenever an element that contains this attribute will be created a value will be set using this table.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:3.
3.2.3
Defaults attributes
Select a Current Line For Pipe / HVAC mode, also select a Current Line before proceeding to create branches and add fittings etc. Note: This is however not done by clicking in the status bar, but is instead done by selecting a line in the schematic explorer.
3.3
Application Settings
3.3.1
Overview In the Project Tab > Options menu the following commands are available: •
Visio Options. This is the standard MS Visio Options dialogue (available at Tools > Options in MS Visio). Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information.
Note: In Vision options, there is an option to disable Automation events (Advanced tab>Enable Automation events). AVEVA Diagrams is depending on these events. Without them, the application is “blind” and if they are disabled, AVEVA Diagrams will stop working. To prevent this, a message will appear if this checkbox is unchecked:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Diagrams will then enable the Automation Events again. •
Explorer Options. Further described in User Guide Catalogues and Specifications / General Application Tools / Settings / Explorer.
•
Page Setup. Is a standard MS Visio dialogue. Refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information.
Other options are available on the Admin Tab in the Configuration group. This is further described below.
3.3.2 •
Diagrams Options Defaults
In the Diagrams Options Defaults section tab, there are a several settings that will control the operation of the application. On the left pane is a tree structure showing the organization of the settings by group. When a group is selected, the settings in that group are presented in the window to the right. At the bottom of that pane there is a grey box providing an explanation for each setting. The settings are further described in the documentation for the respective functions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
If changes have been made when the dialogue is closed by clicking the OK button, the dialogue window shown below will appear. In case the user clicks Yes the changes will be saved for the next program session. If the user clicks No, the settings will only apply to the current program session. By default changes to Diagrams Options Defaults are saved to %PDMSDFLTS%/ Diagrams/ which usually is a machine specific location and should be configured separately on each machine. It is also possible to configure a project with Diagrams Options Defaults. For more information about handling settings files please see Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup. On startup the application will attempt to find a valid settings file in any of the folders specified in %PDMSDFLTS% with a subfolder, Diagrams. If a valid settings file is found, the location will be remembered, so when the settings are changed and the user has requested them stored, the file will be overwritten with the new settings' values.
•
Attribute Presentation
On the Attribute Presentation tab the user can set up the attribute presentation to be used in the Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window as well as in the Item List. To the
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
left there is a tree-view containing the different element types relevant to the Diagrams application. In case UDETs have been defined, these will be included in the list. For each element type selected in the tree-view, the attribute presentation can be individually controlled by the settings in the right hand list view. The columns in the table are as follows: Attribute
Name of the attribute. (This can not be modified).
Label
Presentation label for the attribute. This controls the name to be presented to the user in the Custom Properties window only. This setting does not apply to the Item List as it shows mixed items in the same list.
Prompt
If a Prompt string is entered, the application will prompt the user for a value as the shape is dropped on the drawing. The Prompt string will be presented to the user at that time, for example ‘Please enter Name’.
Visible
If this checkbox is checked, then the attribute will be included in the list of attributes shown in the Custom Properties window.
Visible in Item List
If this checkbox is checked, then the attribute will be included in the list of attributes shown in the Item List.
Read Only
If this checkbox is checked, it will not be possible to update the attribute value from the Custom Properties window or from the Item List.
Copy with Shape
If this checkbox is checked, the attribute value will be copied when shapes are copied in or between drawings. Please note that the shape must be defined for the Copy with Shape setting to apply (refer to Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
Propagate
PropagateThe setting is available for Area shapes. If this checkbox is checked, value of the attribute will be propagated to all applicable items contained by Area.
By clicking the Move Up and Move Down buttons, the presentation order of the currently selected attribute can be changed. In the Import Shape Wizard there is a possibility to override the default attribute presentation settings for individual shapes. In case this override should be enabled, the Allow individual shape settings to override default settings should be checked. This setting can be applied individually for each element type by first selecting a type in the tree before clicking the checkbox. If this is not checked, any attribute presentation settings done in the Import Shape Wizard for individual shapes will be ignored. By clicking the Referenced attributes button, it is possible to add attributes from referenced or hierarchically superior elements. If changes have been made when the dialogue is closed by clicking the OK button, the below dialogue will be shown. In case the user clicks Yes the attribute presentation settings will be saved for the next program session. If the user clicks No, the settings will only apply to the current program session. By default Attribute Presentation settings are machine specific and should be configured separately on each machine, but it is also possible to make them specific for the project. For more information about handling settings files please see Working with Diagrams Options chapter Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Referenced attributes can be added in two ways: 1. Navigate and select. Navigate and select the attribute in the tree view on the right hand pane, and click the Add button to add them to the Selected Attributes list on the right hand side. 2. Key-in. Click on the next free line in the Selected Attributes list, and key in the name of the referenced attribute using a dot notation as described in Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices. Attributes selected by Navigate and Select can also be manually edited by selecting them in the Selected Attributes list. For example by selecting SPRE.CATR.PARA and then manually adding (0) at the end to get the first parameter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: Pseudo attributes are not shown in the list of attributes in Attribute Presentation and Referenced Attributes dialogues. In case pseudo attributes should be presented, these will have to be added manually by using the Key-in method described above. A few pseudo attributes that can be useful for the Diagrams user are described in Pseudo Attributes in Chapter Appendices.
3.3.3
Other Options Under the Admin Tab > Configuration group the following commands can be found: •
Units
•
Aveva Net
•
Line List
•
Naming
The Units command. For more information refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Current Sessions Units. The Aveva NET command. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway. The Line List command is further described in chapter Line List Configuration in the User Schematic Model Manager User Guide. The Naming command is further described in chapter Creating/Modifying Auto Number Rules in the Area Based ADP Administrator Guide.
3.4
Upgrading Drawings to Latest Diagrams Version Every time a new version of the Diagrams application is released, drawings created in previous versions should be upgraded in order to make sure all their shapes support newly added functionalities. The upgrade is done automatically when a drawing is opened, however, it is possible to turn the automatic upgrade off by setting ‘Upgrade drawing on Open’ to False in Diagrams Options.
After a drawing is opened it is possible to force updating all shapes by calling Admin Tab > Upgrade > Upgrade Drawing. The function will traverse the shapes on the current drawing and upgrade the ones created in previous versions of the Diagrams application. The shapes that have a format that is not recognized will be ignored. Please note that the command Upgrade Drawing will update the shapes' formats only and will not create or delete any links between shapes and database elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
During the Upgrade Drawing process the below window is shown and the operation may be cancelled:
However, the shapes upgraded before Cancel was clicked are not restored. If it is required to keep shapes in their original versions, the drawing should be closed without saving.
3.5
Creating Shapes and Adding to Stencils
3.5.1
Overview A major part of the Diagrams functionality is based on a set of specialized Diagrams shapes. Many of these shapes contain information about what kind of database element the shape should be related to, while others do not have any database equivalence at all (such as annotation labels etc.). This mechanism enables the application to automatically create related database elements, as well as provide automatic annotation and general intelligence. Shapes that should be recognized by Diagrams and handled by the application logic must be created through the Import Shape Wizard accessible on the Admin Tab. Examples of these are as follows: •
Shapes corresponding to DB elements, for instance branches, valves, instruments and fittings.
•
Off-page connector shapes.
•
Label shapes presenting attribute information.
Shapes processed by the Import Shape Wizard will be stored in a user-selected stencil and will contain data specific to the Diagrams application. Other Visio shapes that have not been processed through the Import Shape Wizard can still be used for annotation etc. on drawings, but they will not be handled ‘intelligently’ by the application. Diagrams shapes can also contain default attribute values, which can enable users to create specialized shapes and will reduce the amount of information that is necessary to enter when diagrams are created. By investing some time and effort in the creation of stencils and shapes, the application can be tailored to work as efficiently as possible for the needs of the user. Thereby time and effort can later be saved when these shapes are used to build up diagrams.
3.5.2
Creating MS Visio Shapes Before shapes can be imported to a stencil using the Import Shape Wizard, they will have to be created using MS Visio tools. It is highly recommended that the user creating shapes has a good knowledge of MS Visio and is familiar with how Visio shapes works before proceeding to create Diagrams shapes. MS Visio offers many possibilities for creation of
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
smart shapes with different kinds of behaviour. We recommend that this is used sparingly and with consideration, as complex shape behaviour can result in reduced performance and also interact with the Diagrams application code in a way that can give unexpected errors. A few examples of useable behaviour are described below. Note: To be able to create shapes with special features, the MS Visio Shape Sheet has to be used. For technical reasons, this is not available in the Diagrams application. In case you need to access the Shape Sheet for making special settings in the shapes before import, you will have to copy the shape to the Standard MS Office Visio application, access the Shape Sheet, and then copy the shape back to Diagrams. When drawing the shape, it is recommended to use the same grid setting that will apply when the shape will be used in the drawing, thereby avoiding alignment and snapping problems. To minimize the risk for mistakes when different zoom settings are used, the grid can be set to Fixed. A suitable grid size is suggested to be 1 mm. The Ruler & Grid dialogue is available from the button next to the Show group label on the View Tab.
It is also preferable to use a X any Y size of the shape that is evenly dividable with 2, so that connection points can be conveniently placed at grid intersections.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Figure 3:4.
Example of Valve shape using a 4x8 size
Connection points can be added to shapes by using the Connection Point Tool available on the dropdown for connector tool in the Standard toolbar.
To add connection points, Ctrl+Click using this tool. For inline pipe/HVAC parts, the order in which connection points are added is relevant, as the first added connection point will correspond to ppoint 1 on the catalogue item. When an inline fitting is connected, Arrive and Leave are resolved depending on the connections. I.e. if conn 1 is connected to Leave of another fitting during define, conn 1 will be Arrive and vice versa. If it is not connected when defined, Arrive and Leave will default to 1 and 2. The direction of the connection points can be changed by right clicking on a connection point and selecting Inward, Outward or Inward & Outward.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: These directions are NOT related to flow directions of the component. This only relates to Visio mechanisms for connecting shapes to each other. Connection points for 2D shapes (such as Equipment, Valves, Fittings etc.) should normally be Inward. Only use Outward connection points if you intend the shape to be directly connected to other 2D shapes. The normal approach is to always use Inward when shapes are created, and to change them to Outward after dropping on a drawing only in case the shape should be connected to another 2D shape. (refer to Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)). Note: When creating grouped piping/HVAC shapes having connection points, please make sure to first group the shapes and then add the connection points to the group. In case connection points are added to the members of the group, this could result in difficulties to connect pipes/HVACs when the shapes are used. For electrical items, it is OK to have connection points on group members as this is specially handled by the application when cables are connected. Note: When grouping shapes, use the Group command rather than Convert to group, as the former works better with the Diagrams application.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Example 1: Creating an Attachment Line
For shapes that can be attached to other shapes using a control handle, such as labels and off-line instruments, it can be preferred to have an attach line showing where the item is connected. This can be achieved by going though the following steps: 1. Create the shape which is going to represent the offline instrument or label in MS Visio by using the drawing tools. If the shape is more complicated (consisting of several shapes) it should be grouped before proceeding. 2. Draw the attachment line and adjust z-order of the shapes (in most cases the attachment line should be sent to back).
3. Group the instrument or label shape and attachment line.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
4. Access the Shape Sheet of the group (available on the right click menu). 5. If there is not any Controls section, create a new (Right click > Insert section). The newly created control should be named Attach.
6. Now, when the Attach control is added to the group, the attachment line should be adjusted so its begin refers to the shape representing instrument or label (rectangle) and its end, to the position of Attach control belonging to the group. In order to do this go to the command Shape Sheet of the attachment line and do the following changes: •
Refer beginX and beginY cells to the middle of a sub-shape representing instrument:
To refer to the instrument shape, its ID should be used. It can be found in the Special format window accessible from Format > Special in the shape context menu or from the main menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
The ID's of the shapes in the example are as follows: - 1 for the rectangle shape representing label or offline instrument (Sheet.1 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) - 2 for the attachment line (Sheet.2 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) - 3 for the whole group (Sheet.3 should be used in formulas referring to the shape) •
Refer endX and endY cells to position of Attach control in the whole group (now the ID of the whole grouped shape is used):
7. After the references are set, the attachment line will follow the Attach control. 8. Now the alignment box of the shape should be adjusted to contain the instrument (or label) shape only. In order to do this, Attach control should be brought to inside the rectangle, so the attachment line is hidden. After that the Update Alignment Box command should be issued for the group.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
9. In case there should be a possibility to turn on and off the attachment line, this can be achieved by the following: •
Inserting an Actions section (in the Shape Sheet of the group) with the =SETF(GetRef(Actions.Row_1.Checked),NOT(GetVal(Actions.Row_1.Ch ecked))) action:
•
Referring the Checked property using the =IF(Sheet.3!Actions.Row_1.Checked,1,0) formula from the LinePattern cell of the Line Format section in the attachment line (the Shape Sheet of attachment line should be opened):
10. The attachment line can now be turned on and off by using the shape right click menu:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
11. The last thing to do is to ensure that the text of the created shape will be displayed in front. To do this please make sure that Group data is set to "" in the Behaviour window accessible from Shape Tab > Properties > Behaviour:
12. Now the shape prepared in the above way can be imported using the Import Shape Wizard as Offline Instrument or Label and used in the drawing. Note: The above example will allow for creating a shape with desired behaviour only before Import Shape is executed on the shape. It is because of the need to group shapes to achieve attachment line functionality. The table below provides some specific information for each kind of shape to be imported: Category
Type
Conn. Points
Equipment items
Equipment
Any number
Sub-equipment
Any number
Nozzle
2
The point to be used for connecting the nozzle to an equipment item should be of Outward type. The point where a pipe branch should be connected should be Inward.
Electrical connection
2
The point to be used for connecting the elconn to an equipment item should be of Outward type. The point where a cable should be connected should be Inward.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:19
Notes
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Pipeline elements
Pipeline, Branch, Tube
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
Pipe components
Valve
For 2-way:2
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive (= connection point 1) and Leave (= connection point 2) for the main flow will be achieved.
For 3-way:3 For 4-way:4
Pipe components Fitting
Instrument
2
Pipe Destination
1
Cap
1
Closure Blind flange
2
For a reducer, the first connection point (arrive) is normally on the large side.
Cross
4
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive - Leave (main flow) will be achieved.
Olet
3
Assign connection points so that the desired Arrive - Leave (main flow) will be achieved.
Coupling Filter Flange Reducer Trap Vent Weld Other
Tee
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Instrumentation
HVACline elements
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Instrumentation line, Instrumentation branch, Instrumentation tube
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
Instrument relationship shape
N/A
This must be a connector shape. Linestyle can be assigned before importing. When connecting to instruments, Begin is considered to 'fromreference', and End is considered to be 'toreference'.
Actuator
2
The point to be used for connecting the actuator to component items should be of Outward type. The point where an instrumentation line (tube) or instrument relationship shape should be connected should be Inward.
Offline Instrument
Any number
During Import Shape, an attachment control handle will automatically be added to the shape if it does not already exist in the shape sheet.
HVACline, HVAC branch, Duct
N/A
These must be connector type shapes. Linestyles can be assigned before importing. In case any indication of flow direction is to be used, Begin is considered to be Arrive, and End is considered to be Leave.
3:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Inline HVAC Components - HVAC Fitting
Air handling unit
1
Cowl Grille Mesh Plate Taper Branch connector
2
Damper Fan Flexible joint Offset Plenum Silencer Straight Transformation piece Cable elements
Three way
3
Cable
N/A
Multi-cable Annotation
Off-page connectors
Line splitter
3.5.3
Label
None
Multilabel
None
Title block
None
Off-page connector, incoming
1
Off-page connector, outgoing
1
Must be a Connector type shape.
Line splitter
Creating Diagrams Shapes Diagrams shapes can be created using the following steps: 1. Create a shape in a diagram drawing using standard Visio drawing tools and according to the instructions in Creating MS Visio Shapes shapes. 2. If the shape has been drawn as separate entities, e.g. two separate lines, or a line and a text etc., it must be grouped before proceeding. Normally shapes should be grouped BEFORE connection points are added, refer to further information in Creating MS Visio Shapes 3. If relevant, attach connection points by using the Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add the points to the shape. 4. Make sure that the stencil that you want to add the shapes to is open.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
5. Select the shape(s), (several shapes can be imported in one go, but they must be of the same type). 6. Select Admin Tab > Shapes > Import Shape. This will start the Import Shape Wizard that will guide you through the steps to transform the shapes into Diagrams shapes. An alternative way of doing this is to create the Diagrams shape directly on the drawing. To achieve that the below steps should be followed: 1. Create a shape in a diagram drawing using standard Visio drawing tools and according to the instructions in Creating MS Visio Shapes shapes. 2. If the shape has been drawn as separate entities, e.g. two separate lines, or a line and a text etc., it must be grouped before proceeding. Normally shapes should be grouped BEFORE connection points are added, refer to further information in Creating MS Visio Shapes. 3. f relevant, attach the connection points by using the Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add the points to the shape. 4. Select the Home Tab > Object > Define command. The Define Item Wizard window will open and by the following steps similar to the Import Shape Wizard, it will be possible to configure the shape and transform it to a Diagrams shape. In addition after the dialogue is closed, the shape will be defined in the way it would be after dropping it from a stencil.
3.5.4 •
Import Shape Wizard Overview Prior to starting the Import Shape Wizard, one or more shapes must have been selected on the current drawing. In case more than one shape has been selected, they will all receive a common type, common presentation settings etc. when the wizard has completed. Only the name will be different. If shapes of different types should be imported, the wizard must be executed once for each type of shape.
When the Import Shape Wizard starts, it will perform an optional scale check of the shape. In the Diagrams Options > System Configuration > Import Shape a min/max height/width can be set up. Import Shape will check against these values and give a warning to the user in case the shape exceeds or falls below the set limits. The four steps of the import shape wizard allows the user to set up the following information for the imported shapes:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 1: Selecting Type and Assigning a Name
1. First select the category in the explorer pane to the left. 2. Then select the type in the right hand pane. In case UDETs have been defined, these will be available for selection together with the corresponding base types. 3. Last enter the name for the shape. In case more than one shape is imported at the same time, the name will be suffixed _1, _2 etc.
Note: The checkbox Keep Custom Menu Actions is available for each shape. If checked the cells in Actions section of the shape sheet will be preserved.For piping and HVAC branches, a Denote to dropdown box will appear. This can be used to select
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
the tube/duct type that a branch should be denoted to when dropped on to the drawing. When a branch shape is dropped on to a drawing, a new branch element will be created in the pipeline hierarchy. At the same time, the actual shape will be denoted to become a tube/ duct shape, and a corresponding tube/duct element will be created in the DB as well. In case a shape having a UDET type derived from a branch is dropped on the drawing, the application must know which UDET type it should be denoted to. When the Next button is clicked, the wizard will continue to the next step. At this time, there is also a check that the shape has the correct number and direction of connection points.
Figure 3:5.
•
Example of error message dialogue box shown when the number of connections on the shape is not correct
Step 2: Selecting the Stencil
In this step you should select the stencil to which the shape should be added. The dialogue will show the currently open stencils, so the stencil must have been opened before starting the Import Shape Wizard.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Note: When import shape is performed, the stencil is automatically saved, but to make this save permanent, the user will have to perform a Save Work.
•
Step 3: Annotation Style Settings
In this step the default annotation can be set up. The default annotation is represented by the shape text as well as a number of default labels that can be automatically placed on the drawing when the shape is dropped. The number of default annotations varies depending on the type of item and can be controlled by changing the settings under General Options > Annotation Settings in Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
The annotation options are as follows: Shape text options
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Use defaults
If this is set to True, the Shape Text settings will be fetched from the default set up in Diagrams Options > Element Options for the relevant type. If it is set to False, it will be possible to override the default settings with a specific setting for the shape to be imported in this dialogue. Other Shape text options can only be changed if Use defaults is set to False.
Shape text
The shape text can be specified using attribute references and dot notation (refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices).
Text frame style
The setting is available for 2D shapes except annotating shapes (e.g. Labels). It allows adding a frame around the shape's text. Possible values are: None-no text frame, Rectangle-rectangular frame will be added to the shape text, RoundedRectangle-rectangular frame with rounded corners will be wrapped around text.
Rotate text with shape
The setting is available for 2D shapes except annotating shapes (e.g. Labels). Its value determines the shape text orientation. When set to False, the text will always be oriented horizontally regardless of the shape's rotation. When it is set to True - the text orientation will be corresponding to the shape's rotation.
Shape text colour
The colour of the shape text can be freely selected from a Windows standard colour palette.
Shape text font
The shape text font can be freely selected from a Windows standard font dialogue.
XRef
XRef can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT. It represents the reference point in the shape to which the X offset of shape text is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
YRef
YRef can be set to CENTRE, TOP or BOTTOM. It represents the reference point in the shape to which the Y offset of shape text is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset X
Horizontal offset for shape text placement in relation to XRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset Y
Vertical offset for shape text placement in relation to YRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
3:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Offset longitudinal reference
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT and represents the reference point in the text block. Longitudinal offset of the text will be measured from that point to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset longitudinal
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the longitudinal offset of shape text in relation to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular reference
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It can be set to CENTRE, TOP and BOTTOM and represents the reference point in the text block. Perpendicular offset of text will be measured from that point to the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the distance between the label and the longest part of the line.
3:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
Annotation 1 - 10
Use
Can be set to the following values: USE - Means that the annotation will be used for this shape and that the annotation settings can be specified separately. DON'T_USE - Means that the annotation will not be used for this shape. USE_DEFAULT - Means that the default settings as specified in Diagrams Options > Element Options will be used. Other annotation options can only be changed if Use is set to USE.
Attribute
The attribute to be shown in the annotation label can be specified using attribute references and dot notation (refer to Attribute Presentation Notation).
XRef
XRef can be set to CENTRE, RIGHT or LEFT and represents the reference point to in the shape to which the X offset is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset X
X offset for label placement in relation to XRef. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Yref
YRef can be set to CENTRE, TOP or BOTTOM and represents the reference point to in the shape to which the X offset is related. The setting is available for 2D shapes only.
Offset Y
Y offset for label placement in relation to YRef. The setting is available for 2-D shapes only.
Offset longitudinal
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines longitudinal offset of a label in relation to the centre of the longest part of the line.
Offset perpendicular
The setting is available for 1D shapes (connectors) only. It determines the distance between a label and the longest part of the line.
Colour
Annotation colour can be freely selected from a Windows standard colour palette.
Font
Font can be freely selected from a Windows standard font selection dialogue.
Stencil
Name of the stencil where the label shape should be fetched from.
Label shape
Name of the label shape to be used for the annotation.
Note: The number of annotations can be changed using the General Options > Annotation Settings > Number of Autolabels setting in Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 4: Attribute Presentation
In this step the attribute presentation can be set up. If the Use default attribute presentation settings checkbox is checked, all presentation settings will be taken from the default that has been set up using the Attribute Presentation tab of the Diagrams Options dialogue (refer to Diagrams Options). In addition to the default presentation settings, it is in this step also possible to set up a default value (the Value column) for each attribute. This can still be provided even if the presentation settings are taken from the default. For a description of the columns, please refer to the Attribute presentation tab of the Diagrams Options dialogue. Note: In the Diagrams Options dialogue, there is also an Allow individual shape settings to override default settings checkbox related to the behaviour of this step. If that checkbox is checked, the presentation settings specified in this step of the Import Shape Wizard will be ignored. In case the user wants to override the default settings for certain shapes, this checkbox will have to be unchecked when the shapes are dropped on to the diagram drawing. Note: The value of the Text attribute is controlled by Annotation Settings in step 3, and is therefore disabled in step 4.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
•
Step 5: Default Catalogue Search Filter
In this step, it is possible to specify a default catalogue search filter for the shape. If this is done, the filter will be applied in subsequent catalogue search operations using the Manual Catalogue Selection (refer to Manual Component Selection in Chapter Working with Diagrams). This can for instance be used in a way that for a cable shape, a filter is referred that includes searching in the correct category for cables. When the user will subsequently select such a cable shape in the drawing and go to the catalogue search window, it will automatically apply the pre-defined filter so only relevant cable catalogue items will be shown. Default filters for each type of item can be specified in Diagrams Options by using the Catalogue search settings > Default filters for non-pipeline elements settings. If these should be used, the Use filter from Diagrams default settings should be checked. Otherwise a specific filter for the particular shape can be specified in the Default catalogue search filter textbox. Note: If specification search for pipeline parts is not active, the following settings are also available, Catalogue search settings > Default filters for pipeline elements. When step 5 has been completed and the Finish command has been given, the shape(s) will be added to the selected stencil. The user will also be prompted if he/she wants to make a Save Work or not. The reason for this is that if the application subsequently will be closed without any Save Work command being issued, the imported shapes will be lost. So if the user clicks NO, then he/she will have to remember to perform a SaveWork at a later time.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.5.5
Edit Master By using the Admin Tab > Shapes > Edit Master command, it is possible to edit the settings for Diagrams shapes in a stencil without having to do a new import. The user interface is the same as for Import Shape (refer to Import Shape Wizard). However, as the dialogue opens it goes directly to step 3, as steps 1 and 2 are irrelevant for an already existing shape in a stencil. In step 3, the annotation settings can be changed, in step 4 the attribute presentation can be changed and in step 5 the default catalogue search filter can be changed.
3.5.6
Edit Shape Sometimes after dropping several shapes from stencils, there is a need to change their text or annotation properties. This can be achieved by using the Admin Tab > Shapes > Edit Shape command. The command can be used for one or more shapes selected on the drawing. If more than one shape is selected, all shapes should represent the same element type (e.g. all should be cable shapes or equipment shapes). The Edit Shape command brings up the same dialogue as Import Shape and Edit Master (refer to Import Shape Wizard). Like for the function Edit Master, the dialogue opens at step 3, but it is not possible to go back to step 1, Type and Name of Shape, because it is not allowed to change the type of an already dropped shape, nor to step 2, Destination Stencil, as this step is not relevant in this case. When using the Edit Shape functionality it is possible to change the following: •
annotation style settings (step 3)
•
attribute presentation settings (step 4)
•
default catalogue search filter (step 5)
Note: Edit Shape can be used for Diagrams shapes only (shapes created using Import Shape Wizard or the Instant Define feature).
3.5.7
Instant Define There are situations when some of the shapes are used very rarely and there is no need to have them defined on the stencil. In these cases, it is possible to draw/copy a shape on the drawing and define it skipping the Import Shape. To achieve that: •
Select a shape on the drawing that was not created by the Import Shape Wizard.
•
Select the Home Tab > Object > Define command.
The Define Item Wizard window will open. The dialogue is the same as the Import Shape Wizard, only step 2, Destination Stencil, is not available and in step 1 the Name field is disabled as it is not relevant. After the steps in the Define Item Wizard are done, the shape will be defined on the drawing in the same way as Diagrams shapes dropped from stencils.
3.6
Optimising Project Performance and Storage Space Important: Please read this chapter before setting up your project.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3.6.1
Recommendations to Improve Performance of SaveWork 1. Avoid having many pages in the same diagram. It is better to create separate diagram files. At the moment, all the pages in the diagram are being processed and saved as SVG files during SaveWork, this is the case even if the user has just modified one of the pages. 2. Avoid using heavy bitmaps or too detailed vector graphics in title block and backgrounds. You can experiment by removing some of these and measure the SaveWork performance to determine if you have an issue with this. 3. There is a setting to control whether SVG files should always be created, or only when the drawing contains anything released to 3D. If this setting is used, it is possible to get better performance when initially working with the drawing. After it has been released to 3D, there will then be a performance degradation as the SVG files starts getting created. Please note that once SVG files starts generating, you cannot turn it off again, so this setting has to be applied from the start of a new diagram drawing. 4. During savework, there is intense file storage activity with Visio and SVG files. For this reason it is recommended that the IT infrastructure such as network and file server disk performance where the files reside (xxxDIA) is optimized.
3.6.2
Refresh Performance The performance of the Refresh command is dependent on how many shapes are being refreshed and how many attributes belong to each of these shapes in the Custom Properties. It is easy to get large numbers here. E.g. if there are a 100 shapes in a drawing that each has 50 attributes belonging to it, this will produce 5000 attribute values to be read from Dabacon and updated in the shapes' Custom Properties. Recommendations: 1. Only use the Refresh command when necessary, e.g. when you suspect something has been updated in the DB and you need to see it reflected in your drawing. 2. If only some shapes are selected in a drawing when doing the refresh, only those shapes will be affected. It is often unnecessary to refresh the whole drawing if only one part is being worked on. 3. Reduce the number of attributes per shape to be shown in Custom Properties down to a set of attributes that are really being used by the Diagrams user. E.g. there exists a lot of .Pmg... UDA’s in the sample project. In many cases these attributes are not being used and take up unnecessary time during the Refresh. When these kinds of attributes are not being used the UDA’s can simply be removed from the project. It is also possible to control which attributes should appear in the Custom Properties through the Attribute Presentation function. If for instance half of the attributes shown in the Custom Properties are never used, then removing them will halve the time used for refreshing the whole drawing.
3.6.3
Project Storage with Respect to Visio and SVG Files Recommendations 1. As mentioned above, it is possible to disable the SVG creation until it is really needed (when the diagram has been released to 3D). 2. There is a setting to control whether to use binary Visio files or XML format Visio files. XML format requires much more storage space, so make sure to use the binary format.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Getting Started
3. There is a ‘Keep session files’ setting that will determine whether the old versions of the Visio and SVG files will be kept during each SaveWork or not. With this setting you can balance between ‘more data management capability & more storage space required’ or ‘less data management capability & less storage space required’ as is described below: •
With this setting set to True there is a possibility to backtrack the Dabacon session and access the specific Visio/SVG file versions related to that particular session. The drawback here is, of course, that it may take a significant amount of storage space to save the related files for all sessions.
•
With this setting set to False only latest versions of the Visio/SVG files will be kept. This means that backtracking a Dabacon session will not give access to the corresponding Visio/SVG files. However, storage space requirements will be less demanding.
•
When ‘Keep session files’ is set to True, and sessions are to be merged, then select Admin Tab > Admin Tools > Project Maintenance > Clean Old Session Files to get rid of the corresponding Visio/SVG files. This can be an approach where there is a possibility to backtrack changes during a period. Merge and clean the sessions and continue from there.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
3:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4
Working with Diagrams This chapter describes all the standard functions and procedures for using the application, and is therefore of interest to all users of Diagrams.
4.1
Introduction Symbols are added to drawings by dragging and dropping shapes from the stencil to the drawing area. As soon as a shape that corresponds to a DB element is dropped, it will if possible be defined (refer to section Define / Undefine), which means that a corresponding database element will be created in the current database session. Some shapes will need a context to be defined. For example, if a valve shape is dropped by itself, it will not be defined until it is connected to a defined member of a pipeline branch, for instance a SCTUB shape. When a shape is defined, the corresponding database element can also be seen appearing in the DB explorer. When using the Consistency Check function (refer to section Consistency Check), a warning will be issued for undefined shapes. Default attributes defined in the shape in the stencil will automatically be assigned to the element. There is also a function to prompt the user for attribute values when a shape is dropped is also supported. The attributes of a shape are available through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. As soon as an attribute is changed by the user, it will be updated into the database session. The data will then be written to the database and be available to other users after issuing a Save Work command. Shapes can be connected to other shapes directly when dropped, or they can be connected afterwards.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:1.
Attributes for a shape can be viewed and updated through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. Updated attributes are automatically stored in the corresponding DB element.
4.2
Main GUI Components
4.2.1
Main Window and Dockable Sub-windows The main window contains a number of dockable/floatable sub-windows that can be rearranged in different ways. Please refer to the Common Application Framework (CAF) documentation for further details.
4.2.2
Schematic Explorer The Schematic Explorer can be used to navigate in the Schematic World in the database. If the Schematic Explorer is not visible, it can be displayed using the View Tab > Explorers > Schematic Explorer command in the main application menu. In this explorer you can see the primary Schematic Group hierarchy (refer to Groups in Chapter Application Setup). Below each schematic group, the items are further sub-grouped by Folders. Folders do not exist in the database, they are only a way to display items of the same type, together, and provide a better navigation and overview. Above the navigation tree is a Filter checkbox as well as a dropdown list where predefined filters can be selected. If the Filter checkbox is checked, the selected filter will be applied to the explorer tree. Currently there are tree filters available, one for each discipline (Piping, HVAC, Electrical). The Schematic Explorer features a context sensitive right mouse button menu that provides common commands.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The Schematic Explorer shows the entire contents of the database and not only the current drawing. Operations done through the explorer such as Rename etc. will be automatically updated in any currently open diagram drawing, but for any drawings that would be affected by the change, but are not open in the current session for the moment, a manual Refresh will have to be applied later.
4.2.3
System Explorer The System Explorer can be used to navigate in the System Hierarchy in the database. If the System Explorer is not visible, it can be displayed by using the View Tab > Explorers > System Explorer command in the main application menu. In this explorer you can see the secondary Systems hierarchy. Below each system, the items are further sub-grouped by Folders. Folders do not exist in the database, they are only
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
a way to display items of the same type, together, and provide a better navigation and overview. Main schematic items such as Pipelines, HVAC lines, Equipment items and Cables are members in the system hierarchy through their SCSYSF attribute, which contains an array of system references. This means that a schematic item can be a member of more than one system simultaneously, thereby appearing in several places in the System Explorer tree. The first system in the array is considered the primary system, and others are considered secondary. By default, all subordinate items are considered to be members of the same system as the parent Pipeline / HVACline / Equipment item. It is however possible to override this by setting a different system reference on a subordinate item, such as a special valve or a sub-equipment item. In this case that particular item would both appear below the parent item (Pipeline, Equipment) in the system explorer, and also by itself under the system set for that item. Diagrams are shown under all systems to which the items on the diagram belong. This includes both primary and secondary systems. Above the navigation tree is a Filter checkbox as well as a dropdown list where predefined filters can be selected. If the Filter checkbox is checked, the selected filter will be applied to the explorer tree. Currently there are tree filters available, one for each discipline (Piping, HVAC, Electrical). The System Explorer features a context sensitive right mouse button menu that provides common commands. Note: The System Explorer shows the entire contents of the database and not only the current drawing. Some administrative elements such as the SYSCDA and SYSMDA are however hidden in order not to clutter the view. These elements can be seen and manipulated through the systems hierarchy administration function. Please refer to Systems in Chapter Application Setup for further information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.4
Project Breakdown Structure Explorer The PBS (Project Breakdown Structure) Explorer allows presenting database content depending on user needs. It is accessible in View ribbon tab in Explorer group:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The data can be shown as one or more user-defined structures. Each structure is shown in the explorer as a hierarchy starting from separate root node and can show database items organized according to their belonging to system, class, etc., depending on definition in Lexicon (for more information please refer to Project Breakdown Structure chapter in Lexicon User Guide). The PBS Explorer tree is generated during runtime from Lexicon definition and its nodes can represent database items as well as just label texts generated from definition. By selecting node connected to database item, user can navigate database hierarchy (set current element). Also, context menu with basic commands is available for relevant nodes.
4.2.5
Hiding Element Type String in Explorer It is possible to hide the element type when presenting the database elements in the explorer, in order to make the elements appear only by name. This can be done by unchecking the Element Type checkbox in the Explorer Settings:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
This can make the appearance in the explorer easier to view.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:2.
Element Type checked
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:3.
Element Type unchecked
The rules of presenting elements when ‘Element Type’ is off are as below; •
For named items, only name is displayed.
•
For unnamed items of build-in (system) type presented string is concatenated from "Reporter text" (RPTX) defined for the type followed by sequence number, e.g. Equipment 1.
•
For unnamed items of user defined type, user-defined type name followed by sequence number is presented.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.6
Possibility to Sort Explorer Items by Name It is possible to display database items sorted by name alphabetically. The sorting can be decided for each element type, so that items under a certain element type is sorted by name. For example, if choosing to sort under SCGROUP, all nodes below SCGROUP will be sorted in the explorer. Nodes that are displaying its members sorted are indicated by an arrow;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
It is possible to select several element types for sorting. Their names can be keyed in or selected from the Select element types window. This is available after clicking the Browse button in the options field.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The method of sorting elements is as follow; •
Elements are sorted by the text visible in explorer tree, that means that if type string is visible, it is taken into account while sorting. For example,:SCPUMP zzz will be placed before SCEQUI aaa. If the type string is off, then the items will be ordered differently.
•
Items are sorted alphanumerically.
•
Sorting is inherited when secondary explorer is created by selecting "New Explorer" command from item's context menu.
Note: The sorting is done only for presentation in the Explorer and does not affect the order of the elements in the database.
4.2.7
Diagram Drafting Canvas The MS Visio sub-window contains the diagram drawing canvas and provides access to stencils as well as attributes through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Shape attributes are available through the Custom Properties / Shape Data window (see below).
•
There are right-click menus available for shapes as well as for the drawing background providing context sensitive short-cuts for common functions.
•
When an item is selected on the drawing, it will automatically be made the Current Element (CE), which means that it will be selected in the explorer and other windows that track the CE.
•
When an item is selected in the explorer, it will however not be selected in the drawing automatically. In case the user wants to select it, there is a Select in Drawing command on the right click menu in the explorer.
•
Navigation such as Scrolling, Panning, Zooming in the drawing window can be achieved through standard Visio functions such as Ctrl+Shift+Click on left and right mouse buttons. See table below. Ctrl+Shift+Left Mouse button click
Zoom in
Ctrl+Shift+Right Mouse button click
Zoom out
Ctrl+Shift+Right Mouse button drag
Pan
•
A number of Function Keys are available for easy access and commonly used commands. Please refer to section Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys for more information.
•
Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information about the drawing window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.8
Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window
Note: The Custom Properties Window has been renamed to Shape Data Window in Visio 2007. If the Custom Properties / Shape Data window is not visible, it can be shown using the View Tab > Attributes > Shape Data command in the main menu. The attributes presented for each kind of item can be changed using the Attribute Presentation settings in Diagrams Options in Chapter Getting Started. When the value of an attribute is changed through Shape Data, it will automatically be changed in the related database item using the current Dabacon Session as well. To permanently save the changes to the database, the Save Work command must be issued. For further information about this, refer to section Save Work and Save As. To enter multiple values for an array type attribute, the values can be entered separated by a blank (using space bar). In case more than one shape is selected in the drawing, Shape Data will show the attributes for the first selected item. If the user will then update an attribute value, it will be applied to all selected shapes.
4.2.9
Item List The Item List contains lists of the items on the current page of the diagram drawing. These are arranged on different tabs according to their type. The Item List can be shown by using the View Tab > Attributes > Item List command in the main menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Item List is synchronized with the drawing, so that any items added to or removed from the current drawing page will immediately be reflected in the Item List. Note: When drawings with many items are being worked on, the automatic synchronization between the drawing and the Item List might lead to a noticeable delay in some situations, depending on the computer performance rating. In case this happens, the automatic updating can be turned off by setting the System configuration > Item List > Automatic updating default setting in Diagrams Options to False. Then the Item List can be refreshed manually by using the Refresh command on the right click menu. When items are selected in the drawing, they will also be selected in the Item List and vice versa. This behaviour can be turned off by setting the Connect Item List with Drawing default option to False. In the Pipe inline components and HVAC inline components tabs, Tube and Duct elements are by default not shown in the list. It is however possible to turn on the display of Tubes/ Ducts by changing the System configuration > Item List > Tube/Duct visible default setting in Diagrams Options to True. The Item List is using the AVEVA Grid Control which provides a number of filtering, sorting and grouping functions. For more information about the AVEVA Grid Control, refer to Getting started With Plant documentation. The presentation of attributes in the Item List is configurable by the Attribute Presentation tab in the Project Tab > Options > Diagrams Options dialogue. Please refer to Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started for further information. Attribute data can be edited in the Item List as well as in the Custom Properties / Shape Data Window (refer to section Custom Properties Window / Shape Data Window). The Item List features a right click menu that contains the same item specific commands as in the Schematic Explorer as well as some presentation options such as Show Filter Line, Show Group Panel etc. The Item List also includes an Export to spreadsheet feature. This is further described under section Export.
4.2.10
Catalogue Search By selecting the View Tab > Searching > Catalogue Search command in the main application menu, the Catalogue Search window can be shown. This is further described under Manual Component Selection.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.11
Command Line By selecting the View Tab > Reference > Command Window command in the main application menu, the Command Window can be displayed. In the Command Window you can type in standard PDMS commands for listing and manipulating data, executing PML functions etc. For more information, please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Database Management Reference Manual.
Note: The command line should be used with care, and it is important to fully understand the consequences of the commands issued. Some commands might not work as expected in the Diagrams context. A few examples of these are listed below: •
If changing modules by issuing the PDMS or similar commands, the Diagrams exit handling will be bypassed, so settings and data will not be properly saved.
•
By using the Savework command, the diagram document might not be saved if the user subsequently clicks Cancel in the following dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.12
Message Log
The Message Log can be shown by issuing the View Tab > Reference > Message Log command from the main application menu, or by clicking on the Message Log in the Status Bar (refer to section Status Bar for more information). The Message Log shows messages that occur when the application is being used. Messages can have different severity (Error, Warning or Information) as indicated by the icon. In case a message is related to a particular shape in the drawing, this is indicated by the shape name in the Shape column and the page number in the Page column. In this case it is also possible to click on the message to select the related shape in the drawing. If the shape is not available on the drawing any more (i.e. was deleted or drawing is closed), the page number disappears after the first click on the line with this shape. When the shape is not visible in the drawing window, the window will pan/zoom as necessary. The Message Log can be cleared of all messages by right clicking and selecting Clear Message Log. The columns are as follows: Column Message
Explanation 1. The icon indicates the severity of the message (Error, Warning or Information) 2. Message text
Shape
Name of the Visio shape that the message is related to.
Connection
Connection number of the shape which the message is related to. This is only shown in case the message is related with a certain connection point on the shape.
DB Element
Name of DB element that the shape is related to. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape that has a corresponding DB element.
Page
Page number in the drawing on which the related shape exists. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape.
Time
The time that the message was generated.
Note: When the Message Log window is not open, any error or warning (but not informational messages) that occurs will cause the status bar panel to flash in an orange colour. The flashing will stop as soon as the user moves the mouse to the status bar panel. Please note that in some cases several messages can be generated by a single user operation. In the example below, it is not the SPRE changed… informational message that caused the flashing, but rather the previous error message. Opening the Message Log will show that a previous error message caused the flashing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Status bar panel flashes when the Message Log window is not open.
Opening the Message Log reveals the actual error message that caused the flashing. There is also a functionality which allows exporting the Message log and Consistency check results to a txt or xls file. This is available in the right click context menu of the Message Log and Consistency Check window.
4.2.13
Status Bar
The status bar contains the following panels from left to right: Panel
Description
Status message
Shows status messages, for instance how many shapes are selected at the moment.
Message Log
Shows the latest message in the Message Log. By clicking on this panel, the Message Log window will be shown (refer to the section Message Log for more information).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Panel
Description
Current Line
Shows the name of the current Pipeline/HVACline. The application remembers the latest Pipeline/HVACline that was selected by the user. In case the CE moves to another part of the schematic hierarchy, for instance by selecting an equipment item, the latest selected Pipeline/HVACline will still be remembered and shown in this panel. If any new branches are added, they will be created in the line shown in this panel. If you click on this panel, the line shown will become CE.
Sessions Defaults
When the mouse pointer is hovered over this panel the following tooltip will be shown:
Default System - Shows the current Default System. When new items, that can be part of the System hierarchy, are created they will be created under the current Default System. The current Default System can be changed by clicking on this panel, this will bring up the Standard DB Browse Dialogue. Default Groups - This panel shows the current setting for Default groups. This can be either Individual per type or Get from CE. The Default Groups setting determines at which position in the main hierarchy (schematic groups) that new items will be created. By clicking on the panel, the Default Groups dialogue will be shown (see below). In the Default Groups dialogue, the default group can be set up for each type of item. In case UDETs are being used, separate settings can be applied for each UDET type. In case the Get Default Group from CE checkbox is checked, new elements will instead be created under the Schematic Group which is found in the CE path. Default Attributes - This panel shows the number of currently used default attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Zoom Bar
This panel is visible only when any drawing is open. The content from left is: Zoom To Page- this button zooms out the view to the whole page of an active drawing. Pan & Zoom - toggles the Pan & Zoom window. Zoom Level - Shows the current zoom value. Zoom Out/Zoom In - Zooms the view to the next available zoom threshold. Zoom Slider - allows to quickly change zoom by any value. Figure 4:4.
4.2.14
The Default Groups dialogue.
Search The Search command is available in the View Tab under Searching group. This function searches the database for elements based on name, element type or other criteria and can be useful for finding elements in case the user is not familiar with their location in the schematic hierarchy and are therefore difficult to locate in the explorer. The Search Results shows a list of elements found, and features a right-click menu with common commands.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.15
Find in Drawing Toolbar The Find in Drawing toolbar is available on the Tools Tab. It can be used for finding and highlighting of shapes in the diagram. These selections can be used for further operations.
The procedure to use the Selection Toolbar is as follows: 1. First select the type of element using the Type drop-down box. 2. Select an attribute using the Attribute dropdown box. If no attribute is selected, all items of the specified type will be selected in the drawing. It is also possible to key in the name of a pseudo attribute or a referenced attribute in this field. In order to do that square brackets must be used, e.g. [ABORE] or [SPRE.CATR.PARA(1)]. Note: Array indexing always starts from 1.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
3. Select an operator using the Operator dropdown box. The available operators are the following: Operator
Description
=
Equal-to sign
>
Greater-than sign
<
Less-than sign
<>
Not-equal-to sign
>=
Greater-than-or-equal-to sign
<=
Less-than-or-equal-to sign
The operators are valid for the following types: Type
=
>
<
<>
>=
<=
Integer
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Real
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Text
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Logical
Yes
Yes
Reference
Yes
Yes
Word
Yes
Yes
Yes
Position
Yes
Yes
Orientation
Yes
Yes
Direction
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note: If the attribute is an array, then only the operators ‘=’ and ‘<>’ are available unless an array index is specified, e.g. [Borearray(1)], then the Type should be one of the mentioned above. 4. Enter a criteria value. The value can be left blank in case you are searching for shapes where some fields have not been set, for instance where SPRE in not set. 5. Click the Select button to select items according to the criteria, or click the Highlight button to instead highlight items according to the criteria. 6. Click the Previous button to go to the previous item within the collection of selected or highlighted shapes. The Next button goes to the next item within the collection of selected or highlighted shapes. In the Selection Options menu the user can choose one of the three modes: •
Clear current Selection / Highlight before applying new search - when active new search will disregard the previous selection / highlight next time user performs a search.
•
Add to current Selection / Highlight - when active a new search will add to the existing selection or highlight.
•
Select / Highlight within current selection - forces the search to consider only the items within the current selection. It is therefore possible in this mode to first make a selection using the Area or Lasso method prior to clicking any of the find buttons.
In the Search Options menu the user can choose if the search will be performed on Defined shapes, Undefined shapes or both. When the Zoom To button is activated the application will zoom and/or pan so that the entire selection is visible.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.16
Standard DB Browse Dialogue A standard dialogue is used for several tasks where a DB reference is to be set. The dialogue enables the user to navigate the relevant parts of the database hierarchy as well as search for items by a text search. When the OK button is clicked, the reference to the selected item will be returned to the UI component from which the dialogue was called.
In the Database Tree tab only relevant parts of the database for the current context is shown. In case the user is supposed to select a certain kind of element, only this kind of element together with necessary hierarchy elements will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Using the Search tab, it is possible to make a text search in the database. In case the user has selected a hierarchy node in the Database Tree tab, the search will be limited within that part of the hierarchy. The current search scope can be seen after the Search in label above the text criteria field. The text criteria should be keyed into the criteria field. This will be matched against a concatenation of the Name and Description attributes as the search is being carried out. In case no wildcard characters are used, only items with a whole word matching the criteria will be found. In case more than one word is entered, this will be considered as a complete string to be matched. This means that if you want to find a string that contains two or more words which might be separated by other words, you will have to use asterisks in between (see wildcards below). The asterisk (*) character can be used as a wildcard denominator. Asterisks can be placed before (e.g. *A3), after (e.g. A3*) or in between (e.g. system*spec). This can also be combined (e.g. *A3*). Note: The search is not case sensitive.
4.2.17
Document Links The Links command is available in View Tab > Reference > Links. It allows the user to link documents, URLs etc., to elements in a generic fashion using the LinksAddin. The functionality provided by the LinksAddin is further described in Database Management Reference Manual chapter Link Documents.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.18
Edit Members The Edit Members command is available in the Context menu displayed for elements in the Schematic Explorer. This is an addin which provides functionality to manage members of CE, edit attributes, creating/deleting elements, duplicating some of the members, etc.
4.2.19
Reference List This is an addin which immediately shows the references form the CE to other database elements. It is very useful for checking dependencies between elements and also provides the possibility to navigate between referenced items. This function is available in View Tab > Reference > References.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.2.20
Status Control Status Control is the ability to control and report on the status of individual model objects as they progress through their lifecycles. It can be applied to any model objects, e.g. tagged items, catalogue components, drawings, etc. It can be expressed in a variety of ways, e.g. Approved for Construction, 80% Complete, Clash Free, etc. For more information about Status Control please refer to the Status Control documentation.
4.2.21
Diagrams Rules The Diagrams Rules provides functionality to configure actions depending on user-defined conditions. There are two kinds of rules available: •
Formatting Rules which allows the control of the appearances of shapes.
•
Consistency Rules which allows to create fully configurable definitions of diagrams consistency.
All the rules are accessible in the Diagrams Rules window which can be viewed using the Admin Tab > Definition > Rules command or the appropriate button on the Auto Formatting Rules toolbar.
Figure 4:5.
Diagrams Rules window
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Diagrams Rules Window The Diagrams Rules window provides functionality to define Rules Sets and create new Rules below them. There are two main nodes in the tree on the left hand side representing two kinds of available rules; the Consistency Rules and Formatting Rules. It is not possible to remove or change the order of these nodes.
Rules Sets and then Rules of a given kind can be created below each of the main nodes. Rules and whole Rule Sets can then be copied, removed or renamed using the right mouse button menu:
Rules and Rule Sets can also be re-ordered using the Drag&Drop functionality. Note: Copying and re-ordering is only possible in scope of one kind of rules, a consistency rule cannot become a formatting rule. It is also possible to turn on/off rules or whole rule sets using check boxes in the left part of the window. If the main node is turned off all the rule sets and rules are not active. Turning a rule or rule set off means that it will be skipped when rules are executed either manually or automatically on events.
•
Rule Details The Rule definition can be seen/modified in the Rule Details window which is shown when a new rule is created or after the Rule Details command is selected from the Rule Context menu. It provides functionality to specify the rule definition and its content is different for Formatting and Consistency Rules.
•
Formatting Rule Details The Formatting Rule definition can be specified by defining the following; •
rule name and description
•
selection criteria
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
format to apply to matching shapes
•
additional rule options
When the rule is executed on the current drawing, first all the shapes that meet the selection criteria are found and then the appropriate format is applied to them according to the additional options.
•
Setting Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria specifies to which elements a rule is applied. Generally the criteria are based on values of database attributes, but it is also possible to filter out shapes fulfilling specified Visio formula. The database criteria can be defined in three ways; 1. Using element type and attribute values 2. Using a pml expression. 3. Selecting shapes without database element This can be chosen in the Criteria drop down box.
Figure 4:6.
Defining selection criteria using the Type & attribute value option
If the ‘Type & attribute value’ is selected it provides the possibility to select the type of elements to which the rule should be applied and then to define the number of attribute filters. It is also possible to select ‘All types’ which means that the attribute filters will be matched to all elements. To specify attribute filters select the Attribute from the drop down in the Attribute column in the grid. It is possible to use regular attributes as well as referenced attributes. It is also possible to key in the attribute name rather than select it from the list. The attributes list contains system attributes and UDAs valid for the selected type including referenced attributes defined in Attribute Presentation in Diagrams Options. It does not contain pseudo attributes unless they are added in the Attribute Presentation. If there is no type specified for the rule (‘All’ is selected in the Type drop down) the list consists
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
of merged attributes for all database types that can be represented on a diagram. After the attribute is selected, the operator and value to compare should be specified as shown in the screen shot above. A new row for the next attribute filter is added automatically after the current row is edited. To delete an existing attribute filter row select the whole row and press the Delete key on the keyboard. When several attribute filters are defined it is possible to decide if all of them should meet the rule for a specified shape or if it is enough that one of them is valid for a given shape. This depends on the state of the Require all the following check box. If the selection criteria type is set to ‘PML expression’ then there will be a text box displayed to key in the expression. It will be executed on all database elements represented on the drawing and the element will be considered as satisfying the rule criteria if the expression returns True. Therefore the expression must be of boolean type, e.g. FUNC EQ ‘PIPE’. For more information about constructing PML expression see User Guide Software Customisation / Customisation Guide / PML Expressions.
Figure 4:7.
Defining selection criteria using the PML expression option
The third possible Criteria is ‘Shapes without DB element’. After this is selected from the drop down, user is able to decide which shapes not having any connection should be taken into account. There is an option to select: •
Not defined shapes
•
Shapes defined but not having any DB representation (this could happen e.g. when element is deleted from database from command line)
•
Non-database shapes like Labels, Title blocks, Instrument Relationship Shapes etc.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:8.
Defining selection criteria for shapes without DB representation
Apart from specifying the database condition, it is also possible to set Visio formula as an additional shape condition. To set the formula 'Visio shape condition...' link label should be pressed and a valid Visio formula should be shown in the dialog:
Figure 4:9.
Setting Visio shape condition
Following Visio standards, the formula should be of Boolean type and result in TRUE (non zero) or FALSE (zero). The entered formula will be executed on shapes and is allowing to make applying rules dependant of e.g. shape geometry. For example formula (BeginXEndX)*(BeginX-EndX)+(BeginY-EndY)*(BeginY-EndY)>10mm could be used if the rule should be applied to shapes matching the given database criteria and in addition only if the length of the connector is greater than 10 mm. After the selection criteria are defined it is possible to check to which shapes the rule will be applied on the current drawing using the Highlight link placed at the right bottom of the dialog. After this is clicked all shapes meeting the criteria will be highlighted on the current drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Specifying Format to be Applied When the shapes meet the rule criteria are found during the executing rule, the format properties defined by this rule are applied to them. The format to be applied to the matching shape can be defined on the Format to be assigned tab:
Figure 4:10. Defining format to be applied by rule
The tab page contains a list of all format properties possible to assign using the rule. If the associated value is not set (blank) it means that the property is not going to be set. The following properties can be assigned: •
Line colour – if the value for the property is set, then the line colour of the shapes meeting the rule criteria will be set appropriately. This will override the Defined, Released To 3D and Associated With 3D colours. The value can be defined in the dialog presented after clicking the button in the field:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:11.
•
Define line colour
Lline pattern – can be defined by selecting the desired value from the drop down in the corresponding field. The value can also be keyed in. It determines which line pattern can be assigned to shapes matching the rule. If a selected pattern is defined, it should be added to the drawing before applying the rule. Otherwise there will be no visible effect (only the formula will be set appropriately).
Figure 4:12. Selecting line pattern
•
Line weight – line weight can be selected from the list or be put into the corresponding field as a text. If the value is keyed in without a unit string, then when the rule is being applied, the default page unit will be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:13. Selecting line weight
•
Line cap - can be selected from a list or keyed in, in the same way as line pattern.
•
Line transparency - can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
Figure 4:14. Specifying transparency
•
Fill colour – can be set in the same way as line colour.
•
Fill pattern – fill pattern can be selected from a list or keyed in, in the same way as line pattern.
•
Fill pattern colour – is defined in the same way as line colour.
•
Fill transparency – can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
•
Layer – layer can be selected from the list containing layers present on the current drawing or keyed into the appropriate field. If it is set, then all shapes matching the rule will be added to the layer and removed from the layers they belonged to before. If a layer with a name does not exist it will be created.
Figure 4:15. Selecting a layer
If
Text font – defines the font to be used in the text of shapes matching the rule. It can be selected from the following list:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:16. Selecting text font
•
Text size – can be selected from a list of typical font sizes or keyed in:
Figure 4:17. Selecting text size
•
Text colour - can be set in the same way as other colours.
•
Text style – specifies if text in shapes fulfilling the rule criteria should be bold, italic, etc. An appropriate value can be selected from the following list:
Figure 4:18. Selecting text style
•
Text transparency – can be selected from a list or keyed in to the appropriate field. It is a numeric value presented as % of.
Sometimes there is a need to clear previous formatting before applying the new one. In such a case, the Clear auto formatting option placed on the Format tab below the table can be used.
If the check box is ticked then previous formatting done by the rules will be cleared for all shapes fulfilling current rule criteria. Also, in such a case the formatting table will be disabled for editing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Additional Rule Options To make rules more adjustable to specific needs it is possible to set several additional options. This can be achieved using the Rule options tab.
The options possible to set are: •
Apply rule to protected members of grouped shapes – if the option is unchecked then any format defined in the rule will not be applied to group members protected from group formatting. It can be set by selecting Format > Protection and checking the appropriate option in the dialog opened by the command:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The option will be ignored and disabled for editing when Clear auto formatting is checked in the Format to be assigned tab. •
Overwrite guarded Visio formulas – if the option is not checked then the format will not be applied if the corresponding cell in the shape sheet is guarded, e.g. line colour will not be applied to the shape if its ‘LineColor’ cell contains the formula’=GUARD(7)’.
Note: The option will be ignored and disabled for editing when ‘Clear auto formatting’ is checked in the Format to be assigned tab.
•
•
Apply rule automatically on events (if enabled) – if the option is not checked then the rule will not be executed automatically even if ‘Auto apply rules’ is on, see also Executing Rules below.
•
Handling annotations – if a shape matches the rule, then this setting provides the possibility to decide if the format should be applied to the shape only, to the shape and its annotations (attached labels) or only for the shape’s annotations.
Consistency Rule details The Consistency Rule definition can be specified by setting the following; •
rule name and description
•
selection criteria
•
check to be performer on pre-selected shapes
•
action to be taken on ‘failed’ shapes
•
additional rule options
When the rule is executed on the current drawing, at first all the shapes that meet the selection criteria are found and then the check is executed on the shapes to determine whether they are fulfilling required conditions, and finally specified actions are taken on ‘failed’ shapes. The execution of rules is controlled by the rule options.
•
Setting Selection Criteria The Selection Criteria are specifying which elements should be taken into account while performing the consistency check, e.g. bore size should be checked for inline components only. The Selection Criteria can be defined in exactly the same way as for Formatting Rules.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
For more details please refer to Setting Selection Criteria.
•
Check Definition Shapes meeting selection criteria found during rules execution are checked according to definition. The Check can be defined as PML macro or the Check function should be used. The PML macro should be of BOOLEAN type and it should return TRUE if the shape meets the requirements and FALSE if not and if actions defined on next tab page should be taken.
Figure 4:19. Defining check as PML expression
The Check can also be retrieved from the Library. After selecting the option, using the browse button, a list of available Checks are presented.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:37
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:20. Selecting the check function from library
If the Check method fails for some reason, a defined action should be taken on the shape. There are a number of standard checks defined in the Diagrams Consistency Rules Library, but it is also possible to define customised checks. These should be defined as classes implementing IDiagramsRulesCheck specified in Aveva.Diagrams.DiagramsRules in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. To be automatically picked up, the class defining check should be placed in a dll named *ConsistencyRulesLibrary.dll. Apart from defining the check itself there is also an option to decide if the check should be performed for every connection of the shape. If Execute for each connection is checked, a defined PML Expression or selected library check will be applied for every connection of the given shape and an action will be performed on every failed connection. If the option is unchecked checks are performed once for every shape matching the selection criteria. Note: Only one check can be specified for each rule.
•
Specifying Actions On the Actions tab page it can be specified which action(s) should be taken for shapes that failed the check. Several actions can be specified for the same rule. An action can be defined as a PML macro which can be any operation to be executed on a DB element connected with a shape.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:38
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:21. Definition of action
In addition it is possible to select a number of actions from the library. They can be added/ removed by clicking Add action/Remove Action. Actions are executed in order or appearance on the list. Move up/down link labels allow to re-order them according to needs.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:39
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:22. Selecting action from Library
Similarly to the checks, actions are also pre-defined in Diagrams Consistency Rules Library, with the possibility to add more. To add a custom action a class needs to be defined implementing IDiagramsRulesActon specified in Aveva.Diagrams.DiagramsRules in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. To be automatically picked up, the class defining check should be placed in a dll named *ConsistencyRulesLibrary.dll. On the Action tab page also the severity of rule and message to be added to the Consistency Check Result window can be specified. The severity can be as follows: •
Information
•
Warning
•
Error
And the message can be any text which will be visible in the Consistency Check Result window if a shape fails the check. The severity is also mapped to the window:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:40
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Consistency Rule Options To make rules more adjustable to specific needs it is possible to configure their behaviour on events. This can be accomplished using the Rule Options tab:
The following possibilities of rule behaviour exist: •
Don’t execute rule on events – this means that the rule will be executed only manually.
•
Use default configuration – the behaviour depends on the Consistency Rules settings in Diagram Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:41
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
•
Custom configuration – the behaviour is specified ‘locally’ for the rule and does not depend on the default configuration.
Executing Rules Rules and rule sets are controlled by the Diagrams Rules toolbar which allows the turn on/ off of several options and to manually execute rule sets.
Figure 4:23. Diagrams Rules Toolbar
To manually execute the rule set on current selection or the whole drawing if no shapes are selected, the appropriate value (name of the rule set to be executed) should be selected from the drop down on the toolbar and after that the Apply rules button
should be
clicked. To select the proper Rule Set to execute, the kind of rule should be selected from the left drop down list (Formatting Rules or Consistency Rules). Then, the second drop down menu will be updated with all Rule Sets available for the selected kind of rule. To execute all rules of a given kind, the All rule sets should be selected in the second drop down. Note: Only active rule sets (having checked the ‘active’ check box in the tree in the Rule Definitions window) are executed by this command. Another method to execute a single rule or rule set is issuing the Apply command with the Right Mouse button menu on the appropriate item in the Auto Formatting Rules window. This will also work for currently selected shapes or for the whole drawing if nothing is selected on it.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:42
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is a number of options configuring the execution of rules. They are specified for Formatting Rules and for Consistency Rules and the execution of every kind or rule can be performed in a different way.
•
Executing Formatting Rules As mentioned above, Formatting Rules can be executed from the Diagrams Rules toolbar. The important thing to be aware of is that Formatting Rules are applied in sequence and if one of them is specifying the same property, e.g. colour than the previous rule, then the previous value will be overwritten. It could be used to define a sequence of rules going from very general criteria to more specified conditions, but it is important to keep an appropriate rules order. There are also additional options on the toolbar to configure execution of Formatting Rules.
To turn on automatic executing, select the Apply on Events button . When this is checked the active rules with the Apply rule automatically on events option set are executed after different kinds of events. The events can be determined in Diagrams Options.
Figure 4:24. Specifying events that should trigger executing formatting rules
If the Zoom to option changed shapes.
is on, then the zoom of the current page is adjusted to show all
After the rules are executed and the appropriate formats are applied, it is possible to restore the original format from the shapes in the current selection using the Reverse button: If no shapes are selected on the drawing, then the format is restored for all shapes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:43
.
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Another option that can be set in Diagrams Options is the Message level. It specifies how detailed messages will appear in the Message Log during applying auto formatting rules. The setting can have the following values:
•
•
Summary message - only messages on starting and finishing applying auto formatting rules are displayed in the Message Log.
•
Message per rule - apart from start and finish message, one message per applied rule is added with information of the number of shapes the rule has been applied to.
•
Message per shape - apart from start and finish message, one message for each shape with changed format is added to the Message Log.
•
Message per applied format - information about each applied format is added to the Message Log as well as start and finish applying rules messages.
Executing Consistency Rules The Consistency Rules can be executed manually in the following ways: •
From Diagrams Rules definition window by executing the Apply command from the context menu of Rule or Rule Set – the Rule or Rule Set will be executed for the current selection or the whole drawing if nothing is selected.
•
From the main menu by selecting the Consistency Check command – executes all available active Consistency Rules for the current selection or the whole drawing if noting is selected.
•
From the Diagrams Rules toolbar by clicking the Apply button as described in the Executing Rules chapter above. The Rule Set selected from the drop down will also be applied to the current selection or the whole drawing if nothing is selected. It is possible to execute rules with specific severity by checking the appropriate options in the Consistency Check options on the Diagrams Rules toolbar.
In the example above only rules with severity equal Error or Warning will be executed. The ones with severity set to Information will be skipped. Note: The selection of severity only applies when the execution is called from the Diagrams Rules toolbar. On the Diagrams Rules toolbar there is also an option to turn on/off automatic execution of Consistency Rules. This can be achieved by checking/un-checking the Apply on Events button in the Consistency Rules options. After the Consistency Rules are executed the Consistency Check Result window is shown. The messages are added to the window when the check fails for a rule having Message specified on the Action tab page. The Message can be viewed in the window and the severity rule is mapped to the appropriate icon.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:44
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:25. Consistency Check Result window
Every message added to the Consistency Check Result window has information about the Rule that generated the message. It is possible to navigate to the Rule definition by selecting the Go to Consistency Rule command from the Context menu of each message:
4.3
Standard MS Visio Functions The standard MS Visio functions are embedded and available through menus and ribbon tabs. For more information about MS Visio functions, refer to the MS Visio documentation. Below can be seen the main application menus, where the standard MS Visio functions have been highlighted in yellow.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:45
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:46
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:47
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:48
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Other main application menus do not contain any standard MS Visio commands.
4.4
Application Modes Diagrams can operate in three different application modes: •
P&ID mode
•
Cable mode
•
HVAC mode
The selected mode will affect some of the available commands. Each mode has its own group in the Home Tab (P&ID, HVAC, Cable) and is only available when that mode is selected.
Figure 4:26. Application mode selection in Tools menu.
4.5
Keyboard Shortcuts and Function Keys In the following table is listed the various keyboard shortcuts available in Diagrams. Standard Visio commands have been highlighted in a yellow colour, while Diagrams specific commands are not.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:49
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6
File Handling
4.6.1
Overview All diagrams, stencils and templates are handled through proxy elements in the database, even if the actual files are stored in the file system. Please refer to Database Architecture in Chapter Diagrams Overview for an overview of how these documents are managed. Note: It is possible to choose binary or XML format for saving Visio documents. For more information please see Document file formats in Document Files, Sessions etc. in Chapter Application Setup.
4.6.2
New
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:50
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
New diagrams, templates and stencils can be created through the New Diagram and New Stencil commands in the Project > New menu.
If desired, a template for a new diagram can be chosen from the database. If no template should be used, then click the No template button. To ensure integrity between data on the drawing and its database representation, when a new diagram is created (from a template or not) it should be saved to the database. For that reason the user is immediately prompted for a name and database location for the new document via the standard Save Diagram As dialogue as seen below:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:51
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is a possibility to create a new drawing without saving it to the database. This is done by clicking the Cancel button as it states in the dialogue title bar. However, then the document is considered read-only and any database related changes to its content are not allowed. Note: The same occurs when an external drawing is imported using Project > Import and Export > Import > Drawing. The imported drawing should be either saved to the database or be opened in read-only mode.
4.6.3
Open Existing diagrams, stencils and templates can be opened through the Project Tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:52
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When the Open command is issued, the Open dialogue is shown. This dialogue shows a list of the diagram, stencil and template index elements in the database, through which the diagrams can be opened.
Diagrams, stencils and templates can also be opened by double clicking or using the rightclick menu of the Schematic Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:53
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case the diagram is connected to other diagrams through off-page connectors, the Connected Diagrams command will be available. By selecting this command either of two things will happen: 1. If the diagram is connected to one other diagram only, this diagram will open. 2. If the diagram is connected to several other diagrams, a list of diagrams will be shown so the user can select which one(s) to open.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:54
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: When the user tries to open a diagram that is already claimed a dialogue will be shown where the user gets the opportunity to open in read only mode.
4.6.4
Open Read Only It is possible to open a diagram as read only. It will not be possible to modify the diagram and in read only mode it will not be claimed. This means that other users still can open it in Read/Write mode (using the normal Open command). The Open Read Only command is available in a number of situations as seen below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:55
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:27. Context menus on SCDIAG
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:56
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:28. Context menus on SCPLIN or its members (also SCEQUI etc.)
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:57
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:29. When line, equipment etc. are placed on diagrams
Figure 4:30. When option Connected Diagrams is chosen
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:58
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:31. Open from File menu
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:59
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:32. In Open From Batch Job
Figure 4:33. In Line Properties
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:60
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:34. In the Search Result context menus
4.6.5
Save Work and Save As When the Save Work command is issued, the following actions will be performed:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:61
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
1. Saving the Visio drawing and modified stencils to the file system, also re-saving all opened documents with a file format not corresponding to ‘Save documents in the Visio XML format’ setting. 2. Updating the SCDIAG and SCSTEN index elements in the database with Visio drawing related data. 3. Performing the Dabacon SaveWork, thereby flushing all session data to the database. The Save As command will provide the user with a possibility to save the drawing under a different name and with the option to duplicate all the presented data. In order to keep consistency between the database and drawings it is not possible to execute the Save As command on a drawing containing unsaved database related changes. In such a case the changes must first be saved and therefore the operation is cancelled with the following warning message.
Figure 4:35. Save As warning message
After the Save As command has been executed and the drawing does not contain any database related changes, the name and location for a new drawing should be specified in the Save As dialog.
Figure 4:36. Save As dialogue
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:62
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The location for a new diagram is assigned by selecting the schematic group element below which the diagram should be created. It is also possible to create new schematic groups by right-clicking on the Schematic World element or on an existing Schematic Group element in the element tree to the left. Depending on the Copy DB items option, shown in the picture above, the new diagram can be saved in two different ways: •
When the option is checked, all items that are defined in the database are duplicated together with the drawing containing the changes. For more information refer to Save As with Copy of Data.
•
When the option is unchecked, the drawing is duplicated but all the containing shapes are undefined on the copy of the diagram.
When the drawing has been successfully saved with Saved As, with a copy of the database data or not, the user is prompted to perform a Save Work.
Note: If the Diagrams application is closed without the execution of Save Work the newly created copy of the drawing will not be saved between sessions. Note: If more than one diagram is open, all open diagrams will be saved when Save Work is performed. Important: It is not allowed to overwrite an existing diagram by performing a Save As and selecting the same name as an existing diagram. This is due to technical reasons and the way that diagram files are stored and referred from the DB proxy elements (SCDIAG). The workaround is to first delete the diagram to be overwritten before performing the Save As using the same name.
4.6.6
Save As with Copy of Data The Diagrams application provides a possibility to duplicate a drawing together with its database context. To use this functionality Save As should be executed on a drawing to be copied and the Copy DB items option should be checked. Then, after the Save button is clicked, the user is provided with further options:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:63
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6.7 •
Save Work and SVG Creation Overview To reduce time for the Save Work function to complete it is possible to choose when to create SVG files for the diagram. The basic concept of this functionality is described in the flowchart below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:64
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:37. Save Work and SVG creation flowchart
You can change the Save Work behaviour via the Diagrams Options > Create SVG on Save Work option:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:65
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:38. Diagrams Options - Create SVG on Save Work
Create SVG on Save Work Set to Always Each time that Save Work is executed SVG files are generated for every page of the diagram. Whether the diagram has elements released to 3D or not has no impact. Create SVG on Save Work Set to For Data Released to 3D Only Each time Save Work is executed SVG files are generated for each page of the diagram that contains data released to 3D. For every page that does not contain released to 3D data a ‘dummy’ SVG file is being created. The dummy file is just an empty file with some basic parameters so the diagram data is possible to load to the integrator without errors. Create SVG on Save Work Set to Never SVG files are never created when Save Work is executed. However, if the diagram contains released to 3D data a warning message is displayed in the message log.
•
Alternate Way of Creating SVG Files One more way of creating, or rather updating, SVG files, is the Batch Job function. This can be selected from the Tools Tab > Drawings > Batch Job function in the Diagrams ribbon menu. Just select the diagrams that are to be updated and click Update Diagrams:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:66
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
On the next form there is no need to select any options, just click Update!.
All selected diagrams that had SVG files created for them will have SVG files generated again for all pages in the diagram. If a diagram had no SVG files created it will not be modified and no SVG files will be created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:67
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: This option only updates pages that were previously exported. Dummy pages will not be updated. -
SVG Creation from PML It is also possible to create SVG files using PML. The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. Export to SVG can be achieved by using PMLDiagrams Object, or global PML function !!ExportToSVG('DiagName'). For more information and usage examples please see Publishing from Diagrams via PML in Chapter Utilities chapter.
•
Release Diagram to 3D Button
Click the Home Tab > Object > Release button and select the pages for releasing items to 3D. This is a simple way to release all items to 3D on selected pages of the diagram. It will affect all elements on the selected pages.
If a page was previously released to 3D then it will be pre-selected and the date of the recent release will be displayed. Note: This performs Save Work. If you are working with extracts, then the Flush extract checkbox will be active. By checking it, all data that were released on the selected pages will be flushed to the master database. Note: It is strongly recommended to set the ‘Keep session files’ option to True. Otherwise, each Save Work in the extract will replace and rename existing Visio and SVG files and may make them inaccessible at the master location
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:68
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.6.8
Save As with Copy of Data The Diagrams application provides the possibility to duplicate a drawing together with related database items. To be able to use this functionality the Copy DB items option, in the Save As dialogue, see Figure 4:39.: Copy DB items tick box below, should be ticked and the Save As command should be performed on the drawing that is to be copied. Then click the Save button to display more options. (The full Save As dialogue is shown in Figure 4:36.: Save As dialogue above).
Figure 4:39. Copy DB items tick box
At this stage it is possible to cancel the Save As by clicking the Cancel button. The operation is then aborted and no copy of the drawing is created. The settings available on the Copy DB Items dialog, shown above, are described below:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:69
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Location for New Elements Copies of database items are created below groups specified for particular types in the Defaults Groups settings. The destination groups can be modified by clicking the Change... button. The Defaults Groups dialog is displayed and new groups can be selected for different types. The new setting will be saved when the Save As operation is finished. Note: If a default group is not set for an element type, then elements of such type will not be copied and appropriate shapes will be undefined on the destination drawing.
•
Copy Options Auto named copied elements This option is only available when auto naming is enabled. This is done via This is done via Admin Tab > Configuration > Naming. Tick this option to apply auto naming rules to copied elements. If this option is not ticked, then copies of named items will get a ‘Copy-of-’ prefix while copies of unnamed items will remain unnamed. Create secondary shapes for applicable types Select this option to create secondary shapes for Equipment, Sub-equipment, Electrical connection items, Cables and Multi-cables. This means that these types of items will not be copied and the shapes in the new diagram will instead refer to the same database items as in the old diagram. Copy database items and create primary shapes Select this option to copy database items and create primary shapes for Equipment, Subequipment, electrical connection items, Cables and Multi-cables. If selected then a number of the following options become available (in addition, to make these options available, the appropriate situation must be relevant for the diagram that is being copied):
•
•
Copy owning equipment not on current diagram - in case of the diagram containing sub-equipment, where the owning equipment item is not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those owning equipment items.
•
Copy sub-equipment not on current diagram - if the diagram contains equipment that owns sub-equipment items that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those sub-equipment items.
•
Copy nozzles not on current diagram - in cases where the diagram contains equipment that owns nozzles that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be checked to also copy those nozzles.
•
Copy electrical connections not on current diagram - if the diagram contains equipment that owns electrical connection items that are not represented on the current diagram, this option should be ticked to also copy those electrical connections.
•
Copy cores with cables - when the diagram contains cables that own cores, this option should be ticked to copy the cores as well.
Refresh Refresh copied drawing If this option is ticked, the shapes on a newly created drawing are refreshed during the Save As operation. It will make the operation take longer, but all the texts on all the shapes will be updated.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:70
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When the appropriate options are selected click OK. The drawing is duplicated and all DB items it contains are copied according to the settings from the dialog. The progress of the copy operation is presented in the Progress Bar in the application window. The information about all subsequent steps is also saved in the Diagrams Message Log:
4.6.9
Get Work To get access to updates done by other users, the Get Work command can be used. This works exactly like the standard PDMS Get Work command.
4.6.10
Delete Diagrams can be deleted using the Delete command on the right click menu on the SCDIAG element in the schematic explorer. When a diagram is deleted, any related items on that diagram will not be deleted from the database. However, all references to that diagram will be cleared. This means that if the diagram for instance contains an equipment shape, the DIAREFARRAY on the equipment item will be updated, but the equipment item as such will not be deleted. Any orphan items left over when diagrams are deleted can be found by searching for items where DIAREFARRAY is empty. Note: When a single page within a diagram is deleted, the user will be presented with a question regarding deleting all items from the database or not.
4.6.11
Additional Notes on File Handling Below are a few notes regarding file handling: •
The application supports Multiple Document Interface (MDI) which allows several diagrams to be open at one time. However, due to technical reasons and the integration between the document state and the database state (Save Work and DB sessions), it is not possible to only save one single document or to close one single document.
•
When Save Work is performed, all open diagrams will be saved.
•
When Quit Work is performed (for instance when one diagram is closed), all open diagrams will be closed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:71
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.7
•
When exiting the application, the user will be prompted whether to save work or not.
•
When KEEP_SESSION_FILES default setting is set to False, there is a tool available for cleaning old session files. For more information refer to Clean Old Session Files in Chapter Utilities.
Define / Undefine The Define command will create a new database element that corresponds to a shape and link the shape to that database element. In case an element with the same name already exists in the DB, the application will issue an error message and create a new unnamed element. The Define command is available on the Home Tab > Object > Define, and on the right click menu for shapes in the drawing. For piping and HVAC branches, there is also a Define Branch command that will create a new branch element under the current pipe-/HVAC-line and define all in-line fittings in the branch in one go. The Undefine command will break the link between the shape and the corresponding database element. The database element will not be deleted. Note: When Undefine is performed, the attributes will be cleared using the same rules as when a shape is copied, refer to the Copy with shape setting in Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started. During normal drafting of diagrams by dragging and dropping shapes from a stencil and connecting together in the drawing, the Define operation will be handled automatically by the application. The manual define/undefined only has to be used in special situations. For example, if a number of inline fitting shapes (a branch or part of a branch) are copied and pasted, they will not automatically be defined, so the user will have to first select a current Pipe-/HVAC-line and then issue the Define command. It is possible to disable the automatic Define mechanism by setting the Define shape on drop to False. As a visual feedback to the user, it is possible to set up a default colour that is automatically assigned to shapes when they are defined. This is done by the Colour setting for each kind of item under Element Options in Diagrams Options in Chapter Getting Started. Using the default application settings from the installation, this means that Equipment and Pipework shapes will turn blue as they are defined, HVAC ducting and fittings will turn green etc. In case the colour does not change on drop/connect, the user will see that the shape could not be defined.
4.8
Refresh The term ‘Refresh’ in Diagrams refers to a mechanism whereby the diagram document is kept up-to-date with changes done in the database. For example, if an update has been done to the database from the Command Line window, it is possible that annotation labels in the drawing or other windows showing drawing-based data such as Shape Data etc. needs to be updated accordingly. Normally the necessary update happens automatically, but in some cases this will not occur, see note below. For this reason there is a manual Refresh command that can be used to get the diagram drawing in synch with the database data. The Refresh command will update the shape attributes, labels and annotations in the drawing from the related database elements.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:72
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Refresh command works on the current selection, so it is possible to refresh a single selected shape, a group of shapes or the whole drawing. The whole drawing will be refreshed when no shapes are selected before choosing the Refresh command. The Refresh command can be called from the Home Tab or from the Shape and Drawing right-click menus. Refresh will be carried out automatically for any changes on database elements that are directly related to shapes on open diagrams. For example, if you change an attribute on an equipment item in the database, and you have an open diagram containing a symbol representing this equipment item, the shape data attributes as well as related annotations for this symbol will be automatically updated. However, in some cases the automatic Refresh will NOT happen;
4.8.1
•
For referenced data in other elements. For example, if you have an annotation formula like [SPREF.CATR.PARA(1)], it will not be automatically refreshed if the catalogue DB will be updated. In that case the user will have to manually use the Refresh command to see the update in the diagram drawing.
•
For drawings that are currently not open. These will either have to be manually refreshed after opening, or the Refresh drawing on opening setting in Diagrams Options can be used.
•
For Pseudo Attributes. These will not be automatically re-calculated and refreshed if any data they depend on is changed, it has to be done manually by the user to see any updated values from Pseudo Attributes.
Feedback on Refresh The Diagrams application provides functionality to indicate changes made to shape data after the Refresh command has been executed. This functionality makes it possible to know what changes have been picked up from the database - it is useful when database data has been modified by some external application, an addin or by another user in a parallel session. The user can be updated about the changes by highlighting of the modified shape and/or its annotation and also by appropriate messages in the message log. The functionality is controlled by a number of settings:
The settings controlling feedback given by highlighting a shape and/or its annotation are as follows: •
‘Reset highlight before refresh’ indicates whether the Reset Highlight command should be executed before the Refresh command is executed.
•
‘Highlight shape with changed attributes’ - if this option is set to true, then a shape that has attributes updated by the Refresh command will be highlighted.
•
‘Highlight changed annotation’ - if this option is set to true, then after the Refresh command is executed and the shape's text has been changed, the text will be
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:73
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
highlighted. If the text on the Labels/Multi-labels, attached to the shape being refreshed, was changed, the annotation will be highlighted as well.
Figure 4:40. Changed shape and its annotation (text and attached label) being highlighted after Refresh
Apart from highlighting the modified shape or annotation the changes are also indicated by messages in the message log. There is possibility to adjust the level of information according to individual user needs using the ‘Message level’ setting. It can be set to the following values: •
‘Summary message for refresh operation’ - only one summary message with information of the number of changed shapes will be given:
•
‘Message per shape’ – a summary message and also one message for each changed shape with information about the number of changed attributes will be displayed:
•
‘Message per attribute’ – there will be a summary message and also one message for each updated attribute (except attributes listed in ‘Ignore changed attributes’ setting):
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:74
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Another option controlling the feedback on Refresh is ‘Zoom out to show all changes’. When this option is set to True it gives a possibility to zoom out to see all changes, then after the refresh, zoom is adjusted to show all changed shapes on the current page. To avoid indications on any insignificant changes, it is possible to set attributes which should be skipped by feedback on Refresh. They can be listed as value ‘Ignore changed attributes’. The attributes to be ignored should be separated by commas or spaces like on the examples below:
Referenced attributes cannot be listed in the setting, but they are ignored if any of their parts are skipped, e.g. OWNER_NAME will be ignored if the Ignore changed attributes list contains an OWNER or NAME attribute. A change made to ignored attributes during refresh will be skipped in the message log information (there will be no message if the level is set to Per attribute and also the change will not be counted in ‘Per shape’ and summary information). If all changed attributes for the refreshed shape are listed in the Ignore changed attributes list, the shape will not be highlighted even if ‘Highlight shape with changed attributes’ is on. However, if the ignored attribute causes any modification of the shape's text or label text, the text and the label will still be highlighted if ‘Highlight changed annotation’ is set to True. By default the feedback is given only if the Refresh operation is executed from the menu or if it is called after a drawing is opened and the ‘Refresh drawing on opening’ is set to True. However, it is possible to set the 'Give feedback on automatic refresh' to On to get feedback on the automatically called Refresh operations, e.g. after Refit and Resize.
4.9
Consistency Check The Consistency Check command can be executed on a single shape, several shapes or on all shapes in the drawing. This function will perform two kinds of checks on the selected items. It will check the consistency between the drawing and the database as well as performing an engineering check.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:75
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case any inconsistencies are found, these will be listed in the Consistency Check Result window. Inconsistencies are classified as Errors, Warnings and Informational messages as indicated by the status icon. The columns are as follows: Column
Explanation
Shape
1. The icon indicates the severity of the problem (Error, Warning or Information). 2. Name of the Visio shape that the problem is related to.
Connection
Connection number of the shape which the problem is related to. This is only shown in case the problem is related to a certain connection point on the shape.
DB Element
Name of DB element that the shape is related to. This is only shown in case the problem is related to a shape that has a corresponding DB element.
Page
Page number in the drawing on which the related shape exists. This is only shown in case the message is related to a shape.
Problem
Problem text. See below for the list of problems that can be detected by the Consistency Check function.
Corrective action
In case any corrective action has been taken, this will be indicated in this column.
By clicking on each line in the dialogue, the corresponding shape will be highlighted in the drawing. In case the shape is not visible in the current view, the system will pan and if necessary zoom out to make the entire shape visible. The system will also attempt to bring back the drawing to a consistent state against the database in case any inconsistencies have been detected. This normally means that shapes will be disconnected or undefined in the drawing. No automatic updates will be done to the database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:76
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Below is a table showing the different checks that are performed during the Consistency Check operation. Problem
Severity
Corrective action
Explanation
Not connected to the same point on element in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The connection number indicated by the shape connection point differs from the one get from arrive/ leave attribute.
Not connected to the same element in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The element connected to the shape on the drawing is not the same as the element pointed by the database reference.
Connected pipeline X has different attribute FLUR
WARNING
None
Pipeline connected to the shape on the drawing has different attribute FLUR than the pipeline that the shape belongs to.
Connected shape's element does not exist in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
The shape is connected on the drawing to the element which does not have a database representation.
Element not connected in DB
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
Similar to the above, the shape is connected on the drawing, but not in the database.
Illegal connection between different line types
ERROR
Disconnect in dwg
Occurs when connected inline components and tubes are placed below different line types (Pipelines and Instrumentation lines).
Nozzle not related with an equipment item
ERROR
Undefine shapes
Nozzle is defined in the database under some equipment, but not connected to any defined item on the drawing.
Electrical connection not related with an equipment item
ERROR
Undefine shape
Electrical connection is defined in the database under some equipment, but not connected to any defined item on the drawing.
Shape is related to a ERROR different equipment item than in the database
Undefine shape
The nozzle or electrical connection is defined in the database under some equipment, but on the drawing it is connected to another item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:77
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The database element is missing
ERROR
Undefine shape
The shape is defined, but the related database element is missing.
The database element is connected at the connection point, but the shape is not
WARNING
None
The element in the database is connected, but its representation on the drawing (shape) is not.
Shape has only to/from WARNING flows
None
The shape has only 'to' or 'from' connections.
Only X of Y cable members are released to 3D (performed for Multi-cables)
WARNING
None
SPREF not set
WARNING
None
SPREF of component is not set (Nulref)
SPREF not of SPCOMPONENT type
WARNING
None
SPREF of component is set to an element different than SPCOMPONENT (occurs when current settings do not allow out-of-spec components).
Boresizes does not match (between current and connected shape)
WARNING
None
Widths does not match
INFORMATION
None
Heights does not match
INFORMATION
None
Shape do not match
INFORMATION
None
Shapes (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) of connected shapes are different (for HVAC).
Ductsizes/shapes do not match
INFORMATION
None
Widths, heights or shapes (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) of connected shapes are different (for connection between HVAC elements and e.g. nozzles.
Boresize not set
INFORMATION
None
Bore size is unset (for piping and instrumentation).
Ductsize not set
Duct size (height or width) is not set (for HVAC).
Shape not set
Shape (OVAL, CIRC, RECT) is not set (for HVAC).
Shape not connected at connection point
INFORMATION
None
One of connection points is not connected to any item.
Shape is not defined in the DB
INFORMATION
None
Shape is not defined.
Shape not connected to other OPC
INFORMATION
None
Occurs for OPC's when their OPCREF is not set (is not pointing to other OCP).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:78
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Attribute X has bad WARNING reference(s) to Y. Referenced item(s) missing in the MDB.
None
Reference in attribute X is pointing to an element Y which is not valid in the MDB. One attribute can have many references, in which case only bad references will be reported. Note: This will not report unset references, only references set to invalid objects are listed.
Instrument relationship shape is not defined on drawing but it connects items that are connected in DB.
WARNING
‘The shape has been defined’ message appear and relationship line will be defined.
Relationship shape supposed to be defined because it connects valid items and items are connected in DB but for some reason it was not defined.
Can not connect Instrument relationship line shape to this connection point
WARNING
Disconnect in dwg.
User is trying connect relationship shape to some component connection point that was designed for process line.
Instrument relationship WARNING line shape should be connected to offline instrument or actuator from at least one end.
Disconnect in dwg
Situation where the system detects that relationship shape is connected with both ends but none of the connected items are actuators nor offline instruments.
Twin connection.
WARNING
Disconnect in dwg
Message when the system detects that Offline instrument or Actuator has more than one connection to the same item.
One end of Instrument relationship line is not connected.
INFORMATION
None
Situation where relationship shape line has one end disconnected.
Instrument relationship line is not connected.
INFORMATION
None
Situation where relationship line has both ends disconnected.
There is also a functionality which allows exporting the Message Log and Consistency Check results to a txt or xls file. This is available in the right click context menu of the Message Log and Consistency Check window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:79
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Consistency Check command can be issued through the following UI commands: •
Object pull-down menu
•
Shape right-click menu (also works on a selection of shapes)
•
Drawing background right-click menu
A summary of the consistency check result can also be seen in the Message Log. In case no inconsistencies are detected, the Consistency Check Result pane will not appear.
4.9.1
Export Consistency Check Result to File There is functionality to allow the export of a consistency check result. After the consistency check for a diagram has been executed, right-click on a message in the Message list and choose the option Export to....
In the Save As dialogue there is a possibility to choose the export file format to be used, either text file format or Excel file format.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:80
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.10
Annotation
4.10.1
Overview Diagrams supports the standard Visio Shape Text field as well as predefined label shapes. The users can create their own label shapes, including multi-field labels. When such a label is dropped on the drawing and connected to a DB element shape, it can display arbitrary attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:81
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.10.2
Shape Text The Visio Shape Text field provides a default annotation that will be presented together with the shape in the diagram. The initial position of the shape text is automatically calculated by the application according to text placement settings provided in Diagrams Options and in Import Shape Wizard (for more information refer to Step 3: Annotation Style Settings in Chapter Getting Started). After a shape has been placed, the shape text can be selected and dragged by the mouse to another position. For connector type shapes such as tubes, ducts and cables, the shape text is automatically placed and oriented along the longest leg. To be able to move and place the shape text manually, the Using control handle command has to be enabled. This command is available on the Shape right-click menu. The shape text can be turned on or off by right-clicking on a shape and selecting the Show Text command. This command can also be used after having selected several shapes. Line breaks in the shape text can be accomplished in two different ways: •
By adding a "\n" escape sequence to the text annotation format.
•
By defining a linebreak character. This is done by assigning a value to the Linebreak delimiter setting in Diagrams Options.This requires that the attribute data values to be presented in the text contains such characters at suitable positions, which in essence means that these characters will be stored inside the text strings in the database. To enable this kind of linebreaks for a certain shape, the Linebreaks command in the right-click menu has to be checked.
For pipe tubes and HVAC ducts, there is a possibility to enable a mode where only the shape text for the first tube/duct in a branch (or rather segment) will be visible, while others
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:82
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
will be invisible by default. This function can be enabled by setting the Show Text on first segment only default setting in Diagrams Options to True. However, depending on the sequence of operations when the branches and segments are built, some extra texts might be left in the middle of a segment. These can then be manually hidden by using the right click command.
•
Wrapping Frame around Shape Text There is also a possibility to add a frame to the shape text. To do so there is an option to set in the Diagrams Defaults and Import Shape Wizard as shown below.
This option is available for 2D shapes except for annotating shapes (Label, Multi-label, Title Block). The option allows the user to determine whether the shape text should be wrapped with a frame and if so, it is also possible to choose between different frame styles. The text frame styles are:
Name
Description
None
No text frame
Rectangle
Rectangular frame around text
RoundedRectangle
Rectangular frame with rounded corners
The image below illustrates the result of selecting the particular values:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:83
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: The colour of the text frame is always the same as the colour of the shape text.
4.10.3
Labels Shapes for custom labels and multilabels can be created using the Import Shape Wizard. The annotation strings can be formatted according to the Attribute Presentation Notation (please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices) in order to present attribute values from the related shape. Default labels can also be set up for shapes, so that for instance an equipment shape will get a number of pre-defined labels when it is dropped on the drawing. This can be done in the type specific settings in Diagrams Options and can also be overridden in step 3 (Annotation settings) of the Import Shape Wizard in case individual settings are required. A number of annotation settings are available in Diagrams Options that controls the label shape to be used for annotation as well as the number of annotation labels that should be available for each type of item in Import Shape Wizard. These settings can be found under General Options > Annotation Settings. Line breaks are supported in the same way for labels as for the Shape Text.
4.10.4
Title Block Title Block shape can be used to annotate a diagram or template. Its behaviour is similar to Multi-label, but it can not be connected to any shape - it is displaying the attributes of the diagram or template. A shape for Title Block can be created using the Import Shape Wizard and then be dropped on a drawing as any other shape. Typically the Title Block consists of several fields (grouped shapes) - each of them representing an attribute:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:84
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:41. Sample method of preparing a shape for the Title Block
Similar to other annotation shapes, texts for particular fields can be formatted according to the Attribute Presentation Notation (please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices) and line breaks are supported in the same way as for Shape Text. During importing Title Block, font and colour of text can be defined separately for each field:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:85
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:42. Configuration of texts for separate fields of Title Block in the Import Shape Wizard
After dropping the Title Block on to a diagram/template the annotation strings defined for particular fields are evaluated according to the existing database attributes. Those strings can be re-defined using the custom properties of a single text field:
Figure 4:43. Sample Title Block - changing annotation string
4.10.5
Property Break Symbol In the Annotations stencil supplied with Diagrams, there is a Property Break symbol. This symbol can be dragged to the diagram and attached to a connection point on an inline fitting. The property break symbol will then show attributes that differ between the elements at the connection. This can for instance be used to annotate spec breaks. In the example
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:86
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
below, there are different Pspec (A300 vs. A150) and Ptspec (PS007 vs. PS008) between the tee and the following tubing.
The attributes that will be shown can be configured using the General Options >Annotation settings > Property Break settings in Diagrams Options. This setting is represented by a comma separated list of attributes. Only the attribute values that differ will be shown.
4.11
Off-page Connectors Diagrams allows the creation of discontinuous pipelines / HVAClines through the use of an Off-Page Connector (OPC) mechanism. Even if these are called Off-Page Connectors, they can also be used within a page. Two variants of Off-Page Connectors are supported by the application, Outgoing and Incoming. Off-Page connectors are created by dragging an OPC shape onto the drawing and connecting it to a free end of a pipeline branch.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:87
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
An outgoing OPC can be connected to an incoming (or vice versa) using the Connect OPC command in the shape right-click menu.
This command will bring up a Selection dialogue (Standard DB Browse Dialogue) where all unconnected OPCs of the opposite kind will be listed.
By selecting a matching OPC they will be connected by the OPCREF attribute.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:88
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When examining the database explorer, it can be seen that a new SCSEG element has been created. The purpose of these administrative elements is to serve as containers for the parts of a branch that is divided by OPCs.
The shape text shown in the OPC can be controlled by the Attribute Presentation Notation. Refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices for further information. It is for example possible to show the name of the drawing and the page of the OPC that the current one is connected to by using the following format: [opcref.owner.diaref(1)] - Page: [opcref.owner.page(1)]. It is possible to navigate between connected OPCs by using the Go to Connected OPC command available on the right click menu.
The OPC connections can also be listed and navigated on a diagram level. By right clicking on a Diagram Element in the database explorer and choosing the Connected Diagrams command, all diagrams connected to the current one will be listed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:89
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By clicking on a diagram in the list, this can be opened.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:90
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.12
Area Shape An Area Shape provides the possibility to define an area in the diagram drawing that corresponds to a room, a plant area or represents a db Area Shape (SCAREA) defined in the Schematic database. This provides a general mechanism for assigning attribute values based on the location of the shape within the frame provided by the Area Shape. Area can control a set of attributes and their values are automatically applied to the shapes it contains.
4.12.1
Defining Area Shapes Area can be represented by any 2-dimensional shape which is imported on a stencil as Area Shape using the Import Shape Wizard. After that it can be used as any other item by dropping it on the drawing. Area Shape can be located on the foreground and background page. An Area Shape can be used just as a graphic frame not connected to any database element or it could have database representation. DB data against the Area Shape are stored as SCAREA element, which can be created below SCGROU. As any other element, Area can be defined in DB using Define command and also it can be defined on dropping the shape on drawing. To allow the second possibility, Define Area on Drop settings should be set to True:
Note: The option is only applicable when General options->System configuration->System>Define shape on drop setting is set to True. To disconnect Area Shape from database element Undefine command can be used. It is possible to specify different colours for defined and undefined Area shapes - see picture above. The Primary/secondary shape mechanism can be used to contain several Area Shapes on different drawings referring to the same SCAREA element. For more information please see chapter Primary / Secondary Shapes. Elements contained by defined Area Shape are referring to it via SCAREF. One item can refer to several Area Shapes. All items referring to SCAREA via SCAREF can be seen in Schematic Explorer tree as its secondary hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:91
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By default the Area has the attributes relevant for the SCAREA element, but the set of attributes controlled by Area Shape can be extended in Diagrams Options. Select the Attribute Presentation click the Referenced Attributes button and then manually key in the attribute names:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:92
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To distinguish between attributes that can be propagated to shapes contained by the Area and those who should only be displayed in Area's Shape Data, the Propagate column should be used:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:93
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
All attributes with the Propagate field checked will be controlled by Area and propagated to contained shapes. In addition it is possible to specify prefixes which would be set for both propagate and not propagate attributes in Shape Data. The prefixes can be set in diagrams options for Area Shape:
E.g. the above settings will take following effect in Shape Data:
As for other elements, the default attribute presentation settings for Area Shape can be overridden during Import Shape:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:94
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.12.2
Propagation of Attributes to Containing Shapes After attributes to propagate are specified and Area Shape is placed on drawing, any item dragged inside its limits will automatically receive default values defined in the Area. Any attributes not applicable for a particular type will be skipped. After the item is dragged out from the Area, its attributes controlled by the Area are cleared (set to default values). In both cases applicable messages are added to the message log. In addition, when the Area is defined in database, SCAREF of element represented by the shape dragged in/out is updated appropriately. In Diagrams Options, there is a setting to control how the application should behave when a user tries to change an attribute controlled by the Area Shape - ‘Allow to modify attributes of contained shapes’:
The setting can have the following values:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:95
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Ask user - the user is warned that the attribute being changed is governed by the Area and is asked to proceed or not:
•
Always allow - the change is always allowed without a warning
•
Never allow - the change is not allowed
Please note that changes done directly to the database are not controlled by this setting, for example, if the database is updated from functions such as the Command Line, Attributes Utility form, Customer defined PML forms etc. All differences between attributes controlled by the Area and the corresponding values of the contained shapes and also inconsistencies between value of SCAREF and the situation on drawing are reported by the Consistency Check function. The attribute values of contained shapes being different that corresponding ones in Area Shape can be updated using Update Containing Shapes command available from Area right mouse button menu.
4.13
Manual Component Selection
4.13.1
Overview By using the Catalogue Search function, it is possible to search through the catalogue and to assign catalogue references to the selected item(s). This is achieved by the following steps: 1. First select the item(s) in the drawing that should receive the new catalogue reference. 2. Second, make a selection in the Catalogue Search window. The Select command is available on the right click menus of the explorer and the result list as well as on a dedicated button in the bottom right of the window. Manual component selection behaves differently depending on the current setting of the Use specification default variable as shown below:
General Options - Pipe Dimensioning - Spec Search - Use Specification
General Options - Pipe Dimensioning - Spec Search - Use Specification
Specification
Spec selection
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:96
Result
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
True
False
False
Manual component selection can be done for SCOINS, SCEQUI, SCSUBE, SCCAB, SCMCAB, SCDUCT and SCHVFI.
True
Manual component selection can be done for elements listed above and also for SCINST, SCTUB, SCVALV and SCFITT.
Ignored
The same as above.
The Catalogue Search window is divided in two main parts. To the left is a pane that contains two tabs, Catalogue Explorer and Selection Tables, to the right there is a search result list. The Catalogue Search window will automatically navigate to the currently used catalogue item. This means that when a shape which has a SPREF pointing to a GPART or a TABITEM is selected in the drawing, the catalogue search will switch to the relevant tab and navigate to the currently selected catalogue item in the Catalogue Explorer, as well as in the result list. However, on slow computers this can cause a slight delay when shapes are selected. If this is the case, this behaviour can be turned off by setting the General options > Catalogue search settings > Configuration > Auto navigate to catalogue element setting in Diagrams Options to False.
4.13.2
Catalogue Explorer By selecting the Catalogue Explorer tab, the user can navigate through the GPART user defined hierarchy of the catalogue. In case the desired GPART can be identified already in the explorer, it is possible to right click and choose the Select command to assign the catalogue reference (SPREF) to the selected item(s) in the drawing. There is also a possibility to define and use filters to be applied to the search. When the Find button is clicked, the search result will be displayed in the result list pane to the right.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:97
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In case default filters for shapes have been specified in Diagrams Options or in the Default Catalogue Search Filter (refer to Step 5: Default Catalogue Search Filter in Chapter Getting Started), the "== Use default filter from item ==" option will have to be selected for these to take effect. When a shape associated with a default filter is selected, and the "== Use default filter from item ==" is applied, as soon as the Find button is clicked, the associated filter will automatically be applied.
4.13.3
Defining Filters Below the explorer pane, there is a possibility to define or use filters to be applied to the search. By clicking the Define Filters link, the Define Filters dialogue is shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:98
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To define a new filter, click the New filter button and specify a name.
Below the Select Filter section, there is a Category line. If the Category checkbox is checked, the filter will include a category selection criteria. This means that when the filter is used, it will only search within the predefined category. As a default, the currently selected category in the GPART hierarchy explorer pane will be shown in the category textbox. In case the user wants to select another category, the Browse button (…) to the right can be used. If the Category checkbox is not checked, the filter will be defined as a generic filter, which can be applied to any category when used. When filters are used, it works as follows: •
If a filter including a category definition is used, the system will first navigate automatically to the defined category in the explorer and then apply the rest of the filter and make the search.
•
If a filter which does not include a category is used, the system will apply the filter to the category that is currently selected by the user in the explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:99
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Below the category line, a table of criteria statements can be defined for the filter. To add a new statement, simply click on the Attribute field to display a dropdown list of attributes. This list contains all attributes that have been defined using the Customize function and may include attributes from referenced elements.
Next click the Operator field and select an operator. Note that some operators are only applicable to certain data types, for instance the Like operator can only be applied to text string attributes.
Finally enter a criteria value in the Value field. When using the Like operator, wildcards can be specified using the asterisk (*) character.
To add another criteria statement, simply click on the next empty line which was automatically added when the first criteria statement was defined. In case more than one statement is used for a filter, there will be an implicit AND operator applied between statements. Finally click OK to create the filter and close the dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:100
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.13.4
Modifying, Renaming and Deleting Filters To modify an existing filter, click the Define Filters link to go the Define Filters dialogue. Then select the filter from the dropdown list and change the criteria statements. Unnecessary statements can be removed by first selecting the statement in the list and then clicking the Remove Statement button. Filters can be modified and removed by using the Rename and Delete buttons for the selected filter.
4.13.5
Using Filters To use a filter for a search, select it from the Filter dropdown box, and click the Find button to perform the search. In case the filter definition includes a category, the explorer will automatically navigate to this category when the filter is selected, and the search will be performed accordingly.
Filters are stored in the Windows registry of the local machine.
4.13.6
Selection Tables Selection Tables (available on the Selection Tables tab in the left pane), can be used to find catalogue items in a way similar to pipe specifications.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:101
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
By making a selection in the Table and Type dropdown boxes and clicking the Find button, the table on the right hand side will be filled with a relevant selection of catalogue items represented by TABITE database elements. If the Auto select table and type from item checkbox is checked, the table and type dropdowns will automatically be set according to applicable default settings under General Options > Catalogue Search Settings in Diagrams Options or specified in step 5 of Import Shape Wizard. A selection table item can contain default values that will be applied to the shape when the catalogue reference is set, provided that the Apply default values to item checkbox is checked. This can be followed up in the Message Log where messages regarding assigned default attributes is provided.
4.13.7
Result List When a search has been performed, the result can be seen in the Result List. If the Catalogue Search tab has been used, the list will contain GPARTs, if Selection Tables have been used, it will show TABITEs.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:102
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
To select a Catalogue Reference from the result list, you can either select the line in the list and click the Select button, or use the Select command in the right click menu on the item in the list. The columns shown in the result list can be changed by clicking the Customise link. This will show the Catalogue Search Result Presentation Settings dialogue. Note: The result list for GPARTs will automatically be filtered on the LSELEC attribute. This has to be true in order for the GPARTs to be shown in the result list.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:103
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In this dialogue, the presentation label can be changed and it can be set up whether the attribute should be visible or not. By clicking the Referenced Attributes button, attributes from related elements can be shown. This dialogue works just like the same dialogue used for Attribute Presentation (refer to Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started). The result list can be presented in three different layouts, in order to provide as much space for data as possible. By right clicking in the list and selecting Horizontal Layout, Vertical Layout or Result list only the layout can be changed so that either as many rows and/or columns as possible can be shown. In the right click menu, commands are also available for showing or hiding the Grouping pane, Filters row and Summary line. For more information on how to use the grouping and filtering functions, please refer to the Getting Started with Plant documentation.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:104
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.14
Copying / Pasting Data Copy / Paste in diagrams can be executed in two ways: 1. Select the shapes, click CTRL and drag the selected shapes. When you drop the selection new shapes will be created. 2. Select shapes, click right mouse button on the selected shapes and execute the Copy option. Next click on the page and execute Paste from the context menu. Alternatively you can use the shortcut CTRL+C/ CTRL+V when the drawing is in an active window. Which attributes to be copied or not copied together with the shape can be set up using the Attribute Presentation function in Diagrams Options (please refer to Step 4: Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started). Note: That this only applies when defined shapes are copied. There is also a possibility to copy and paste several attributes at the same time between existing shapes. This can be done by using the Copy Attributes and Paste Attributes commands in the Home Tab > Clipboard group. These will copy and paste all attributes that have been defined as copy with shape in Attribute Presentation. These can be used in the following way: 1. Select a single shape from which the attributes should be copied. 2. Use the Copy Attributes command. 3. Select one or more shapes of the same type as the one that you just copied from. 4. Use the Paste Attributes command. The result of the paste operation can be followed up in the message log, which will show a list of the attributes that have been pasted for each shape.
Note: It is the Copy with shape setting for the destination shape which will determine which attributes will be pasted. The Copy with shape setting for the source shape is not considered. Note: The Copy/Paste Attributes function only apply for DB defined attributes.
4.14.1 •
CTRL+DRAG General When this method for copying is chosen, Diagrams will try to define elements that can be created directly under SCGROUP (like SCEQUIPMENT, SCACTU but not SCTUBE, SCVALVE). The proper group will be taken according to the diagrams settings. Additionally, the application will create all items that were copied and can be created under previously created elements. For example, if selecting an SCEQUIPMENT and a properly connected SCNOZZLE, then after copy/paste the application will create a new SCEQUIPMENT and a
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:105
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
new SCNOZZLE. The attributes of the new elements will be set according to data in Shape Data (it can be determined which attributes will be copied – see diagrams settings for more details). This method will not create items like branches, pipelines segments and inline elements. All tubes, valves etc. that were copied will become undefined. The items can be defined afterwards to create new branches, but the created database structure might be different than for the original items that were copied. This way of copying is very similar to dragging and dropping from a stencil.
4.14.2 •
Copying and Pasting (CTRL+C > CTRL+V) General This way of copying items copies shapes on a drawing together with its database structure. When pasting the data, Diagrams will define the elements automatically. All shapes that were valid in the database during copy will be stored in the windows clipboard with extra information about database structure. The most important differences between Copying and Pasting and copying using CTRL+DRAG are: •
All valid items that were copied can be created with the same database group hierarchy, or according to the hierarchy defined in Session Defaults. See Copy-paste options.
•
In some special cases it might not be possible to restore the same structure - see Partial copy.
•
Any attribute values for the shape are copied from the database rather than the source shape. Normally these should be the same, but if they still differ then the database value is used.
•
Behaviour when copying/pasting two or more items that point to the same database element, for example when selecting two equipment shapes that points to the same database element (primary and secondary):
•
•
When using CTRL+DRAG technique (for each shape) then the application will ask for decision twice whether it should create a secondary shape or a new db element. This means that it’s not possible to create a new equipment item with two shapes representation.
•
However, when using CTRL+C/CTRL+V, then the application asks only once. This means that it’s possible to create a new database element with two shapes representation, but it will not be possible to create new database objects for each shape which is possible using CTRL+DRAG.
Copy-paste sub-equipment items. In Figure 4:44.: Two equipment items with two subequipment items in database, there are three items selected. •
When copy and paste using CTRL+DRAG a new equipment item with two subequipment items below will be created. Figure 4:45.: Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+DRAG technique.
•
When copying items using CTRL+C/CTRL+V a new equipment item will be created with one sub-equipment below. The second sub-equipment will be undefined. The application is checking if the true owner for Sub-Equipment_B was copied or not. Figure 4:46.: Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+C/CTRL+V technique.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:106
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:44. Two equipment items with two sub-equipment items in database
Figure 4:45. Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+DRAG technique
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:107
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:46. Items from image 1 copied by CTRL+C/CTRL+V technique
•
Copy/Paste Options Diagrams has a few options related to Copy and Paste.
Figure 4:47. The copy paste options that can be user changed
-
Destination Group hierarchy Items can be copied and pasted with the same group hierarchy. Basically, when copying equipment that is located in DB like on Figure 4:48.: Sample database structure. Next paste it, then the result can look like on Figure 4:49.: Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from image 5 when source group are kept (“Use existing groups” has to be disabled). Alternatively, new elements can be defined according to diagrams settings.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:108
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:48. Sample database structure
Figure 4:49. Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from image 5 when source group are kept
Figure 4:50. Situation in DB and drawing after copy-paste equipment from the previous image when diagrams settings determine items owning group
Possible values are: •
Same as source groups – the system will try to create the same group hierarchy structure that the copied items had when they were copied
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:109
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Use session defaults– items are created under groups as defined by the session defaults.
•
Ask – the system will ask if items should be created according to settings or if it should create the group hierarchy from the source.
Note: The groups are created, not copied from the source data. If the system is not able to create the copied items in the DB, then the empty groups will not be created either. -
Use Existing Line In some cases copy and paste of a whole pipeline in one go might not be possible because it can be located on several drawing or pages. When this option is enabled, Diagrams will check if the database contains a line with the same name (it can be different UDET types, only base type must be the same). If a line with the same name exists, then all branches will be created under the existing line. When the option is disabled, a new line will be always created. Possible values are: •
Always – Branches will always be created under existing lines with the same name as in source model. If there is no line with the same name, new lines will be created.
•
Never – system will create new lines and define new branches under them.
•
Ask – each time, before creating a new line it checks if there exist lines with the same name. If existing, a dialog message will be displayed, asking if as new line should be created.
Note: This option will work properly only when line names are set correctly. Please see the “Elements name” section below for naming behaviour during Copy/Paste. -
Use Existing OPC Off page connectors can connect two segments, branches or lines that are located on different drawings/pages. Because of that it might not be possible to copy the whole structure in one go. If we consider the simple case, when it is possible to select connected items, the database structure and connections will be identical (see images below):
Figure 4:51. Two segments in one branch selected on drawing
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:110
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:52. Database structure and drawing layout after copy-paste items from the previous image
However, in most cases it is not possible to copy both OPCI and OPCO at the same time, since they usually are on different pages or diagrams. When copying and pasting OPC’s individually, a new branch will be created for the first OPC, and the system may ask about existing lines for the second OPC. See image below.
Figure 4:53. Database structure and drawing layout when copying items in two steps
The connection will be established only when the database contains items with the same name and type that were connected to copied OPC (only base type match is required). Moreover, the existing item has to have OPCREF free and branches (pasted and existing) has to have proper ends free (HREF/TREF unset, depends on OPC type). Note: This option will work properly only when OPC names are set correctly. Naming behaviour described below. Note: This functionality will be mostly useful when data copied between two different databases. In case if copy and paste in the same MDB then system will not connect offline instruments because existing item will be already connected (unless user disconnected it before paste).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:111
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
-
Use Existing Groups This setting is valid only when user set “Destination group hierarchy” setting to “Same as source groups”. It determines whether items should be created under new groups or under existing one with the same name (the actual type is not obligatory, only base type must be the same). I.E. When user copy equipment “EQUI_1” that is defined under “GROUP_1” from project “A” to project “B” then in project “B” new SCGROUP will be created with the same name (if auto name is disabled, see “Elements Name”). Next user copy “EQUI_2” that was defined under “GROUP_1” from project “A” to project “B” (situation in project A is presented on image 11). Depends on this option, system can create new group with default name and define “EQUI_2” under it, or system can use existing group as owner for pasted equipment (see below images).
Figure 4:54. Two equipment items defined under the same group in project A
Figure 4:55. Project B, Equipment 2 was pasted with disabled “Use existing group” option
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:112
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Figure 4:56. Project B, Equipment 2 was pasted with enabled “Use existing group” option
Possible values:
•
•
Always – system will create items under existing groups if its names will be the same.
•
Never – system will create new group structure – exactly the same as in source data that was copied
•
Ask – each time, before system creates new groups it checks if in database exist group with the same name. If exist, system will display dialog message, then user can decide whether existing group should be used or not.
Elements Name If auto naming is enabled then all items will be renamed using auto name rules. When auto naming is disabled and data copied between two different projects, then the system will try to set copied item names. If the name is already in use then a warning message will appear. In some cases it is required that the parent object exists for naming to work correctly. For example, if copying a pipeline in two steps from one project to another, and using auto naming, then the newly created line can have different name than the original one because the naming rule might be different. As a result, when copying a second part of the pipeline and pasting it to the second project, a new line will be created because there is no pipeline with the same name defined. It might be also that when copying and pasting the first part of your pipeline, the database already contains a pipeline with the same name. In this case the copied branches will be created under the existing pipeline.
•
Attributes The attributes will be set according to the Attribute presentation settings in Diagrams Options. Attributes that are marked as read only or not marked as “copy with shape” will not be set. If two shapes that points to the same element in database are copied, for example primary and secondary equipment items, it might be that one shape inherited settings from its master but the second one depends on diagrams settings. If there is a conflict in the attribute presentation rules for these shapes, then the attribute will not be copied.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:113
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If attributes cannot be set during copy-paste, warning messages will be displayed, except for the following situations:
•
•
Attribute cannot be set due to definition rules or data access.
•
Attribute is defined as “read only”
•
Attribute is set as not to be copied with shape
Referenced Attributes There are two kinds of referenced attributes: •
Attributes like SPREF, SCLORE etc. that are pointing to other element to get some extra information from them, or where the item is part of for example a system or loop. These attributes will be set if it will be possible.
•
For example, when copying equipment that has SCLORE set to LOOP1 from project MAR to CCH then SCLORE of equipment will be set if LOOP1 exist in CCH. If the attribute can’t be set, then a message will be shown in the message log.
•
Attributes like SCIREF, CRFA etc. that are pointing to other elements because they are connected. These attributes will be set only if connected items were copied together. The paste function will try to set these attributes even when they are set as read only or “copy with shape” is disabled. If the connection cannot be established, a message will be shown in the message log.
Note: SCIRTY attribute will be updated according to SCIREF.
•
Partial Copy Sometimes only a few items from a whole structure are copied. An example is shown below.
There are two equipment items and one branch. When selecting everything except valve and copy this, it will be impossible to recreate the same structure after paste.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:114
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The copy/paste operation creates two branches instead of one. Each time items are copied where branches or segments have to be reorganized, a message will be displayed in the message log.
•
Copying Items without Parent In some occasions, nozzles or electrical connections are copied without its owning element. In these cases the pasted objects will not be defined in the database, since they don’t have any owning element. A warning message will be displayed in the message log. They can afterwards be connected to an equipment, and will then become defined in the database. However, sub-equipment items do not need that connection to be defined, but they require valid equipment as the owner. Because of this, it is possible to copy and paste subequipment items as defined object without copying equipment owners. There is only one restriction, only sub-equipment items are copied and CE has to be equipment when paste executed. This CE will be owner for copied sub-equipment items.
•
Copying Undefined Items Items that were not valid in DB during copy will have the same rules like copying using CTRL+DRAG. For example, when copying two equipment items, one valid and one invalid in DB, then after paste both items will be defined if possible. The defined one will be created according to settings for default group/source group, and its attributes will be the same as in database item. The second item will be created in default group or under the group where current element is located, and its attributes will be set according to Shape Data.
•
Messages in the Message Log During copy paste, messages will be displayed in the message log, informing about the copy paste result. Below is a list of possible messages with explanation.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:115
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Text displayed in SML
Description when message is displayed
Severity
The attribute
Will be displayed each time when source application does not contain that kind of attribute. I.e. MAR project has defined some UDA but SAM project does not have them. Because of that, these UDA's will not be set when copy-paste from MAR to SAM project.
Warning
The attribute
An example of this message can look like "The attribute HREF can not be set because element is not SCBRAN, SCSEG type. Type of element is SCCABLE". This kind of messages should never be displayed, unless something changed in the database, for example if pasting copied data into older database versions. Message will be displayed only for referenced attributes that are responsible for connections (like CRFA, ECRFA but not SCLORE).
Warning
This is not a SCSEGMENT nor SCBRANCH and you are trying to set HREF. IsTypeValid() method failed!
System error message. This should not occur under normal circumstances.
Warning
This is not a SCSEGMENT nor SCBRANCH and you are trying to set TREF. IsTypeValid() method failed!
System error message. This should not occur under normal circumstances.
Warning
Message when HREF or TREF cannot be set because item that was connected in source does not exist in destination. Typically, when a branch is connected to equipment but during copy user copied equipment and branch without tube that was connected to equipment (partial copy) system cannot set HREF/TREF because in destination branch is not connected to equipment (there is no tube)
Warning
HREF/TREF/STAREF/ENREF can not be set because the item that attribute points to was not copied
Warning
HREF/TREF/STAREF/ENREF can not be set because the item that attribute points to was copied but for some reason is not valid in DB (there supposed to be different message that explain why item is not valid)
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:116
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When copying a cable or multi cable the pasted item has been selected to be secondary. The existing primary item has STAREF/ENDREF already set.
Warning
The
When copying a cable or multi cable the pasted item has been selected to be secondary. The existing primary item didn’t have STAREF/ENDREF already set. They have been updated according to the pasted item.
Information
In case STAREF/ENDREF is not connected on drawing, this message will be displayed. Typically it might happen when equipment is connected with primary cable representation. The cable also has secondary shape representation that is not connected with the equipment. When copying and pasting equipment and secondary cable representation then it will not be possible to set the attribute because items are not connected on the drawing.
Warning
The nozzle does not have the required PIPE_1 connection point. CREF attribute is not set.
A nozzle shape was copied that was not properly defined on drawing. The connection point could not be found.
Warning
The connection between nozzle and branch can not be copied because the item is not connected to a valid branch!
This is displayed when the nozzle connection will not be connected in the destination but was in source. For example if an equipment and nozzle were copied without connected branch (or branch is connected but is not valid).
Warning
Could not copy
The message will be displayed when copying and pasting an item with CRFA/ECRFA set. For example, a valve in the source has CRFA set (meaning that the valve has a branching point connected to some branch) but was copied without connected branch.
Warning
One of the referenced
CRFA and ECRFA are arrays, it might be that a valve with two branching points connected is copied, for example a cross, but it was copied only with one branch. In the result in destination there will be a cross with only one branch connected.
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:117
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The ECRFA maximum size was reached. Some items can not be connected.
The ECRFA size is constant. Some items like equipment might be a secondary. In case an equipment with connected branches is copied and chosen to be secondary during paste, then the ECRFA array will be extended with the new connections. It might be that this operation will cause too many connected branches – then this message is displayed.
Warning
The attribute
Message will be displayed if referenced attribute is not valid in the destination project. For example if copying an equipment that refers to some systems and pasting it to a project where one or more of these systems doesn’t exist.
Warning
OPCREF can not be set because of missing connected OPCI/O
Message displayed when OPCREF can not be set because connected OPCI/O was not copied
Warning
OPCREF can not be set. The connected OPCI/O was copied but it is invalid
Message displayed when OPCREF can not be set because OPCI/O was copied but for some reason it is undefined. It might happen if creating a branch under existing pipelines and one of pipelines belong to database that is read only. Because of that, the item will be pasted but will be undefined.
Warning
Failed to copy SCIRTY because the SCIRTY table has different size than SCIREF table. All values have been set to NONE
In case if SCIRTY has different size than SCIREF then properly setting this array is not possible. Because of that SCIRTY will be reset. This should not normally happen, but it might be that attributes were changed outside of Diagrams or manually in PML.
Warning
The database does not contain UDET type
Displayed when copying a UDET and pasting it in a destination project where this UDET has no definition. In the result base type will be used.
Warning
The object type does not exist in db definition for
Displayed when the database type of the copied item, that exists in source project does not exist in the destination project.
Warning
There is no schematic DB where the item can be created
The destination project doesn’t have any available Schematics database, or it is read-only.
Warning
Failed creating item because its owner was not created.
Items like Elconns or Nozzles are copied without their owning elements. This will result in the items becoming undefined.
Warning
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:118
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Failed to get default group for {0} from CE. Item was not created.
Displayed when the Session Defaults option “Get Default Group from CE” is used, but the group could not be fetched. This can for example happen if the current element is the “World” element.
Warning
Failed to get default group for {0}. Item was not created!
Displayed when no default group for an element type is defined in Session Defaults.
Warning
Can not create item in database because the subequipment is copied without its owner. Either copy the subequipment separately and paste it with the parent equipment item as CE, or copy this item together with its equipment parent.
When user is coping sub-equipment items without its owner, it is possible that they will be created in db. However, there is restriction that CE has to be equipment (or one of the CE parent is an equipment) and only subequipment items were copied. In case mixed types are copied and sub-equipment items are copied without the parent, then this message will be displayed.
Warning
Can not create subequipment in database because CE is not an equipment. Please set CE to equipment or its member, or copy this item together with its equipment parent.
Displayed when sub-equipment items are copied but CE is not an equipment or an equipment member.
Warning
Some of the segments were copied partially, and the copied data structure was reorganized. When pasting, the newly created data structure will be different than the copied one
This message might be displayed during copy action when copying only a few items from branch. Example: There is a branch that contains tube1, valve1, tube2, valve2. If selecting valve1 and valve2 and executing copy/paste, then this message will be displayed because when paste, the structure has to be changed. Two branches have to be created instead of one. However, if selecting valve1, tube2 and valve2 the message will not be displayed because the branch structure will be the same.
Information
Name should not contain spaces. Evaluated name "
Error from auto naming. Displayed when auto name rule is wrongly set so that name contains spaces.
Warning
Name already exists.
Error from auto naming. Displayed when auto name rule creates name that already is in use.
Warning
The item was supposed to be copied but the DBElem is not valid!
Critical error that can appear when during paste action another thread/process change pasted database elements.
Critical
The shape can not be linked with database element.
Displayed if it is not possible to establish connection between database element and the shape.
Critical
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:119
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The database attribute '
Displayed when an attribute is valid in the database but the element does not have this attribute. A typical case might be when some UDA is defined in both source and destination projects, but in project A this UDA is assigned to SCOINST and SCEQUI but in project B it is assigned to SCEQUI only. When copying SCOINST from project A where the UDA has value set and paste it to project B, it will not be able to set the attribute.
Warning
Paste action failed. Items might be defined incorrectly
Paste action failed. There is high probability that another error message precedes this message.
Critical
The auto naming of elements failed. Exception message
Auto naming failed. Probably some rules are incorrectly defined or some elements do not have all attributes set that naming rule requires.
Warning
4.15
Primary / Secondary Shapes
4.15.1
Overview Diagrams supports a Primary/Secondary shapes concept. This allows a single item in the database to be represented by several shapes in diagrams. The shapes can exist in the same page, on another page in the same diagram or on different diagrams. A good example of this are equipment items to which several systems are connected, such as the main engine. Even if the main engine will be represented on all the related systems' diagrams, it can still be a single item in the database. In some cases the main responsibility for an equipment item lies with a certain design team or system design group while it needs to be accessible to other teams for connecting other systems to it. To support this way of working, shapes can be considered Primary or Secondary, and different rules and restrictions can be applied to these categories. We can distinguish two groups of secondary elements: 1. The non-inline elements: •
Equipment items
•
Sub-equipment items
•
Cables
•
Multi cables
•
Actuators
•
Offline instruments
•
Nozzles
•
Electrical connections
•
Area shapes
The system allows 0-n primary shapes and 0-n secondary shapes for a certain non-inline element in the database. This means that the shapes corresponding to a certain DB element might be all primary, all secondary or a mix of primary and secondary. For example, if an equipment shape is deleted while keeping the corresponding DB item, and later a new shape is created referring to the same DB item, the new shape will be secondary even if no primary shape exists. This kind of situation is not handled
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:120
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
automatically by the system. It is however possible for the user to manually change the IsPrimary flag in the shape data window. 2. The inline elements (elements that can be created under the branch's segment) •
Valves
•
Fittings
•
HVAC fittings
•
Inline instruments
•
Off page connectors (incoming/outgoing)
•
Pipe destinations
•
Tubes
•
Ducts
In contrast to the elements from the first group, the system allows only one primary shape and 0-n secondary shapes for an element in the database. It is not allowed to change the primary status for these shapes. This means that the primary shape will always be primary and the secondary shape will always be secondary. Deleting the secondary shape will never remove the element from the database, but deleting the primary one will always remove it. Secondary shapes can be created in two main ways: •
By changing the name into an already existing name.
•
By copying and pasting shapes in the drawing.
Note: The usage of Primary/Secondary shapes for certain combinations of main items having subitems and/or connected cables or pipes involves a complex behaviour and can give results that were not expected by the user. When using the Primary/ Secondary shapes for such combinations, it is important that the user understands all implications of his/her actions.
4.15.2
Creating Secondary Shapes by Changing Name When a shape of one of the above listed types is dropped on to the drawing, this shape will automatically be considered a Primary shape. You can create a secondary shape representation of the database element by changing its name in the Shape Data window. This behaviour depends on the default settings, please refer to section Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes. Because of the database structure, inline elements are created differently from non-inline elements. Create secondary shape by name change of an inline shape: 1. Drag and drop a symbol of a piping or valve inline component from a stencil onto the drawing canvas. The symbol will not be defined.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:121
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
2. Change the name of the undefined and unconnected symbol to the name of an existing item of the same type.
3. The application prompts the user with a dialog box informing that the item already exists and asks if a secondary shape should be created:
Click Yes and the shape will then refer to the existing item in the database, the name should be manually entered, and it will be made into a secondary shape. Create secondary shape by name change of an non-inline shape: The user can create a secondary non-inline element using the same technique as for inline elements. However, a non-inline element has to be defined and may be connected to other elements. If the user decides to create a secondary shape representation, he may be asked for confirmation of deletion from the database of the original item created when the shape was
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:122
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
dropped (depending on the setting). Please see Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
If the original database item contains some subordinate Electrical Connection Elements or Nozzles, a dialog is shown asking if these should be copied into the existing item is having the new name entered manually. When the element is connected to other items, the system behaves differently depending on the type of connected element. Please refer to the table below for more information. Note: (EXISTING_ITEM" - element that already exist in DB, "CURRENT_ITEM" element where name is changed) “The already existing item in the database”
“The shape on the drawing that is being modified”
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:123
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Situation on drawing
Description
Behaviour
EXISTING_ITEM The already existing item in the database. CURRENT_ITEM The shape on the drawing that is being modified. 1.
The Equipment contains an electrical connection. The Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The EQUIPMENT name is changed manually. In a dialog the user is asked if the connected electrical connection should be moved to the already existing item in the database. The answer is NO.
The following behaviour occurs: 1. The electrical connection will be undefined. 2. The cable will be disconnected from the electrical connection on the drawing. 3. The cable will be disconnected in the database.
(If the answer is YES the system moves the elconns to the destination element without disconnecting cables. The same behaviour is for nozzles) The Equipment contains an electrical connection and the Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The Electrical connection name is changed manually.
The following behaviour occurs: 1. A change to secondary will be possible only if the already existing item in the database has the same owner as the shape on the drawing that is being modified. 2. Cable will be disconnected on drawing. 3. Cable will be disconnected in DB.
The Equipment contains a electrical connection. The Electrical connection is connected to a cable. The cable name is changed manually.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:124
1. The cable will be disconnected on the drawing. 2. The cable will be disconnected in the database.
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Equipment is connected to a cable. The Equipment name is changed manually.
The Equipment is connected to a cable. The cable name is changed manually.
The Equipment contains a nozzle. The nozzle is connected to a branch. The Equipment name is changed manually.
1. The cable disconnected drawing.
will on
be the
2. The Cable disconnected database.
will in
be the
1. The Cable disconnected drawing.
will on
be the
2. The Cable disconnected database.
will in
be the
In a dialog the user is asked if the connected nozzles should be moved to the already existing item in the database. The answer is NO. 1. The Nozzle shape will be undefined. 2. The Branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
3. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by the secondary shape). The Equipment contains a nozzle. The nozzle is connected to a branch. The Nozzle name is changed manually.
1. The Nozzle element will be transformed to secondary only if the already existing item in the database has the same owner as the shape on the drawing that is being modified. 2. The branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
3. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by secondary shape).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:125
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The Equipment is connected to a branch. The Equipment name is changed manually.
1. The Branch disconnected drawing.
will be on the
2. The Branch will be disconnected in the database (the database connection will not be changed if the branch is represented by secondary shape). The Actuator is connected to an inline element. The Actuator name is changed manually.
1. The shape on the drawing that is being modified removes connection to valve. 2. The Actuator shape will be disconnected on the drawing.
The Actuator is connected to an inline element by a relationship shape. The Actuator name is changed manually.
1. The shape on the drawing that is being modified removes connection to valve. 2. The Relationship shape will be disconnected from the Actuator and will be undefined.
The system also enforces some restrictions on secondary shape handling for hierarchically subordinate items such as sub-equipment and electrical connection elements. For example, it is not allowed to have secondary electrical connection elements referring to a DB item owned by a different equipment item than the one that the electrical connection element is connected to on the current drawing. This is described in more detail under Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
4.15.3
Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste Secondary shapes can also be created by copying and pasting shapes in or between drawings. When a shape is being pasted, the system checks if it contains a name of a DB element. If that DB element already exists, a dialog is shown. For electrical connections and nozzle elements, no separate dialog is shown and the response is taken from the parent equipment item. This behaviour depends on the default settings. Refer to Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes.
•
Copy with CTRL+DRAG Also, copying by the CTRL+DRAG technique it is possible to create secondary objects for the following shapes: •
Equipment
•
Sub-equipment
•
Electrical connection elements
•
Cables
•
Multi-cables
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:126
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
•
Area Shapes
Copy/Paste with CTRL+C and CTRL+V
Using this technique it is possible to create secondary objects for all inline and non-inline elements. To achieve this, user has to select shapes on drawing and copy it to clipboard. Next, user has to paste it into the same or different drawing. If all elements can be created as secondary, user is prompted by dialog message as in the picture below (depends on settings).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:127
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the Secondary button is clicked, all shapes become secondary representations of the copied structure.
Note: That if it is not possible to create the secondary elements (because of at least one database element missing), the system tries to create a new structure in the database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:128
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.15.4
Viewing and Changing Primary/Secondary Status The Primary/Secondary status of a shape can be seen by having a look at the IsPrimaryShape attribute in Shape Data or the Item List. It is also possible to change the Primary/Secondary status for a certain shape by using the dropdown list. Auto Formatting rules can be used to localise all secondary shapes. To achieve this, a new rule has to be created under the formatting rules and a Visio Shape Condition has to be set. An example can be seen in the picture below.
4.15.5
Behaviour of Primary/Secondary Shapes A set of default settings available in Diagrams Options controls how primary and secondary shapes will behave regarding creation, updates of attributes and deletion of the shape. These can be found under the respective element options. For instance for equipment items, the settings can be found under Element Options > Equipment Options. The settings are as follows: Default setting
Value
Description
Deleting a primary shape
Ask user
When a primary shape is deleted, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be deleted or not.
Always delete DB item
When a primary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is always also deleted without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never delete DB item
When a primary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is never deleted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:129
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Deleting a secondary shape
Modifying attributes secondary shape
of
Creating secondary shapes on Paste
Creating secondary shapes on Name Change
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
Ask user
When a secondary shape is deleted, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be deleted or not.
Always delete DB item
When a secondary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is always also deleted without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never delete DB item
When a secondary shape is deleted, the corresponding DB element is never deleted.
Ask user
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the system will ask the user if the corresponding DB element should be updated or not.
Always allow
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the corresponding DB element is always also updated without any confirmation or message to the user.
Never allow
When an attribute value for a secondary shape is changed, the corresponding DB element is never updated. The user will receive an error message.
Ask user
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, the user is asked whether to create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB or not.
Always create secondary shape
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, always create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB.
Never create secondary shape
When a shape having a name already existing in the DB is pasted, blank the name and never create a secondary shape. A new item will be created in the DB.
Ask user
When the name of a shape is changed to the name of an existing item in the database, the user is asked whether to create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB or not.
Always create secondary shape
When the name of a shape is changed to the name of an existing item in the database, always create a secondary shape referring to the same item in the DB.
Never create secondary shape
It will not be allowed to change the name to the same name as an existing item in the database.
4:130
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
There is also certain behaviour related to subitems and connected items. This behaviour is described in the table below. In case of secondary shape creation through name change, the DB item that the shape was referring to before it was assigned to another one is referred to as the Source item. The DB item that the shape will be linked to after the creation is referred to as the Destination item. Method
Action
Behaviour
Copy/Paste
Creating secondary shapes for equipment where the source DB item has got subequipment.
No special handling. The source subequipment items will always be kept.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source item has got electrical connection/nozzles items.
The electrical connection/nozzle items will be copied and the electrical connection/nozzle shapes will be made secondary shapes (CTRL+C->CTRL-V, CTRL+DRAG does not support secondary nozzle creation).
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source DB item has got nozzles
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment where the source DB item has connected cables
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment having connected pipes
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Creating secondary shapes for equipment or subequipment having connected HVACs
No special action as long as only the equipment shape is copied.
Copy/Paste of an elconn/ nozzle.
It is possible to create a secondary elcon/nozzle without its parent using the CTRL+C->CTRL-V short command. When using the CTRL+DRAG command, the new elconn/nozzle will be created. When copying multiple shapes including equipment items and elconns/ nozzles, the elconn/nozzle always inherits the answer from its parent. Note: When CTRL+DRAG is used, a new nozzle is always created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:131
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Method
Action
Behaviour
Copy/Paste of multiple shapes having mixed item types.
When multiple shapes of different kinds are copied and pasted, the system will behave differently depending on the kinds of items that have been selected. This is fairly complicated and is therefore not recommended unless the user knows exactly what he/she is doing. If the user for instance has selected a few equipment items and a few subequipment items and these items contain elconns, all elconns will be added to their parents as primary/ secondary - depending on the answer from the parent.
•
Behaviour and Limitations of Secondary Shapes for Inline Items The secondary shapes for inline types will show a different behaviour to other kinds of secondary shapes: •
It is not possible to delete the DB item by deleting a secondary shape. If you delete the secondary shape for an inline item, only the shape will disappear. This also means that there is no setting for Deleting a primary shape and Deleting a secondary shape for these types in Diagrams Options.
•
The setting Creating secondary shapes on Paste is located in the Pipeline options, Instrumentation line options and HVAC line options instead of in each inline element options. This setting affects all inline elements defined under HVAC, Pipeline or Instrument line.
•
Settings: Modifying attributes of secondary shape and Creating secondary shapes on Name Change for tubes duct are located under the Pipeline, Instrument and HVAC lines options. Other inline elements, like valves or fittings, have these settings located under their own options.
•
If a secondary shape is copied and pasted without its primary structure, the element will not be defined and the user will be notified by a message in the Message Log.
•
It is not possible to make any pipe/HVAC connections to a secondary shape. However, it is possible to connect offline instruments or actuators.
•
It is not allowed for any operation that might change the database pipeline/HVAC line connection structure (like join, split, reverse branch, insert valve into structure etc.)
•
If refit/resize or propagation of SCLORE will be executed on a secondary shape and the structure is a segment that ends with OPCO, the system will continue propagation only if it finds the primary OPCI.
•
The DIAGREF/PAGEREF attribute of segment is not updated when a secondary shape is created.
•
When secondary shapes for more than one shape have been created, e.g. for a whole branch or part of a branch, then these secondary shapes will subsequently be handled as a group: •
It will not be possible to disconnect them from each other.
•
It will not be possible to delete just one of them, the whole group has to be deleted.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:132
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Equipment and Sub-equipment Copy and Paste Summary The following examples will explain the logic in the function for copying and pasting equipment and sub-equipment. Note: This is only valid when using Ctrl+Drag. Example 1: The diagram below has got two equipments with sub-equipments. When they are copied and pasted, the sub equipments will be copied together with the equipment. New database items will be created for them.
Example 2: Now the diagram has one equipment with a secondary shape and two sub-equipments.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:133
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When this group of shapes is marked and copied and pasted, the system will ask if new database items should be created for each shape, or if they should become secondary shapes. This question is asked for each shape.
If new database items are chosen, the system will create two new equipments, making the secondary shape become an individual equipment item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:134
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When creating the database items for the sub equipment, the ownership of the sub equipment is determined by proximity. In this example, sub equipment Equipment-002-Sub001 is owned by Equipment-002 because it is positioned closest to that equipment shape. For the same reason Equipment-003-Sub-001 is owned by Equipment-003 because it is closer to that equipment than to Equipment-002. If both sub equipments are closer to one of the equipment shapes than the other, they will both be owned by this equipment:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:135
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
In this case, both sub equipments are owned by Equipment-002.
4.15.6
Deleting Primary/Secondary Shapes Deleting Non-inline Elements: The system does not include any automatic management of primary/secondary status when shapes are deleted. This means that if a primary shape is deleted, leaving the DB element, it can happen that only secondary shapes are left for that item. If this is not a preferred situation, one of the secondary shapes will have to be upgraded to a primary by changing the status of the IsPrimaryShape attribute. In case the DB element has also been deleted, this will be detected and reported by the consistency check operation for the secondary shapes. Deleting inline elements: Deleting secondary inline shapes will not remove the database element. Only when deleting the primary shape. If the user tries to delete the secondary inline element that is connected to other inline items (is inside group) then the operation will be cancelled.
The whole group needs to be selected and deleted.
4.15.7
Finding All Shapes Referring to a Certain DB Element To find out which drawings contain shapes that references a certain DB element, the Open Diagram function can be used. This is for instance available by right clicking on the element in the Schematic Explorer. In case the element only exists on a single drawing, this drawing will be opened. If it occurs on several drawings, a list will be displayed. When a drawing has been opened, the Find in Drawing Toolbar can be used to find all instances of the DB element within that drawing.
4.16
Unassigned Items Unassigned Items are database items that exist in the Schematic database but do not currently exist on any diagram. These can for example originate from AVEVA Engineering via Compare/Update, or created using Excel import.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:136
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.16.1
Assign to Database Element A Visio symbol can be created and connected to an existing database element using the following procedure: 1. Select the desired database element as ‘current element’. 2. Hold down the Shift key. 3. Drag and drop the Visio symbol from the stencil to the drawing area. The Visio shape is assigned to the existing database element only when: 1. The master shape is of the same type as the database element, for example SCEQUIPMENT db element corresponding to an Equipment shape. 2. There is no currently selected database element on any drawing yet. When a database element is assigned to a symbol an information message will be displayed in the message log informing that the shape has been linked to the existing database element. If it is not possible to do assign an error message will be displayed and the dropped symbol will be removed from the drawing automatically.
4.16.2
Elements to be Dropped There are three types of elements that can be dropped onto a drawing; 1. None inline elements that can exist alone on a drawing (like Equipment, Subequipment, Actuators, Offline elements, Area etc.). When a master shape is dropped from a stencil the currently selected database element will be linked to the Visio shape. 2. Nozzles and Electrical Connections. It is only possible to drop electrical connections and nozzles symbols if they are dropped on the shapes of the owning elements, for example a nozzle can only be dropped on an Equipment shape. See figure below.
3. Inline elements. It is possible to drop inline symbols and build segments. To achieve this parts of the segment has to be dropped one by one from the stencil and connected on the drawing by dropping them on the connecting parts, see figures below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:137
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
After connecting a shape with the unassigned item Current Element will automatically be set to the next unassigned element in the branch. If one part of the segment is already on the drawing it will not be possible to continue with the same segment on another page or drawing. Elements have to be dropped one by one and have to be connected, or if it is a component to component connection they have to be dropped closely enough so that they can be auto connected, see figure below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:138
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When connecting a shape to a branch, arrive and leave will be automatically adjusted to the flow direction. If the shape is a one-way component, then it will be rotated according to the flow.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:139
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.17
Using Background Drawings
4.17.1
Import CAD Drawing Diagrams relies on the standard Visio function Import CAD Drawing for importing background drawings. This means that the process is the following: 1. Export the background drawing from Marine Drafting using the Export > DXF function, having a format that is compatible with the used MS Visio version, for stance R12 DXF*. 1. Import the drawing using the Insert Tab > Illustration > CAD Drawing command in Diagrams. *As the support for drawing formats and versions changes with new releases of Marine Drafting and MS Visio, it is recommended that the user will make some tests and investigations using their current program versions to determine which format and version will provide the best results. For more information about the Import CAD Drawing function, please refer to the MS Visio documentation.
4.17.2
Intelligent Background Page The Intelligent Background Page feature allows the import of drafting drawings as a background page. To achieve this open the Visio drawing and choose the Insert Tab > Illustration> Intelligent Background command.
To display a drawing select one in the left hand side window.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:140
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Click the Options button to select Import Options and Imported View Types.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:141
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
When importing a view from Marine Drafting the basic position of the view can be chosen in the Import Options dialog. There are three possibilities: •
Original
•
Center
•
Fit
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:142
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
After import, the view shape position is locked for modifications. Each imported view gets an extra right-click menu option called Lock. By default this is checked so the view cannot be moved. By unchecking it, the view can be flipped, moved, rotated and scaled. After editing the view, it can again be locked to avoid accidental modifications.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:143
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: That any items located on the foreground page (equipments etc) that had their position set before the view shape movement, will not be automatically updated after the view has been moved or resized. They will need to be manually updated.
4.18
Setting an Initial 3D Position
4.18.1
Overview Diagrams supports a 3D Position (POS) attribute for relevant schematic database elements. This position is independent of the 3D position of any related 3D elements. This can be handled in different ways using the Schematic 3D Integrator. It is for instance possible to copy the initial 3D position given for the schematic element to the corresponding 3D element during the build process. Please refer to the Schematic 3D Integrator User Guide for more details.
4.19
P&ID Grid Definition Diagrams supports localisation of symbols on a diagram within the AVEVA Diagrams application according to grid definition.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:144
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.1
P&ID Grid Definition File The file griddef.xml contains the definition of the gridding for a project. It should be located into your "
The definition file consists of two paths: one for X and one for Y. Both of them contain a series of tags defined by a min/max value and a name value. Example:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:145
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.2
Grid Position Attributes Items that can be localized have four attributes as shown below: Attribute Name
Type
Description
DIAGXPOS
Real
The X position of the symbol on Visio drawing stored in mm. The default value is 0.0001. This means that the position is not set. (For old items it will be 0).
DIAGYPOS
Real
The Y position of the symbol on Visio drawing stored in mm. The default value is 0.0001. This means that the position is not set. (For old items it will be 0)
GRIDXPOS
String
The X position of the symbol according to the gridding definition. This is the pseudo attribute. The value is evaluated each time it is queried. It will retrieve the name of the tag from the gridding definition where DIAGXPOS fit, if possible.
GRIDYPOS
String
The Y position of the symbol according to the gridding definition. This is the pseudo attribute. The value is evaluated each time it is queried. It will retrieve the name of the tag from the gridding definition where DIAGYPOS fit, if possible.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:146
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Each time the user wants to move an item on the drawing or create a new one, the DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS will be updated according to the Visio drawing position. Be aware that if DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS will be out of limits of the grid definition file then an appropriate message will be returned by GRIDXPOS/GRIDYPOS pseudo attributes. Note: The four attributes: DIAGXPOS, DIAGYPOS, GRIDXPOS and GRIDYPOS are defined as "Hidden"
4.19.3
Items that can be Localised Items that contain the above mentioned attributes are: •
Equipment items
•
Sub-equipment items
•
Offline instruments
•
Actuators
•
Fittings
•
HVAC Fittings
•
Off page connectors (SCOPCI and SCOPCO)
•
Valves
•
Instruments
•
Pipe destination
•
Nozzles
•
Electrical connections
•
Areas
Some of above items might have secondary representation. That means that there is more than one shape that is representing the same item in the database. The position DIAGXPOS/DIAGYPOS will be updated only according to primary items.
4.19.4
Using the P&ID Grid Each time a symbol is dropped on to a diagram sheet or the symbol is moved on the sheet, the actual PinX, PinY symbol position is retrieved via the Visio application and these values are stored respectively in the DIAGXPOS and DIAGYPOS DB element attributes.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:147
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
It is mostly not interesting to know this value but rather the corresponding gridding position along the X/Y axes. A second pair of attributes is available for that, they are GRIDXPOS and GRIDYPOS, which are pseudo attributes. That means the value is never stored on the DB element, but is dynamically converted based on the DIAGXPOS/DIAGYPOS values and the gridding defined configuration. Thus, if he gridding definition should be changed during the project life cycle, any simple query would dynamically reflect the changes. Displaying these values graphically for a symbol can be done with the following formula:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:148
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: In some cases it will be required to call the Refresh command to see the proper text. Alternatively you may want to display the gridding position of the connector you are connected to. In that case, use the following formula:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:149
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.19.5
Updating Existing Drawings Old drawings may be updated using the File > Batch Job… > Update Diagrams function. When the item position is updated this will be will be notified in the message log.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:150
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20
Changing Symbols for Existing Items
4.20.1
Overview Diagrams supports exchanging a placed and connected symbol with another symbol. All connections will be retained. This can be done either manually by the user or automatically by fetching a shape reference from the catalogue. The main difference between manually and automatically replacing a symbol is the Shape Data cells handling. When done automatically all cells are retained. In other words, there is only a graphical symbol change and no database changes. Whereas during manual replace, all attributes that are possible to be set in the database element are copied from the master shape. As in the following example, where the master shape has Description set to "GD629EJ" the database element will have the description attribute updated to that value after replacing the symbol.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:151
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the attribute change is successful, a notification like the one below is displayed in the Message Log.
If the attribute change failed, an error message like the one below is displayed in the Message Log.
The Replace operation does not erase attributes that are not set in the master. In the above example, all attributes with no value in the master (Area, Arrive, Borearray etc.) are not changed in the database element.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:152
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Note: On name change - when the name attribute is changing because of a replace operation, the system does not ask about creating a secondary representation item. The name will be changed. If the operation fails, a warning message is displayed.
•
Replacing Symbols with Updating Attributes According to Master In the Update Diagrams Options dialog tick the box for Update symbols according to master shapes. This will enable execution in a batch job.
Now choose the Replace Symbol option from the shape’s context menu.
The main difference between replacing symbol using batch job and using the Replace Symbol option from the context menu is that in the latter question dialogs can appear when the database attribute is changing. It could be that the replaced item: •
is released to 3D,
•
is a secondary item,
•
belongs to the area that controls attributes.
Normally, while changing database attribute of an item using shape data, there is a user confirmation dialog. When you modify an attribute using Replace Symbol from the shape context menu, you will be notified in the same way. (Note that questions are related with database attribute change, which means that if you say No then the symbol will be replaced
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:153
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
but the attribute will stay the same.) When you use a batch job, all question messages are skipped. Because of that, each time the when the system is not sure if changing an attribute is allowed, the attribute will not be changed. At each attribute operation, regardless of changing or not changing the value, you will be notified about that in the batch log. Note: Changing SCSTYP or PSPE might trigger a specification search. When an attribute is changed using the Replace Symbol option, the process of specification search works just like during attribute change from shape data. However, if it is done from the batch job, the specification search is executed very similarly to when changing GTYP to INST. There are small differences in the algorithm:
•
•
When SCSTYP is changing, the system is checking if any SELE or SPEC asks about the SCSTYP and starts searching from this element (instead of item with TYPE question).
•
When PSPE is changing, the system skips the condition related with SELE element that contains the question and starts searching from SPEC element.
Replacing Symbols that will not Update Attributes Choose the Replace Symbol from Catalogue option from the shape’s context menu.
Change SPREF. In the Update Diagrams Options dialog tick the box for Update symbols according to catalogue information. This will enable execution in a batch job.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:154
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20.2
Manual Replacing of Symbol By selecting one or more shapes and using the Replace Symbol command on the right click menu, the symbol can be manually replaced. This will bring up a dialogue where a new shape can be selected.
In the treeview to the left, all open stencils are shown. In the right hand pane all shapes for the selected stencil can be seen. Select one of these and click the Replace button to make the change. In case the dialogue should remain open, use the Apply button instead. The Reset button will restore the original symbol(s).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:155
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
If the selected shape is not of the same type or has too few connections, an error message will be shown and the symbol will not be replaced.
4.20.3
Automatic Replacing of Symbol When the catalogue reference for an item is set or changed, the application can automatically replace the symbol using a symbol reference from the catalogue. This can for instance be applied when a generic shape has been used from the beginning, and when at a later time in the process the catalogue reference is set. Then a more specific symbol can be fetched from the catalogue, given that the catalogue item includes a shape reference. The shape reference in the catalogue can be set using the Symbol Group and Symbol Name fields in Paragon. Symbol Group should contain the name of the stencil and Symbol Name should be the name of the shape within the stencil.
Figure 4:57. Catalogue symbol reference in Paragon
The way that the automatic symbol replacement works is controlled by some default settings in Diagrams Options (Defaults in Chapter Getting Started): Default setting
Value
Description
Auto replace shape from catalogue
Yes
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will check if the referenced catalogue item has a shape reference. If it has, the shape will automatically be replaced with one referenced from the catalogue.
No
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will not attempt to replace the shape from the catalogue.
Ask User
When the catalogue reference is set or changed, the application will check if the referenced catalogue item has a shape reference. If it has, the system will ask the user if the shape should be replaced.
In addition to this, there is also a setting for Auto replace manually replaced shapes. This can have the same values as described above for the Auto replace shape from catalogue, with the difference that it only applies to shapes that the user has previously exchanged manually. This basically provides a way to disallow any automatic changes to shapes that the user has manually replaced.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:156
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.20.4
Replace Symbol from Catalogue By using the Replace Symbol from Catalogue command available on the shape right click menu, the current symbol will be replaced with the one stored in the catalogue. This can be useful in the following cases:
4.21
•
The item has received a new catalogue reference outside the control of the Diagrams application and the symbol has therefore not been updated accordingly.
•
The user has manually replaced a symbol and now wants to return to the symbol provided by the catalogue.
•
The catalogue has been updated with new symbol references and the diagram should reflect this change.
Setting System Reference In some cases the user might want to override the System reference inherited from the pipeline for a particular valve or fitting. In this case the Set System Reference command available on the shape right-click menu can be used. This will bring up a dialogue where the system reference can be set or updated. This dialogue can also be used for setting the system reference(s) for equipment items and cables.
One item can be a member of multiple systems. To add a reference to a System, click the button, which will bring up a dialogue where the system hierarchy can be browsed and a system selected. To remove a system reference, select it in the list and click the
button.
In the list you can also see the system reference of the parent Pipeline / HVACline for applicable items as a greyed out system name at the top of the list. This is not shown for cables or equipment items, as there is no hierarchically superior element in the database that has a system reference.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:157
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.22
Naming
4.22.1
Overview Diagrams includes a possibility for automatic naming and re-naming of database elements. This is primarily accomplished through the standard PDMS Autonaming function. In addition to this, there are also functions to rename elements based on their position in the diagram layout.
4.22.2 •
Autonaming Naming Rules To set up naming rules to be automatically applied when DB elements are created, use the Admin Tab > Configuration > Naming function. Please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Administrator User Guide for more information about this. The autonaming only works when no name has been given at the time the element is created. If for instance the Prompt on drop (Prompting the User to Enter a Name) facility is used to prompt the user for a name, the autonaming will not be activated (unless the user does not enter any name).
•
Autoname CE The naming can also be manually triggered by using the Autoname CE function available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming menu item. Note: That this only works in case the element is not already named.
•
Autoname CE and Offspring The Autoname CE and Offspring function is the same as the Autoname CE, but it will also autoname any unnamed off springs of CE.
•
Autoname Offspring Only The Autoname Offspring Only function should be used for auto naming any unnamed off springs of CE, but not CE itself.
4.22.3
Auto Renaming In addition to the autonaming, it is also possible to autorename elements. These functions works more or less in the way that the current name is first removed and then a new autoname is applied.
•
Auto Rename CE This function will autoname the current element according to the current Naming Option, after first removing the current name. The function is available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming.
•
Auto Rename CE and Offspring Works the same way as Auto Rename CE, but it will also auto rename any off springs of CE. The function is available under Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:158
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
•
Auto Rename Offspring Only This function will auto rename any offspring of CE, but not CE itself.
4.22.4
Rename Elements This function works on the current selection in the diagram, and can rename the elements based on their position in the diagram layout. Typically the user can select elements of a certain type (i.e. valves, cables etc.) and rename them according to their position.
•
Name Option Choose whether the names should be regenerated, re-ordered ascending or re-ordered descending. Regenerating the names will first remove the names of the selected elements and then the autoname function will be applied to the selected elements. Re-order names will keep the names of the selected elements and re-order them alphanumerically.
•
Point of Comparison Choose which point of the shape that should be used for deciding the order. Typically this setting is used in conjunction with function Sort Options Horizontally and Vertically.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:159
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Sort Option:
4.22.5
Horizontally
This will consider the X position of the shapes first.
Vertically
This will consider the Y position of the shapes first.
Selected Order
This will rename in the order that the shapes where selected.
Reversed Selected Order
This will rename in the reverse order that the shapes where selected.
Chain (cables only)
This will rename cables in a chain style, starting with the selected cable traversing downstream via connected equipments/elconns. Before using this option, the user must first have selected a single cable at the start of the chain. If more than one cable is selected, the rename chain option will be disabled. It will also only propagate downstream if there is exactly one incoming and one outgoing cable at each connection. Typically this feature can be used for naming continuous circuits like lighting, fire alarms etc.
Prompting the User to Enter a Name By using the Attribute Presentation settings (please refer to Attribute Presentation in Chapter Getting Started), it is possible to make the application prompt the user for attribute values as a shape is being dropped on the drawing. In case the NAME attribute is used for prompting, a special functionality is invoked. In case an element with the same name already exists in the DB, the user will be presented with a dialogue where it is possible to reenter the name, create a Secondary shape (Creating Secondary Shapes by Copy/Paste), if this is enabled, or to create the new item anyway, but with a blank name.
4.23
Viewing Datasheets in Diagrams Diagrams allows the viewing of Datasheets for engineering items that are linked with schematics elements. It is possible to open Datasheets from either the context menu on the Drawing, the Ribbon context menu for selected element or in the Schematic Explorer context menu. Datasheets in Diagrams are opened in read-only mode, they can be only viewed. Datasheets can be printed directly from Diagrams.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:160
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.1
Drawing The Open Datasheet function in the Drawing context menu is always enabled and there will be a message in the Message Log window if the element does not have a linked engineering item or the linked engineering element does not have a Datasheet Instance.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:161
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:162
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.2
Ribbon UI The Datasheet option in the Ribbon context menu, for the selected element, is enabled only when the selected element has a linked engineering item and there is a Datasheet Instance created for that item.
4.23.3
Schematic Explorer The Open Datasheet function in the Schematic Explorer context menu is enabled only when the selected element has a linked engineering item and there is a Datasheet Instance created for that item.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:163
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.23.4
Printing Datasheet in Diagrams Datasheets can be printed directly from Diagrams using the Print Datasheet menu in the Project menu. The Print Datasheet function is enabled only when a Datasheet is opened.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:164
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:165
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.24
Highlighting The application includes a number of ways to highlight shapes in the drawing. Some examples of these are the right-click menu in the Schematic and System Explorers, the Find in Drawing group on the Tools Tab, during automatic dimensioning/spec search etc. In the case that the application will not automatically reset the highlight, it can be reset by using the Reset Highlight function. This is available in the Quick Access Toolbar. In addition to this, the F7 key on the keyboard can be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:166
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
The highlight colour and linewidth can be configured by changing some default settings in Diagrams Options (refer to section Defaults):
4.25
Default setting
Value
Description
Highlight colour
Colour (default is Red colour)
Colour to be used when highlighting
Line width multiplier
Multiplier factor
The multiplier to be applied to the line width when highlighting. This is only relevant when ‘Enable auto line width’ is False.
Enable auto line width
True / False
Automatically adjust the line width to the current zoom level when highlighting is done.
Auto line width
Line width
The line width in approx points to be applied when ‘Enable auto line width’ is True.
Apply auto line width on zoom operation
True / False
Automatically adjust the line width when the zoom level is changed. This can be set to False if the performance of the zoom operation degrades on large drawings.
Keep highlight after dimensioning operation.
True / False
If True, changed component will be kept highlighted after resize / refit operations.
Importing/Exporting Drawings, Stencils and Templates The Project Tab > Import And Export > Import function can be used to open Visio drawings which are not created through the Diagrams application and are therefore not represented by index elements in the database. Likewise, to export an existing drawing or to save a newly created Visio drawing to a file without creating an index element in the database, the export function can be used.
The Diagrams Import and Export functions are basically the same as the standard MS Visio Open and Save As functions, and also supports importing/exporting other formats, such as DXF etc. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for further information on how these functions operate. For Export and Save As there might for instance be some differences in what kinds of information can be exported to different formats, as well as if the function will export the whole diagram or only the current page.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:167
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
Please note that the Import Drawing function only opens a Visio drawing stored in the file system and does not import related data to the database.
4.26
Importing and Exporting Data to the DB
4.26.1
Import The Project Tab > Import And Export > Import > Excel Import Wizard provides a possibility to import data to the schematic database from .CSV and .XLS format files. Please refer to the Data Management and Data Base / Database Management Reference Manual for a description of how to use it.
4.26.2
Export The Item List includes a facility for exporting data to a spreadsheet file. By right clicking on the table and selecting Export to SpreadSheet the contents of the currently selected tab will be exported to an .XLS file. The file can be saved in a location selected by the user through a standard Project Tab > Save As dialog. For more information refer to the Design Common Functionality User Guide. Note: DB data can also be exported in the same way from the Search Result grid. When doing that, the scope of data will not be limited to the current diagram.
4.27
Undo and Redo The standard Visio Undo and Redo commands are available in Diagrams. These can be fully used for Visio functions and operations that are not affecting the database, for instance undoing the move of a shape in a drawing etc. Note: The Undo/Redo command supplied via Visio is not connected to the Undo/Redo functionality presented by the database. If any database actions have been carried out as a result of the previous Visio command, then the Undo buffer will be emptied to assure consistency between the diagrams and database. Also, pure Diagrams functions such as Refresh, Resize, Refit etc. are not possible to Undo/Redo.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:168
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
4.28
Working with Units The Diagrams application supports the usage of values with units. All relevant attribute values are displayed in accordance with the project settings for units. Independent of the current settings for units presentation the user has the possibility to set attribute values or fill in forms with values in any units. For instance if a bore diameters are set to be presented in imperial units all bore diameters will be presented in inches. However, this does not limit the usage of values in metric units, 24.5mm, to set attributes. In cases when other then the relevant units are used the application will try to interpret the value entered. To be able to properly display units in a shape annotation, a unit aware attribute must be referred to in the Text shape property. Some cases when units are used include, but are not limited to, distances, bore diameters, positions. For changing the current units settings, please refer to documentation for Administration of AVEVA Marine Environment. Examples:
Figure 4:58. Tee annotation using PPBO(1) annotation to provide units aware values
Figure 4:59. Reducer with Text value referring to ABOR, LBOR
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:169
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Working with Diagrams
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
4:170
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5
Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) The chapter covers the special functions and procedures for the Piping discipline and is of special interest to users creating Piping and Instrumentation diagrams.
5.1
Overview The Diagrams application supports the creation of piping diagrams. This includes features such as automatic management of the logical pipe model, dimensioning and automatic specification search for components. To create P&IDs, the P&ID mode should be used. This can be selected in the Project Tab.
5.2
Creating Pipelines Pipelines can be created using the Home Tab > P&ID > Pipe > Create Pipeline command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
When the Create Pipeline dialogue is opened, a number of attributes will have values preset as follows. These are just default values and can be changed by the user. •
Group will be set from the default group settings available in the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Primary System will be set from current system setting available in the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Pipe Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Insulation Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Tracing Specification will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
•
Fluid will be set from the default value of the Primary system.
The Type dropdown box will allow the user to create pipelines using derived UDET types. The pipeline name can be automatically constructed by using the Autonaming function. In order to provide feedback on the autonaming while the dialogue is open, a pipeline element is actually created as the dialogue is opened. In case the user clicks Cancel, this pipeline element will be removed again. The pipeline will be created in the selected group (SCGROU) in the main hierarchy of the schematic database.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is also possible to move pipelines between schematic groups either by changing the Group in the Pipeline Properties dialogue, or by using the Cut and Paste commands in the Schematic Explorer. Note: That it is also possible to create pipelines by dropping a Pipeline shape onto the drawing. This works more or less like a Branch shape with the difference that it also creates a new pipeline (the Create Pipeline dialogue is automatically shown when the pipeline shape is dropped onto the drawing). Pipeline shapes can be created by using the Import Shape Wizard. See chapter Getting Started for further information.
5.3
Pipeline Properties After a pipeline has been created, its properties can be viewed and changed by using the Pipeline Properties command. This command is available through the right click menu in the Explorer on pipelines and their members, as well as through the right click menu for Inline Fittings in the drawing. In case any branches have been created on diagram drawings, the dialogue will now also show an additional tab, Diagram references, which contains a list of all diagrams/pages that the pipeline is represented on.
5.4
Creating Branches Before a branch can be created, the Current Pipeline must be selected. The Current Pipeline can be viewed in the Status bar (please refer to Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams). To change the Current Pipeline, you can either select the pipeline or any item below it in the explorer, or you can select a tube, a duct or an inline fitting in the drawing which belongs to the desired pipeline. Pipeline branches are then created by dragging and dropping a branch shape onto the drawing area. The branch will be added to the Current Pipeline. In addition to the branch element, the application will also create a Segment Element and a Tube Element.
The purpose of the Segment Element is to provide a way to divide branches between several pages or drawings using Off-page Connectors (please refer to Off-page Connectors in Chapter Working with Diagrams). All in-line fittings in a branch belonging to a certain drawing page will be grouped under the same segment in the hierarchy. The tube element will be related with the tube shape in the drawing which was created when the branch shape was dropped. In case UDETs are used, there is a possibility in the Import Shape Wizard (refer to Import Shape Wizard in Chapter Getting Started) to set up which UDET type of tube should be created when the shape is dropped (Denote to). It is possible to move branches between pipelines by using the Cut and Paste commands in the Schematic Explorer. However, please note that this will not re-apply any default values, like pipe spec etc., from the receiving pipeline to the branch or its members.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In Diagrams Options > Element Options > Fitting Options > Default Options, the setting Auto create branch on connect Tee will automatically add a new branch shape when a Tee is dropped into a line. Also, in Diagrams Options > Element Options > Fitting Options > Default Options, the setting Auto create Tee on connect branch will automatically add a new Tee shape when branches are connected.
5.5
Adding Parts to a Branch
5.5.1
Overview Valves, fittings and inline instruments can be members of a branch and are all considered inline parts. These can be created by dragging and dropping shapes from the stencil onto the drawing area. Inline parts can be added to a branch in different ways.
5.5.2
Arrive and Leave Inline parts with 2 or more connections are using the Arrive and Leave attributes to relate the main flow (design) direction to the connection points on the shape. When a shape is created using MS Visio tools and subsequently added to a stencil using the Import Shape Wizard, it is important that the connection points are added in the correct sequence. The point added first will by default be related to Arrive, and the second will be related to Leave. This can be seen as the default value of Arrive is 1 (referring to the first point) and Leave is 2 (referring to the second point). Note: If the values of Arrive and Leave are changed, this will affect the application’s perception of what is the main flow, and therefore cause inconsistencies if not properly applied.
5.5.3
Dropping and Connecting When a shape is dragged and dropped onto the drawing, it will respond differently depending on where it is dropped: 1. Dropped onto an empty space in the drawing: The shape will not be defined (refer to Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) until it is subsequently connected to a member of a branch. 2. Dropped onto a tube shape: The tube will be divided into two and the dropped shape will be inserted in between and defined (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) in the database. Note: This only happens if the connections points related with Arrive and Leave (point 1 and 2 in the shape) will both be in line with the tube shape. Also, Arrive and Leave will if necessary also be automatically switched so that they will be consistent with the flow direction of the branch that the shape is dropped into. Note: If the connector has more than one angle and the connector style is set to Reroute Freely, then each time when the user is trying to drop something on that connector the line is immediately rerouted, avoiding the dropped shape. This is an MS Visio behaviour that unfortunately cannot be changed by AVEVA. To prevent connector reroute during that operation the user has to set the reroute style to Reroute on Crossover or Never Reroute using the Layout & Routing group on the Home Tab.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
3. Dropped onto a free end of a tube shape: By aligning one of the connection points of the part and a free end of a tube when the shape is dropped, they will be connected and the shape will be defined (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams) and added to the branch. When an inline component is connected to a branch, the Arrive and Leave will automatically be set to follow the flow of the branch. However, the visual appearance of the shape will not be changed. There are two ways to make sure that the shape gets the right direction in the branch: 1. Drop the shape onto an empty area of the drawing, and use the rotation handle to properly align it with the branch it should be connected to. Then connect it to the branch end or drag it over a tube to insert it. 2. Drop the shape into the branch (connect or split on drop), and if it gets the incorrect orientation, use the Reverse Direction command. When connecting a branch/tube to an item (valve, inline fitting, equipment, nozzle etc.), which is a grouped shape, the connection points must be on the group and not on the members of the group. Otherwise the connection operation will fail and the message ‘Not a valid pipe piece and/or pipe connection’ is shown. It is not possible to directly connect tube/branch shapes to each other, a Visio 2D shape is required in between. For example, to connect one branch to another, a fitting such as a Tee, Olet or Coupling must be inserted, and the branches connected to this.
5.5.4 •
Automatic Tee Insertion General Automatic Tee insertion provides the possibility to automatically insert a Tee every time two branches are connected by the user. At the branches’ connection point a predefined Tee shape is inserted. If there is any specification or dimensioning conflicts the appropriate dimensioning and size selection dialogs are presented to the user.
•
Activation and Options The Automatic Tee Insertion function can be turned on or off in the Diagrams Options dialog. All related options can be found in the Element options > Fitting options section.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:1.
Activation of Automatic Tee Insertion in Diagrams options dialog
In the options dialog it is also possible to select the shape of the Tee to be automatically inserted on connection of two branches, as well as from which stencil this shape should be taken. The option for Auto create Tee on connect branch is by default set to False. It is left to the user to make sure that the Tee's shape name and stencil exist and are valid. If a Tee with a chosen shape name is not found or a stencil with a chosen name is not found errors will be generated.
•
Using Automatic Tee Insertion The usage of the Automatic Tee Insertion function is as the title suggest automatic. Every time two branches are connected, that usually involves one branch that is dragged (either an end point of it or the branch as a whole) and one that is stationary. When the dragged branch is released the Tee shape specified in the Diagrams Options is dropped over the stationary branch with the branching connector pointing towards the dragged branch. The dropped Tee splits the stationary branch as if the Tee was dropped by the user and the branching connector of the Tee is connected to the dragged branch. Thus completing the process of connecting two branches with a Tee. If there are any specification conflicts or dimensioning variations that cannot be chosen by the system, a choose size dialog will be presented to prompt the user and resolve these variations.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Below is shown an automatically inserted tee when one branch is dragged to another one. The result is as if the tee was placed over the static branch and then the dragged branch connected to it.
Figure 5:2.
The branch is dragged to the one that is stationary
Figure 5:3.
The Tee is connected
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.5.5
Using Tube Shapes Valves, fittings and instruments are normally connected by tube elements. These can be created by dragging and dropping in a similar manner as the parts described above. Tubes are represented by Visio connector shapes, while all other inline parts are represented by Visio 2D shapes. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information about the behaviour of connector shapes and 2D shapes. The main difference between a branch shape and a tube shape is that while the branch will create branch, segment and tube elements in one go, the tube will only create the tube element and can thereby be used to extend an existing branch.
5.5.6
Connecting Fittings without a Tube in between It is also possible to connect several inline parts in a sequence without having a tube in between. This can for instance be used to attach a reducer directly to a valve, or to create a sequence of valves without intermediate tubing. To achieve this, follow these steps: 1. Drag and drop the inline part to the drawing area. 2. Select the Connection Point tool (available on the Home Tab in the Tools group). 3. Right-click on the connection point that you will be using to connect the new shape to the existing one. 4. Select Outward from the right-click menu. 5. Change back to the Pointer tool (available on the Home Tab in the Tools group or click F8). 6. Position the mouse pointer close to the connection point that was just modified. Important: If the mouse pointer is closer to another connection point or to the centre point of the shape as the shape is dragged, it will not be possible to connect. 7. Drag the shape so that the connection point aligns with the connection point of the existing shape.
5.6
Flow Direction One of the branch’s characteristics is its flow direction. In the database flow it is determined by the order of tubes and components below the segments and the sequence of the OPCO/ OPCI connections between the segments. In a correctly designed branch all its segments should be allowed to become traversed trough their OPCs. On the drawing the flow determines the layout of connectors and the logic of the connecting components (the incoming and outgoing connection should correspond with the arrive and leave connection number set in the database).
5.6.1
The Flow Direction Symbol The Flow Direction symbol can be used for a graphical indication of the flow of a branch on a drawing. When dropped on top of a tube or duct shape, the flow direction symbol automatically aligns with the current flow and it reacts on the connectors’ moving or resizing. It is also automatically adjusted on the reversing of the flow direction. The flow direction symbol can be created using Import Shape Wizard and then dropped from the stencil as any other shape. To achieve proper behaviour it is important that before the symbol is imported its orientation corresponds with default flow direction going horizontally
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
form left to right. The shape should also have one outwards connection point which will be used to attach to the connector.
Figure 5:4.
Creation of sample flow direction symbol
It is possible to define a flow direction symbol that is automatically attached to a dropped piping or HVAC connector. This can be achieved using the default settings or in the Import Shape Wizard by specifying a stencil and a name of the flow direction symbol to be automatically dropped.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:5.
5.6.2
Definition of default flow direction symbol for pipe connectors
Directional Components Inline parts can be defined as directional components. This means that the shape will always be adjusted to the flow of the branch. When such a shape is inserted into the tube, the application will check if its orientation is corresponding to the main flow and automatically reverse the direction of the component if needed. Such shapes can be used e.g. to represent non-returning valves. To create a directional component the following actions are required: •
draw the Visio shape which is going to represent the component and make sure its arrive and leave (first and second) connection points are aligned with the default flow which goes horizontally from left to right
•
import the shape as desired inline component and in Step 1 of the Import Shape Wizard tick the Directional component option.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.6.3
Reversing Flow Direction for a Whole Branch Diagrams application provides functionality to reverse flow direction of a branch. The command is accessible from main menu of from context menu for any branch components:
After the command is issued all necessary changes will be done to branch hierarchy in database and its representation on current drawing is changed to fit reversed flow. The changes done to database are following:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
Order of elements below all segments belonging to the branch is reversed.
•
All OPCO elements are changed to OPCI and the other way round. As a result of that sequence of connections between segments belonging to the branch is reversed.
•
All OPC connections referring to other branches are disconnected.
•
Arrive and Leave attributes of all components below segments (except OPC elements) are switched.
•
TREF/HREF attributes of branch and segments below it are adjusted accordingly to new flow direction.
Corresponding changes done to shapes on current drawing are: •
Start/end of tube shapes is reversed.
•
Type of OPCO shapes is changed to OPCI (and OPCI to OPCO), but the shapes are not replaced.
•
Directional components (e.g. non-return valves) are reversed and their connection points are changed to fit Arrive and Leave attributes in database. The other components are not changed.
Note: If the directional component has branching connection it may not be possible to restore the connection after reverse. In such situation the branching point will be disconnected on drawing and in database with appropriate message in message log. In case branch is located on several drawings, user is prompted to automatically update shapes on other drawings as well.
If other drawings containing parts of reversed branch are not updated (user answered “No” to above question or it was impossible to edit the drawings e.g. because they were claimed by another user) there is inconsistency between the drawings and database data. Such inconsistencies are detected and fixed on opening drawing and by Consistency Check.
5.7
Using Equipment and Subequipment Equipment items can be created by dragging and dropping equipment shapes from the stencil to the drawing area. The application includes support for Primary and Secondary equipment items (refer to Primary / Secondary Shapes in Chapter Working with Diagrams), meaning that a single equipment item in the database can be represented by two or more shapes on the same or on different drawings. For an equipment to be defined on drop, it is required that a default Group is set up in the Default Groups dialogue that can be reached from the Status Bar in Chapter Working with Diagrams. Subequipment items can also be created by dragging and dropping a subequipment shape from a stencil onto the drawing. However, for the subequipment shape to be defined in the database, it is required the equipment item to which is should belong is currently selected when the drop takes place.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to add more connection points after an equipment, or sub-equipment, item is dropped onto the drawing. To achieve this, select the Visio Connection Point tool and Ctrl+Click to add points.
Sub-equipment items are not dependent on their parent equipment item being represented on the same diagram. It is allowed to have the main equipment item on one diagram and the subequipment item on another diagram, even if they are hierarchically linked in the database. Likewise, when and if they appear on the same diagram, there are no layout restrictions in terms of them having to be connected or close to each other in any way.
5.8
Using Nozzles Nozzle shapes can be added to equipment items by dragging and dropping onto an equipment item. They can be attached to a connection point on the equipment item (‘Glue to connection point’) or just to the geometry (‘Snap to Geometry’). Nozzle items will then be created under the equipment item in the DB. In case a nozzle shape is not connected to an equipment item on drop, it can be connected later, but it will not be defined in the database until it is connected to an equipment item.
Note: When dragging a nozzle to connect to an equipment item, it is important that the mouse pointer is close to the connection point on the nozzle that you want to connect to it. Otherwise Visio will not find the correct connection. The nozzle specification can be set by right-clicking on the nozzle shape and selecting the Nozzle Specification command. This will bring up the Nozzle Specification dialogue.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In the Nozzle Specification dialogue, the Specification, Generic Type and Nominal bore can be selected, and this will result in a specification reference. When the OK button is clicked, the specification reference will be updated in the CATREF attribute of the nozzle. Branches can now be created and connected to the nozzle.
5.9
Using Pipe Destination Elements For pipes that end without any connection to an equipment item, Pipe Destination elements can be used. A Pipe Destination shape can be attached to the end of a branch, and can contain a description of the nature of the branch end. This can for instance be ‘Vent to atmosphere’, ‘Overboard discharge’ etc. Pipe Destination elements will also remove unnecessary information messages from the consistency check result, such that the end of a branch is unconnected. Pipe Destination shapes can be created using the Import Shape Wizard.
5.10
Grouped Shapes It is possible to group together several shapes into a unit that can be added to a stencil. To achieve this, start by building up the arrangement in the drawing in the normal way. Then select the shapes that should form the group, undefine them (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams), and drag them to the stencil. They will then be grouped automatically.
Figure 5:6.
Example of a group of shapes
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
This group can then be dragged and dropped onto a drawing, thereby adding an arrangement of branches and inline fittings in a single operation. In case the arrangement contains more than one branch, the user will have to select a part in each branch and issue the Define branch command (Define / Undefine in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Note: When a group of shapes is added to the drawing in the way described above, it is recommended to ungroup it (Right click > Shape > Ungroup) before proceeding to connect or modify. If this is not done, it can result in unexpected behaviour. For instance that a tube within the group will not split into two when a new fitting is dropped onto it.
5.11
Online Dimensioning and Specification Search
5.11.1
Overview The Diagrams application supports a flexible approach to the handling of dimensioning and spec search. The following levels of automation are supported: •
No dimensioning.
•
Dimensioning without catalogue or spec search.
•
Dimensioning with manual catalogue selection.
•
Dimensioning with automatic spec search.
These methods can also be combined in various ways and allows for an incremental/ iterative workflow. It is for instance possible to start a diagram using dimensioning but no catalogue or spec search. At a later time when a catalogue and specification has been established, the spec search can be enabled and the selection of components be done based on the previously entered dimensions. If the automatic spec search is enabled, the manual catalogue search can not be done for in-line parts, please refer to Manual Component Selection in Chapter Working with Diagrams for more information about the Catalogue Search window. The dimensioning is using the concepts of Fit and Size operations: •
Refit means that the current component will obtain a new size from the upstream component. When this will occur automatically, it is called Autofit.
•
Resize means that the user will manually select a new size to be applied to the component. This only applies to branching and size-changing components such as tees and reducers.
The dimensioning can work with varying degrees of propagation of dimension changes. Propagation will always occur in a downstream direction (from head to tail). There are a number of default settings in Diagrams Options under General Options > Pipe Dimensioning that control the way that the dimension and spec search is operating (please refer to Defaults in Chapter Getting Started): Default setting
Value
Description
Refit - Autofit on connect
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when connecting.
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when connecting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Refit - Autofit on delete
Refit - Propagate autofit
Refit - Propagate at segment
Refit - Propagate at branch
Resize - Propagate at segment
Resize - Propagate at branch
Spec Search - Use Specification
Spec Search - Allow out-of-spec selection
True
The component following the one that is being deleted will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component.
False
The component following the one that is being deleted will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component.
True
Autofit should be propagated to downstream components.
False
Autofit should not be propagated to downstream components.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
The specification search will be used.
False
The specification will not be used. Dimensioning will be stored locally in each inline part using the BOREARRAY attribute.
True
SPRE of tubes and inline components can be set to GPART or SCOM rather than to SPCOMPONENT.
False
SPRE attribute of tubes and inline components can be set only to SPCOMPONENT. Note: This setting has no effect when Use Specification is set to False.
Spec Search - Autoselect on define
Spec Search - Ignore defaults in specification
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
True
Specification search and component selection will be triggered when a shape is defined.
False
No spec search and automatic component selection will be done when a shape is defined.
True
No selection of the first found SELE/SPCO member when TDefault of the SELE is set to EQUA.
5:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.11.2
No Dimensioning To create a piping diagram without any dimensioning, all the settings described in the table above should be set to False.
5.11.3
Dimensioning without Catalogue or Spec Search If the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting is set to False, the specification will not be used and all dimensioning will be handled through the BOREARRAY attribute on the parts. When a new branch is created, the boresize will be picked up from the default bore size that is set up in the current pipeline. When inline parts such as valves, reducers etc. are dropped into a branch, the bore will be picked up from the upstream component. In case a size-changing or branching component will be dropped, the system will prompt the user for a ‘Leave bore?’ or ‘Branching bore?’. In all other cases the system will automatically pick up the bore size from the element it will be connected to.
Figure 5:7.
The bore-question dialogue.
The Resize and Refit operations and related propagation settings operates in the same way for dimensioning with or without spec search.
5.11.4
Dimensioning with Manual Catalogue Selection When the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting is set to False, it is possible to manually select components from the catalogue for inline parts using the Catalogue Search function (see Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
5.11.5
Dimensioning with Automatic Spec Search To use the automatic spec search, the Spec Search > Use Specification default setting must be set to True. A default pipe specification for a pipeline can be set up in the Create Pipeline dialogue when the pipeline is created.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The pipe specification works as a default value that is propagated to subordinate elements such as branches and inline parts as these are created within the pipeline. It is possible to subsequently change the specification reference for an individual fitting through the Custom Properties window or Item List. If the pipe spec is later changed in the pipeline properties dialogue, it will not affect existing inline parts within the pipeline, it will only be applied to new inline parts as they are added. When a new branch is created, the boresize will be picked up from the default bore size that is set up in the current pipeline. When inline parts such as valves, reducers etc. are dropped into a branch, the bore will be picked up from the upstream component and a specification search will be performed, provided that the Autoselect on Define default setting is set to True in Diagrams Options.
Figure 5:8.
Before valve is dropped
Figure 5:9.
After valve is dropped. The specification reference can be seen in the shape text, as this has been set up to show [SPRE.NAME].
In case a size-changing or branching component will be dropped, the system will prompt the user for a ‘Leave bore?’ or ‘Branching bore?’. In all other cases the system will automatically pick up the bore size from the element it will be connected to.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The Bore-question dialogue will present a dropdown list of valid boresizes picked up from the specification. In case a user will type in a bore size that does not match any of these, the application will round it up to the next defined bore size. The result of the specification search will be that the specification reference (SPREF) will point to the matching SPCO element. In case no matching SPCO will be found, the SPREF will not be set. The operation of the spec search is highly dependant on how the spec is organized in terms of the hierarchy of questions and answers. In case the spec search will not find the expected SPCO, please review the structure of the spec and modify if necessary.
The progress of the spec search is also presented in the Message Log window (refer to Message Log in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Successful spec search operations are logged as informational messages, while unsuccessful ones are logged as warnings.
All elements affected by an automatic spec search can also be left highlighted, depending on the value of the Keep highlight after dimensioning default setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Note: When the automatic spec search is enabled, it is not possible to manually set catalogue references for the inline parts using the Catalogue Search function (please refer to Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
5.11.6
Respec Changing the specification of existing pipework can be done by first selecting all relevant inline parts and then change the PSPEC attribute in the Shape Data window. The new spec will be applied to all the selected inline parts. After this, the spec selection process will automatically be triggered and changes to Sprefs can be followed up by viewing the Message Log. Note: In order to get a good overview of what happens during the respec operation, it is recommended to only respec a reasonable number of parts in the same operation. This makes it easier to follow up and check any changes. Note: To select, in the current drawing, all inline parts in a branch or a pipeline, it is possible to right click on the branch or pipeline in the explorer and use the Select in Drawing command. In the case where a diagram has been created without using any specification, and you subsequently want to apply a spec, the below procedure can be followed: 1. Go to the Diagrams Options dialogue and change the Use specification default setting under General options > Pipe Dimensioning > Spec search to True. 2. Also make sure that any desired propagation settings such as Refit – Propagate Autofit, Refit – Propagate at Segment and Refit – Propagate at Branch are set to True. 3. Close the Diagrams Options dialogue. 4. Click on the first tube/fitting in the branch you want to apply spec search to and select pipeline properties. 5. In the Pipeline Properties dialogue, go to the Specification tab and select a Pipe spec. 6. Click OK to close the dialogue. 7. Select the first tube or fitting in the branch, right click and choose Refit. The specification search will now be carried out and propagated according to the propagation settings.
5.11.7
Resize In case the user would like to change the leave bore or branching bore on an existing shape, the Resize command can be used. The Resize command is available on the Shape Contextual Tab as well as on the shape right-click menu. Whether the result of the Resize operation should be propagated or not is controlled by the various propagation default settings.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
In case specification search is used, the Bore size dialogue will contain a dropdown list where valid boresizes can be selected. In case the user will key in a bore size, this will automatically be rounded off to the nearest valid bore size. In case specification search is not used, the dropdown list will not contain any predefined values, and the rounding will not occur.
Note: Resize can only be done at the start of a branch, at branching components such as tees and at size-changing components such as reducers. All other components will obtain their size from upstream components in order to keep the dimensional consistency of the data model. There are cases when the resize will not provide any result from the spec search, such as when an equal Tee is resized to be un-equal. The Diagrams application then provides a fallback in form of a new spec search which will hopefully find a matching SPCO of the unequal type. In case this happens, it will be visible to the user in the way that the Bore question dialogue will appear twice.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.11.8
Refit
In case a bore size inconsistency has occurred, the Refit function can be used. This can for example happen when a reducer is inserted and the Propagate autofit setting is set to False. In the example above, the reducer has an input bore size of 100 and output of 80 while the downstream valve has a bore size of 100. Such inconsistencies can be found by using the Consistency Check function.
By using the refit function available on the shape right click menu, the specification reference for the valve will be re-selected using the upstream bore size.
After the Refit command has been performed, the valve now has a correct bore size and specification reference.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Depending on the propagation settings, the action will propagate downstream to a varying degree.
5.11.9
Specification Search on Existing Non-Specified Data There is a possibility to run Diagrams without a specification. To do that just turn off the ‘Use Specification’ setting i Diagrams Options.
The below layout is done using the ‘Use Specification’ setting set to False. This means that any dimensioning will be done using the Borearray attribute, and the PDMS specification will not be involved at this stage.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
For the above selected reducer the Borearray can be viewed in Custom Properties. To view it on the drawing select [borear] as Shape Text.
There are now two options: 1. Make no changes and let Integrator deal with 3D specifications during Build/ Compare operations. 2. Switch over to specification driven in Diagrams. To do that proceed as follows: 1. First change the ‘Use Specification’ setting in Diagrams Options to True.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
2. Next enter a Pipe specification in the Pipeline Properties dialog. This needs to be done for every SCPLIN. To do this for several lines in one go the Search Result or any other utility that allows bulking updates of database items may be used.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
To start the Specification Search, either right-click on each branch and do a Refit, as shown below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Or, go to the Shape Contextual Tab and perform a Spec Search.
The propagation settings in Diagrams Options will determine how far the specification search will continue along the piping network.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
By viewing the Message Log it is possible to follow up the changes made. Click on the message to select the corresponding item in the diagram.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
If there are any valves or fittings that cannot be found in the specification, then a warning message will be shown in the Message Log. These warning messages have to be dealt with manually.
To find any items that have not yet received a proper specification reference use the Find in Drawing toolbar and search for SPREF = “ ”. It is also recommended to do a Consistency Check to make sure it is all connected after the change from Borearray to specification driven.
5.12
Reverse Direction By using the Reverse Direction command, the direction of valves and fittings can be changed.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Before Reverse Direction is performed, Arrive is 1 and Leave is 2. The Reverse Direction command is available on the shape right-click menu.
After Reverse Direction has been performed, the symbol has been reversed and Arrive and Leave have been exchanged.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Note: Reverse Direction only works on valves and fittings, which are Visio 2D shapes. In case the user wants to reverse the direction of a tube segment, which is a Visio connector, the standard Visio Reverse Ends command can be used. This command can be found under Shape Tab > Format > Orientation. An important difference between these commands is that Reverse Ends changes the flow direction, while Reverse Direction does not.
5.13
SpecSearch By using the SpecSearch command a re-setting of SPREF of piping elements can be performed. The functionality can be used e.g. for changing the specification for a whole segment (or branch or pipeline depending on the propagation settings) as the component selection is made from scratch and any existing search results or SPREF are not considered.
5.14
Splitting Pipelines One pipeline can be split into two by using the Pipe Splitter tool. This is available in the Pipes sample stencil delivered with the system. Drag the Pipe Splitter and drop it onto the position where the pipeline should be split.
The parts following the split point will now be re-organized into a new pipeline. Note: If the Pipe Splitter will not split the line as it is being dropped, try to zoom in and make sure that the hair cross is properly aligned with the line to be split. If the Show property dialogue on split default setting is True, the application will automatically show the pipeline properties dialogue for the newly created pipeline. This will give the user the opportunity to change attributes as for instance the description of the new pipeline.
5.15
Joining Pipelines To join two pipelines, first select the last part of a branch in the target pipeline, then Ctrl+Click to also select the first part in the source pipeline. Next use the Join Pipelines command to join the two pipelines together. All branches and inline parts will now be transferred from the source pipeline to the target pipeline and the now empty source pipeline will be deleted. Note: That the Join Pipeline command requires that the branches are not connected at the join point.
5.16
Consistency Check for Pipe The Consistency Check function can be used to check the consistency of the piping arrangements (please refer to Consistency Check in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.17
Line List Configuration The Line List Configuration command is available under the menu Admin Tab > Configuration > Line List Options. It brings up the dialogue for configuring rules used to calculate pseudo attributes for generating line lists from P&ID content. The Line List Configuration command is further described in chapter Line List Configuration in the Schematic Model Manager User Guide.
5.18
Automatic Management of Logical Pipe Model As the user is working with the diagram, creating/deleting and connecting/disconnecting items, the application will attempt to keep a consistent data model. This includes the following functions: •
Automatic concatenation of branches. When the first or last element of a branch is connected to the first or last element of another branch in the same pipeline, the branches will be concatenated. This means that all inline fitting will be reorganised as members of the first branch, and the second branch will be deleted. This behaviour is controlled by the following setting; Diagrams Options > General options > System Configuration > Concatenate branches.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
5.19
When the last inline part within a segment is deleted, the segment will also be deleted. The same goes for branches. Because of this, the user will not have to consider this situation and there will never be any empty segments or branches left in the database.
Instrumentation This chapter describes instrumentation features that can be used to create control systems for piping diagrams.
5.19.1
Overview The Diagrams application allows the user to create low and high level control systems. There are a few special elements in the database that can be easily used to create a instrumentation data model. Those elements can be grouped into schematic loops and can be easily found and modified.
5.19.2 •
Elements Schematic Loop (SCLOOP) The Schematic Instrumentation LOOP is located at the same level as SCPLIN, which will be a root for a secondary hierarchy. Instruments and other piping components will have the capability to reference a SCLOOP and participate in the SCLOOP hierarchy (very similar to the SYSTEM hierarchy, but the SCLOOP will be in the schematic database).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
If a high level of detail is desired, it will be possible to model instrument lines in the same way as the main flow, using branches, tubes, valves and off-page connectors. All discrete components as well as structural elements will have the capacity to refer to a SCLOOP by SCLORE attribute, and thus, be a member in instrument loop hierarchies.
Figure 5:10. SCLOOP element in the tree explorer
All elements that are members of a schematic loop can be easily found and selected on the drawing. You can use one of the options from the context menu, Select in Drawing, Highlight or Zoom to. A typical loop is presented below:
Figure 5:11.
Typical instrument loop
The Offline instrument (CCH-0/TC) is controlling the temperature inside the reactor. If the temperature is too high/low, it gives a pneumatic signal via the tube to the actuator. The actuator is steering cooling stream via a valve. To create a new schematic loop the following dialogue is to be used:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:12. Instrument Loop (SCLOOP)
An existing Instrument Loop can be modified by the Instrument Loop Properties dialog. It is available in the context menu after right-clicking the Instrument Loop element in the Schematic Explorer.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:13. Instrument Loop Properties
SCILIN represents a Schematic Instrument Line in the data model. It is very similar to SCPLIN and should be used by those who prefer to have a high level of detail in their instrumentation model. SCILIN is able to refer to SCLOOP via the SCLORE attribute, similar to other instrumentation elements. SCILIN has the same member hierarchy as SCPLIN (SCBRAN, SCSEG etc.) and its primary hierarchy structure is the same as for SCPLIN.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
From the Home Tab > P&ID > Instrument menu an Instrument Line can be created as shown below:
The options here are the same as for pipeline. There is one additional option that allows to set schematic loop references for Instrument Lines.
•
Offline Instruments (SCOINS) SCOINS represents the Schematic Offline Instrument An Offline Instrument can be connected to: •
equipments
•
sub-equipments
•
other offline instruments
•
actuators
•
valves
•
fittings
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:37
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
tubes
•
ducts
•
HVAC fittings
•
nozzles
Note: Connection of offline instrument to nozzle is not supported by Schematic 3D Integrator and therefore will not be properly modelled in 3D. For that reason it is recommended to use inline instruments connecting to nozzles instead. To create an offline instrument: 1. First, drag an offline instrument shape from the stencil onto the drawing.
2. Second, drag the control handle and connect it to an inline fitting.
3. The instrument is now connected to the fitting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:38
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is also possible to have connection points on the off-line instrument, allowing control lines to be attached to it as can be seen in the example below:
It is also possible to connect two offline instruments directly, i.e. connect some alarms. To achieve this the connection points have to be added as shown below:
The offline instrument has to be dragged with the outward connection point to offline instrument with the inward connection point.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:39
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
•
Actuator Element (SCACTU)
SCACTU is representing a Schematic Actuator in the schematic database. Its attribute set and behaviour is very much like SCOINS and its primary owner is the same as for the SCOINS element. The differences between SCACTU and SCOINS are in: •
the item they represent
•
the element they can refer to
•
the way the user can manipulate them in the AVEVA Diagrams application.
SCACTU is able to refer (attach) to another inline component, such as SCVALV, SCFITT and SCINST. The SCOINS shape accomplishes this by using the Control Handle. On the contrary, the SCACTU has a an outwards connection point used to build up the reference in the diagram (SCNOZZ works similarly). Actuators can be connected to: •
equipments
•
sub-equipments
•
offline instruments
•
other actuators
•
valves
•
fittings
•
inline instruments
•
HVAC fittings
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:40
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to connect control lines for actuator behaviour managing.
5.19.3 •
Connection in Database Schematic Instrument Reference (SCIREF) Offline instruments and actuators can refer to other offline instruments, as well as equipments, actuators and other pipe components. This reference is called schematic instrument reference (SCIREF). There are pseudo attributes used for querying SCIREF as described below.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:41
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Example:
SCIREF
Attribute executed on SCOINS, points to SCVALVE (returns all items that are connected via SCIREF).
SCIREL
Pseudo attribute executed on SCVALVE, points to SCOINS (returns all items where SCIREF points to this SCVALVE).
Note: There is one more pseudo attribute called SCEIRE that returns the sum of SCIREF and SCIREL. For Actuators and Offline Instruments there is a possibility to query on only references to elements of a particular type (process or instrumentation). To get such information the following pseudo attributes should be used: SCIPRE
Returns a list of all process elements (equipments, sub-equipments, nozzles and elements placed below SCPLIN) referenced by Actuator or Offline Instrument via SCIREF.
SCIIRE
Returns a list of all instrumentation elements (Actuators, Offline Instruments and elements placed below SCILIN) referenced by Actuator or Offline Instrument via SCIREF.
A list of corresponding connection types is returned by SCIPRT, for process connections, and SCIIRT, for instrumentation connections, pseudo attributes described in the next chapter.
•
Schematic Instrument Reference Type (SCIRTY) The type of SCIRTY connection (i.e. electrical, infrared, Bluetooth, ZigBee, hydraulic etc.) can be determined by using the SCIRTY attribute. This attribute is an array and has the same size as SCIREF. The available pseudo attributes for querying SCIRTY are described below: SCIRLT
Pseudo attribute returning all connection types that are linked with SCIREL.
SCIERT
Pseudo attribute returning all connection types that are linked with SCEIRE.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:42
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
SCIPRT
Returns a list of connection types for process connections of Actuator or Offline Instrument (connection types from SCIRTY which are corresponding with elements returned by SCIPRE).
SCIIRT
Returns a list of connection types for instrumentation connections of Actuator or Offline Instrument (connection types from SCIRTY which are corresponding with elements returned by SCIIRE).
The table in the following example illustrates possible data extracted by SCIREF and SCIRTY.
SCIREF of CCH-1 [DBREF]
SCIRTY of CCH-1 [WORD]
1
CCH-2
ELEC
2
CCH-11
ZIGB
... 10 Schematic instrument reference type is corresponding to schematic instrument reference where the same index. CCH-1 has two SCIREF connections. It is connected with offline instrument (CCH-2) via electrical interface and it is connected with actuator via the ZigBee interface.
5.19.4
Instrument Relationship Shape
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:43
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Instrument Relationship Shape does not represent a database element, but do represent a SCIREF between SCOINS and SCACTU. In the figure below, the dashed line represents a SCIREF from the SCOINS element at CCH-0 to the SCACTU representing the actuator at AT-12. The actuator has a SCIREF set to A150/Vv-002.
When Instrument Relationship Shape connects two valid items, it changes colour to ‘defined’. The colour can be determined in Diagrams Options:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:44
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
As mentioned earlier, Instrument Relationship Shape does not represent any database element but it can display information from a database element that is associated with its start. It has a little support for SCIRTY because it is representing a connection. This connection type can be set using the Custom Properties / Shape Data window. If the Text property is filled in, the Instrument Relationship Shape displays connection type value on drawing using SCIRTY attribute without index. The system will automatically find the correct one. In the figure below the offline instrument has SCIREF set to equipment and actuator. A connection between the equipment and offline instrument is achieved by the control handle which is using an infra red interface. A connection between the offline instrument and actuator is achieved by instrument relationship line which is using an electrical interface.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:45
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
Figure 5:14. Offline instrument is controlling a valve via actuator
It is possible to use a relationship shape to connect an Offline instrument or Actuator to any valid item. The connection point will be created automatically on the shape if connection is at all possible, therefore it is not necessary to create any additional points on a shape that should be connected, before using the shape. Note: Note that connection points that are designed for process lines cannot be used to connect to a relationship shape. For example, a two way valve has two connection points that should be connected to a process line. If a relationship shape is connected to one of them, Diagrams will automatically disconnect it and present a message in the message log.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:46
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
The direction of the relationship shape is not important. You can connect an Offline Instrument to a Valve or a Valve to an Offline Instrument:
The result in the Database will be the same. The only one exception is connections between Offline instruments and Actuators. Because both elements have SCIREF attributes, the system will set SCIREF on the element that has the connected relationship shape starting part. In the below example Offline instrument A will point to Offline instrument B. (SCIREF of Offline instrument will refer to Offline instrument B)
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:47
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.19.5
High Level Detail The Instrument Relationship Shape can be replaced by more advanced structures. The scenario presented in figure Figure 5:14.: Offline instrument is controlling a valve via actuator can be realized using the SCILIN, if a higher level of detailing is desired. In that case, the instrument line is a full featured line consisting of branches and segments, similar to the main flow lines. This will also cater for using any inline style valves and/or fittings within the instrument line if needed. Since SCILIN has a SCLORE pointing to a loop, any member of the SCILIN inherits the loop membership.
If desired, individual fittings can have a direct SCLORE making them direct members of another loop. This may be the case when bridging between different systems and/or signal styles.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:48
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
It is possible to create control lines from tubes, valves etc. Those elements are the same elements that are created under pipe lines. To distinguish between those two line types in the Diagrams application when importing shape, AVEVA Diagrams gives the user new types to select: 1. Instrument line - works similar to Pipeline, creates SCILINE element in database after drop. 2. Instrumentation branch - works similar to Branch, creates branch, segment and tube under SCILIN after drop. 3. Instrumentation tube - works similar to Tube, creates tube under segment.
All inline components (valves and fittings) have the same Visio shapes for two types of lines: pipelines and instrument lines. To distinguish them in the drawing it is possible to determine different colours for items defined under SCPLIN and items defined under SCILIN lines.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:49
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
5.19.6
Instrumentation Loop Options Items like actuators, offline instruments, inline components and tubes have an attribute called Schematic Loop Reference (SCLORE). Elements with this attribute can be assigned to any SCLOOP element. This is done by changing the value in the Custom Properties / Shape Data window, item list or by using the dialogue available from the Home Tab > P&ID > Instrument menu and context menu.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:50
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
There is an intelligent mechanism helping to keep connected elements in the same SCLOOP. When something is connected to an item that is a part of a control system and it has SCLOOP set already, the propagation mechanism will automatically set the SCLORE attribute to newly connected items. Moreover, if the SCLORE attribute is changed, the new value will be propagated to all connected items that have SCLORE unset or have previous SCLORE value set. Note: The Propagation mechanism does not support multiple SCLOOPs. If the previous value was multiple SCLOOP the propagation will not continue after the change. Additionally, propagation will stop on elements when: •
The item has SCLORE already set.
•
The item is not an instrument/process line member or equipment or sub-equipment.
•
The item has multiple SCLORE set.
All items propagated will be displayed in the System Message Log. Propagation behaviour can be defined via Diagrams Options.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:51
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)
There is an option called ‘Ask user for loop reference when connecting instrument loop’. When the instrument item is connected to another item that does not have SCLORE set, the system will automatically ask for SCLOOP.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
5:52
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
6
HVAC Diagrams In this chapter the special functions and procedures for the HVAC discipline are covered and it is of special interest to users creating HVAC diagrams.
6.1
Overview The application supports the creation of HVAC diagrams. This has a lot in common with the creation of piping diagrams, but with the following major differences: •
The dimensioning considers the shape factor (Rectangular, Round, Oval).
•
There is no automatic spec search.
To create HVAC diagrams, the HVAC mode should be used. This can be selected in the Project Tab menu. Before reading the HVAC diagrams documentation, it is recommended that you read the Pipe diagrams section. The documentation for HVAC diagrams primarily covers the differences compared to the piping diagrams functionality.
6.2
Creating HVAC Lines HVAC lines can be created by using the Home Tab > HVAC > Create HVAC Line command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
This dialogue is similar to the Create Pipeline dialogue, the most significant difference is in the Default Dimension tab. In this tab the Shape setting is available as well as Width and Height for using with the rectangular and oval shapes. For the circular shape, only the Width is available, which then represents the diameter.
6.3
HVAC Line Properties After a HVACline has been created, its properties can be viewed and changed by using the HVACline Properties command. This command is available through the right click menu in the explorer on HVAClines and their members, as well as through the right click menu for inline fittings in the drawing.
6.4
Creating Branches and Adding Parts Before a branch can be created, the Current HVACline must be selected. The Current HVACline can be seen in the Status Bar. To change the current HVACline, you can either select the HVACline or any item below it in the explorer, or you can select a duct or an inline fitting in the drawing which belongs to the desired HVACline. Parts are added in the same way as for piping, by dragging and dropping ducts and fittings to the drawing and connecting it together.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
6.5
Dimensioning The HVAC dimensioning considers the shape factor as well as the dimension. The shape factor is stored in the Conarray attribute, and the dimension in Heightarray and Widtharray. In case a circular shape is used, the diameter is stored in the Heightarray. When a branch shape is dropped on a drawing, the dimension will be picked up from the default dimensioning settings for the HVACline.
As HVAC fittings are added, they will pick up the dimension from the upstream component, provided that the Autoselect on Define default setting is True.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
As can be seen in the picture above, the fittings will by default get the same dimension for arrive and leave. Please note that the CON1 & CON2 annotations do not reflect arrive and leave, but rather connection1 and connection2. The behaviour of the dimensioning during the creation of HVAC diagrams can be controlled through a number of default settings that can be found under General options > HVAC Dimensioning: Default setting
Value
Description
Miscellaneous Autoselect on define
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when defined (dropped onto a free connection).
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when defining.
True
The component will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component when being connected.
False
The component will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component when being connected.
True
The component following the one that is being deleted will automatically obtain the dimension from the upstream component.
False
The component following the one that is being deleted will not obtain any dimension from the upstream component.
True
Autofit should be propagated to downstream components.
False
Autofit should not be propagated to downstream components.
Refit - Autofit on connect
Refit - Autofit on delete
Refit - Propagate autofit
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
Refit - Propagate at segment
Refit - Propagate at branch
Resize - Propagate at segment
Resize - Propagate at branch
6.6
True
Autofit propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Autofit propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Autofit propagation will not continue over branch limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over segment limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over segment limits.
True
Resize propagation will continue over branch limits.
False
Resize propagation will not continue over branch limits.
Resize The Resize command is available on the right click menu of the shape. It will bring up a dialogue where the leave size, and if applicable also the branching size can be set. Whether the result of the Resize operation should be propagated or not is controlled by the various propagation default settings.
Figure 6:1.
Resize dialogue
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide HVAC Diagrams
Figure 6:2.
6.7
After resizing
Refit In case a size inconsistency has occurred, the Refit function can be used. This can for instance happen when a dimension is changed and refit propagation is disabled (HVAC Dimensioning > Refit options set to False). Such inconsistencies can be found by using the Consistency Check function. The Refit function is available on the shape right click menu and will apply the upstream size to the current part.
6.8
Splitting and Joining HVAC Lines HVAC lines can be split and joined in the same way as pipelines.
6.9
Consistency Check for HVAC The Consistency Check function (please refer to Consistency Check in Chapter Working with Diagrams) can be used to check the consistency of a HVAC diagram and will provide messages for mismatches between diagrams against the database, dimensional mismatches and unconnected ends etc.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
6:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7
Cable Diagrams This chapter covers the special functions and procedures for the Cable discipline and is of special interest for users creating single line and core connections diagrams.
7.1
Overview The application supports the creation of single line cabling diagrams as well as core connection diagrams.
7.2
Single Line Cabling Diagrams There are two types of cable elements: •
Cables - connector shapes representing a single cable line.
•
Multi-cables - connector shapes representing a set of cables (refer to Working with Multi-cables for further information).
Both types listed above are created by dragging and dropping corresponding shapes from the stencil. Cables and Multi-cables can be connected to equipment items in four different ways: •
Connected to the centre point of the equipment item. This means that the shape representing the equipment item does not have to have any connection points defined.
•
Connected to a predefined connection point on the equipment item.
•
Connected to an electrical connection element on the equipment item.
•
By applying the Connection to Nested Symbol method (refer to Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol for further information.
For renaming cables there is a special Rename Chain function in the Tools Tab > Naming > Auto Naming > Rename Elements function (refer to Rename Elements in Chapter Working with Diagrams). Note: That you might have to refresh the shapes to update annotation etc. on the drawing, after the Rename operation is complete. Electrical equipment items can be created in the same way as other equipment items. See the Using Equipment and Subequipment in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs). For cabling diagrams, electrical connection elements can be used. These behave very much like piping nozzles, see Using Nozzles in Chapter Piping & Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.3
Working with Multi-cables Multi-cable elements represent several cables with the same specification and are also connected to/from the same database item. In database, cables represented by a multicable shape, are placed below the corresponding Multi-cable db element. On the drawing, multi-cables are represented by single connector lines and can be created by dragging and dropping Multi-cable shapes from a stencil. Dropping Multi-cable on a page will result in creation of a new Multi-cable db element with a configurable number of db cables placed below it. The number of cables represented by Multi-cable is controlled via its SCQUAN attribute. It can be set in the Custom Properties / Shape Data window or directly on the command line. Connecting/disconnecting Multi-cable shapes to/from different db elements (equipments, sub-equipments, electrical connections) will cause changing STAREF/ ENDREF of Multi-cable and all cables below it. Changes to Multi-cable attributes, except NAME, will override changes to Cable attributes. Changes made in Multi-cable are propagated to its cable members. It is possible to set values of attributes of a particular cable by using the command line (except STAREF, ENDREF, CATREF), but the values will be overridden each time the same attribute will change on Multi-cable level.
Figure 7:1.
7.3.1
Example of using Multi-cable element
Naming Cables Owned by Multi-cable Cables owned by Multi-cable are named automatically and the names can not be edited directly. The names are consisting of three parts:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
•
Name of owning Multi-cable
•
Delimiter - configurable by SCDELIM attribute of Multi-cable
•
Ordinal character (numeric or alpha)
Ordinal character is controlled by SCALPHA and SCDIGITS attributes in the following way: SCALPHA determines whether ordinal character should be numeric (SCAPHA=false) of alphabetic (SCALPHA=true). Example 1: Attribute
Value
SCMCAB NAME
/XYZ
SCDELIM
'-'
SCALPHA
false
SCDIGITS
2
Result Cable names: Element
Name
SCCAB1
/XYZ-01
SCCAB2
/XYZ-02
Example 2: Attribute
Value
SCMCAB NAME
/XYZ_1
SCDELIM
Unset
SCALPHA
true
SCDIGITS
2 (ignored when SCALPHA=true)
Result Cable names: Element
Name
SCCAB1
/XYZ_1A
SCCAB2
/XYZ_1B
Note: The names of cables owned by Multi-cable will be generated automatically only when the name of the Multi-cable itself is set. Note: Each time SCDELIM, SCALPHA or SCDIGITS (when SCAPHA=false) is changed, the names of cables will be redefined.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.3.2
Presenting Multi-cables in Item List As any schematic elements present on a drawing, the Multi-cables are shown in the Item List. They are listed on a separate Multi-cables tab. Cable members can be shown on the Cables tab depending on the Show Multi-cable Members setting, which can be defined in the Diagrams Options window.
7.4
Connecting Cable Elements to Nested Symbol One of the methods of connecting Cable or Multi-cable to equipment is connection using a nested symbol. It can be established as follows: •
By connecting the Cable element to a connection point on a symbol being part of Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical Connection group.
•
By dragging a symbol that is already connected to a Cable element into Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical connection group. To be able to use this option, the behaviour of the Containing Group should be set to Accept dropped shapes and nested symbol should be set to Add shape to group option.
Disconnecting a cable element from a symbol belonging to an equipment group, or dragging a symbol connected to a cable element out of an equipment group, will result in disconnection in db. To achieve this functionality the Equipment, Sub-equipment or Electrical connection should be converted to a group before importing a shape to the stencil.
7.5
Core Connections Definition Dialogue By first selecting one or more cables, and then issuing the Home Tab > Cable Cores > Define command, the core connections can be defined. In case other items than cables have been selected, these will be ignored.
Note: To select all cables in a drawing or cables according to a certain criteria, the Selection Toolbar can be used (refer to Find in Drawing Toolbar in Chapter Working with Diagrams. The Define Core Connections dialogue will contain one section for each cable. In the middle is the cable with its cores and to the left and right are the connected equipment items.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
7.5.1
Defining the Number of Cores The number of cores for a cable is fetched from the catalogue. If the Spref is already set, the correct number of rows will be shown for each cable, one for each core. In case the cable does not have any Spref, the application will not know how many cores the cable has and will therefore show a question mark in the Core column. It is possible to assign a Spref to a cable in the core connections dialogue by right-clicking on the cable name and selecting Set Catalogue Reference.
This will bring up a Catalogue Search dialogue, which works in the same way as the general Catalogue Search function (Catalogue Search in Chapter Working with Diagrams).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
When a cable catalogue item has been selected, the Cable Core Connection Definition dialogue will know how many cores the cable has got and will then show the corresponding number of rows.
7.5.2
Selecting Equipment In case the cable has already been connected to equipment items in the diagram, these equipment items will be shown in the Equipment columns to the left and to the right in the dialogue. If it has not been connected, it is possible to select an equipment item in the core connections dialogue by clicking on the text box and using the
button.
This will bring up the standard Browse/Search dialogue (Standard DB Browse Dialogue in Chapter Working with Diagrams) where an equipment item can be found and selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
The text box in the Equipment column also features a fill handle. By clicking and dragging on the grey box in the lower right corner, the selected equipment can be applied to other rows in the same way that the fill handle works in applications like MS Excel.
It is also possible to change the connected equipment item for a cable that has been connected to an equipment shape in the diagram. Changing the equipment item in this dialogue will only affect the core connections. The cable as such will still retain its connection to the equipment item, as defined in the diagram, and will not be affected. Theoretically it is possible to define all cores being connected to a different equipment item than the one that the cable is connected to, in the single line diagram.
7.5.3
Selecting Electrical Connection By clicking at the Text box in the Electrical connection column, an electrical connection (elconn) can be selected. The dropdown list will show all existing elconn elements for the selected equipment item. In case the equipment item does not have any or too few elconns, it is possible to add new ones by selecting the Add… command.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
This will bring up the Create electrical connection dialogue, where the new electrical connection can be created and its attributes set. The Catalogue reference is of special importance as it will be used to determine how many terminals the elconn has.
The Electrical connection column also features a fill handle like the one described above for the Equipment column.
7.5.4
Selecting the Terminal for Each Core By clicking on the dropdown and using the fill handle in the terminal column, the actual core connection can be defined.
7.5.5
Configuring the Dialogue In the Diagrams Options, under the General Options > Dialogues, there are a number of values that can be set up to control the initial layout of the dialogue columns. The numbers are given as a percentage of the total dialogue width. By entering -1 as column width, the column will automatically adjust to the free width.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
Here it is also possible to configure tooltips to be shown in the dialogue. This can for instance be used to show the description of an equipment item when the mouse hovers over the equipment name. The format of the tooltip definition follows the Attribute Presentation Notation format, please refer to Attribute Presentation Notation in Chapter Appendices for further information.
7.6
Generating Core Connection Diagrams After the core connections have been established using the Cable Core Connection Definition dialogue, the Generate Core Connections Diagram command can be used to create the connection diagram layout. This will be created as a new diagram that can be manually annotated, saved, printed etc.
The Diagrams application is delivered with a standard core connections diagram layout which can be considered a sample. As there is a wide variety of preferred layouts and many
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Cable Diagrams
companies have their own layout standards, the program source code for the Core Connections diagram generation is provided on the support site (www.aveva.com/support). It is therefore possible for customers to modify the layout by modifying the program code, or to create totally different layouts by creating new code, perhaps with some inspiration from the standard sample. The program code is contained within the following c# source files: • CableInfo.cs • CoreInfo.cs • Commands.cs • CoreConnectionsDiagram.cs • CoreConnectionsDiagramAddin.cs These can be found in the installation in folder
C:\AVEVA\Marine\OH12.1.SP4\Samples\Samples.zip. Microsoft Visual Studio is required to modify and rebuild the Add-in.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
7:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Reporting
8
Reporting The Diagrams application offers different types of reports of schematic data for various purposes. These are as follows: •
Visio reports: This is the standard MS Visio report function and can be used to create reports based on diagram document data. Please refer to the MS Visio documentation for more information. This command is available in the Tools Tab > Reporting > Visio Reports menu.
•
Reports: This is the standard AVEVA reporting tool which can create reports from database data and is also available in the other PDMS applications. In the Tools Tab > Reporting > Reports > Reports sub-menu there are commands for running, creating, modifying and deleting reports. Please refer to the General / Reporting Reference Manual for more information on this reporting tool.
•
Quick Reports: This is the standard AVEVA quick reporting tool and is available in the Tools Tab > Reporting > Reports > Quick Reports menu. Please refer to the Catalogues and Specifications User Guide / Quick Reports Form for more information.
•
Spreadsheet export: This is available on the right click menu in the Item List (please refer to Item List in Chapter Working with Diagrams) and can be used to create equipment lists, fitting lists, cable lists etc. from the current drawing. This is further described in Export in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
Figure 8:1.
The reports menu
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
8:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Reporting
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
8:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9
Releasing Information for 3D This chapter includes information about managing the relation with 3D data and is of interest to most users when the link to 3D through the Schematic 3D Integrator is used.
9.1
Overview To support the workflow between diagram designers and 3D model designers, Diagrams includes some functions to manage the release of information to 3D. These are as follows: •
Setting the Release Status.
•
Highlighting and Visualizing Release and Linked-to-3D status.
•
Warnings and Restrictions for Released and Linked-to-3D items.
Diagrams supports a Release status that can be set or re-set through the application and serves as a flag to the 3D designers that the diagram data is now complete and approved and can be used as a base for 3D modelling. When related 3D data is created through the Schematic 3D Integrator, a link between 2D schematic items and corresponding 3D items will be established in the database. These items are then considered to be linked, and this is represented by a linked-to-3D status attribute. If items have been linked they can be considered as being picked up and re-used by the 3D designers. The release status can be set on database items in a flexible way, among these is to set the release status for all items in a diagram. However, the diagram document as such does not have a release status and will not be managed in this way. The release status is represented by the RESTAT attribute in the database. A value of 1 means that the item is released, and a value of 0 means that it is not released. The diagram documents are made available to 3D design users as SVG files, created for each foreground page on the drawing. This can then be used for viewing the diagram without the need for having MS Visio installed. The SVG file name for a particular page can be found by querying the NVIEWF(N) pseudo attribute on the SCDIAG element, where N is a number of a page. Depending on the ‘Create SVG on Save Work’ setting available in Diagrams Options>General Options>System configuration>SVG, the files can be created automatically on Save Work for every drawing, for pages containing data released to 3D only or if the setting is set to ‘Never’ the SVGs will have to be created manually using the Release Diagram to 3D function. If this function is used, then all items on pages the SVGs are created for are released to 3D. For more information please see Save Work and SVG Creation in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9.2
Setting the Release Status Setting the release status can be done in two ways, using the Set Release Status dialogue or Release Diagram to 3D. The Release Diagram to 3D dialogue provides functionality to release all items on selected pages and to create SVG files for the pages to make them available for Design. For more information please see Save Work and Save As in Chapter Working with Diagrams.The Set Release Status dialogue provides the possibility to release individually selected items as well as whole drawings. It can be opened in different contexts and parts of the user interface providing a flexible way of selecting the items to be released. The dialogue is available: •
By right-clicking on items in the Schematic Explorer.
•
By right-clicking on items in the System Explorer.
•
By selecting one or more objects in the drawing and using the Home Tab > Object > Release command or using the shape right click menu.
•
By right clicking on the drawing background (this will release all items on all pages in the current drawing).
The release status can be set individually for: •
Equipment
•
Sub-equipment
•
Cables
•
Multi-cables
•
Offline instruments
•
Actuators
•
Segments
For piping and HVAC, the lowest level that can be released is a segment. Nozzles and Elconns will be released together with their parent equipment/subequipment item. When the Set Release Status command is issued, a dialogue will be shown to the user. In this dialogue it is possible to see the current release status of the selected items as well as set or reset the status of the selection or individual items.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
When the dialogue is opened, the current release status is shown. If the item is already released, you will see a green checkmark in the box in front of the item. For hierarchically superior items, there is also a green checkmark if all subordinate items are released. If only some of the subordinate items are released, there will instead be a green box shown. After the type, name and description of the item, the date and user that released it is also listed. To set the release status, click the boxes. If a box on a high level is checked, all subordinate items will also be checked, the same applies if you uncheck a box. As well as setting the release status, it is also possible to reset it here, simply by unchecking the boxes. This means that items that were earlier released now no longer are released. This enables the user to make changes to already released items and these changes can be detected by the Schematic 3D integrator application. Once the changes are complete, the release status can be set once again. The dialogue also includes a Comment field which can be used to enter a release comment to be applied to the items. Depending on how the Set Release Status command was activated, the dialogue will show a different hierarchy:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Group Context window which will be displayed when a schematic group has been selected in the explorer. The dialogue now shows the complete hierarchy below the group node.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Objects Context window which will be displayed when one or more objects have been selected in the explorer or in the drawing. The dialogue now only shows parts of the hierarchy covering the selected items. If for instance a piping or HVAC branch has been selected, the explorer only shows that branch, even if the pipeline might have other branches.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
The picture above shows the Diagram Context window which will be displayed when the user has right clicked an SCDIAG element in the explorer or on the drawing background. The dialogue now shows all items in the current drawing. In case the drawing contains parts of a pipeline (branches or segments) while other parts of the pipeline are represented in other drawings, the explorer only shows the parts of the pipeline that are on the current drawing.
9.3
Visualizing Release and Link to 3D Status By using the Home Tab > Object > Release drop down > Visualize Release and Link to 3D Status command, the items in the current drawing page can be highlighted or selected.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
9.4
Warnings and Restrictions In case the user will try to modify or delete an item that has been released or associated, messages will be shown and restrictions can apply.
9.4.1
Released but not Linked Items
The dialog above will be shown when an item which is released but not linked is modified. If the user clicks OK, the modification will be applied to the item and the release status will be reset. If the user wants to release the item to 3D again, he/she will have to use the Set Release Status function again. If the Cancel button is clicked, any changes will be undone.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Releasing Information for 3D
If the user tries to delete one or more items that are released but not linked, the dialogue above will be shown. If the user clicks OK, the item(s) will be deleted, otherwise the user should click Cancel.
Also if the user opens the Pipeline Properties / HVACline Properties dialogues, a warning will be issued.
9.4.2
Released and Linked Items For items that are released AND linked, similar dialogues as above will be shown. However, depending on the value of the Allow changes to linked with 3D default setting, changes and deletions will be either allowed or not.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
9:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10
Utilities This chapter describes miscellaneous utilities that can be useful to most users.
10.1
Batch Job By using the Batch Job function, a selection of diagrams can be checked and printed in one operation.
To the left, the contents of the database can be navigated using the Database Tree tab and searched using the Search tab. This part of the dialogue behaves more or less like the general Browse Dialogue (please refer to the Standard DB Browse Dialogue in Chapter Working with Diagrams), with the difference that it contains checkboxes for multiple selection in the tree view. In the search view, multiple diagrams can be selected by using normal Shift+Click and Ctrl+Click.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Items can be added to the selection in the right side of the dialogue by using the Add button and removed using the Remove button. The selected diagrams can then be consistency checked and printed by using the buttons at the bottom of the dialogue.
10.1.1 •
Batch Update Overview The Batch update function is used to update many drawings in one go without opening them separately. The option is available in the Batch Job dialogue below.
Figure 10:1. Batch job form
Before proceeding, select the diagrams that are to be updated. After selecting the diagrams click the Update Diagrams button.
•
Batch Update Options The Batch update function also makes it possible to choose options that will be updated on selected diagrams. Available options are presented in Figure 10:2.: Update Diagrams Options Form below. The options will be described further later on in this chapter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:2. Update Diagrams Options Form
•
Select Updated Masters A new shape is created each time you drag and drop a new symbol from an external stencil (e.g. ‘Sample_Fitting_Symbols.vss’) into the drawing. In addition it creates a new master on the Document stencil (Figure 10:3.: Document Stencil). After dropping the symbol the direct link between the Shape and its original master located on the external stencil is broken. However, each master has a BaseID and a UniqueID.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:3. Document Stencil
The following example will explain the difference between a BaseID and a UniqueID: A BaseID is assigned to a master when it is created. The valve has been dropped on to the page from the ‘Sample_Valve_Symbols’ stencil. As a result of this operation the new master will be created in the Document Stencil. Both masters (on the document and Sample_Valve_Symbols stencils) will have the same BaseID and UniqueID. If one of the masters is changed the UniqueID will also change but the BaseID will remain the same. For more information refer to the Microsoft Visio documentation. If modifying masters items on external stencils and applying changes to shapes, which were created by dropping these masters, those masters need to be selected. To do that click the Select master shapes to use for update button in Figure 10:2.: Update Diagrams Options Form. The following dialog will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:4. Select Masters to Update
The dialogue above contains three windows: Stencils, Masters and Masters to update. These windows will be empty at start up. Click the Add Stencil button to add a stencil that contains modified masters. These added stencils will be shown in the Stencils window. In the Masters window the masters that belong to a selected stencil are displayed. Only the masters in the Masters to update window will be used during the update operations. To add masters to the Master to update window, use drag and drop or the right-click context menu. If the Add all check box is checked all masters from all stencils will be added. To remove masters from the Master to update window select right-click on a master or use the Delete key on the keyboard.
Figure 10:5. Deleting Masters to update
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The number of selected masters will be visible in brackets in the Update Diagrams Option dialogue as shown below.
Figure 10:6. Number of selected masters
•
Update Symbols According to Master Shapes This option replaces the shape symbols if the shape master, that is located in the document master, has a different UniqueID than the master with the same BaseID that was selected. Note that all cells from the shape data section with a value set in the new master will be copied to the shape in the drawing. This might trigger an attribute change. For more details please read Changing Symbols for Existing Items in Chapter Working with Diagrams.
•
Update Symbols According to Catalogue Information This option replaces symbol shape according to data in the specification. Symbol from SPREF will replace the existing one when:
•
•
the SPREF attribute points to an element that have SYMGROU and SYMNAME attributes
•
SYMGROU points to a valid stencil and SYMNAME points to a valid master.
Update Annotation Formats When this option is checked it is possible to update auto labels and presentation text according to the diagrams settings or master settings. There are four different scenarios: 1. If a master was selected then labels and text rule is taken from the master instance. 2. When the master is not selected then the system will check if the shape that should be updated inherited its setting from the master or the default. 3. If settings were derived from the master and this master is not selected then some shape settings will not be updated. 4. If settings were derived from the diagram’s default settings then the system will update them. Note: Title blocks and multi-labels require the master to be selected because there is no setting for this in Diagrams Options. Note: If an auto-label is deleted from a shape after the update the label might not be added. The reason for this is that the system remembers that this label was previously deleted. To add an auto-label use the option Ignore stencil settings or select the correct master. Note: It is possible to preserve the position of a particular auto-label shape during the update. The position will not be modified if the Keep Position function in the RightClick contextual menu of this auto-label shape is checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
Update Attribute Presentation Settings This option is for updating the Shape Data (Custom Properties) order, presentation texts, visibility etc. according to Diagrams default options or master setting. This option can be controlled globally for each type separately by checking ‘Allow individual shape to override default settings’.
Figure 10:7. Allow individual shape settings to override default settings
When this option is unchecked the shapes will be updated according to the diagrams default settings. Otherwise data from the selected master will be used. If the master was not selected, the system checks if a shape that should be updated retrieved its settings from the master or the default. If the settings were taken from the master and the master was not selected then the shape will not be updated. If the settings were taken from the diagrams default settings then the system will update the shape. During update all Shape Data (Custom Properties) that exist in the shape instance but does not exist in the current settings will be removed. The only exception from this rule is a situation where other cells depends on it. When this is the case, the system will not delete it but will display a warning that other cells are using this data. See the following example: A shape has two shape data before update: •
Text
•
Instrument Type
This will be displayed as in the following figure.
Figure 10:8. Shape data before update
The next step is to modify the settings to hold only one set of shape data: •
Text
Click Update. This can result in two scenarios: 1. The Instrument type was removed according to the current setting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:9. After update unnecessary shape data were removed
2. The instrument type remains. This is because other cells are using its value. In this case there will be a warning issued in the report.
Figure 10:10. After update the Instrument type remains
Warning message: ‘This update will not set any default values to new shape data.
•
Refresh Shapes If this option is checked it will make a call to refresh each shape.
•
Ignore Stencil Settings Some options require the selection of masters to execute the updates properly. This is because the data was retrieved from them. However, there might be situations where this will not be possible or instead the diagrams settings should be used. In these cases this option should be checked. When it is checked, the system will update the shapes according to the global settings. Note: This setting will not work for the autolabels layer. The layer for autolabel is taken from the master that is used to create autolabel.
•
Update of the Diagram After clicking the Update! button the system will start updating the diagrams. Each column corresponds to an according update option. There is one more extra column called Update drawing. This option is obligatory to execute. It will upgrade the shapes to the newest versions.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
.
Figure 10:11. Upgrade Diagram Status
When all the steps are finished more details can be viewed by clicking the link label:
Figure 10:12. Upgrade details
Information can be selected and copied to the clipboard. To save the report to a file, click the Save Report button on the Update Diagrams Status form. To load a saved report, use the Load Log button on the Update Diagrams Options form.
10.1.2
Batch Consistency Check The Consistency Check function will go through each of the selected diagrams and run a consistency check on them.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The result summary for each diagram is reported in the Errors, Warnings and Informational columns, as well as represented by the icon before the diagram name. The progress for each diagram can be seen in the Progress Bar as well as in the status text below it. By using the Stop button, the Check function can be cancelled. In case the user wants to further investigate any of the issues found in a diagram, it is possible to select the diagram and use the Open Diagram button. The diagram will then be opened in the background, and after the dialogue is closed, the Consistency Check function can be used to create a detailed report of the issues with that diagram.
10.1.3
Batch Print By clicking the Print button in the batch job dialogue, a Print dialog will be shown.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
In the Print dialog it is possible to select the following: •
Which printer to use
•
Number of copies
•
Print colour as black
•
Printer paper size and aspect
•
Zoom settings
When the OK button is clicked, all pages of all selected diagrams will be printed on the selected printer. Note: It is possible to print to PDF without an installed PDF printer. To achieve this click Export to PDF instead of the Print button on the Batch Job form, see Batch Job.
10.2
Project Maintenance
10.2.1
Clean Old Session Files The Diagrams application provides a tool for removing old document session files from a project. It is available from the menu Admin Tab > Admin Tools > Project Maintenance and can be used when the Keep session files setting (KEEP_SESSION_FILES) in Diagrams Options is set to False. After selecting it from the menu, the dialogue window is opened and provides the possibility to select the document types to clean:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:11
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
After clicking OK the following confirmation dialogue is displayed:
After clicking the Yes button all old session files connected with DB elements (of selected types) existing in the current MDB are removed. Only the files that are related with the most recent version of each element will be kept. Files that are not connected with any SCDIAG, SCTEMP or SCSTEN from the current MDB are not considered to avoid accidental deleting of important files. Note: Cleaning old session files allows saving disc space in the case that there is no need to keep previous documents versions, but after performing the operation it will not be possible to restore earlier sessions including the corresponding diagram file versions. Note: Using the Clean Old Session Files function will only remove Visio and SVG files related to old sessions, it will not remove the actual dabacon DB settings. To remove the sessions from the DB, use the Merge Changes function in Admin.
10.3
AVEVA Compare/Update Compare/Update in AVEVA Diagrams can be used to compare and update from the AVEVA data sources. From the Manage Tab select Integration > Compare / Update / Link.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:12
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:13. View Menu
For more information please refer to the Compare/Update User Guide.
10.4
DWG Export DWG Export is a tool for exporting Visio drawings to DWG format. The DWG Export tool is available in Project Tab > Import and Export > Export > DWG Export.
During the export process the tool reads Visio geometry and styles information and creates corresponding DWG objects that the best fit Visio components. Whole component corresponding geometry objects are exported as blocks with component attributes as block attributes. Then blocks inserts are creating DWG file geometry. The existing background page of the Visio drawing is exported as one block named ‘Background’. All additional texts corresponding to the Visio component are exported separately as MTexts and grouped with blocks. It makes editing texts easier and available without block exploding.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:13
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.4.1
Visio Drawing Items Compatibility Geometry: Supported:
Line Arc EllipticalArc Polyline Ellipse
Unsupported:
NURBS, Spline, Infinities
Note: If some unsupported shape geometry will be found, a proper message will be displayed in the Message Log. Foreign object: Supported:
All COM objects (Excel) Ink Pictures
All these objects are exported as raster images. Set the AutoCAD option ImageFrame to 0 to disable frames for pictures attached to a dwg file. Lines Option: Supported:
Weight Colour Pattern (patterns depend on user Diagrams.lin file definition). Ends
Unsupported:
Round corners, Transparency, Caps Note: Shapes with transparency line set to 100% will be exported like shapes with "NoLine" set to True in its geometry sections.
Fill options: Supported:
Foreground colour Solid fill Patterns from 2 to 7
Unsupported:
Other patterns, Shadow, Transparency, Patterns with defined background colour.
Texts:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:14
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Supported:
System fonts Text formatting; Size, Colour, Italic, Bold, Underline, Alignment, Margins, Paragraph Line Spacing.
Unsupported:
Visio line braking (DWG uses a different algorithm), Case (Caps), Position, Strikethrough, Transparency, Character Spacing, Paragraph Indentations, Paragraph Before/After Spacing, Background Colour, Vertical Text, Bullets, Tabs.
Data:
Supported:
Shape Data (component attributes become block data).
Layers:
Supported:
Active Page Layers, Background(s) layers. Shape ‘Layer Membership’ Layer property: Colour
Unsupported:
Layer properties: Visible, Print, Active, Lock, Snap, Glue.
Note: There are some differences between DWG and the original Visio format. If a Visio shape geometry is an open contour or the filled area is defined by more that one geometry, it is not possible to fill it using hatch in DWG format. An example of this is the AVEVA logo from the default diagrams background which is exported with incorrect fill in some of the letters.
10.4.2 •
User Interface Main Form After running Dwg export, the Dwg export docked window will show on the Diagrams main form. With every first run of this add-in, there will be export settings from DiagramsCadExport.xml file located in the application directory. The Export window has four operating buttons (see Figure 10:14.: Dwg export window) and two tabs. The tabs
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:15
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
are described further in Settings Tab and Lines Map Tab below. Operating buttons: Dismiss
Closes the Dwg export window
Load
Loads settings from DiagramsCadExport.xml file
Save
Saves settings to DiagramsCadExport.xml file
Export
Runs export
Figure 10:14. Dwg export window
10.4.3
Settings Tab The Settings tab, in the Dwg export window above, contains general settings for export like: •
Export location - path to exported DWG file. On the right hand side there is a button for choosing the right path from the dialog. If full path is not used, the export will create the DWG file in the %PDMSEXE% directory
•
DWG version - option to fit valid version of exported DWG file. Available DWG versions:
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:16
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
•
•
Release 14
•
AutoCAD 2000/2000i/2002
•
AutoCAD 2004/2005/2006
•
AutoCAD 2007/2008/2009 (default)
•
AutoCAD 2010
Exported shapes - option with shape collection manners for exported diagram. •
Page (default) - collects all shapes from the active page and background page(s).
•
Selected - collects all selected shapes from the active page and all from the background page, if the background page is not the active page. The order of selection determines the order of export.
Units - option for choosing metric or imperial units to be used in the DWG file. Available units:
10.4.4
•
Millimetres - measurement - Metric.
•
Inches (default) - measurement - Imperial.
Lines Map Tab Lines Map contains pairs of Visio lines types and DWG line patterns that shows line type representation in DWG after export. Available DWG lines are defined in the Diagrams.lin file. A description of how to define DWG line patterns can be found in Creating Line Patterns below. The Lines Map tab (Figure 10:15.: Lines Map) contains the following controls: •
Line types table- table with corresponding lines patterns from Diagrams to DWG.
•
New - add new rows to the map table.
•
Delete - delete selected rows from the map table.
•
Default - option to choose default DWG pattern.
•
Refresh - refreshes DWG patterns list. Refresh must be used every time the Diagrams.lin file is changed so that the DWG line patterns will be available in the lines map grid.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:17
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:15. Lines Map
10.4.5
Layers Tab The Layers tab contains a set of DWG layer properties; Colour, Line Width and Line Pattern. If the Line Pattern box ByLayer is ticked, every shape that belongs to the specific layer will have the corresponding property set to ByLayer. This means that the value in the layer property will control that of the shape(s). The Refresh button refreshes layers from the active diagram. The Layers Map tab (Figure 10:16.: Layers Tab) contains the following controls: •
Layers settings table
•
Refresh button - refreshes layers from the diagram.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:18
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Figure 10:16. Layers Tab
10.4.6
Configuration - DWG Export Settings When DwgExport starts, all settings are loaded from the DiagramsCadExport.xml configuration file. While loading the settings, the application is looking for the DiagramsCadExport.xml file in the following locations: 1. First in the Diagrams sub-folder in of directory pointed by %
10.4.7
Creating Line Patterns The default Diagrams.lin file with DWG patterns definitions is placed in the %PDMSEXE% directory. This is a text file, so it can be edited using a text editor like Notepad. This file can be exchanged with another line pattern file directly in the operating system. It is possible to have project-specific patterns. To achieve this the modified Diagrams.lin file should be placed in the Diagrams sub-directory in the location pointed out by %
patterns file in the following order;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:19
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
1. %
A,pattern A simple pattern is a sequence of dashes, dots or spaces separated by commas: •
Dash - is represented by a positive number.
•
Space - is represented by negative number.
•
Dot - is represented by zero.
Example 1: A simple linetype definition containing dashes:
*myLine1,- - - - - - - A,1,-1
Example 2: A simple linetype definition containing dashes and dots:
*myLine2,- . - . A,1,-0.5,0,-0.5
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:20
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
To define the linetype that includes text characters, some parameters must be defined: •
"text" - text to display (must be defined)
•
textstylename - used text style (must be defined)
•
scale - the scale or height of the text
•
rotation - rotation angle of the text
•
xoffset - X offset from the end of the previous space
•
yoffset - Y offset from the end of the previous space
The text specification is enclosed in square brackets "[]" and each item is separated by commas ",":
["text",textstylename,scale,rotation,xoffset,yoffset] Note: textstylename - should be ACAD embedded text style name, .shx files are unsupported. Example 3: Line type definition with text character:
*myLine3,- B - B - B A,1,-0.5,["B",STATNDARD,S=0.4],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 4: Line type definition with rotated text character:
*myLine4, - B - B - B -
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:21
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
A,1,-0.5,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,R=18],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 5: Line type definition with moved text character:
*myLine5, - B - B - B A,1,-0.5,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,X=0.2,Y=0.3],-0,-0.5,-0
Example 6: Line type definition with text character above continuous line:
*myLine6, -B-B-B-B-BA,1,-0,["B",STANDARD,S=0.4,Y=0.3]
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:22
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Example 7:
*FLOWDIR, -->---->-A,1,-0,[">",STANDARD,S=0.1,R=0,Y=-0.05]
10.5
DGN Export DGN Export is designed for exporting Visio drawings to DGN format. The File menu contains a DGN Export option under the Export submenu. After selecting the option, the main window for export settings will be shown. The Export button is only active if a Diagrams drawing is opened. Settings can be loaded and saved in DiagramsDGNExport.xml file stored in the Diagrams settings folder (project defaults or global defaults).
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:23
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:24
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.5.1
DGN Export - Settings Tab
The Settings tab contains the following controls: •
Export location - the location where the exported file should be saved.
•
Exported shapes - it is possible to export a whole page or selected object.
•
Units - exporting can be done in inches or millimetres.
•
Use Shared Cells - when this box is ticked it is allowed to use shared cells in the produced drawing.
•
Use Nested Cells - when this box is ticked it is allowed to use nested cells in the produced drawing.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:25
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
•
Export Attributes as Tags - in combination with the Use Nested Cells box this allows for including shape attributes in the produced drawing
•
Export Embedded Objects - This is for allowing export of references/attachments. DGN can then be exported with OLE files and bitmaps.
•
Seed file name - The seed file (contains default settings and attributes) will be opened and Diagrams data will be added to it.
•
Line type and font libraries - This is a list of libraries to use with mapping. To control the contents of these lists, you may do modifications in DiagramsDGNExport.xml.
To finalize the export load the libraries for mapping, save and load the settings in the project folder and start the export.
10.5.2
DGN Export - Lines Map Tab
This tab is used for line mapping. As line style definitions can be stored directly in DGN, in DGNlib files or in line style libraries (RSC), library styles must be loaded with the Load for mapping button, on the Settings tab, after a selection change.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:26
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Some custom Diagrams line styles may be used in the current diagram. Use the Reload button to be able to map line styles to them. If there are line styles in the drawing that are not mapped, the drawing will be exported using the default line styles. Note: Shapes with transparency line set to 100% will be exported like shapes with "NoLine" set to True in its geometry sections.
10.5.3
DGN Export - Fonts Map Tab
This tab is used to define font mapping. As font definitions can be stored in RSC libraries, the libraries must be loaded with the Load for mapping button, on the Settings tab, after a selection change. Some custom Diagrams fonts may be used in the current diagram. Use the Reload button to be able to map fonts to them.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:27
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.5.4
DGN Export - Levels Tab
The Levels tab contains a set of DGN layer properties; colour, line width and line pattern. Every property has a check box to mark if every shape that belongs to the specific layer should have the corresponding property set to ByLevel. This means that if checked, the value in the levels table will control that of the shape(s). The Refresh button refreshes layers from the active diagram. Note: If some elements in the diagram are altered by the level setting and no specific check boxes in the Levels tab are checked, the output DGN will be different from the diagram. Elements are exported with their local shape format, not layer override, by default.
10.5.5
The Settings File The Settings file contains the first tab settings and the mapping settings. The nodes DGNvariety and RSCvariety contain filters on files to be displayed in two library lists. The DGNvariety collection will be displayed in the first list and the RSCvariety collection will be displayed in the second list. The node DGNSeedFiles is a filter for seed files displayed in the seed file drop-down box.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:28
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
Filter nodes can contain wildcards, environment variables along with fully extended file paths. Additionally, the settings file contains the line style factor in the node LineStyleFactor. This is used when applying a line style to an element. The line style factor is set to 0.05 by default.
•
Example of a Settings File
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:29
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.5.6
Language Customisation The DGN Export form is available for local specific resource selection. This can be achieved by the standard AVEVA Resource Editor. The resource file name for DGN Export is DiagramsDGNExportText.resources.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:30
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
10.6
Publishing Data to AVEVA NET
10.6.1
Availability of Publishing Function The function for publishing Diagrams data to AVEVA NET is available from the following locations in Diagrams: 1. Right-clicking on a diagram in the Schematic explorer:
A dialog to choose which pages to publish will be shown. By default, all pages in the diagram will be checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:31
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
2. Right-clicking on the current page of an open diagram:
A dialog to choose which pages to publish will be shown. By default, only the currently selected page will be checked.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:32
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
3. New button, Publish, in Batch Job function.
When using the Batch Job function, all pages on each diagram will be published. 4. Checkbox in Release to 3D function.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:33
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
5. From the Ribbon menu Manage Tab > Integration > Publish to AVEVA NET command:
10.6.2
SaveWork When publishing a diagram to AVEVA NET, the diagram must not contain any unsaved changes. The system will prompt for save work if needed.
10.6.3
Configuration Tool The Configuration Tool dialog is available from Admin Tab > Configuration > AVEVA NET. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway.
10.6.4
Publishing from PML The SCDIAG database elements can be published to AVEVA NET using PML. The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. For more information and usage examples please see Publishing from Diagrams via PML chapter.
10.7
Publishing from Diagrams via PML This object can be used as an interface to Diagrams using PML. It enables the following: •
export drawings to the SVG file(s)
•
publish SCDIAG database elements to AVEVA NET.
The interface is defined in Aveva.Diagrams.dll. The sample usage might look like below:
•
Sample Usage (Publish to AVEVA NET): import 'Aveva.Diagrams' using namespace 'Aveva.Diagrams' !tool = object PMLDiagrams() !tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') The input parameter is a Diagram name. By default publishing will use Diagrams configuration settings. However, the PublishToAVEVANET method is overloaded and gives the possibility to publish diagrams with different deliverables. The deliverables that might be used are available on the list in the Publish To AVEVA NET Configuration dialog. The dialog is available from Admin Tab > Configuration > AVEVA NET. For more details refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Schematic Gateway.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:34
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
The sample usage might look like below:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom','DiagramsHVAC') •
Sample Usage (Export to SVG) import 'Aveva.Diagrams' using namespace 'Aveva.Diagrams' !tool = object PMLDiagrams() !tool. ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') The input parameter is a diagram name. In case of any exporting error it throws a PMLException. There is also a global PML function available which uses the PMLDiagrams object and the method mentioned above. It handles any PMLExceptions by printing the error message in the console window. This PML function returns the Boolean value True if export has been completed successfully, or False in case of any errors. The sample usage might look like below:
!!ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') •
Error Handling: If something goes wrong the PMLDiagrams object will throw a PMLNetException that can be handled in PML like below:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') handle any !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:35
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Utilities
If needed, it is possible to filter exceptions by using module 98 and error code 1 i.e.:
!tool.PublishToAVEVANET('/MainRoom') handle(98,1) !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle The .ExportToSVG method throws PMLExceptions with module number 98 and code 2.
!tool.ExportToSVG('/MainRoom') handle(98,2) !Etext = !!Error.Text $P $!Etext endhandle The error message might be different, depending on the problem.
•
The Interface has the Following Methods: Methods
10.8
Name
Result
Purpose
PublishToAVEVANET(STRING DiagramName)
No Result
Publishes SCDIAG to AVEVA NET.
PublishToAVEVANET(STRING DiagramName, STRING DeliverableName)
No Result
Publishes SCDIAG to AVEVA NET with specific deliverable.
ExportToSVG(STRING DiagramName)
No Result
Exports SCDIAG to the SVG file(s).
Design Reuse It is possible to copy Diagrams or any database elements between projects using the Design Reuse tool. With this tool database elements can be exported to the files in the local file system. They are called the Transfer Set, and can later be imported by the same tool.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
10:36
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11
Schematic Model Viewer
11.1
Overview The Schematic Model Viewer allows users to view the contents of the schematic model database independently of diagram layouts. It provides a continuous navigable view of equipment items and the interconnecting networks, independently of which system they belong to or which P&ID they have been drafted on. The ConnMapAddin with Schematic module is implemented as a CAF Add-in, meaning that it can be hosted by different applications. The viewer will also require access to a SCHE DB as part of the current MDB.
Figure 11:1.
Sample Model Map results
To start the viewer, the user will have to select an equipment item. This item will be placed at the centre of the generated view and the system will automatically find all connections in the database and display each connection as a graphical sub tree. Each sub tree is traversed through all branches until other equipment items or branch ends are encountered. Branching points (such as Tees, Owlets or 3-way valves) are represented by a generic branching point symbol. The initially generated view will not extend beyond the equipment items encountered at the end of the branches, but it is possible for the user to manually expand and continue exploring along the schematic network. Equipment items are displayed using different symbols, selected by a set of customer definable rules.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.2
Starting the Viewer The viewer can be started in a few different ways, depending on the possibilities of the hosting application: Start method
Available in
Click the New Schematic Model View button in the Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar.
All hosting applications where the Schematic Model Viewer is available.
Select an equipment item in the explorer, right click and choose the Create Schematic Model View command.
All applications where the schematic explorer is used.
Select an equipment item in the Diagram Drawing, right click and choose the Create Schematic Model View command.
Marine Diagrams application only.
and
Cable
Diagrams
When using the New Schematic Model View command in the toolbar, a Select Equipment dialog will be shown where the equipment item can be selected.
Figure 11:2.
The Select Equipment dialog
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.3
Zooming, Panning etc. The viewer is using an MS Office Visio drawing control component to generate the view, please see the related Microsoft documentation for a full description on how to navigate in an MS Visio view. A few navigation functions especially worth mentioning are the following.
11.4
Command
Result
Ctrl+Shift+Left mouse button click
Zoom in
Ctrl+Shift+Right mouse button click
Zoom out
Ctrl+Shift+Right mouse button drag
Pan
Viewing Attributes By right clicking on an item and selecting the Show Attributes command, an attributes pane will be shown. This is the standard MS Visio attributes pane which is labelled Shape Data. This pane can be resized, moved and docked in various ways, see the MS Visio documentation for more information.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.5
Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar When the ConnMapAddin with Schematic module is successfully loaded the Schematic Model Viewer Toolbar is shown as a Contextual tab in the Ribbon menu. Tools on that toolbar allow you to control the ConnMapAddin behaviour.
Starting from left: •
Create Model View - allows the creation of a connection map by choosing an element from the dialog.
•
Pipelines - shows pipe lines connections.
•
HVAC lines - shows HVAC lines connections
•
Cable - shows cable lines connections
•
Inline Items - By selecting the View Inline Items command, the viewer will change into a mode where all inline fittings are shown. These will be placed along the lines between the branching points, like knots on a piece of string. The branching points will also be illustrated by an icon representing the kind of fitting it is, rather than the generic branching point icon used when inline fittings are not shown.
•
Center - when a model map is created for an element, the system automatically inserts that item in the centre, all connections' lines must start from the centre item, and there is a possibility to also change the centre item. To do so, select any item on a drawing and execute the Centre command. The item is then highlighted and moved to the centre and the window will be changed.
•
Expand - by selecting an item and using the Expand command, all connections to that item will be traversed and expanded.
•
Collapse - items that have previously been expanded can also be collapsed, restoring the previous state.
•
Settings - options are described in the following chapter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.6
Options
11.6.1
General Settings
This page presents options common for all modules. •
Follow CE - when an item is selected in the viewer, the CE will also change accordingly.
•
Layout after hide - when checked, the connection map will be redrawn each time the user hides some connections’ lines, elements or execute a collapse.
•
Show connector text - determines whether the connector's lines should display describing text.
•
Show inline - this is the same as the Show Inline Items command on the toolbar.
•
Show Arrow - shows flow direction using arrows. You can determine the size of the arrows by using the drop down list.
•
Highlight color - selection of colours for highlighted items.
•
X Distance - determines space between elements in the x axis.
•
Y Distance - determines space between elements in the y axis.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:5
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.6.2
Schematic Model Settings
The settings are divided into five categories:
11.6.3
•
Display Text - the text that is displayed on the item.
•
Line Color - changes the colour of the lines for the desired connection type.
•
Line Patters - changes the line patterns for the desired connection type.
•
Line Weight - sets the weight of the line for the desired connection type.
•
Object Visibility - shows/hides the desired element types.\
Schematic Symbol Settings The icons used to represent the equipment items, generic branch points as well as inline fittings are determined by a set of user configurable rules. These rules are stored in an XML file called SchematicSymbols.xml which resides in the main installation directory. Below can be seen an example of this file. By changing the file, it is possible to apply different rules for the selection of symbols. The icon files are by default stored in the %PMLLIB%\icons\SchematicModelViewer\ directory. New icons can be added to this location and it is also possible to modify or replace the existing ones if so desired.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
You can view the file in, e.g., Notepad.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
It is possible to determine which symbol should be used when creating a connection map and also to set the displayed text beneath the item. Attributes can be used by entering the attribute name in brackets, e.g. [Type]. To use a shape from a stencil instead of icons the setting ‘Use Icon’ needs to be set to False and the settings ‘Set Stencil Name’ and ‘Stencil Shape’ to True. However, if the system cannot find a shape or a stencil the icon will be automatically used instead. If an icon, a shape or a stencil is not found the default rule will be used. Stencils and icons have to be located in the "%PMLLIB%\icons\SchematicModelViewer" directory. The location can be changed with Default > Path. Note: You can not change an already drawn item. Note: [UNIQUE_ID] is not an attribute, it is the unique id of the element.
11.6.4
Saving Settings The
default
schematic
model
settings
are
stored
in
your
PDMSEXE\SchematicModelSetting.xml file, this file points to SchematicSymbols.xml. By clicking on the Save to defaults button, the settings will be saved in PDMSDFLTS\SchematicModelMapModuleUserSettings.xml. If there will be more modules, their settings will be saved in the same location. The file name will be <ModuleName>UserSettings.xml. Next time when running the application
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
the settings will be read from PDMSDFLTS. To reset custom settings please remove all <ModuleName>UserSettings.xml files from your PDMSDFLTS. Note that the system will also save the settings for symbol. The file name will be ModuleName>UserSymbolSettings.xml in schematic module case, this name will be SchematicModelMapModuleUserSymbolSettings.xml
11.7
11.8
Right Mouse Button Context Menu on Items
•
Open Diagram - If the main application is Marine Diagrams or Cable Diagrams then the Visio diagram will be opened. Otherwise the system will try open the SVG document.
•
Center - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
•
Show All Connections - Sometimes items are connected to more than one line. To make the drawing easier to read other connections can be turned off.
•
Expand - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
•
Collapse - This is the same as the Center command on the toolbar.
Connectors •
Layout - The connector locations can be changed by moving a whole connector or points on a connector. This works as normal drag and drop functionality. To move a whole connector just click on it and move. To move a point on a connector first have to select it, next press CTRL and click on the green point on the connector, then move the point to the desired location. To set connectors re-route style use the options available in the right mouse button context menu. Right-Angle, Straight or Reset.
Note: When the connection map is redrawing then the connector's layout is resetting.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Schematic Model Viewer
11.8.1
Reverse link When items are connected, Figure 11:3.: below, it is possible to change that layout using one of the reverse link options additional connector. See figure Figure 11:4.: and Figure 11:5.: for two available ways of doing this (reverse source and destination).
Figure 11:3.
Figure 11:4.
Figure 11:5.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
11:10
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
A
Appendices
A.1
Attribute Presentation Notation Through the Attribute Presentation format notation, attribute information can be collected from the DB element that corresponds to the shape as well as from hierarchically superior elements and referenced elements. It can also be combined with literals in an arbitrary way. The notation uses square brackets for attribute references that should be evaluated before presentation. All characters outside the brackets are considered as literals and will be presented as-is. Referenced attributes can be referred by a dot notation (reference.attribute). References can be in several steps, in that case the reference chain will be followed to resolve the expression and find the attribute value. An arbitrary number of literals and attribute references can be combined to form advanced attribute presentation and annotation strings. Attributes that are of a particular dimension will have units associated with their current value. Using the name of the attribute will result in presenting the value of the attribute in the current units without the actual unit label. If the units identifier is desired a ‘.withunit’ suffix can be added to the attribute. For example if the current session units for bores are inch the [scplin.bore] will produce a value of "12", while [scplin.bore.withunit] will produce "12in". Another example is [scplin.press.withunit] will produce "23psi" if the current session units are psi, while using the [scplin.press] will produce "23". For changing current session units settings use Admin Tab > Configuration > Units. For more information refer to User Guide Design / Design Common Functionality / Current Sessions Units. The notation can also be a result of a pml1 expression. Refer to Software Customisation Reference Manual, chapter PML 1 Expression. PML1 expressions should be enclosed with curly braces { }. The usage of native square bracketed attribute references within PML1 expressions is supported. In such case the square bracketed attribute references are resolved first, and then the PML1 expression is parsed. The attribute presentation notation can be applied to the following: •
Attribute Presentation Setup (In Diagrams Options and in Import Shape Wizard)
•
Shape Text attribute
•
Label annotation fields
Here follows a few examples using native syntax: Syntax
Description
[scplin.bore]
Will fetch the default bore attribute from the pipeline element that owns the current hierarchically subordinate element, for example a valve
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:1
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
[owner.owner.owne r.bore]
Will provide the same result as above for a valve. The owner of a valve is the SCSEG element, the owner.owner is the SCBRAN element, and the owner.owner.owner is the SCPLIN element.
[name][spref.name]
Will display the name of the current element, a literal (in this case a "-"), and the name of the related catalogue element.
Following are some examples using PML1 expressions: Syntax
Description
{str(abor)} {subst(name,2)}
Provides the arrival bore value.
ERED[\n]{str(para1)} *{str(para2)} {str(para[arrive] of catr of spre)}/ {str(para[leave] of catr of spre)}
Equivalent to ERED[\n][spre.catr.para(1)]*[spre.catr.para(2)]
This uses the substring function to provide the part of the name of the element starting at the 2nd character.
When using the spec-driven mode, labelling of a reducer with the larger diameter first.
For more information about PML1 expression syntax please see PML 1 Expressions in the Software Customisation Reference Manual. To get a particular element from an attribute of array type, use a (num) notation. Example: Owner.Diaref(1). The enumeration of elements is 1-based. The (0) string will give all elements. Using square brackets to reference an element in an array in PML1 expressions is not supported, as it interferes with the native syntax. To reference an array element use the attribute name followed directly by a number. For example "ppbo[2]"is not supported - instead use "ppbo2"to refer to the 2nd value in the ppbo attribute array.
A.2
Pseudo Attributes The table below describes a few pseudo attributes that can be useful for attribute presentation, annotation etc. Attribute
Element
Description
HBOR
SCBRAN
Head bore for the branch
TBOR
SCBRAN
Tail bore for the branch
ABOR
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Arrival bore
LBOR
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Leave bore
PPBO(n)
SCVALV, SCFITT, SCINST
Bore of connection point n, for example, PPBO1 returns the bore
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:2
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
A.3
Customisation
A.3.1
Overview The Diagrams application provides significant built-in customisation capabilities through XML menus, default settings, UDETs and UDAs, autonaming, attribute presentation notation etc. For more extensive customisation it is also possible for customers to develop new program functions and routines. Diagrams is based on the AVEVA Design Platform, and thereby includes all of the customisation and development possibilities provided by that platform. Examples of this are the database.Net API (AVEVA.Pdms.Database) as well as other.Net APIs. CAF Add-ins can be created and PML can be used to the same extent as in the Design (General) module. In addition to this, the actual Microsoft Visio Drawing Control used by Diagrams is also accessible, giving the user full access to the extensive toolbox that MS Visio provides. A good example of how this works is the CoreConnectionsDiagramAddin, which is a sample Addin shipped with the product to create core connection diagrams. The addin is delivered with source code for the user to use as template when creating their own addins to support their particular needs.
A.3.2
Using the Visio Drawing Control The Visio Drawing Control can be accessed in different ways. By using reflection, it is possible to invoke GetCurrentVisio method which will return an instance of Visio.Application associated with currently active drawing. Example using System; using Visio=Microsoft.Office.Interop.Visio; using Aveva.Diagrams; namespace UserAddin { /// <summary> /// Summary description for AccessVisio. /// internal class AccessVisio { internal AccessVisio() { // // TODO: Add constructor logic here // } internal static bool IsDrawingActive() { System.Reflection.Assembly _assembly = System.Reflection.Assembly.Load( "diagrams" ); System.Type _type = _assembly.GetType( "Aveva.Diagrams.diagApp", true, false ); System.Reflection.MethodInfo _info = _type.GetMethod( "GetCurrentVisio", System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Static | System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Public ); Visio.Application visApp = (Visio.Application)_info.Invoke ( null, null );
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:3
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
if(visApp == null) return false; return true; } internal static void AddDescription(string ElemType, string Description) { System.Reflection.Assembly _assembly = System.Reflection.Assembly.Load( "diagrams" ); System.Type _type = _assembly.GetType( "AvevaDiagrams.diagApp", true, false ); System.Reflection.MethodInfo _info = _type.GetMethod( "GetCurrentVisio", System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Static | System.Reflection.BindingFlags.Public ); Visio.Application visApp = (Visio.Application)_info.Invoke( null, null ); if(visApp == null) return; //Find all shapes of type ElemType and add Description foreach(Visio.Shape shape in visApp.ActivePage.Shapes) { try { if(shape.get_CellsU("User.ElementType").get_ResultStr (Visio.VisUnitCodes.visNoCast) == ElemType) { try { shape.get_CellsU("Prop.VMD_SCEQUI_DESC").FormulaU = string.Format("\"{0}\"", Description); } catch(Exception){}; } } catch(Exception){}; } } } }
Another approach is to use the AVEVA.ApplicationFramework.Presentation.WindowManager and iterate through the windows looking for an active Drawing Control. Example if( WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild != null ) { _activeCtrl = WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild.ActiveCont rol; if(_activeCtrl != null && !(_activeCtrl is AxDrawingControl)) { foreach(System.Windows.Forms.Control ctrl in WindowManager.Instance.MainForm.ActiveMdiChild.ActiveControl.Contro ls) { if(ctrl is AxDrawingControl) { _activeCtrl = ctrl;
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:4
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
break; } } } }
When the Visio.Application instance is obtained from the Drawing Control it is possible to invoke any of the Visio API methods available to customize the drawing.
A.4
Diagrams API AVEVA Diagrams has a public interface to help developers write custom addins, Aveva.Diagrams.Interface.dll. The dll contains a class with three interfaces, including the following methods and events; SettingManager Methods GetSettingValue
Get actual AVEVA Diagrams setting value.
DrawingManager Events DrawingOpened
Raised when a drawing is opened.
DrawingClosed
Raised when a drawing is closed.
Methods GetActiveDrawing
Get DrawingInfo on active drawing.
GetOpenedDrawing
Get list of all opened drawings.
ShapeManager Events BeforeShapeAdd
Raised just before Visio Shape add.
BeforeShapeDelete
Raised just before Visio Shape delete.
ShapeAdded
Raised when Visio Shape added.
ShapeDeleted
Raised when Visio Shape deleted.
Methods FindShapesOnCurrentDrawing
Find all shapes on current representing database item.
FindShapesOnCurrentPage
Find all shapes on current page that are representing database item.
FindShapesOnOpenedDrawing s
Find all shapes on all opened drawings that are representing database item.
GetDbElementFromShape
Find database elements represented by a shape.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:5
drawing
that are
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
HighlightShape
Highlight or reset highlight on Visio Shape.
ResetHighlight
Reset many shapes in one go on desired area.
The detailed documentation for the library can be found following this link. DiagramsAPI.chm Note: It is not recommended to call other Diagrams dll’s, as these are internal to Diagrams and may be changed without notice.
A.4.1
Adding Custom Calls to Addin Functions Shape’s Context Menu It is possible to add a custom context menu option and call the Execute() method from any registered Command class or call a PML function. To achieve this, the shapesheet of the master shape that is representing an item has to be edited in Visio. There, the Action section has to be updated with custom rows Figure A:1.: Edit master shape in Visio and add own action rows in shape sheet. This will result in all shapes based on this master having an additional context menu Figure A:2.: Additional context menu items.
Figure A:1.
Edit master shape in Visio and add own action rows in shape sheet
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:6
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
Figure A:2.
Additional context menu items
This mechanism is based on the Visio function QUEUEMARKEREVENT. This requires proper parameters that will be parsed when QueueMarkerEvent will be handled by the Diagrams application. According to parameters, the PML function or Command.Execute() will be called.
•
PML Function For example, to call a simple PML function that looks like below;
define function !!DiagramsPrint() $P Hello world! endfunction All needed is to set the proper Action cell formula. In this case, it will look like below;
define function !!DiagramsPrintParam(!DbRefNum is string) !a = object DBREF(!DbRefNum) handle any endhandle if (UNDEFINED(!a) or UNSET(!a) or BADREF(!a)) then $P element not found return endif !n = !a.name $P The clicked item is $!n endfunction
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:7
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
In this example, the reference number should be passed to the PML function. This is done by adding /param=refnum to the formula, like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=PMLFUNC /name=DiagramsPrintParam /param=refnum") •
Command Execute It is possible to call Execute() methods from your classes based on the Command. See the command class example, below;
class DiagramsAPICommand : Command { internal DiagramsAPICommand() { this.Key = "TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD"; } public void Execute(Shape shape) { MessageBox.Show(string.Format("The shape: {0} was clicked!", shape.Name)); } public override void Execute() { MessageBox.Show("Execute!"); } } There are two Execute() methods:; 1. Execute(); 2. Execute(Shape shape); The Action cell formula can be set up to call both versions. To call Execute without a parameter would look like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=COMMAND /Key=TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD") To call Execute with the parameter param=shape added to the formula would look like below;
=QUEUEMARKEREVENT("/module=Diagrams /type=shapecontext / code=COMMAND /Key=TEST_DIAGRAM_API_CMD /param=shape")
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:8
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
Note: The command has to be registered in
Aveva.ApplicationFramework.Presentation.CommandManager Parameters used in QUEUEMARKEREVENT are; Parameter Name
Allowed Values
Comments
module
Diagrams
Application name
type
shapecontext
Says that it is the shape context menu
code
PMLFUNC
The PML function will be called
COMMAND
The Command Execute will be called
name
[PML function name]
Used with PMLFUNC only
key
[CommandKey]
Used with COMMAND only
param
refnum
Database reference number as a string of item that is represented by the Visio Shape. This parameter can only be used with PMLFUNC.
shape
The Visio Shape will be passed as parameter.
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:9
12 Series
Diagrams User Guide Appendices
© Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
A:10
12 Series
Related Documents
Diagrams User Guide
January 2021 2
Drboom V1.0 User Guide
March 2021 0
Hp200lx User Guide
January 2021 4
Cos Screen User Guide
January 2021 2
Etap User Guide 7.1
January 2021 1
Ce123 User Guide 1013
January 2021 3More Documents from "Wawan Suhartawan"
Tm-1105-pdms-cableway-and-cabling-design-english.pdf
January 2021 0
Administrator Command Reference Manual
February 2021 0